JP6618140B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

There are various examples of enclosed ball game machines that do not pay out real balls. In these enclosed ball type gaming machines, the number of balls is displayed by a ball number indicator such as a 7-segment LED.
There is also an example of an enclosed ball game machine that displays the number of balls that can be fired and the number of stored balls that cannot be temporarily fired (see Patent Document 1).

JP 2006-325929 A

However, when the display is divided into the number of balls that can be fired and the number of balls possessed, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to understand only by using, for example, a 7-segment LED.
In addition, it is required that the control device of the gaming machine can be controlled efficiently.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can efficiently control a control device.

The invention according to claim 1 is a gaming machine that manages the number of balls and counting balls.
A first display device capable of displaying the number of balls held;
A second display device capable of simply displaying the counting ball;
A third display device that manages a card unit capable of displaying details of the number of balls and counting balls;
It is characterized by having.

The gaming machine according to claim 1 is a gaming machine that manages the number of balls and counting balls.
The display update of the number of balls is performed every time interval shorter than the continuous firing interval,
If it is determined that a game ball is fired, a prize ball or a foul ball is generated, the game ball is fired, the prize is awarded at least after an interval shorter than the continuous firing interval since the last update of the number of balls held. A first display device that performs display update of the number of balls that accompanies the occurrence of either the ball or the foul ball, and is managed by the gaming machine;
A second display device capable of simple display for notifying the player of the presence of the counting ball and managed by the gaming machine;
And a third display device that can display details of the number of balls and the counting ball and is managed by a card unit.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a back view of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows a circulation apparatus. It is a system block diagram of a pachinko parlor. It is a block diagram which shows the control system of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an operation display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the detail of a power supply delay circuit. It is a figure which shows the detailed structure of a package display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a payout command reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an error monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows fraud & winning prize monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart which shows payout command transmission processing. It is a flowchart which shows LED edit processing. It is a flowchart which shows a prize display LED edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a grinding | polishing apparatus control process. It is a flowchart which shows production command setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a ball number command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a main control command reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a launch ball detection switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a foul ball | bowl detection switch monitoring process. Out ball detection switch monitoring process It is a flowchart which shows a count switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a counting ball use switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an error monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an error cancellation switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an enclosing ball | bowl number monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a board surface ball number error monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a frame open | release error monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a discharge permission signal edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a number-of-balls addition process. It is a flowchart which shows a ball | bowl feed control process. It is a flowchart which shows a payment / rest control process. It is a flowchart which shows a payment control process. It is a flowchart which shows a break control process. It is a flowchart which shows a payment start monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows adjustment write completion monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows a payment end monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a break start monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a break start ACK monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a break end monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a card unit reception analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the card unit reception analysis process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the card unit reception analysis process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a regular command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a game machine ID signal edit process. It is a flowchart which shows game machine ID output processing. It is a flowchart which shows LED edit processing. It is a flowchart which shows a ball number LED editing process. It is a flowchart which shows a number-of-balls display data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows count ball number LED edit processing. It is a flowchart which shows the grinding | polishing apparatus control processing of a grinding | polishing control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a main control command setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the polishing apparatus control processing of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the grinding | polishing control processing of a grinding | polishing control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the operation display apparatus edit process of a card unit. It is a flowchart which shows the return button monitoring process of a card unit. It is a flowchart which shows the adjustment process of a card unit. It is a flowchart which shows the game machine ID collation process of a card unit. It is a timing chart of operation | movement of grinding | polishing control of an enclosure bulb | ball. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen of the display apparatus in grinding | polishing control of an enclosure bulb | ball. It is a figure which shows the operation example of an operation display apparatus. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of a decoration ball display apparatus. It is a timing chart which shows operation | movement of a front frame open switch. It is a timing chart of display control of a prize display LED. It is a timing chart which shows display update control of the number of balls. It is a timing chart which shows operation | movement of a switching circuit. It is a figure which shows operation | movement of an operation display apparatus. It is a figure which shows operation | movement of an operation display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the control system of the pachinko machine in the modification 3 of Example 1. FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the control system of the pachinko machine in the modification 6 of Example 1. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a switching circuit according to a sixth modification of the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows operation | movement of the operation display apparatus in the modification 6 of Example 1. FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the control system of the pachinko machine in the modification 7 of Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the connection relation of the card unit in the modification 7 of Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows operation | movement of the operation display apparatus in the modification 7 of Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows operation | movement of the operation display apparatus in the modification 8 of Example 1. FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the control system of the pachinko machine in the modification 9 of Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of the circulation structure of the enclosure bulb | ball in the modification 10 of Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the operation display apparatus in the modification 11 of Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the payout control apparatus in the modification 12 of Example 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge | release permission signal edit process of the payout control apparatus in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure explaining the setting screen of the grinding | polishing period in Example 2. FIG. 12 is a timing chart of the operation of polishing control of the encapsulated sphere in the second embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in Example 3. It is a figure which shows the operation example of the operation display apparatus in Example 3. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an operation example of the operation display device according to the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the output system of the front frame open switch of Example 5. FIG. 10 is a timing chart illustrating an operation of a front frame opening switch according to a fifth embodiment. 14 is a timing chart illustrating the operation of the front frame opening switch according to the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the front frame open switch in Example 7. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing the operation of the front frame opening switch of the seventh embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the front frame open switch in Example 8. FIG. 10 is a timing chart illustrating an operation of a front frame opening switch according to an eighth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of an output delay circuit according to a ninth embodiment. 10 is a timing chart showing the operation of the front frame opening switch of the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart of the card unit in Example 10. It is a front view of the pachinko machine of Example 11. It is a front view of the pachinko machine of Example 12. It is a figure which shows the game board of Example 13. FIG. It is a figure which shows the game board of Example 14. FIG. It is a figure which shows the package display apparatus of Example 15. It is a figure which shows the package display apparatus of Example 16. It is a figure which shows the package display apparatus of Example 17. FIG. It is a figure which shows the package display apparatus of Example 18. FIG. FIG. 38 is a timing chart showing display update control of the number of balls in Embodiment 19. FIG. It is a figure explaining the counting method of the number of balls of Example 20. FIG. It is a figure explaining the counting method of the number of balls of the modification of Example 20. FIG.

Hereinafter, as Example 1 of the present invention, an example of a case where the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine that is an enclosed ball type gaming machine will be described with reference to the drawings.
A. Front Configuration of Pachinko Machine First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine of this example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 1 (enclosed ball game machine) of this example.

  This pachinko machine 1 is a so-called enclosed ball type game machine, and includes a game control device (see FIG. 6) for managing and controlling the progress of the game, and a predetermined number (for example, 20) in the game machine body. ) Of game balls, and based on the number of possessed balls (game value) based on the valuable value information (ball rental number) input from the card unit (CR unit) 15 as a game medium lending device, The enclosed game ball is fired into the game area to play a game, and it is determined whether the game result is in a predetermined profit state or other state. Circulating this enclosed game ball by increasing the number of possessed balls (game value), which is the player's profit, corresponding to the number of winning balls, and collecting the game balls that have passed through the game area and guiding them to the launch position It is a mechanism to use and play pachinko gamesHere, the card unit 15 corresponds to a medium control unit that reads and writes information recorded in a game storage medium (game card or the like).

The pachinko machine 1 has a machine frame 2 fixed to an island where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and is pivotally supported by the machine frame 2 at a hinge portion 3 so that the machine frame 2 can be rotated. And a front frame 4 that can be freely opened and closed. A game board 20 (shown in FIG. 2) is attached to the front frame 4.
A glass frame 5 is attached to the front frame 4 so as to be openable and closable so as to cover the upper front side. Note that a game area 22 (to be described later) of the game board 20 can be viewed from the front through a glass plate (a transparent plastic board may be omitted) held by the glass frame 5. The glass frame 5 is pivotally supported by the front frame 4 at the hinge portion 3 so as to be opened and closed. That is, the glass frame 5 including the glass plate opens the front surface of the game board 20 from a normal use state (closed state) covering the front surface of the game board 20 (a front surface including a game area 22 described later) with a slight gap. It is possible to operate in a state (open state). In the open state of the glass frame 5, for example, an operator inserts a hand into the front surface of the game board 20 to release a clogged ball in the game area 22 or insert a missing game ball. Is possible.
Here, the front frame 4 is sometimes referred to as a game frame, and the glass frame 5 is sometimes referred to as a front frame. In this embodiment, the front frame 4 and the glass frame 5 are described.

A lower panel 6 is provided on the lower side of the glass frame 5, and an operation display device 7, a number-of-balls display 40 and a decoration ball display device 250 are arranged on the lower panel 6. The decorative ball display device 250 includes an upper decorative ball display device 250a and a lower decorative ball display device 250b. The upper decorative ball display device 250a is designed to create an image of a so-called upper plate, is arranged on the upper side of the operation display device 7, and includes a large number of LEDs. In the upper decorative ball display device 250a, for example, when the number of balls held by the player is 100 or more, all the LEDs are lit or moved and blinked. Control of the decoration is performed.
On the other hand, the lower decorative ball display device 250b is designed to create an image of a so-called ball box, and is disposed on the lower side of the operation display device 7 (below the ball number display 40). It consists of LEDs. In the lower decorative ball display device 250b, for example, when the number of counted balls = 0, all the LEDs are turned off, and while counting the number of balls, the lower decorative ball display device imaged from the upper decorative ball display device 250a. The decoration is controlled so that the LED (this part corresponds to the counting decoration unit 250c as described later) is moved and blinked so that the sphere moves toward 250b. Then, the LED is turned on sequentially from the lower part of the lower decorative ball display device 250b in the image of the ball box according to the number of counted balls, and the decoration control is performed so that the player can know the approximate number of counted balls by the number of LEDs turned on. (Details will be described later in the operation). A portion where the LED of the lower decorative ball display device 250b moves and blinks during counting of the number of balls is called a counting decoration unit 250c.
The number-of-balls display 40 displays the number of balls that the player has acquired (that is, the game value as the player's profit). The number of balls) can be displayed.
Here, the number-of-balls display 40 constitutes first game value display means for displaying the player's game value under the management of the gaming machine (specifically, the payout control device 230). In addition, the number-of-balls display 40 constitutes a first display device that can display the number of balls.

Further, the lower panel 6 is provided with a counting switch 311, a break switch 312, a counting ball display 313, a counting ball use switch 314, and an effect operation switch 9.
The counting switch 311, the break switch 312, and the counting ball use switch 314 are turned on (or alternately turned on and off) when the player presses the operation unit (button) on the surface of these switches. The counting ball display 313 is composed of a small LED, and if there is a counting ball, the LED is turned on. Specifically, the counting sphere display 313 corresponds to the second display device, and is configured to be able to display at least the presence or absence of the counting sphere by turning on / off the LED, which corresponds to simple display of the counting sphere.
The counting switch 311 is operated when the player wants to count the number of balls, and when the counting switch 311 is pressed, the counting of the number of balls is started. A count switch LED is provided inside the count switch 311, and the count switch LED is lit when urging to press the count switch 311. As described above, the counting switch 311 has a configuration in which the counting switch LED is incorporated.
The break switch 312 is operated when the player desires to take a break. When the break switch 312 is pressed, the gaming machine shifts to the break mode. The break switch effective LED is provided inside the break switch 312 and lights up when the break switch effective LED can take a break. As described above, the break switch 312 has a built-in break switch effective LED.

The counting ball use switch 314 is operated when the player wishes to move the ball from the counting ball number to the holding ball number. When the counting ball use switch 314 is operated once, the counting ball use number is determined from the counting ball number. The movement of the ball (for example, a predetermined amount = 100 balls) is started. In other words, the counting ball use switch 314 corresponds to the concept of a switch used to start an operation of transferring a ball from a ball box to an upper plate. A counting ball use switch LED is provided inside the counting ball use switch 314, and the counting ball use switch LED is lit when the ball can move from the counting ball number to the holding ball number. As described above, the counting ball use switch 314 has a built-in counting ball use switch LED.
The production operation switch 9 can be involved in the production within a certain range and is operated by the player. The production operation switch 9 has a push button type switch (indicated as button P in FIG. 1) in the center and corresponds to a so-called cross key. It has four switches arranged vertically and horizontally. The push button type switch (button P) at the center can be involved in the production within a certain range when pressed by the player, and appears on the screen of the display device 41 by pressing the four switches arranged vertically and horizontally, for example. You can select numbers and symbols.
On the other hand, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with the card unit 15 (card type medium control unit). The card unit 15 inserts a game card (storage medium: game value storage medium) into the card slot 201, and the player operates the ball lending button 303 (see FIG. 7) of the operation display device 7, A predetermined number of balls can be lent (increased number of balls) within the range of valuable value information (for example, the number of balls lent) recorded on the game card.

In addition, the card unit 15 is provided with a cash slot 202. The cash input port 202 is capable of inputting cash, and a predetermined banknote (for example, 1000 yen, 5000 yen, 10,000 yen) is inserted therein, so that it is within the range of the ball lending degree corresponding to the amount of the inserted banknote. A game ball is rented (ie, lending a ball; increasing the number of balls held).
In addition to prepaid cards that can be used by non-member general players (hereinafter referred to as visitor cards), the game card that can be used in the card unit 15 can also use a unique membership card called a house card. Yes, in that case, a membership card as a game card is inserted into the card slot 201. When this member card is inserted, it is possible to use a configuration in which the storage can be used on condition that the password of the member is input on the screen of the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7. Note that an LCD touch panel type screen is adopted for the operation display device 7, and the player can touch the touch panel with a finger to input a personal identification number.
Further, a card unit error notification LED 203 is disposed in the card unit 15, and the card unit error notification LED 203 notifies of an error that has occurred in the card unit 15.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 20 has game nails planted on the front surface of a plate-like base material (so-called veneer), and a substantially circular area on the front surface is surrounded by a guide rail 21 so that the game area 22 is formed. The game area 22 is an area in which a game ball that has been thrown in is dropped from above and is judged to be out or safe (determination of whether or not a prize has been won). When the game ball enters the winning opening and is effectively safe Is configured such that data of a predetermined number of game balls set in accordance with the type of winning opening is added to the number of balls held by the player as a prize ball.
Returning to FIG. 1, a key insertion portion 8 of a locking device (not shown) for the front frame 4 and the glass frame 5 is formed at the opening / closing side (right side in FIG. 1) of the front frame 4. .

Further, the operation display device 7 provided at the lower part of the glass frame 5 is for displaying the number of ball lending and the like and performing operations such as ball lending (see FIG. 7 for details). Next to the operation display device 7, as described above, the presentation operation switch 9 (first production operation unit) is a push button type operated by the player and has four switches arranged vertically and horizontally. Is provided.
Further, the lower panel 6 is provided with a lower speaker 10 that outputs sound effects and the like, a firing operation handle 11 that performs a launching operation of a game ball, and an ashtray 12.
Furthermore, in FIG. 1, what is shown by the code | symbol 13 is a decoration lamp which uses LED (light emitting diode) provided in the front surface of the glass frame 5 as a light emission source, and what is shown by the codes | symbols 14a and 14b of the glass frame 5 It is a plurality of moving lights provided on the lower front surface. Although not shown, the moving lights 14a and 14b include an LED as a light source and a motor as a drive source. Here, the decoration lamp 13 and the moving lights 14a and 14b constitute the decoration display LED 141 shown in FIG.
In FIG. 1, reference numerals 16 a and 16 b denote upper speakers that output sound effects and the like provided on the upper left and right sides of the glass frame 5.

B. 2. In FIG. 2, reference numeral 21 denotes a guide rail of the game board 20, and as described above, the game area 22 is formed by surrounding the substantially circular area of the front of the game board with the guide rail 21. ing.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game area 22 includes an out ball inlet 23, a center case 24, a first start winning port 25, a second starting winning port 26 as a normal electric accessory (general power), and a variable winning device. 27, general winning openings 28 to 31, a normal start gate 32, a number of game nails (not shown), and the like are provided. In addition, a collective display device 35 is provided outside the game area 22 of the game board 20. The game nails flow down while hitting the game balls that have entered the upper part of the game area 22, and a plurality of game nails are planted in the game area excluding an attachment portion such as a center case.

Here, the above-described out-ball inflow port 23 is a portion through which a ball that has passed through the game area and the game result is out (out) flows in, and has a different concept from the number of outs described later.
That is, all the balls launched into the game area 22 by the operation of the launch solenoid 173 described later, except for the foul balls, will be played in the process of flowing down the game area 22, and the balls won in any of the winning openings. Is a safe (winning), and a ball that does not win any of the winning holes has a game result of out. In that case, the safe ball generates a prize ball, but in the case of an enclosed ball type game machine, the prize ball number is only electronically added to the number of possessed balls, and no real ball is discharged. Then, as shown in FIG. 4, the safe ball flows into the game ball inlet 71 for taking in the collected ball from the board surface (game board 22).
On the other hand, an out ball that does not win any of the winning holes becomes a game result that is out (out), and after passing through the out ball inlet 23, it flows into the game ball inlet 71 for taking in the collected balls from the board surface (game board 22). To do.
In addition, although the ball that became a foul was fired into the game area 22 by the operation of the launch solenoid 173, it did not reach the game area 22, so that it flowed into the game ball inlet 71 without generating a game result. Again, it will return to the launch position.
The number of outs to be described later is a concept including a safe (winning) ball and an out (out) ball. In short, the game result is generated by passing through the game area 22 to the outside (here, the game board 20). Out of board (out): It is a ball collected outside the gaming machine) and is a concept that does not include a foul ball. Therefore, the number of balls that go out of the game board 20 after the game is ended is referred to as an out number. On the other hand, the foul ball once goes out of the game board 20 but is not included in the number of outs because the game has not ended. The number of outs is detected by an out sphere detection switch 163 shown in FIG. 6 described later, and the foul sphere is detected by a foul sphere detection switch 162 shown in FIG. 6 described later.

The center case 24 is a member that surrounds the front periphery of the display unit 41a (shown in FIG. 2) of the display device 41 (shown in FIG. 6) attached to the back side of the game board 20. Although not shown in the figure, the center case 24 includes lamps that use LEDs for production or decoration as light sources, and electric accessories that enhance production effects in cooperation with production display on the display device 41 (for example, An accessory having a movable part that is operated by a driving source such as a motor or a solenoid).
Note that lamps for effect or decoration are also provided in portions other than the center case 24 of the game board 20 (may be outside the game area 22). Note that lamps for performance or decoration provided on the game board 20 (including the center case 24) constitute a board decoration device. The electric accessory provided in the center case 24 constitutes a board effect device. It should be noted that the electric accessory constituting the board effect device may be provided at a place other than the center case 24 of the game board 20.

The display device 41 (production means) includes, for example, a liquid crystal display device, and is usually referred to as a variable display device. In addition, as the name of the display device 41, there are various names such as a special figure display device, a symbol variation device, a variable symbol display device, an identification information variation device, an identification information variation display device, etc. Items with the same function are in the same category.
The display device 41 includes a display unit 41a (screen) capable of displaying identification information (referred to as a special figure) such as numbers and characters, and can display a plurality of special figures. For example, special charts are displayed in three vertical columns on the left, center, and right, and special charts consisting of numbers, letters, etc. in each column are displayed in a stopped state (stop display), or in a fluctuating state (for example, vertically) Display in a scrolling state) (that is, a variable display).
Here, the display device 41 constitutes a first display device managed by the gaming machine.
In addition to the special figure, the display unit 41a can display an image for production such as a background image or a character image or an information notification image, or an image corresponding to a so-called ordinary figure. Note that the special figure is identification information that is variably displayed in the variable display game related to the big hit, and the common figure is identification information that is variably displayed in the variable display game related to the common figure (not the big hit). .

The start winning ports 25 and 26 are winning ports that function as start winning ports for special drawings as will be described later. In this example, they are arranged side by side as shown in FIG. The upper first start winning opening 25 is always open. The lower second start winning opening 26 has opening / closing members 26a on both the left and right sides, and when the opening / closing members 26a are opened in a reverse C shape, the winning can be made. As shown in FIG. It is impossible to win if it is closed. The start winning ports 25 and 26 are disposed below the center portion of the center case 24.
The second start winning opening is also referred to as an ordinary electric accessory (general power), and corresponds to an ordinary variable winning device.
The variable winning device 27 is a device (so-called attacker) having a large winning opening 27a that is opened and closed by an opening / closing member 27b. This special winning opening 27a is opened on condition that a big hit, which will be described later, is made, and game balls can be won.

As described above, for example, an image of a normal map is also displayed on the display unit 41a (screen) of the display device 41 in addition to the special drawing. The general game will be described as follows. In this case, the display device 41 corresponds to a general-purpose display device.
When the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 32, the variable display game of the normal map by the variable display of the normal map is displayed on the display unit 41a or the like (an independent general map display may be arranged separately from the display device 41). (Hereinafter, referred to as a normal map change display game) is performed, and if the stopped general map is in a predetermined mode (specific display mode), a privilege called per map is granted.
When a normal hit is reached, a game is held in which the pair of opening and closing members 26a of the second start winning opening 26 are opened in a reverse C shape, and are temporarily held for a predetermined opening time, and the game ball is started. It becomes easier to win, and accordingly, the number of executions of the special figure variable display game increases and the possibility of winning a big game increases.
Also, during the above-described variable display game, when a game ball is further won in the general chart start gate 32, the display unit 41a or the like (even if a unique general chart start memory display is arranged separately from the display device 41). (Preferably), the pending display of the usual figure start memory is executed, for example, up to four are stored, and after the usual figure variable display game is ended, the above usual figure fluctuation display game is repeated based on the memory. In addition, if the probability of a normal figure is made high, it will become easy to hit a common figure.

Here, the time saving will be described as follows.
Abbreviation of time is an abbreviation of “time reduction”. After the big hit, the special figure and the usual figure change time is shortened more than usual, the time efficiency is increased, and the probability per ordinary figure is increased. The number of executions of a variable display game with a certain special figure by supporting the winning at the starting gate by opening the (second starting winning gate 26) (including extending the opening time of the electric train longer than usual) It is a function to change the special figure efficiently without reducing the ball (number of balls). Hereinafter, such a state in which the time reduction is being executed is referred to as a normal power support state or a time reduction state.

Next, the collective display device 35 displays a so-called ordinary figure display, special figure display, a special figure or general figure start-up memory hold display (sometimes referred to as a special figure hold display, a general figure hold display), a game The display of the state, for example, a plurality of indicators using LED as a light source (for example, a display composed of one small lamp, or a 7-segment display capable of displaying numbers as a special figure) Instrument). Note that the start memory hold display (in some cases, simply referred to as the start memory display) is a display for informing the number of start memories that have been held in a state in which the variable display game has not been executed. Is displayed by lighting a lamp or the like for each start memory. In other words, if there are three start memories, the three lamps are turned on or three figures are displayed.
The detailed configuration of the collective display device 35 will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, what is displayed by the display of the collective display device 35 is the special figure or the ordinary figure (formal special figure or ordinary figure), but the display unit of the above-described variable display device 41 or the like. The special map and the general map display to be performed are dummy displays for effects for the player. For this reason, the special display and the general view as viewed from the player indicate the dummy display. In the following, when emphasizing this dummy display, for example, “decorative special drawing” and “decorative drawing” are described.
As described above, the collective display device 35 (see FIG. 6 described later for details) may be difficult to be recognized by the player, but is directly controlled by the game control device 54 described later. It is what is used. For example, a special chart start memory display (special figure hold display) for a player that can be more easily recognized by the player is, for example, a display unit of the display device 41 or a plurality of lamps provided on the game board 20 as described above. (Light emitting unit).

C. Next, FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a back mechanism of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment.
In FIG. 3, main components of the back mechanism in the pachinko machine 1 include an external information terminal board 51, a first card unit connection terminal board 52A, a second card unit connection terminal board 52B, an effect control device 53, and a game control device 54. , A payout control device 230, a circulation device 55, a polishing device 56, a firing device 57, a power supply device 58, a polishing control device 59, and the like.
In addition, there is no component equivalent to a conventional storage tank (upper tank) or a safe unit (non-enclosed ball type).

The external information terminal board 51 is a substrate for wiring connection between the pachinko machine 1 side and the card unit 15 side, and only transmits information unilaterally from the pachinko machine 1 side to the card unit 15 side. There is no input from the side to the pachinko machine 1 side. In particular, the external information terminal board 51 is used to output game information from the pachinko machine 1 to the hall computer 86 (described later) via the card unit 15.
On the other hand, the first card unit connection terminal plate 52A and the second card unit connection terminal plate 52B are also substrates for wiring connection between the pachinko machine 1 side and the card unit 15 side, but from the pachinko machine 1 side to the card unit 15 side. It is a board for wiring connection that not only transmits information to the card unit 15 but also allows input from the card unit 15 side to the pachinko machine 1 side. That is, it is a board for wiring connection that can transmit information from both the pachinko machine 1 and the card unit 15.
Also, the first card unit connection terminal plate 52A and the second card unit connection terminal plate 52B, which are divided into two terminal plates, are divided into a payout control device 230 and an operation display device 7, respectively. This is for connection with the unit 15. That is, the first card unit connection terminal plate 52A connects the payout control device 230 and the card unit 15, and the second card unit connection terminal plate 52B connects the operation display device 7 and the card unit 15. .
In addition, the wiring from the switching circuit 320 is connected to the second card unit connection terminal plate 52B. Therefore, the card unit 15 passes through the switching circuit 320 via the second card unit connection terminal plate 52B. Thus, information can be transmitted to and from the effect control device 53 (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 6).
In the present embodiment, the external information terminal board 51, the first card unit connection terminal board 52A, and the second card unit connection terminal board 52B are separated from each other. You may make it do.
The effect control device 53 drives and controls the display device 41, the lower speaker 10, the upper speakers 16a, 16b, and the like based on a control command output from the game control device 54, and realizes this control function in a predetermined case. A circuit board is accommodated.

  The game control device 54 is a main control device (main board) that manages a game such as a special drawing, and various switches, solenoids, Electric components such as lamps (electrical accessories) are electrically controlled, and control information is sent to other control devices to comprehensively manage and control the progress of the game, including a microcomputer that performs these controls A circuit board on which a circuit is formed is housed in a predetermined case 61. The case 61 has a security structure that prevents easy opening by four caulking portions 62a, 62b, 62c, and 62d. In other words, in a state where the crimped portion is sealed, the structure cannot be opened unless the crimped portion is destroyed. Further, only the number of times corresponding to the number of crimped portions can be sealed. On the back side of the game control device 54, an inspection device connection terminal 63 to which a cable for the authorities to inspect the pachinko machine 1 is connected.

  The payout control device 230 manages the number of encapsulated balls and the number of balls held (payout control board), and a circuit board on which a circuit including a microcomputer for performing the control is formed is housed in a predetermined case 64. It becomes the composition. The case 64 has a security structure that prevents easy opening by four caulking portions 65a, 65b, 65c, and 65d. In other words, in a state where the crimped portion is sealed, the structure cannot be opened unless the crimped portion is destroyed. Further, only the number of times corresponding to the number of crimped portions can be sealed. On the back side of the payout control device 230, an inspection device connection terminal 66 to which a cable for the authorities to inspect the pachinko machine 1 is connected, an error display LED 67 that lights (or blinks) when a predetermined abnormality occurs, and an error is released An error canceling switch 68 is provided for this purpose.

The circulation device 55 is used to circulate the encapsulated sphere enclosed in the pachinko machine 1, and a polishing device 56 is disposed in the circulation path (details will be described later).
The launching device 57 launches a sphere, and is configured by housing a device that realizes this function in a predetermined case. The power supply device 58 uses a commercial AC power supply (for example, AC 100 V) as an input power supply, and supplies necessary power to each control device and each electronic component of the pachinko machine 1 from this input power supply. Note that the commercial AC power supply is not limited to AC 100 V, and for example, AC 24 V may be supplied to each gaming machine in units of islands, and AC 24 V may be used as an input power source.

FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an internal configuration of the circulation device 55.
In FIG. 4, the circulation device 55 is formed in a flat plate structure having a predetermined thickness, and a flow path (described later) for circulating an enclosed ball (enclosed game ball) is formed therein. The circulation device 55 is provided with a polishing device 56 in the flow path portion. The flow path in the circulation device 55 constitutes a circulation path for the encapsulated sphere. Note that a game ball inlet 71 for taking in a collected ball from the board surface (game board 22) is opened at the upper part of the circulation device 55 in FIG.
As described above, the safe ball and the out ball that have been played on the game board 22 are taken in the game ball entrance 71 as a collection ball, and the foul ball that has become a foul without being fired on the game board 22 is also a collection ball. Is taken in as. Since the foul ball has not reached the game area 22, no game result is generated, but it flows into the game ball inlet 71 and returns to the launch position again.
The polishing device 56 polishes the encapsulated sphere. The sphere flowing in from the lower inlet 72 is lifted by the lifting screw 73 by the power of the polishing motor 70, and the polishing member 74 (for example, a polishing cloth) disposed therein is used. ) Is polished and discharged from the upper outlet 75 via the polishing outlet switch 76. The polishing outlet switch 76 detects a sphere discharged from the upper outlet 75, and if the polishing outlet switch 76 does not detect the discharge of the sphere from the upper outlet 75 for a certain time or more, abnormalities such as a sphere clogging in the polishing apparatus 56 are detected. Thus, the polishing motor 70 of the polishing apparatus 56 is prevented from continuing to rotate (details will be described later).
Note that the sphere flows into the polishing device 56 through the polishing inflow guide path 80 in which the sphere is switched by the switching valve 79 via the ball feed channel 78 provided subsequent to the sensor channel 77 in the circulation device 55. In other cases, the switching valve 79 is configured to block the inflow of the sphere into the polishing inflow guide path 80.

That is, in a state in which the encapsulated sphere does not flow into the polishing device 56 (hereinafter referred to as encapsulated sphere circulation), the circulator 55 is connected to the out sphere (including the safe sphere) and the foul from the game sphere inlet 71 opened at the top of the circulator 55 The sphere is caused to flow into the sensor flow path 77 and the sphere is moved downward by gravity, and the sphere flowing down from the game sphere inlet 71 in this way is caused by its own weight to cause the first enclosed sphere detection switch 164 (encapsulated sphere detection 1SW) and the second Ball feed for firing a ball through a ball feed channel 78 provided subsequent to the sensor channel 77 after passing through the sensor channel 77 in which the enclosed ball detection switch 165 (encapsulated ball detection 2SW) is arranged. It is configured to be sent to the device (the device provided on the left end side in FIG. 4). A switching valve 79 is provided in front of the ball feeding device (the device provided on the left end side in FIG. 4) in the ball feeding flow path 78. The switching valve 79 is provided with a switching solenoid 79S (see FIG. 6), and is a position that prevents a part of the ball feed passage 78 from being slid by the switching solenoid 79S to open the polishing guide port 80a during circulation of the enclosed sphere. The sealed ball type is not moved to the lower polishing inflow guide path 80.
Therefore, during the enclosed ball circulation, the enclosed ball, which is a collected ball from the board surface (game board 20), flows from the game ball inlet 71, passes through the sensor flow path 77, passes through the ball feed flow path 78, and passes through the ball. The ball sent to the ball feeding device for launching and is sent to the launch position is launched toward the game area 22 along the rail 21 by the power of the launch solenoid 173 (shown in FIG. 6) of the launch device, The route of circulating out of the game ball inlet 71 as a collection ball again as an out ball (including a safe ball) or a foul ball circulates repeatedly.

Here, as described above, the switching valve 79 does not slide the switching solenoid 79S, the switching valve 79 urges the valve body by the spring to close the polishing guide port 80a, and the sealed ball does not flow into the polishing device 56. (Encapsulated ball circulation) corresponds to a normal state in which the game ball is circulated through the game board 20 inside the pachinko machine 1 without the polishing device 56, and this route is referred to as a game circulation route. Therefore, in the game circulation path, an encapsulated sphere that is a recovered sphere from the board surface is a game ball inlet 71, a sensor channel 77, a ball feed channel 78, a ball feed device, and a launch solenoid 173 of the launch device launching the ball to the board surface, Under the surface of the board, the route passes through the game ball entrance 71 again as a collected ball.

On the other hand, when the ball is polished by flowing the sealed ball into the polishing device 56 instead of circulating the sealed ball, the ball feeding device in the ball feeding flow path 78 (the device provided on the left end side in FIG. 4) is in front. The provided switching valve 79 slides a part of the ball feed channel 78 by the switching solenoid 79S to open the polishing guide port 80a, and the encapsulated sphere is passed through the polishing guide port 80a to the lower polishing inflow guide channel 80 by gravity. Operates to move. As a result, the encapsulated spheres present in the sensor flow path 77 and the ball feed flow path 78 are guided by gravity to the lower polishing inflow guiding path 80 through the polishing guide opening 80a, and flow through the polishing inflow guiding path 80 to enter the lower inlet. It flows into the grinding | polishing apparatus 56 from 72, and ball polishing is performed. When the polishing of the sphere by the polishing device 56 is completed, the sphere is discharged from the upper outlet 75 through the polishing outlet switch 76 to the sensor flow path 77 and flows again into the polishing device 56 from the lower inlet 72 through the above-described path. The ball will be polished. Therefore, during the ball polishing, the ball polishing by the polishing device 56 is performed by circulating through the above-described path.
Here, as described above, the switching valve 79 slides a part of the ball feeding flow path 78 by the switching solenoid 79S to open the polishing guide port 80a, and the encapsulated sphere flows into the lower polishing through the polishing guide port 80a by gravity. The state where the encapsulated sphere is moved to the guide path 80 and the encapsulated sphere flows into the polishing device 56 (during the encapsulated sphere polishing) corresponds to a sphere polished state in which the encapsulated sphere is guided to the polishing device 56 to perform polishing. That's it. Therefore, as for the polishing circulation path, the enclosed sphere is a sensor flow path 77, a ball feed flow path 78, a polishing guide port 80a, a polishing inflow guide path 80, a lower inlet 72, a polishing device 56, an upper outlet 75, a polishing outlet switch 76, and a sensor again. It becomes the path | route of discharge | emission to the flow path 77. FIG.
The switching valve 79 constitutes a path switching means for switching to either the polishing circulation path or the game circulation path.

Also, as shown in FIG. 4, the sensor flow path 77 into which the sphere flowing in from the game ball inlet 71 and the sphere discharged from the upper outlet 75 of the polishing apparatus 56 flows in gently to reduce the momentum of the sphere flowing down. It has an inclined shape. Then, the sphere that has flowed into the sensor flow path 77 is, by its own weight, the sensor flow path 77 in which the first enclosed sphere detection switch 164 (encapsulated sphere detection 1SW) and the second enclosed sphere detection switch 165 (encapsulated sphere detection 2SW) are arranged. Then, the ball is fed to a ball feeding device (device provided on the left end side in FIG. 4) for launching a ball through a ball feeding channel 78 provided subsequent to the sensor channel 77.
Here, the first enclosed sphere detection switch 164 is provided so as to detect a sphere located at a position lower than the second enclosed sphere detection switch 165 on the relatively downstream side of the sensor flow path 77. On the other hand, the second encapsulated sphere detection switch 165 is positioned higher than the first encapsulated sphere detection switch 164 on the relatively upstream side of the sensor flow channel 77 (upstream side of the first enclosed sphere detection switch 164). It is provided to detect a sphere. The first encapsulated ball detection switch 164 is a sensor that detects the lower limit of the number of balls encapsulated as a game ball, and the second encapsulated ball detection switch 165 detects the upper limit of the number of balls encapsulated as a game ball. It is a sensor. This is because the encapsulated balls need to be encapsulated in the pachinko machine 1 without excess or deficiency. This is provided to confirm that there are encapsulated balls. The sensor channel 77 and the ball feed channel 78 may or may not be provided as an integral channel.

  Of the circulation paths through which the encapsulated balls circulate, the downstream flow path (the flow path comprising the sensor flow path 77 and the ball feed flow path 78) through which the game balls collected from the game area flow toward the launch position is The vicinity of the launch position (the vicinity of the leftmost ball feeder in FIG. 4) is the lowest position, and as shown in FIG. The first encapsulated ball detection switch 164 is arranged to detect the game ball at the first position in the downstream flow path, and the second encapsulated ball detection switch 165 is the first encapsulated ball detection switch 165 in the downstream flow path. It arrange | positions so that the game ball in the 2nd position upstream from a position may be detected. Here, the first position is the most upstream game ball when the game balls are accumulated in the downstream flow path by the minimum number within the appropriate range of the number of encapsulated balls (the number of enclosed game balls). Is set to a position where the first enclosed ball detection switch 164 detects. Further, the second position is such that when a number of game balls exceeding the appropriate range of the number of encapsulated balls are accumulated in the downstream flow path, the second encapsulated ball detection switch 165 detects the game ball and the appropriate range of the number of encapsulated balls is detected. The second enclosing ball detection switch 165 is set to a position where the game ball is not detected when the game balls are accumulated in the downstream flow path by the maximum number.

In addition, at least a part (preferably the whole) of the enclosed sphere flow path (the flow path including the above-described sensor flow path 77, the ball feed flow path 78, and the polishing inflow guide path 80) in the circulation device 55 is contained inside. The game ball can be viewed from the outside (at least from the back side of the pachinko machine 1). Thereby, the state of the flow of the sphere in the circulation device 55, the presence or absence of the occurrence of clogging, and the state of the number of encapsulated spheres can be visually confirmed. For example, the flow path of the encapsulated sphere is made of a transparent or translucent member, or a predetermined number of internal viewing openings (thin slits, a plurality of minute holes, etc.) large enough to prevent the sphere from flowing out are formed. By comprising with the made member, it becomes the structure which can visually recognize an internal ball | bowl from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. FIG.
Although detailed illustration is omitted, for example, the entire back wall of the circulation device 55 is made of a transparent member, so that the sensor flow path 77, the ball feed flow path 78, and the polishing inflow guide path 80 as shown in FIG. It is good also as a structure which can visually recognize the whole inside. Preferably, at least in the downstream flow path (the sensor flow path 77 and the ball feed flow path 78), the internal sphere can be visually recognized from the outside, whereby the number of enclosed spheres can be visually confirmed. ing. Further, although not shown in the figure, a mark may be formed on the circulation device 55 so that it is possible to accurately determine whether or not the number of encapsulated balls is appropriate by this visual confirmation. For example, marks (indicating signs) may be formed on the back surface side of the circulation device 55 at a predetermined number of 20 positions of the enclosing ball. In this way, when adding a sphere when the encapsulated sphere is insufficient, it is easy to understand because it is sufficient to add up to this mark. Also, if there is an excess of encapsulated spheres, it is easy to understand because it is only necessary to pass the sphere to this mark.

  Further, the ball feeding device is a device that sends the balls flowing down the ball feeding flow path 78 one by one to the firing position of the launching device 57 using the ball feeding solenoid 172 shown in FIGS. 4 and 6 as a drive source. The ball sent to the launch position can be launched toward the game area 22 along the rail 21 by the power of the launch solenoid 173 (shown in FIG. 6) of the launch device 57. As shown in FIG. 4, the ball feeding device is provided with a shot ball detection SW 161. The fire ball detection SW 161 is a sensor that detects the balls to be fired one by one.

D. Next, FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a system configuration of a game hall in which a large number of pachinko machines 1 according to the present embodiment are installed.
In FIG. 5, the game hall has a card management device 81, a card issuing machine 82, a card settlement machine 83, a prize exchange device 84, a ball management device 85, a hall computer 86, a number of pachinko machines 1a to 1n, and card units 15a to 15a. 15n is arranged.
In addition, an external management device 91 is disposed outside the game hall.
The card management device 81 is connected to a card company (not shown) via a telephone line (for example, a digital line such as ISDN), and the card company receives various information of the card management device 81 as necessary. . The amusement hall is connected to the card company via a telephone line in order to obtain or issue card issuance information or necessary information from the card company.

The card management device 81 is connected to the card issuing machine 82, the card settlement machine 83, the prize exchange device 84, the ball management device 85, and a large number of card units 15a to 15n via the information transmission path 87, The hall computer 86 is connected via an information transmission path 88.
The card management device 81 treats the card issuing machine 82, the card settlement machine 83, the gift exchange device 84, the ball management device 85, and a large number of card units 15a to 15n as terminal devices, and manages information on these terminal devices. In addition to performing control, identification information (card ID) of a game card (member card or visitor card) inserted / extracted into each terminal device, information on the number of balls lent or stored in each game card (valuable) Control processing for storing and managing value information) is performed. For example, processing for updating and storing the balance of the ball lending number for each card ID is performed by obtaining necessary information from each card unit, the card issuing machine 82, and the like.

The card issuing machine 82 issues cards (storage media) purchased from a card company to a player as a membership card, and adds, for example, 1000 yen, 2000 yen, 3000 yen, and 5000 yen ball lending (value). And issue the card. The card issuing machine 82 transfers information (for example, the card ID of the card, the number of balls lent or sales information, etc.) to the card management apparatus 81 via the information transmission path 87, and issues the card. Perform the necessary control.
Note that the game card includes a membership card and a visitor card. The membership card is issued after registering as a member, and the number of ball lending (corresponding to the amount of ball lending), the number of balls held, and the number of balls stored can be registered. The visitor card is a card for a player who is not a member, is stocked in the card unit 15, and is issued in the card unit 15 when cash is inserted into the card unit 15 as will be described later. This visitor card can register the number of balls lending and the number of balls held, but not the number of balls stored. In addition, the number of balls held is valid only on the day, and the number of balls stored can be used by changing to the number of balls held at a later date. In this specification, it is described that the number of balls held corresponds to the game value, but the number of stored balls corresponds to the same valuable value as the number of balls lent.

The card checkout machine 83 is for paying out the game card based on the ball loan balance of the game card (visitor card or member card), and returns, for example, an amount corresponding to the ball loan balance in cash. The card settlement machine 83 also has a function of transferring information (for example, information on the number of spheres) to the card management device 81 via the information transmission path 87.
The prize exchange device 84 performs processing for exchanging with a prize desired by the player based on the number of balls held by the game card. For example, a store clerk at the game hall operates the prize exchange device 84 to give the player a prize. Give away a free gift. In the gift exchange device 84, in the case of a membership card, it is also possible to perform storage processing by exchanging the number of balls held for the number of balls stored.
When exchanging a prize or storing a prize, the prize exchanging device 84 transmits the card ID of the game card and the number of balls stored in the game card to the ball management device 85 (in this example, For example, it is transmitted from the prize exchange device 84 to the ball management device 85). The holding ball management device 85 collates the received card ID and holding ball number with the card ID and holding ball number stored in the holding ball number file for each card of the holding ball management device 85 described later. If the result of collation by the holding ball management device 85 is transmitted to the prize exchange device 84 as correct / incorrect information, the received prize exchange device 84 can know whether the number of held balls stored in the game card is correct.
Note that the prize exchange device 84 transmits only the card ID of the game card to the ball management device 85, and transmits the number of balls held in the number-of-card possession number file of the ball management device 85 described later. You may request that you do. In this way, the prize exchange device 84 can know whether the number of balls stored in the game card is correct or not by collating the received number of balls with the number of balls stored in the game card. .

The ball management device 85 is connected to a card management device 81, a card issuing machine 82, a card settlement machine 83, a gift exchange device 84, and a large number of card units 15a to 15n. Based on information from each of these devices, a player Control is performed to store and manage information on the number of balls possessed by the player (game value information). For example, a control process such as storing the number of balls in correspondence with a card ID (card identification information) in a storage area called a number-of-balls file per card is performed.
The card units 15a to 15n are arranged adjacent to the pachinko machines 1a to 1n, respectively, and are connected as described above so that information can be transmitted. And it is the structure which transmits the number of balls and external information (various game information output outside from each pachinko machine 1a-1n) from many pachinko machines 1a-1n to card unit 15a-15n.
The ball management device 85 can also communicate with the hall computer 86 via the card management device 81 and has a function of performing processing according to collation of ball number data from the hall computer 86 and the like.

The card units 15a to 15n, when a game card is inserted, read the game card information (ball lending number data, etc.) and perform processing for lending the ball, or the number of balls possessed by the player ( (Which may be encrypted) is stored in a game card, and information is transferred to / from the card management device 81 via the information transmission path 87.
The card units 15a to 15n are configured to periodically receive the number of balls and external information (various game information as described above) from the pachinko machines 1a to 1n, respectively. The card units 15a to 15n transmit external information collected from a number of pachinko machines 1a to 1n (various game information output from the pachinko machines 1a to 1n) to the hall computer 86 via the information transmission path 87. To do.

The hall computer 86 is installed in the game room management room, connected to the card units 15a to 15n via the information transmission path 87, and connected to the pachinko machines 1a to 1n via the card units 15a to 15n. Are collected from the card management device 81 via the information transmission path 88, and necessary data is collected from the holding ball management device 85 via the card management device 81 to cope with various game states. It organizes the data to be played and manages the management of the game hall.
Specifically, necessary data is collected from a large number of pachinko machines 1a to 1n via the card units 15a to 15n, and necessary data is collected from the ball holding management device 85 via the card management device 81. The data corresponding to various game states is organized, the organized data is displayed on the display, and calculation processing of data necessary for business is performed. Although different from the embodiment, the external information (various game information) transmitted to the hall computer 86 via the card units 15a to 1n is transmitted directly from the pachinko machines 1a to 1n to the hall computer 86. Also good.

The external management device 91 is connected to the card management device 81 via the information transmission path 92 and is managed by a third party by being arranged outside the game hall, and is related to the game card of the game hall outside the store. It has a function to back up information.
For example, data such as the number of stored balls for each gaming card, IDs of a large number of gaming cards, and a number of gaming machine IDs are collected via the card management device 81 to manage the number of stored balls for each gaming card and management of the gaming card ID. Each process (including data backup) such as management of the gaming machine ID is performed. In addition, if there is an inquiry from the game hall, data is supplied as necessary, and in this embodiment, the gaming machine ID (or payout unique ID (in the embodiment described later) is used when the pachinko machines 1a to 1n are turned on. Including the unique ID of the payout control device), and the result of the verification can be transmitted to the game arcade.
Further, when the game hall quits business and closes the store, the external management device 91 provides information on management of the number of stored balls for each customer's game card to a trusted institution.

E. Next, the control system of the pachinko machine 1 of this example will be described with reference to FIG. In the drawings and the following description, “SW” means a switch, and “SOL” means a solenoid. Further, in the drawings, when the name of the member is long, it is difficult to show the illustration, and therefore, the drawing may be appropriately shortened (not shown).
The pachinko machine 1 includes a game control device 54, an effect control device 53, a payout control device 230, a polishing control device 59, and a power supply device 58 as main components of the control system. Necessary power is supplied from the power supply 58 to each of these devices and each electronic component shown in FIG.
In the first embodiment, a device for controlling the progress of a game (a conventional game control) is a device (payout control device) that performs encapsulated ball control (control of the number of encapsulated balls and control of addition / subtraction of the number of held balls). The apparatus is separated from the apparatus, and the program of each control apparatus is simplified and the control burden is reduced. For example, a device in which such a payout control device and a game control device are integrated may be provided as the game control device 54. In that case, signals and commands sent from the game control device to the payout control device are not required, the control burden is reduced, and space and power can be saved.

(Game control device related)
First, the configuration of the game control device 54 of the pachinko machine 1 and the devices connected to the game control device 54 will be described.
The game control device 54 is a main control device (main board) for managing games such as special drawings, and includes a CPU 111, a ROM 112, a RAM 113, a test firing test terminal 115 for an inspection device, and an inspection device connection terminal 63. Yes.
The game control device 54 constitutes a control device and game control means.

The CPU 111 executes a game program for managing a game such as a special figure and performs arithmetic processing necessary for game control. The ROM 112 stores a game program, and the RAM 113 is used as a work area (work area) when executing processing based on the game program.
The RAM 113 is provided with backup power supply means (not shown, for example, comprising a large-capacitance capacitor) for supplying power even in the event of a power failure. If the power is restored from the power failure within the continued time, the data in the RAM 113 is retained.
The CPU 111, the ROM 112, and the RAM 113 correspond to a gaming microcomputer as a gaming arithmetic processing device, and are manufactured as, for example, an IC for an amusement chip.
The amusement chip IC stores a manufacturer code and a product code in addition to a chip code as individual identification information for individually identifying the IC chip, and can output these codes as a gaming machine ID. is there.

The test fire test terminal 115 is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various game information obtained from the CPU 111 to the inspection device is connected. Note that the test firing test terminal 115 and related parts are used in the test organization and are removed at the time of shipment, and are not mounted in the game control device 54 used in the game hall.
The inspection device connection terminal 63 is a terminal to which a cable for the authorities to inspect the pachinko machine 1 is connected after the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall.

The game control device 54 includes a first start port switch 120 (start port 1SW in FIG. 6), a second start port switch 121 (start port 2SW in FIG. 6), a gate switch 122, a winning port switch 123, a count switch 124, Detection signals from the magnet sensor 142, the radio wave sensor 143, and the vibration sensor 144 are input.
The first start port switch 120 is a sensor for detecting a winning ball, which detects the game balls won in the first start winning port 25 one by one, and the second start port switch 121 wins the second start winning port 26. This is a sensor for detecting a winning ball for detecting one game ball at a time.
The count switch 124 is a similar sensor that detects a game ball won in the large winning opening 27a of the variable winning device 27. Further, the winning port switch 123 is a similar sensor provided for the general winning ports 28 to 31, and when there are n general winning ports, one is provided for each and n is provided as a whole. Instead of providing one sensor for each general winning opening, one sensor may be provided as a whole for a plurality of general winning openings. The gate switch 122 is a sensor that detects the game balls passing through the usual start gate 32 one by one.
Each of the sensors 120, 121, 122, 123, and 124 for detecting these game balls is a proximity switch in this example, and outputs a negative logic detection signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V. It is configured.

When there is a winning at the winning opening, the game control device 54 sends a prize ball number command corresponding to the winning to the payout control device 230. The payout control device 230 performs a process of adding the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning to the number of held balls based on the winning ball number command corresponding to the winning sent from the game control device 54.
In addition, the game control device 54 performs a process of displaying the number of winning balls corresponding to winning on the winning display LED 355 of the collective display device 35 when there is a winning at the winning opening.

Specifically, when the game control device 54 has won a prize opening, the game control device 54 determines the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning and outputs a winning ball number command for adding the number of winning balls to the number of possessed balls. Processing to transmit to 230 is performed. The winning awards are all winning awards that involve winning ball discharge (actually paying out a ball or adding to the number of balls in the case of an enclosed ball type). There are a large winning opening 27 a and general winning openings 28 to 31 of the variable winning apparatus 27.
In the game control device 54, the number of winning balls associated with winning a prize is set as follows.
・ Large prize opening 27a = 13 ・ Starting prize opening 25 = 3 ・ Starting prize opening 26 (Fuden) = 1 piece ・ General prize opening 28-31 = 10 pieces

The magnet sensor 142 is a sensor that detects that a magnet has approached the pachinko machine 1 and is used to detect fraud caused by the magnet. The radio wave sensor 143 is a sensor that detects the transmission of radio waves. The vibration sensor 144 is a sensor that detects that vibration has been applied to the pachinko machine 1, and is particularly for detecting unauthorized vibration such as shaking the table (or hitting it abnormally).
The game control device 54 determines fraud based on the detection signals from the magnet sensor 142, the radio wave sensor 143, and the vibration sensor 144. Then, processing such as causing the display device 41 to perform an error display effect is performed under the control of the effect control device 53. Further, the game control device 54 transmits the unauthorized information to the payout control device 230, and the payout control device 230 transmits the unauthorized information to the hall computer 86 via the card unit 15.

Next, the game control device 54 is connected to the effect control device 53, the general power solenoid 131, the special prize opening solenoid 132, and the collective display device 35 as necessary devices for the progress and effect of the game.
The general electric solenoid 131 is a solenoid that opens and closes the opening / closing member 26a of the second start winning port 26, and the large winning port solenoid 132 is a solenoid that opens and closes the opening / closing member 27b of the variable winning device 27. The game control device 54 outputs necessary control signals to the ordinary electric solenoid 131, the big prize opening solenoid 132, and the collective display device 35.
Further, data (for example, an effect command) is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53 by serial communication.
Further, the game control device 54 is configured to transmit data (for example, commands necessary for managing encapsulated balls (for example, prize ball number commands)) to the payout control device 230 by serial communication.

(Discharge control device related)
Next, the configuration of the payout control device 230 and devices connected to the payout control device 230 will be described.
The payout control device 230 manages the number of encapsulated balls and the number of balls held (payout control board). The CPU 231, ROM 232, RAM 233, test firing test terminal 234 for the inspection device, inspection device connection terminal 235, A launch control circuit 236, an error release switch (error release SW) 68, and an error display LED 67 are provided.
The payout control device 230 performs control for paying out the prize balls in accordance with a signal (payout control command) from the game control device 54 (the payout of the prize balls is added to the number of balls held). On the other hand, the payout controller 230 can transmit frame opening information (information indicating whether or not the opening of the front frame 4 is detected by the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126) to the card unit 15. (Details will be described later).
Although not shown in FIG. 6, as shown in FIG. 8 to be described later, a switch power supply that supplies main power to the payout control device 230 after being delayed by a predetermined time to a front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126. A delay circuit 541 is provided (details will be described later).
The payout control device 230 constitutes a control device, an enclosed ball control means, a counting means, a counting operation control means, an input period limiting means, a game value storage means, a game value display control means, a polishing control means, a delay means, and a clear control means. .

The CPU 231 executes a predetermined program to perform calculation processing necessary for enclosing ball control, game ball payout (prize ball payout or loaned ball payout), and management of the number of balls held. The ROM 232 stores the program, and the RAM 233 is used as a work area (work area) when executing processing based on the program.
Here, the RAM 233 constitutes a game value storage means and stores the number of possessed balls as the game value. Specifically, the RAM 233 stores a change in the player's game value, and subtracts the fired ball to win the prize ball. By repeating the addition of the number, the player's number of balls will be updated and stored in real time. Since the subtraction of the fired ball and the addition of the number of prize balls are performed by processing based on a program, the RAM 233 (game value storage means) stores real-time changes in the number of balls held.
Further, the RAM 233 is provided with backup power supply means (not shown, for example, composed of a large-capacitance capacitor) for supplying power even in the event of a power failure. If the power is restored from the power failure within a period during which the power can be continuously supplied, the data in the RAM 233 is retained.

The payout control device 230 specifically performs processing from launching to collection of the enclosed ball as a control necessary for the enclosed ball game, and the number of balls held according to the prize ball number command from the game control device 54. In addition, in the first embodiment, ball lending control (ball lending addition processing), counting the number of balls, and the like are performed.
The payout control device 230 receives a winning ball number command corresponding to winning from the game control device 54 when there is a winning at the winning mouth, so that a prize corresponding to winning based on the winning ball number command is sent. A process of adding the number of balls to the number of balls held is performed (as described above). For example, when there is a continuous change in the number of balls held by the player (game value), the number of balls held in the RAM 233 (game value storage means) The memory of the number is updated immediately. However, when the number-of-balls display 40 (game value display means) displays the number of balls of the player, the number of balls is updated for a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds). ) Is controlled at intervals.
Specifically, the RAM 233 as an internal memory stores a change in the number of balls held by the player, and the game is repeated by subtracting the fired balls, adding the number of prize balls, and adding the foul balls. It will update and memorize in real time how many balls will be held. On the other hand, the payout controller 230 subtracts the number of balls fired from the number of balls held, adds the number of prize balls, and adds a foul ball by processing based on the game program, so that the RAM 233 can determine the number of balls held in real time. Memorize changes. On the other hand, the payout controller 230 updates the number of balls when the number-of-balls display 40 displays the number of balls of the player, and the RAM 233 updates and stores the number of balls in real time. Unlike the above, control is performed so that the number of balls held is updated and displayed at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds).
The test firing test terminal 234 is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various kinds of information in the enclosed ball control and the game ball payout control obtained from the CPU 231 to the inspection device is connected. Note that the test firing test terminal 234 and related parts are used in the test institution and are removed at the time of shipment, and are not mounted on the payout control device 230 used in the game hall.
The inspection device connection terminal 235 is a terminal to which a cable for the authorities to inspect the pachinko machine 1 is connected after the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall.

  The launch control circuit 236 is built in the payout control device 230 and receives supply of necessary power from the payout control device 230 and also receives a fire permission signal. The launch control circuit 236 is required to receive the ON data of the launch permission signal, and the launch solenoid that launches the game ball at the launch position according to the operation of the launch volume 171 (that is, the rotation operation of the launch operation handle 11). 173 is controlled. Further, signals from the touch sensor 174 and the firing stop switch 175 are input to the payout control device 230. The touch sensor 174 detects whether or not the player has touched the firing operation handle 11 that operates the firing volume 171, and the firing stop switch 175 temporarily stops the firing of the game ball. It is operated by a player.

Note that the ball feed solenoid 172 that sends the game ball to the launch position is directly controlled by the payout control device 230. For the control process, a signal from the touch sensor 174 is input to the payout control device 230.
A device that includes the above-described firing solenoid 173 and launches a game ball at a launch position (not shown) into a game area is referred to as a launch device 57. This launching device 57 is controlled by a payout control device 230 including a firing control circuit 236, and a state where launching of a game ball is permitted by control processing of these control devices (a state where on data of a launch permission signal is set) ) Can only launch game balls. In a state where the launch of the game ball is prohibited (a state in which the off data of the launch permission signal is set), even if there is a game ball at the launch position and the player operates the launch operation handle 11, the game ball is launched. Not. In addition, the launching device 57 has a member called a spear for hitting a game ball in order to launch, and the launch position is at the tip of the spear (tip).
Note that the number of game balls fired by operating the firing operation handle 11 is defined as 100 shots per minute according to a predetermined rule, so the payout control device 230 and the launch control circuit 236 control the ball feed solenoid 172. , Within a range of 100 shots / minute (approximately one shot in 0.6 seconds (s)).

The error cancel switch (error cancel SW) 68 outputs a signal for canceling the error when operated when there is an error in the payout control process and the process is stopped.
The error display LED 67 lights a specific number according to the content of the error when there is an error in the payout control process.
Further, the payout control device 230 is connected to the number-of-balls display 40, the counting switch 311, the break switch 312, the counting ball display 313, and the counting ball use switch 314 in relation to the devices arranged on the lower panel 6. Yes. As will be described later, the operation display device 7 is connected to the card unit 15 via the second card unit connection terminal plate 52B and is managed and controlled by the card unit 15. Therefore, the operation display device 7 is not under the control of the payout control device 230. It is a configuration.
The payout control device 230 receives detection signals from the counting switch 311, the break switch 312 and the counting ball use switch 314, and outputs necessary control signals to the holding ball number display 40 and the counting ball display 313. In addition, necessary control signals are output to the LEDs built in the counting switch 311, the break switch 312 and the counting ball use switch 314.
For example, in order to display the number of balls held, the driving signal capable of driving the six LEDs of the seven segments of the number of balls holding display 40 is output to the ball holding number display 40. When there is a counting ball, the counting ball display 313 is configured to output a signal for lighting it. For the LEDs built in the counting switch 311, the break switch 312, and the counting ball use switch 314, when a condition for lighting each LED is satisfied, a driving signal capable of lighting each LED is output.

Here, the concepts such as the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls are organized and described as follows.
-Number of balls: Number of balls that can be fired-Number of balls counted: Number of stored balls moved from the number of balls held (stored balls that cannot be temporarily fired)
Specifically, the number of balls possessed is the number of balls that the player has acquired and can be fired. In the example of a gaming machine using real balls, the ball that can be fired on the upper plate or the lower plate It corresponds to a number of images, and it is a ball that has not moved to the ball box.
On the other hand, the number of counted balls is the number of stored balls moved by counting from the number of balls held by the player. In the example of a gaming machine using real balls, It corresponds to the image of the number of balls moved out of the ball box, and it is the ball in the ball box. By operating the counting switch 311, the number of balls can be moved to the number of counting balls.
Total number of balls: The total number of balls held by the player, which is represented by the number of balls held + the number of counted balls = the total number of balls held.
・ Number of updated balls: Changed number of balls from previous number of balls ・ Number of updated balls: Number of changed balls from previous number of counted balls ・ Use of counting balls: Move the ball from the number of counting balls to the number of balls In detail, “Using counting balls” is an example of a game machine that uses real balls. In the example of a game machine that uses real balls, the balls (counting balls) that have moved from the upper plate or lower plate to the ball box are moved again to the upper plate. This corresponds to the concept of moving (back) and using. In order to use the counting ball, the counting ball use switch 314 may be operated, and a predetermined amount (for example, 100) of the balls moves from the counting ball number to the number of holding balls by one operation. .
・ Number of stored balls: Number of balls that can be replayed after the game on the gaming machine has been completed and the player has stored the total number of balls stored on the membership card. It is possible to play again using the or to exchange prizes. If you move the table, you will play again using the current day's storage, but if you are a guest member, you will not be able to store the ball but simply use the stored ball data recorded on the game card to replay it on another table. Will play.
In the case of payment, the total number of balls is written on the game card. At this time, the total number of balls held is sent to the card unit 15 and the card unit 15 performs a settlement process.
In Example 1, the above-mentioned “number of balls that can be fired” and “number of balls to be counted” are both included in the “number of balls held” acquired by the player in terms of a broad concept. The explanation is divided according to the state of storage.

In the first embodiment, the number of held balls and the number of counted balls are configured to be managed by the payout control device 230, and these data are stored and held in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 233 of the payout control device 230.
The data on the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls is also sent to the card unit 15 and can be displayed on the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7 under the control of the card unit 15. ing. However, although the number of balls held and the number of balls counted are displayed on the operation display device 7, the payout control device 230 is only used to control the increase or decrease in the number of balls held or the number of counted balls stored after moving from the number of balls held. Has come to control. The card unit 15 periodically receives data from the payout control device 230, and displays details of the number of balls held and the number of counted balls on the operation display device 7 based on the received data.
The data on the number of balls held and the number of balls counted are also sent from the payout control device 230 to the effect control device 53 via the game control device 54, and the upper part of the decorative ball display device 250 is controlled by the effect control device 53. The decoration of the number of balls held and the number of counted balls is performed using a number of LEDs of the decorative ball display device 250a and the lower decorative ball display device 250b.

Specifically, the number of held balls and the number of counted balls are displayed by the following devices.
・ Number-of-balls display 40: digitally displays the number of balls held (managed by the payout controller 230)
Counting ball display 313: Displays the presence or absence of a counting ball (lights up when there is a counting ball) (managed by the payout controller 230)
-Decoration ball display device 250: Analog decoration display of the number of balls held and the number of counting balls with a large number of LEDs (managed by the effect control device 53)
-Operation display device 7: Displays details of the number of balls and counting balls in digital or analog (managed by card unit 15)

The payout control device 230 is connected to the card unit 15 via the first card unit connection terminal plate 52 </ b> A so that bidirectional information can be transmitted to and from the card unit 15. Therefore, the first card unit connection terminal plate 52A is mainly used for input / output of information and signals between the card unit 15 and the payout control device 230 on the pachinko machine 1 side.
Then, the payout control device 230 displays the number of balls on the ball count display 40, or counts the number of balls by the operation of the counting switch 311 and shifts to the count ball count (concept to move to a so-called ball box). It is possible to do. In addition, when the number of balls held is counted and transferred to the counting ball number, the payout control device 230 performs control to turn on the counting ball display 313 by determining that the counting ball number is present.
Here, the control concept of “counting the number of possessed balls and moving them to the ball box of the counted number of balls” is an example of a game machine that pays out with real balls. This is the same as the work of physically transferring to an external ball box (details will be described later).
Further, when the counting ball use switch 314 is operated, the payout control device 230 also performs control to move a predetermined amount (for example, 100 balls) from the counting ball number to the holding ball number by one operation.
On the other hand, the payout control device 230 transmits the data on the number of balls held and the number of balls counted to the effect control device 53 via the game control device 54, and the effect control device 53 controls lighting / flashing of the decorative ball display device 250. It is configured to do.

Here, the transmission of information will be described. As described above, the payout control device 230 is connected to the card unit 15 via the first card unit connection terminal plate 52A. Various information in the enclosed ball game (for example, various information including the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls) is sent at predetermined intervals (for example, 400 ms). Note that the number of balls held and the number of balls counted are not changed, but the actual number at that time is transmitted, so that it is not necessary to take measures against data loss.
The card unit 15 manages the control of the operation display device 7 on the basis of various information from the payout control device 230, and displays the player's number of balls (game value) and the number of counted balls in the message / operation area unit 306. To do.
In this example, as described above, various game information from the game control device 54 and various information in the enclosed ball game (various information including the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls) are sent from the payout control device 230 to the card unit 15. Although transmission is performed at predetermined intervals (for example, 400 ms), necessary information may be transmitted from the dispensing control device 230 when a request is made from the card unit 15. Further, the various types of information may be transmitted from the game control device 54 to the card unit 15 instead of from the payout control device 230.

On the other hand, the payout control device 230 is connected to the card unit 15 via the external information terminal board 51, and game information can be transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the card unit 15.
The card unit 15 is connected to the hall computer 86 and the ball management device 85. Therefore, the external information terminal board 51 is mainly used for transmitting game information from the payout control device 230 on the pachinko machine 1 side to the hall computer 86 or the ball management device 85 via the card unit 15.
Specifically, from the payout control device 230, via the external information terminal board 51, via the card unit 15, to the hall computer 86, various game information from the game control device 54 and control of the enclosed ball and payout control of the game ball. Various information in is output. As game information, for example, a signal that informs the signal input to the game control device 54 to the outside, a jackpot signal that informs the jackpot that occurs in the course of the game progress, and a prize at the starting point that is a condition for changing the symbol A start signal to notify, a symbol change start signal to trigger a symbol change stop, a symbol determination number signal to notify a symbol change, a game state is a state advantageous to the player (so-called probability change state, time-short state) There are privilege status signals.
Also, the payout control device 230 outputs information on the number of balls held (game value information) and the like to the card unit 15 via the external information terminal board 51, and the ball number management device 85 and hall computer 86 from the card unit 15. Information on the number of balls held (game value information) is output.

Next, as a signal from various switches necessary for encapsulated sphere control and the like, the payout control device 230 includes a firing sphere detection switch 161, a foul sphere detection switch 162, an out sphere detection switch 163, and a first encapsulated sphere detection switch 164. Detection signals from the enclosed sphere detection 1SW in FIG. 6 and the second enclosed sphere detection switch 165 (encapsulated sphere detection 2SW in FIG. 6) are input.
The shot ball detection switch 161 is a sensor that detects one ball at a time in the game area 22 by operation of the shot volume 171 (details will be described later), and the foul ball detection switch 162 is a game area 22 of what has been shot. It is a sensor that detects one ball at a time without failing to foul. The out ball detection switch 163 is a sensor that detects one ball collected from the game area 22 (including both out ball and safe ball) one by one.
As described above, the first enclosed sphere detection switch 164 and the second enclosed sphere detection switch 165 are arranged in the sensor flow path 77 of the circulation device 55 (see FIG. 4), and are for checking the number of enclosed spheres. .
The payout control device 230 receives the detection signals from the switches 161 to 165, monitors the behavior of the sphere from launching to collection of the enclosed sphere, checks for the presence of a foul sphere, and checks the maximum and minimum number of encapsulated spheres. In addition to the above processing, control is performed such as processing to add to the number of balls held based on the ball lending information (ball lending number command) sent from the card unit 15.

Further, a glass frame opening switch (glass frame opening SW in FIG. 6) 125 and a front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 (front frame opening SW (night monitoring SW) in FIG. 6) are connected to the dispensing control device 230. Has been.
The glass frame opening switch 125 is a sensor that detects that the glass frame 5 is opened.
The front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is a sensor that detects that the front frame 4 is opened, and holds information that detects the opening of the front frame 4 even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off. It is configured. In particular, if the front frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened when the game hall is closed at night, information (for example, opening ON data) that detects that the front frame 4 has been opened is also displayed at night. keeping. When the pachinko machine 1 is activated the next morning, the information that the front frame 4 has been opened at night is detected by the payout control device 230 based on a detection signal from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126. By reading, it is taken into the payout control device 230. Therefore, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is also named “night monitoring switch”.
The front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 may detect that the glass frame 5 is opened in addition to detecting that the front frame 4 is opened. In this way, it is possible to cope with fraud by opening the glass frame while omitting the glass frame opening switch 125 to reduce the cost.
Here, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 constitutes a front frame opening detection means.
Further, main power is supplied from the payout control device 230 to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 with a predetermined time delay from the start of supply of main power to the payout control device 230, and is backed up when the main power is cut off. Power is supplied (see FIG. 8 for details). As the backup power source, for example, as in the RAM 233 described above, backup power source means (not shown, for example, comprising a large-capacitance capacitor) that supplies power even during a power failure is used, and the pachinko machine 1 is turned off at night. The backup power supply means continues to supply necessary power even in the case of power failure (or during power failure).
Then, the frame opening information of the front frame 4 from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is input to the payout control device 230, stored in the RAM 233, and transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the card unit 15. (See the program below for details).

(Production control device related)
Next, a configuration of the effect control device 53 and devices connected to the effect control device 53 will be described.
The effect control device 53 includes a main control microcomputer, a video control microcomputer that performs video control exclusively under the control of the main control microcomputer, a VDP as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 41, It has a tone generator LSI that controls the output of various melody and sound effects, etc., but its detailed configuration is omitted.

The production control device 53 analyzes the control command from the CPU 111 of the game control device 54, determines the production content and controls the content of the output video of the display device 41, or instructs the sound source LSI to play the reproduced sound. The lower speaker 10 and the upper speakers 16a and 16b are driven to produce sound effects, etc., and the processing such as the drive control of the decoration display LED 141 described above is executed, and the production content is determined according to the signal from the production operation switch 9 And control the production.
Further, the effect control device 53 is configured to transmit the number of balls and the number of counted balls from the payout control device 230 via the game control device 54, and the effect control device 53 displays the decorative ball display. A number of LEDs on the upper decorative ball display device 250a and the lower decorative ball display device 250b are controlled to be turned on and off in accordance with the number of balls held and the number of balls counted.
Furthermore, the production control device 53 can input and output information and signals to and from the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 320, and information related to the production screen is sent from the production control device 53 via the switching circuit 320. The operation display device 7 transmits operation information of various effect buttons arranged on the screen of the message / operation area unit 306 to the effect control device 53 via the switching circuit 320.
The effect control device 53 determines the effect contents of the display device 41 based on the operation information of various effect buttons received from the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 320 and controls the effect.
The second card unit connection terminal plate 52B is connected to the switching circuit 320, and the card unit 15 can input and output information and signals to and from the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 320.
In this way, the switching circuit 320 connects the operation display device 7 to the effect control device 53 (game machine: pachinko machine 1, the same applies hereinafter) and the card unit 15 (however, via the second card unit connection terminal plate 52B). (See FIG. 7B).

Next, the effect control device 53 is connected to the polishing control device 59 as a device necessary for the processing of the game ball polishing. The polishing control device 59 includes an RTC (real time clock) 60 inside, and performs processing necessary for polishing the game ball by controlling the operation of the polishing device 56 based on an instruction from the effect control device 53. The reason why the RTC 60 is provided is to enable control based on information such as date and time. For example, the production control device 53 can read the information of the RTC 60 to make a special production appear, or can freely set a time zone for polishing a game ball as in Example 2 described later.
The production control device 53 exchanges signals with the polishing control device 59, and the polishing control device 59 sends a control signal (for example, forward rotation data) to the polishing motor 70 based on an instruction from the production control device 53. (Or a signal corresponding to the reverse rotation data) is appropriately output, and upon receiving this control signal, the polishing motor 70 operates the polishing device 56 for polishing the encapsulated sphere enclosed in the pachinko machine 1 (forward or reverse). Actuated in the direction).
Specifically, the payout control device 230 sets a predetermined period when the power is turned on as a polishing period, transmits a polishing start command to the game control device 54 when polishing is started, and sends a polishing stop command to the game control device 54 when polishing is stopped. Control to send. During the polishing period, game balls cannot be launched.
When the game control device 54 receives a polishing start command from the payout control device 230, the game control device 54 transmits a polishing start command to the effect control device 53, and receives a polishing stop command, and controls to transmit a polishing stop command to the effect control device 53. Do.
When the production control device 53 receives the polishing start command from the game control device 54, the production control device 53 instructs the polishing control device 59 to start polishing, and displays on the screen of the display device 41 from reception of the polishing start command to reception of the polishing stop command. Control to do.

The polishing control device 59 controls the polishing device 56 so as to perform polishing only for a predetermined period in response to a polishing instruction from the effect control device 53. In this case, the polishing control device 59 executes processing necessary for polishing the encapsulated sphere such as driving of the polishing motor 70 and operation of the switching solenoid 79S in accordance with a polishing device program described later.
That is, a polishing motor 70, a switching solenoid 79S and a polishing outlet switch 76 are connected to the polishing control device 59, and the polishing motor 70 is sealed inside the pachinko machine 1 based on a control signal from the polishing control device 59. The polishing device 56 for polishing the encapsulated sphere is operated (operated in the forward direction or the reverse direction). The switching solenoid 79S opens the polishing guide port 80a when polishing the encapsulated sphere. Normally (when the encapsulated sphere is not polished), the switching solenoid 79S is guided to polish by the valve body of the switching valve 79 (details not shown). When the port 80a is closed (for example, the valve body is biased by a spring and displaced to a position where the polishing guide port 80a is closed), and the valve control signal is received from the polishing control device 59, the switch is in the closed position. The valve body of the valve 79 is sucked and displaced to a position where the polishing guide port 80a is opened. As a result, the polishing guide port 80a that closes the movement of the sphere from the ball feed channel 78 to the polishing inflow guide channel 80 is opened, and the encapsulated sphere in the ball feed channel 78 is lowered through the polishing guide port 80a by gravity. It moves to the polishing inflow guide path 80.
The polishing outlet switch 76 detects the sphere discharged from the upper outlet 75 as described above, and outputs a sphere discharge detection signal to the polishing control device 59 when the discharge of the sphere from the upper outlet 75 is detected. If the polishing control device 59 cannot receive a ball discharge detection signal from the polishing outlet switch 76 for a certain period of time or more even though the ball polishing control is in progress, it is determined that an abnormality such as a clogged ball in the polishing device 56 is necessary. (For example, the polishing motor 70 is stopped).

Here, in the first embodiment, as described above, the polishing control device 59 exchanges signals with the performance control device 53, but inputs signals to the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230. Not. Similarly, the polishing device 56 does not input a signal to the game control device 54 or the payout control device 230, and the polishing motor 70 of the polishing device 56 only operates in response to a control signal from the polishing control device 59. . That is, no information is input from the polishing control device 59 and the polishing device 56 to the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230, and from the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230 to the polishing control device 59 and the polishing device 56 in one direction. It is configured to transmit information.
In this way, the polishing control device 59 does not input any information (for example, input of information such as signal input, data input, command input) to the game control device 54 (main board) or the payout control device 230. The configuration is not performed, and the configuration is such that the encapsulated sphere is polished by an instruction (polishing start command) from the game control device 54 (main substrate) or the payout control device 230. For short, it will be referred to as “subification”. Here, information is input including signal input, data input, and the like.
The game control device 54 (main board) and the payout control device 230 are devices that are directly related to the center of the game, such as the progress and management of the game, whereas the effect control device 53 and the like are generally game control devices 54, for example. Since it is a device that operates passively in response to an instruction from the (main board) or the payout control device 230, it is generally referred to as a sub board.
In the first embodiment, the polishing control device 59 is simply configured to send and receive signals to and from the effect control device 53 (sub-board), and also falls within the category of the sub-board. In the first embodiment, for operation, the operation of the polishing control device 59 does not directly affect the game control device 54 (main board) or the payout control device 230, and the polishing control device 59 is not connected to the game control device 54 ( A configuration in which no information is input to the main board) or the payout control device 230, and the sealed ball is polished by an instruction (polishing start command) from the game control device 54 (main board) or the payout control device 230. Thus, the polishing control device 59 (including the polishing device 56) is configured to be “sub-configured”. Therefore, the game control device 54 (main board) and the payout control device 230 are not directly affected by the polishing control device 59 (including the polishing device 56).

In this way, by substituting the polishing control device 59 (including the polishing device 56), the control burden on the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230 is reduced. Specifically, it is only necessary to send a polishing start command from the game control device 54 or the payout control device 230 to the effect control device 53, and when the effect control device 53 receives the polishing start command, the polishing control device 59 starts polishing. In response to the polishing instruction from the effect control device 53, the polishing control device 59 executes processing necessary for polishing the encapsulated sphere, such as driving the polishing motor 70 and operating the switching solenoid 79S, for a predetermined period. The game ball is polished.
Thus, the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230 can operate the “sub-substituted” polishing control device 59 (including the polishing device 56) only by sending a polishing start command to the effect control device 53. Since the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230 need only perform a simple process of sending a command to polish the encapsulated ball, the control burden on the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230 is remarkably reduced.
Moreover, since there is no direct influence on the game for the sub-device, there are few restrictions on the components to be mounted. That is, there is a merit that the limitation of ROM capacity and the limitation of parts are relaxed. Therefore, the design can be performed without worrying about the ROM capacity, and for example, the choice of parts can be expanded, and an RTC (real time clock) can be mounted, thereby expanding the range of production. In addition, options for parts such as sensors are widened, leading to cost reduction. Furthermore, “sub-substitution” has an advantage that the inspection is simplified because there is no direct influence on the game.
In the first embodiment, the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230 are separated from each other. However, such a device in which the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230 are integrated as a game control device. In this case, the game control device including the payout control device 230 becomes the main board. Therefore, there is a concept that the payout control device 230 according to the first embodiment is also handled as a main board and included in the main board. Even if the payout control device 230 of Embodiment 1 itself is included in the main substrate in accordance with this concept, in Embodiment 1, the polishing control device 59 has a configuration in which no information is input to the payout control device 230, and polishing is performed. The control device 59 (including the polishing device 56) is “sub-configured”. Therefore, the above-mentioned merit can be exhibited.

(Power supply)
Next, the configuration of the power supply device 58 will be described.
The power supply device 58 generates DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V from the AC power supply, and supplies necessary power to the game control device 54, the effect control device 53, the payout control device 230, and each electronic component shown in FIG. A power switch 181 and a RAM clear switch 182 are provided.
Here, as described above, the power supplied from the power supply device 58 in the pachinko machine 1 during normal time (when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1) is referred to as a main power supply, and the main power supply includes a game control device 54. The power supply currently supplied to each apparatus of the machine 1, an electronic device, a sensor, etc. is pointed out.
In addition to the main power supply, the power supply device 58 includes the RAM 113 of the game control device 54, the RAM 233 of the payout control device 230, and the front frame when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (that is, when the main power supply is cut off). A backup power supply for supplying to the open switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is also provided.
Therefore, the power supply device 58 has a backup power supply unit (corresponding to backup power supply means), and the backup power supply unit is composed of a large capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the RAM 113 of the game control device 54, the RAM 233 of the payout control device 230, etc., and to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126, and the RAM 113, RAM 233, etc. (Including the nighttime monitoring switch 126) is stored.
The power switch 181 turns on / off the AC power supplied to the power supply device 58 and is used for starting and stopping the power supply device 58. The RAM clear switch 182 initializes the RAM 113 inside the game control device 54, the RAM 233 of the payout control device 230, and the like.

(Operation display device)
Next, details of the operation display device 7 will be described.
As described above, the operation display device 7 is connected to the effect control device 53 via the switching circuit 320 and is also connected to the card unit 15 via the switching circuit 320 and the second card unit connection terminal plate 52B sequentially. .
FIG. 7A shows the operation display device 7.
The operation display device 7 is composed of a liquid crystal display with a touch panel that can be operated by a player touching the touch panel with a finger, and displays a ball rental rate on the operation display device 7 as shown in FIG. A ball rental rate indicator 301, a remaining amount indicator 302 for displaying the remaining amount of a prepaid card (for example, a visitor card), a ball rental button 303, a return button 304, a store / replay button 305, A message / operation area 306 and a switching button 307 are arranged.

The ball lending rate indicator 301 displays a ball lending rate at the time of lending a game ball from the card unit 15. To do. In addition, when lending a ball for 1 yen, the display “ball lending: 1 yen per ball” is displayed. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to lend a ball at a rate of 4 yen per ball or 1 yen per ball.
The remaining amount display unit 302 displays the remaining amount of a prepaid card (for example, a visitor card). At this time, the remaining amount is displayed in units of 1 yen, for example, the remaining amount “5000 yen”.
The ball lending button 303 is operated when the player desires a predetermined number of ball lending.

The return button 304 is operated when the player simply returns a game card (including a prepaid card (for example, a visitor card)) before the game, and when the card is returned after settlement (game end) (that is, the game is finished). , Used for checkout). Therefore, in this embodiment, no checkout button is arranged.
In the case of adjusting the number of held balls, in this embodiment, it is started by operating the return button 304.
That is, when the player presses the return button 304, the card unit 15 transmits a payment instruction to the payout control device 230 in order to start the payment. When the payout control device 230 receives the settlement instruction, it sends the total number of balls (number of balls held + number of balls counted) to the card unit 15, and the card unit 15 records the total number of balls data on the game card, Process to discharge. Next, when the card unit 15 finishes recording the total number-of-balls data for the game card, the card unit 15 transmits the fact to the payout control device 230, and the payout control device 230 stores (for example, stores it in a predetermined area of the RAM 233). Clear the data such as the number of balls you have, the number of balls you are counting, etc., the payment is completed, and the game card is returned. The card unit 15 records the total number of balls data on the game card, but the payout control device 230 stores data such as the number of balls held and the number of balls counted until the game card is recorded. Therefore, the management of the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls is not transferred to the card unit 15.

Next, the store / replay button 305 stores a ball acquired by the player using a unique membership card called a house card, or stores a ball stored on the member card. In addition to the use of replaying, it is operated when using the number of balls that have moved to the table (which is handled in the same way as the number of stored balls).
The message / operation area 306 is used to display the number of stored balls, the number of balls held and the number of counted balls, in addition to the member having a membership card inputting a password or displaying a business message at the time of storing / replaying. It is a place to display details. In addition, the message / operation area unit 306 also displays the number of ball lending.
Further, the message / operation area unit 306 is configured to be able to display the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls in an analog manner (analog display using a figure that looks like a ball box) (details will be described later in a specific example). .

Further, the message / operation area unit 306 also displays information related to effects from the effect control device 53 (game machine) and information such as characters appearing on the display device 41.
Although the operation display device 7 (including the message / operation area unit 306) is arranged in the pachinko machine 1, ball rental, storage, settlement (however, recording processing to the card as described above), replay Play, return of game cards, and the like are controlled and managed by the card unit 15. On the other hand, with regard to the control / production of information related to the production from the production control device 53 (game machine) in the operation display device 7 (including the message / operation area unit 306) and information such as characters appearing on the display device 41, production control is performed. This configuration is controlled and managed by the device 53 (game machine).

  A switch button 307 (second effect operation unit) performs an operation of switching a source of information to be displayed on the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7. The operation display device 7 is switched to the switching circuit 320 and the second card. A route for connecting to the card unit 15 sequentially through the unit connection terminal board 52B (“card unit route” as will be described later), and the operation display device 7 to the effect control device 53 (game machine) via the switching circuit 320. Operated (touched) by the player in order to switch to one of the connected routes (“gaming machine route” as will be described later).

Next, a case controlled and managed by the card unit 15 will be described. For example, at the start of a game, if a player inserts a 1000 yen banknote into the cash insertion slot 202 of the card unit 15, the amount of the inserted banknote is calculated. The corresponding ball lending number is displayed in the message / operation area unit 306. When the player presses the ball lending button 303, the ball lending addition processing is performed within the range of the displayed ball lending number, and the number of balls increased as a result of this ball lending addition processing is displayed on the ball number display 40. Is displayed. For example, when the ball lending button 303 is pressed once, the ball lending is performed five times, the number of balls held is increased by 125, for example, and the number of balls held displayed on the ball holding number display 40 is also increased by 125.
In this case, operation information indicating that the ball lending button 303 has been pressed is sent from the operation display device 7 to the card unit 15 via the switching circuit 320 and the second card unit connection terminal plate 52B, and from the card unit 15 to the gaming machine (that is, , A game lending instruction (addition instruction to the number of balls held) is given to the game control device 54).

  On the other hand, if the player wishes to lend a ball within the range of the frequency of a game card (including a prepaid card (eg, a visitor card)), the player inserts the game card into the card slot 201 of the card unit 15. The remaining number of balls remaining in the game card is displayed in the message / operation area 306. Next, when the player operates the ball lending button 303 of the message / operation area unit 306, the ball lending (number of balls held) within a range of the valuable value information (ball lending number) recorded on the game card. And the number of balls lent out is displayed on the number-of-balls display 40. In this case, not only the pure ball lending number is displayed on the ball holding number display 40 but the ball lending number is added to the previous ball holding number so that the total number of balls is displayed. 40. Therefore, when the previous number of balls held = 0, only the number of balls lent is displayed on the number-of-balls display 40.

  Further, when the player desires to use the stored ball within the range of the number of stored balls recorded in the game card, the player inserts the game card into the card insertion slot 201 of the card unit 15, and the message / operation area section When the member's password is entered on the screen of 306, the number of stored balls remaining in the game card is displayed in the message / operation area 306. Next, when the player operates the storage / replay button 305 of the message / operation area 306, within the range of the number of stored balls recorded on the game card, Increase) and the number of used balls is displayed on the number-of-balls display 40. In this case, the total number of balls is displayed on the number-of-balls display 40 so that the number of used balls from the stored ball is added to the previous number of balls.

Further, when the game is ended, the settlement process is performed by touching the return button 304, and the game card in which the total number of balls is recorded is ejected from the card unit 15. Therefore, there is no settlement switch arrangement.
The player holds the discharged game card and inserts it into the card settlement machine 83, so that the card settlement machine 83 settles it (for example, a prize exchange receipt is ejected and can be exchanged for a prize at the hall counter).
When the break switch 312 is pressed, the game card is ejected and the gaming machine is in a state where it cannot play. At this time, the break switch effective LED built in the break switch 312 is turned on to notify that a break is possible.

When the game ball is won, the payout control device 230 electronically increases the number of balls held by the player (that is, the number of balls held in the game value storage means by performing the ball addition processing). And the like are displayed on the number-of-balls display 40.
Further, as shown in FIG. 6, the operation display device 7 described above is connected to the card unit 15 via the switching circuit 320 and the second card unit connection terminal plate 52 </ b> B, and is arranged on the operation display device 7. The operation signal of the lending button 303 is sent to the card unit 15 via the switching circuit 320 and the second card unit connection terminal plate 52B, and the operation display device 7 receives the card via the second card unit connection terminal plate 52B and the switching circuit 320. Based on the signal output from the unit 15, the remaining amount of the prepaid card is displayed.
On the other hand, the first card unit connection terminal plate 52A is a board mainly for wiring connection between the pachinko machine 1 side and the card unit 15 side. At 1, the control is made so that the game ball cannot be fired.

In this example, the operation display device 7 is provided with a return button 304 for performing a game card return operation. The return button 304 is operated when the player desires to return the game card before starting the game, and is operated when the card is returned after settlement (game end) as described above. As an example of the former, for example, a game card is purchased, and the game card is inserted into the card unit 15 of a certain gaming machine, but the player changes his mind and moves to another table.
Note that when the game is started, a control may be performed to turn off the return button 304 from the screen of the operation display device 7.
Further, although different from the first embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which a settlement switch is arranged, and if the settlement switch is pressed, the total number of balls is transferred to the game card and the game card is ejected by the return button 304.

As shown in FIG. 6, the operation display device 7 is connected to the card unit 15 via the switching circuit 320 and the second card unit connection terminal plate 52B. The operation display device 7 is connected to the second card unit connection terminal plate. Based on the control signal output from the card unit 15 via the switch 52B and the switching circuit 320, the message / operation area 306 is controlled to display details of the number of balls and an analog display (ball box display). Control for counting the number of balls that have moved from the number of balls held in response to the operation of the counting switch 311 under the control of the payout control device 230, and displaying analog information (ballbox display), display at the time of payment Also controls.
Further, the card unit 15 outputs control signals necessary for display on the operation display device 7, ball lending, storage and the like to the operation display device 7, and the operation display device 7 performs various displays based on the control signals from the card unit 15. It responds to the operation of various screen configurations and buttons necessary for lending, ball lending and storage.
Here, the card unit 15 constitutes game value management means, return operation means, settlement means, switching control means, and display mode change control means. The operation display device 7 constitutes a second display device managed by the card unit, and constitutes a second game value display means for displaying the game value of the player by the management of the card unit 15, and further includes a second game value display means. The production operation unit is configured. The operation display device 7 constitutes a third display device that manages the card unit 15 that can display the number of balls and details of the counting balls.
The counting switch 311 constitutes a counting operation means capable of operating the counting means by a player's operation. The return button 304 constitutes a return operation means capable of operating the operation of returning the game value storage medium from the card unit by the player's operation.

(Switching circuit)
Next, a detailed configuration of the switching circuit 320 (switching means) will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 7B is a block configuration diagram of the switching circuit 320. In FIG. 7B, the switching circuit 320 includes an input / output interface 321, a determination circuit 322, a display switching circuit 323, and a touch information switching circuit 324. Since the description is complicated in FIG. 7B, the flow of data, information, and signals is described with the second card unit connection terminal plate 52B omitted.
The input / output interface 321 is an interface circuit that performs input / output processing of data (for example, display data), information, and signals. The determination circuit 322 determines whether or not there is a priority signal from the gaming machine. If there is a priority signal, the operation display device 7 is transmitted to and received from the gaming machine so that information from the gaming machine is displayed on the operation display device 7. It is determined to switch to the route, and this is transmitted to the display switching circuit 323. Here, the gaming machine refers to a circuit on the gaming machine side, for example, the production control device 53 (hereinafter the same).
In the normal mode (initial state), data and information from the card unit 15 are output to the operation display device 7, and information (for example, touch information) from the operation display device 7 is output to the card unit 15. The determination circuit 322 and the display switching circuit 323 operate according to this normal mode.

The display switching circuit 323 switches between sending data and information from the gaming machine or sending data and information from the card unit 15 to the operation display device 7 according to an instruction from the determination circuit 322, and displays the operation display device 7. Switching control is performed. As described above, in the normal mode (initial state), the display switching circuit 323 switches the display route to the transmission / reception route in which data and information from the card unit 15 are output to the operation display device 7.
The touch information switching circuit 324 switches the connection route of the operation display device 7 to the transmission / reception route of either the card unit 15 or the gaming machine according to the operation state of various buttons of the touch panel type of the operation display device 7. For example, when the player touches the switching button 307 of the operation display device 7, switching information is output from the operation display device 7 to the switching circuit 320 in accordance with this, and the internal touch information switching circuit 324 is switched by the switching circuit 320. Based on the above, the connection route of the operation display device 7 is switched to the transmission / reception route of either the card unit 15 or the gaming machine. In this case, the previous connection route (that is, the previous route) is changed and switched to another connection route. For example, in the case where the operation display device 7 has been connected to the card unit 15 until now, when the switching information is generated by touching the switch button 307, the operation display device 7 is connected to the gaming machine. It will switch to the root.

Here, since the connection route of the operation display device 7 will be complicated if it is described in detail every time, it is defined so that it can be expressed as follows.
(A) Route for Connecting Operation Display Device 7 to Card Unit 15 This route is a route for connecting operation display device 7 to card unit 15 through switching circuit 320 and second card unit connection terminal plate 52B in this order.
Hereinafter, this route is referred to as a “card unit route”.
(B) Route for Connecting Operation Display Device 7 to Game Machine This route is a route for connecting operation display device 7 to effect control device 53 (game machine) via switching circuit 320.
Hereinafter, this route is referred to as a “gaming machine route”.

Next, the overall flow of data, information, and signals including the switching circuit 320 will be described as follows. In FIG. 7B, typical data and signal flows are indicated by arrows.
First, in the normal mode (initial state), display data and information from the card unit 15 are output to the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 320, and touch information and switching information are switched from the operation display device 7. Input to the circuit 320, and touch information is output from the switching circuit 320 to the card unit 15. In this normal mode, information output from the card unit 15 is displayed in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7. Further, when the player touches various buttons on the operation display device 7 except the switching button 307, the touch information is output to the card unit 15 via the switching circuit 320, and the card unit 15 responds to the touch information. Take control.

Next, when the player touches the switching button 307 of the operation display device 7, switching information is output from the operation display device 7 to the switching circuit 320 according to this, and the internal touch information switching circuit 324 switches in the switching circuit 320. Based on the information, the connection route of the operation display device 7 is switched from the card unit 15 to the transmission / reception route of the gaming machine (that is, the gaming machine route). As a result, the previous connection route (that is, the previous route) is changed to switch to another connection route. In this case, the card unit route is switched to the gaming machine route.
When the game machine route is switched, the display data is output from the effect control device 53 to the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 320, and the output output from the effect control device 53 to the message / operation area unit 306 in the operation display device 7. Information to be displayed. Further, when the player touches various buttons on the operation display device 7 excluding the switching button 307, the touch information is output to the effect control device 53 via the switching circuit 320, and the effect control device 53 converts the touch information into touch information. Perform the appropriate control.
On the other hand, display data is output from the effect control device 53 to the display device 41, and the display device 41 performs display for the effect based on the display data from the effect control device 53.

In addition, a priority signal is output from the effect control device 53 to the switching circuit 320, and the priority signal is output when switching preferentially to the gaming machine route during a required effect or the like. However, even when gaming machines are prioritized (when priority signals are output and switching to gaming machine routes preferentially), when switching information (for example, touch information) occurs, a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) ) And the operation display device 7 transmits / receives data to / from the card unit 15.
Although the operation display for ball rental based on information from the card unit 15 and the operation display for presentation of the gaming machine based on information from the gaming machine are performed by the same operation display device 7, the card unit is switched by the switching circuit 320. 15 and information on the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) are not mixed. Here, the gaming machine refers to a circuit on the gaming machine side, for example, the effect control device 53. Further, the card unit 15 and the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) are not connected via the switching circuit 320. Furthermore, although the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) is connected to the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 320, the input / output of signals, information, etc. between the gaming machine and the operation display device 7 is limited to production only. Is done.

(Switch power supply delay circuit)
Next, the detailed configuration of the switch power supply delay circuit 541 (referred to as SW power supply delay circuit in FIG. 8) will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 8, a switch power supply delay circuit 541 is provided inside the payout control device 230, and the switch power supply delay circuit 541 includes a crystal oscillator 542, a counter 543, a shift register 544, and a relay 545.
The crystal oscillator 542 generates an oscillation signal having a predetermined cycle (predetermined frequency), and the counter 543 divides the oscillation signal of the predetermined frequency generated by the crystal oscillator 542 to a moderately low frequency that is constant and easy to use by clock division. This is input to the shift register 544. The shift register 544 is configured to function as a delay circuit.

The main power supplied from the power supply device 58 to the payout control device 230 is input as input data (main power of 5V power supply) to the shift register 544 inside the payout control device 230, and the shift register 544 receives the counter 543. Output signal (a signal with a constant low frequency divided by a clock) is used as a shift pulse, and the input data (main power supply of 5V power supply) is shifted (delayed) for a certain period of time to operate. . Here, for example, the shift register 544 delays input data (main power source of 5 V power supply) for 5 seconds and outputs the delayed data to the relay 545 as a signal for on / off control. Specifically, the shift register 544 delays the input data (the main power source of the 5V power supply) for 5 seconds, and outputs the off control signal to the relay 545 during the delay, and the on control signal is relayed to the relay 545 after 5 seconds. Output to.
The main power source of 5V power is applied to the relay 545, and the relay 545 is normally off (while the off control signal is input), but when the on control signal is input from the shift register 544, The main power of 5V power supply is supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 by turning on.

Although main power can be supplied from the payout control device 230 to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126, as described above, the main power is supplied via the switch power supply delay circuit 541. Supply of the main power to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is started after a delay of a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the main power supply to the control device 230. The front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 outputs the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is cut off to the outside after the supply of the main power supply is started.
On the other hand, when the main power is cut off, such as at a night in a game store, the backup power (5 VBB) from the power supply 58 is supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 via the payout controller 230. The frame opening information of the front frame 4 is held. The backup power supply (5VBB) does not pass through the switch power supply delay circuit 541, but is always supplied from the power supply device 58 to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 via the payout control device 230. ing.
Further, the output signal of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 (the frame opening information of the front frame 4: that is, abnormality detection information) is output to the payout control device 230, and the payout control device 230 outputs the frame opening information of the front frame 4. Is received by the internal input port 546 and output to the CPU 231. The CPU 231 stores the frame opening information of the front frame 4 in the RAM 233 and then transmits it to the card unit 15 (details will be described later).

As described above, the switch power supply delay circuit 541 inputs the 5V power supply serving as the main power supply of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 to the shift register 544 at a constant clock, and the shift register 544 outputs a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). ) Just do a delay. Since the relay 545 is turned on by a 5V on control signal output from the shift register 544 that rises with a delay of a predetermined time, the main power supply 5V supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is also The start of supply of main power to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is delayed later than the CPU 231 and various ICs on the payout control device 230. Therefore, the timing at which the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 outputs the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is shut off to the outside is also greater than the start of the supply of the main power to the dispensing control device 230. Become slow.
The backup power is always supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126. The backup power is the same as that supplied to the RAM 233 of the payout control device 230, and the RAM 233 is also backed up in the same manner.
Here, the switch power supply delay circuit 541 constitutes a delay means.

It should be noted that the switch power supply delay circuit 541 is realized by delay means using, for example, a simple CR circuit (delay by CR time constant) without using the above-described components such as the crystal oscillator 542, the counter 543, the shift register 544, the relay 545, and the like. May be.
However, in the case of the delay due to the CR time constant, there is an advantage that the cost can be reduced, but it is also possible that the error is large. Therefore, in the first embodiment, for example, the switch power supply delay circuit 541 is realized by a delay circuit using a logic IC. ing.
Therefore, in the first embodiment, the frame opening information of the front frame 4 from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is abnormality detection information, so it is taken in with an accurate delay and output to an external device with an accurate delay time. There are advantages that can be made.
The relay 545 may be a mechanical relay, but is not limited thereto, and may be, for example, a photo relay or other switching means.

(Batch display device)
Next, a detailed configuration of the collective display device 35 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 9A is an enlarged view of the collective display device 35. In FIG. 9A, the collective display device 35 includes a special figure 1 display 351, a special figure 2 display 352, a special figure 1 hold LED 353, a special figure 2 hold LED 354, a winning display LED 355, a universal figure LED 356, and a general figure hold LED 357. , A round display LED 358 and a status display LED 359, and these elements are integrally formed on the substrate of the collective display device 35.
The special figure 1 indicator 351 is composed of 7-segment LEDs, and displays the special figure 1 (including fluctuation display, stop state display, etc.). Various display modes are adopted depending on which segment is lit (or blinks) among the seven-segment LEDs. The various display modes are, for example, “outside” stop, “big hit” stop, “being fluctuated”, etc., for Special Figure 1.
Similarly, the special figure 2 indicator 352 is composed of 7-segment LEDs, and displays the special figure 2 (including a change display, a stop state display, etc.). Various display modes are adopted depending on which segment is lit (or blinks) among the seven-segment LEDs. The various display modes are, for example, “outside” stop, “big hit” stop, “being changed”, etc., for the special figure 2.

  Note that, as described above, the variable display game according to FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 is that when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 25 and a special figure start winning (first start winning) occurs, When the first variation display game by the variation display of the decoration special figure 1 is performed on the display device 41 and the game ball enters the second start prize opening 26, a special figure start prize (second start prize) occurs. The display device 41 performs the second variation display game based on the variation display of the decoration special figure 2, but displays the aspects of the variable display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 instead of the decoration special figure. These are the special figure 1 display 351 and the special figure 2 display 352 arranged in the collective display device 35.

The special figure 1 hold LED 353 displays the number of holds in the special figure 1, and the reserved number in the special figure 1 is a special figure start prize (first start prize) when the game ball enters the first start prize opening 25. ) Is the number of holds stored with an upper limit of four.
Similarly, the special figure 2 hold LED 354 displays the hold number of the special figure 2, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is the special figure start prize (first figure) when the game ball enters the second start prize opening 26. This is the number of suspensions stored with an upper limit of 4 when a (2 start winning) occurs.
As shown in FIG. 9C, the special figure 1 hold LED 353 and the special figure 2 hold LED 354 are configured to display 1 to 4 hold numbers with three LEDs in this example for common use. Yes. That is, as shown in FIG. 9C, 1 to 4 hold numbers are displayed in the following manner.
-Hold number = 1: One LED at the left end is lit-Hold number = 2: One second LED from the left end is lit-Hold number = 3: One third LED from the left end is lit-Hold number = 4 : All three LEDs are lit. Note that the LEDs may not be lit but may be blinking.

The winning display LED 355 displays the number of winning balls corresponding to winning in the winning opening, and corresponds to a winning display device. Here, winning a prize opening means all winning a prize holes with a winning ball discharge (a process of actually paying out a ball or adding to the number of balls in the case of an enclosed ball type). 25, 26, the big winning opening 27a of the variable winning apparatus 27, and the general winning openings 28-31.
In the case of the present embodiment, since the pachinko machine 1 is an enclosed ball type gaming machine, the winning ball corresponding to the winning at the winning opening is added to the number of balls held. On the other hand, in a normal gaming machine, the winning ball corresponding to the winning at the winning opening is actually discharged (paid out) to the upper plate.

The number of winning balls associated with winning a prize is as follows.
・ Large winning opening 27a = 13 ・ Starting winning opening 25 = 3 ・ Starting winning opening 26 (Fuden) = 1 ・ General winning opening 28-31 = 10 The winning display LED 355 consists of two 7-segment LEDs, A 2-digit number can be displayed as the number of winning balls. The display time of the number of prize balls is as follows.
-Normal mode (normal gaming state) = 1 second (s)
(Small hits and medium hits are included in the normal mode)
・ Special mode (big hit, probability fluctuation, short time (under normal power support) = 0.5 seconds (s)
Note that the special mode is a concept indicating a state where there is a high possibility that a game ball will win continuously such as during a big hit.

The general-purpose LED 356 includes a single LED, and performs the normal-state display (including change display, stop state display, and the like). As the display mode, for example, “disconnect” stop = light-off, “hit” stop = light on, “during change” = flashing.
The multi-purpose hold LED 357 displays the number of general-purpose holds, and the general-purpose hold number indicates that when the game ball passes the general-purpose start gate 32, the general-purpose LED 356 of the collective display device 35 is activated. A normal figure state display is performed, and at the same time, a general figure change display game by a change display of the normal figure is performed on the display unit 41a as a decorative general figure state display. In some cases, this is the number of holds stored with an upper limit of four.
As shown in FIG. 9 (c), the common map hold LED 357 is composed of 1 to 4 LEDs with three LEDs for common use, as shown in FIG. 9 (c), similar to the above-described special map 1 hold LED 353 and special map 2 hold LED 354. It has a configuration that can display the number of holds on the map. In addition, the display mode of the usual number of holds is the same as the example of FIG. 9C, and detailed description is omitted.

The round display LED 358 displays the number of rounds when a big hit with the start winning in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 occurs and executes the big hit game. As shown in FIG. For this reason, in this example, four types of rounds can be displayed with four LEDs.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9B, three types of rounds are displayed in the following manner.
• ○ + (2) = 2 rounds displayed • ○ + (11) = 11 rounds displayed • ○ + (16) = 16 rounds displayed In the above, “◯” indicates lighting of one LED. Also, (2), (11), and (16) are the stickers on which the numbers (2), (11), and (16) are drawn on the surface of the main body of the collective display device 35 on the front side of the LEDs. In addition, the display corresponding to the number of rounds is performed by three LEDs. For example, a sheet may be used instead of the seal.

As a result, if the LED corresponding to the sticker (2) is lit, it can be easily understood that there are two rounds. Similarly, if the LED corresponding to the seal (11) is lit, it is known that the round is 11 rounds, and if the LED corresponding to the seal (16) is lit, it is understood that the round is 16 rounds. Become.
When two rounds of display are performed, one LED corresponding to ◯ and two LEDs corresponding to the sticker (2) are lit simultaneously. This is the same when displaying 11 rounds and 16 rounds, and one LED corresponding to ○ is turned on together. Also, in other round games, only one LED corresponding to ○ is lit. Each LED may be blinking instead of lighting.
Note that the round display LED 358 has four LEDs, one of which does not correspond to the seal, but the LED may be used as a spare. That is, when the number of rounds is four, four types of rounds can be expressed by lighting the four LEDs corresponding to the number of rounds.

Also, sticking the numbers (2), (11), and (16) on the main body surface of the collective display device 35 on the front side of the LED is due to the difference in the model of the pachinko machine 1 Since the number may change, the number of rounds can be changed as long as the seal is changed, so that such a flexible response is possible.
In addition, the performance indication of the model is also written on the seal. The performance display includes, for example, model name, jackpot probability (including a high probability at the time of probability change, a low probability at normal time), a probability change ratio, the maximum number of jackpots (the limit value of the number of jackpots), the number of winning balls, and the like. The performance display by the sticker may be described in a place different from the collective display device 35 (that is, the sticker may be pasted in another place).
The state display LED 359 displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and is composed of two LEDs. As the display of the gaming state, for example, “probability variation state” and “time-short state” are displayed by lighting (or blinking) each one LED.

F. Outline of Game Next, an outline of the game performed in the pachinko machine 1 of this example and the flow of the game will be described.
At the beginning of the game (or before the game), the customer is waiting (during the demonstration), and a command for instructing the display of the customer waiting screen is transmitted from the game controller 54 to the effect controller 53, On the display unit 41a of the display device 41, a customer waiting screen (moving image or still image) is displayed.
When the player inserts a game card, for example, into the card unit 15 and performs a ball lending operation with a predetermined unit frequency (presses the ball lending button 303 of the operation display device 7 once, for example), a predetermined number of balls (For example, 125) are added and displayed by the number-of-balls display 40 on the lower panel 6. At this time, the ball lending number data (valuable value information) of the game card is reduced by the predetermined number (for example, five degrees corresponding to 500 yen). Note that the number of balls possessed corresponds to the game value that is the profit of the player as described above, and the data on the number of balls possessed is stored in, for example, the RAM 233 (game value storage means) in the payout control device 230.

When the player operates the firing operation handle 11 with the above-mentioned number of possessed balls, the game ball at the launch position is driven into the game area 22 through the guide rail 21, and the game ball that has been shot is special. When the winning prize opening 25 or 26 in the figure is won (that is, when there is a special drawing start prize), the collective display device 35 displays the variation of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 and also displays the decorative special figure. A command for instructing a variable display is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53, and a display (for example, scrolling) on the display unit 41a is changed (for example, scrolled). A so-called fluctuation display game is performed, and a special figure fluctuation display game (hereinafter referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game) is performed. On the other hand, the sphere that has been removed without winning the prize flows into the out sphere inlet 23.
The ball that has fallen through the game area 22 becomes out or safe, passes through the game area 22 and then flows down to the game ball inlet 71 of the circulation device 55, is collected and circulated by the circulation device 55, and is again guided to the launch position. Will be. In this manner, the pachinko game is performed by circulating the enclosed game balls.

This inventive concept is shown as follows.
A predetermined number of game balls are encapsulated in the gaming machine main body, and it is possible to play the game by firing the enclosed game balls into the game area, and by the game balls launched into the game area Control means for increasing the game value, which is a player's profit, according to the game result, and collecting the game balls that have passed through the game area and guiding them to the launch position, thereby circulating and using the enclosed game balls It is a concept of an enclosed ball type gaming machine that performs a game.

Here, increasing the game value, which is the player's profit, according to the game result by the game ball launched into the game area, in other words, whether the game result is in a predetermined profit state or other state In the case of a predetermined profit state, the player's profit (game value) is increased corresponding to a predetermined number of prize balls. For example, the game ball becomes safe or out If it is determined that it is safe, for example, the number of balls held by the player is increased. “Safe” corresponds to a ball entering a winning opening (including general winning openings 28 to 31 and start winning openings 25, 26, etc.).
In addition, the game value (for example, the number of possessed balls) that is the profit of the player in accordance with the game result is increased by adding a prize ball to the number of retained balls based on the safe ball, Including special cases where a special game condition) occurs and the big prize opening is opened, and a lot of prize balls are added to the number of possessed balls by winning game balls in the big prize opening. This is equivalent to increasing the game value. Note that the gaming value that is the profit of the player is not necessarily limited to the number of balls corresponding to the number of game balls, and the number of points may be used instead of the number of balls held. However, in this example, unless otherwise indicated, the embodiment is described in the form of using the number of possessed balls corresponding to the number of game balls as the game value.
Further, the game value (the number of possessed balls or the number of points) is added according to the game result as described above, while being subtracted by the number of game balls fired. For example, when the number of possessed balls corresponding to the number of game balls is used as the game value, the number of possessed balls is decremented by “1” every time the game ball is launched.

And, if the stop result mode of the above-mentioned special figure fluctuation display game (a combination of special figures derived by the fluctuation display) is a special result aspect (for example, “3, 3, 3”, etc.), it is a big hit. A privilege to be called is given to the player. In terms of control, for example, a value such as a big hit random number is extracted and stored on the condition that there has been a start prize, and the extracted and stored random number value is compared with a predetermined determination value at the time of determination. Based on the comparison determination result, whether or not to make a big hit is determined in advance, and the variable display game is started in response to this determination.
Further, if the stop result mode of the variable display game is a specific mode of the special result mode (for example, “7, 7, 7”), it will be the big hit and after the big hit game (a special prize described later) After the period), the game state shifts from the normal mode to the probability change mode. In this probability variation mode, control is performed to increase the probability that the special figure will be a big hit (hereinafter referred to as the special figure big hit probability). In some cases, the above-described time-short state control is also performed.

  When the jackpot is reached and the jackpot state is reached, a fanfare period (a period in which an output of a sound effect that produces a jackpot is executed) is passed, and the jackpot of the variable prize winning device 27 is set for a predetermined time (for example, In the range not exceeding 30 seconds), for example, an opening operation (a jackpot round) that is temporarily opened for a period of up to 10 winnings is performed. This release operation is repeated for a specified number of rounds. In this big hit state, a command for instructing display of a big hit screen for directing the big hit state or informing the player of the number of big hit rounds is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53 for display. In the part 41a, such a big hit display is executed.

The period in which the jackpot is in effect (the fanfare period, the period of the jackpot round where the jackpot is open, the interval period between the jackpot round and the next jackpot round, and the ending period) are the special prize period. It corresponds to.
In addition, as the number of rounds of the big hit, for example, a big hit of 15 rounds is usually the main big hit, but a configuration that generates a 16R big hit as a premier or other configurations may be used. Further, there may be a two-round big hit or the like as a so-called surprise (a sudden probability change in which the big hit probability changes via a big hit with few balls).

Further, when a game ball is further won in the start winning opening 25 or 26 during the special figure fluctuation display game or the big hit, the special section start memory is displayed on the display unit 41a or the like, for example, up to four. After the special figure fluctuation display game or the big hit state is stored, the special figure fluctuation display game is repeated or returned to the customer waiting state based on the start-up memory.
That is, if the variable display game ends with a big hit, the game shifts to a big hit state. If the variable display game ends with a start and there is a start memory, the variable display game is executed again. If the big hit ends and there is a start memory, the variable display game is executed again. If the big hit ends and there is no start memory, the flow returns to the customer wait state.

  In this embodiment, for example, two types of special chart start memory (special map start memory) are displayed (special figure 1 hold display and special figure 2 hold display). A variation display game (a first variation display game and a second variation display game) is executed. That is, when a special figure start prize (first start prize) due to the game ball entering the first start prize opening 25 occurs, the display device 41 plays the first variation display game by the variation display of the special figure 1. When a game ball wins the first start winning opening 25 during any special figure variation display game or the like, one first start memory (start memory corresponding to the special figure 1 hold display) is stored. On the other hand, the first variation display game by the variation display of the special figure 1 is performed on the display device 41 after the special figure fluctuation display game is finished.

Further, when a special figure start prize (second start prize) due to the game ball entering the second start prize opening 26 is generated, the display device 41 plays the second variation display game by the variation display of the special figure 2. When a game ball wins the second start winning opening 26 during any of the special figure variation display games, one second start memory (start memory corresponding to the special figure 2 hold display) is stored. On the other hand, the second variation display game by the variation display of the special figure 2 is performed on the display device 41 after the above special figure fluctuation display game is finished. When both the first start memory and the second start memory are present, either the first variation display game or the second variation display game is executed first according to a preset rule. For example, a mode in which the second variable display game corresponding to the second start winning opening 26 is preferentially performed (that is, a mode in which the second start memory is preferentially consumed) or two types of variable display games are alternately displayed. There may be a mode to be performed.
On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the usual figure starting gate 32 during the game, the aforementioned usual figure variation display game is performed. Since this normal map display game has been described above, the description thereof is omitted here.

Here, when it is determined that the game ball is safe and the number of balls held by the player is increased, the ball enters the winning port (including the general winning ports 28 to 31 and the starting winning ports 25, 26, etc.). In addition, when a big hit occurs and shifts to the big win state, the bonus winning hole 27a of the variable winning device 27 is temporarily within a range not exceeding a specified time (for example, 30 seconds), for example, for a period up to ten winnings. The jackpot round to be released is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds, and the player wins a large number of winnings.
In this case, all the winning balls associated with winning are displayed by the winning display LED 355 in the collective display device 35. Here, winning is all winning winnings with winning ball discharge (actually paying out balls or adding to the number of balls in the case of an enclosed ball type). , 26, the large winning port 27a of the variable winning device 27, and the general winning ports 28 to 31 correspond. Even if a game ball wins in any of these winning holes, the winning display LED 355 consisting of two 7-segment LEDs is immediately displayed for a predetermined time (normal mode is 1 second, special mode is 0.5 second). Therefore, the player can easily know where on the board (game board 20) the prize is won and how many prize balls are obtained. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not lower the interest of the game.

Further, the number of balls possessed by the player (game value) is displayed on the number-of-balls display 40 (game value display means) which displays the number of balls possessed by the player (game value) under the management of the payout control device 230 (game machine side). ) And the message / operation area unit 306 (second game value display means) of the operation display device 7 that displays the number of players' balls (game value) under the management of the card unit 15. .
In this case, various information (various information including the number of balls) of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) is sent periodically (for example, every 400 ms) from the payout control device 230 to the card unit 15. In the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 under the management of the card unit 15, the player's number of balls (game value) can also be displayed.
The number of balls held by the player is always digitally displayed on the number-of-balls display 40. Thereby, the player can grasp the number of balls held. However, since the number-of-balls indicator 41 is small, it is not easy to intuitively grasp the number of balls when the number of balls is increased.

  On the other hand, the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7 is a liquid crystal display larger than the number-of-balls display 40, and the number of balls held in the message / operation area unit 306 is displayed in an analog form in a figure that looks like a ball box. . For example, if the number of balls held by the player increases as the big hits continue, the figure that looks like a ball box is displayed as an analog such as two boxes, three boxes,. As a result, when the player has a large number of balls, the number of balls held in the message / operation area 306 is displayed in an analogy with a shape that looks like a ball box. Can be done.

Next, when the player wants to count the number of balls to be counted, that is, in the case of a game machine of a method of paying out with real balls, the acquired number of balls is outside the gaming machine. If you want to do the same thing electronically as the work of physically moving to the ball box, you can do it as follows.
When the player's number of balls is displayed on the number-of-balls display 40, the counting switch 311 disposed on the lower panel 6 of the pachinko machine 1 is pressed to sequentially count the number of balls to be counted. The counted number of possessed balls becomes the counted number of balls, and is held and managed by the payout control device 230. However, the number of balls held and the number of counted balls are periodically sent from the payout control device 230 to the card unit 15 (for example, every 400 ms), whereby the operation display device 7 under the management of the card unit 15 On the screen of the message / operation area unit 306, a digital display (numerals) of the number of counting balls and an analog display (analog display using a figure that looks like a ball box) are displayed.
Similarly, the player's number of balls displayed on the number-of-balls display 40 is also displayed on the screen of the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 in an analog manner (analogue with a figure that looks like a ball box). Display) or an explanation of the number of balls held.
The data on the number of balls held and the number of balls counted are also sent from the payout control device 230 to the effect control device 53 via the game control device 54, and the upper part of the decorative ball display device 250 is controlled by the effect control device 53. Since decoration of the number of balls and the number of counting balls is performed using a large number of LEDs of the decorative ball display device 250a and the lower decoration ball display device 250b, the number of balls and the number of counting balls are particularly demonstrated while exhibiting decorativeness. The player can easily grasp it.

By seeing the digital display (number) or analog display (analog display with a figure that looks like a ball box) on the screen of the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7, how much the player has. It is easy to see if the number of balls has been changed to the number of balls counted. That is, in an example of a gaming machine that pays out with a real ball, it is the same as knowing how much the acquired number of possessed balls is physically transferred to a ball box outside the gaming machine.
In this way, if the counting switch 311 is pressed to count the number of balls, the counted number of balls is held and managed by the dispensing control device 230 as the counted number of balls, but from the dispensing control device 230 to the card unit 15. On the other hand, since the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls are sent regularly (for example, every 400 ms), the control of the card unit 15 causes “more count”, “game end”, When each button of “Continue game” appears and touch “End of game” from here, a message “Please press return button” appears, prompting the settlement, and then pressing the return button 304, the total The number of balls held (the number of balls held + the number of balls counted) is written (recorded) on the game card, and the settlement ends, and the game card is returned.

On the other hand, when the “continue game” button is touched, a message “start firing” appears, prompting the launch, and then the launch handle 11 can be operated to continue the game.
Further, when replaying is desired using the number of counting balls, by operating the counting ball use switch 314, for example, 100 pieces move to the number of holding balls per operation and can be fired.
In this way, even when a game is played with an enclosed ball type gaming machine, the player can count the number of balls with a feeling close to transferring the acquired game ball to the ball box without a sense of incongruity. Then, the counted number of balls counted from the number of held balls is held, and thereafter, settlement or replay can be easily performed.

Next, the following display control is performed on the screen of the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7.
Normally (initial state) is a route (card unit route) for connecting the operation display device 7 to the card unit 15, and data is transmitted and received between the operation display device 7 and the card unit 15. As a result, display data and information from the card unit 15 are output to the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 320, and information output from the card unit 15 is displayed in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7. Is displayed. Further, when the player touches various buttons on the operation display device 7 except the switching button 307, the touch information is output to the card unit 15 via the switching circuit 320, and the card unit 15 responds to the touch information. Take control. In this way, under the management and control of the card unit 15, processing such as ball lending, storage, settlement (recording processing to the card), replay, game card return, etc. is performed. Information necessary for payment, replay, game card return, etc. is displayed in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7.

On the other hand, when a priority signal is output from the effect control device 53 to the switching circuit 320 when necessary during the performance (for example, a battle mode when a reach occurs), the switching circuit 320 changes the card unit route to the gaming machine route. Based on the display data from the production control device 53, the information related to the production is preferentially displayed in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 based on the display data from the production control device 53.
Specifically, when the priority signal is output, for example, in the battle mode with the occurrence of reach, one of a plurality of items used by the character in the battle mode is displayed to the player in the message / operation area unit 306. In this case, a screen to be selected is displayed, and an effect is displayed so that the player can select it with a touch button on the screen. In some cases, the player may select a favorite song during the big hit.
Even if the priority signal is output to the switching circuit 320, when the player touches the switching button 307 of the operation display device 7, the switching information is changed from the operation display device 7 to the switching circuit 320. In the switching circuit 320, the internal touch information switching circuit 324 operates based on the switching information and switches the connection route of the operation display device 7 from the gaming machine route to the card unit route for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). Thereby, processing based on the control of the card unit 15 (for example, ball lending during the game) is performed.

  Further, when the operation display device 7 is in the card unit route in the normal mode and the processing such as ball lending, storage, settlement, and replay is possible under the control of the card unit 15, the player operates When the switching button 307 of the display device 7 is touched, switching information is output from the operation display device 7 to the switching circuit 320 accordingly, and the touch information switching circuit 324 inside the switching circuit 320 operates based on the switching information and operates. The connection route of the display device 7 is switched from the card unit route to the gaming machine route. Thereby, processing based on the control of the effect control device 53 on the gaming machine side is performed. Specifically, based on display data from the effect control device 53, for example, a model name, a description of a game, and the like are displayed in the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7.

As described above, the operation display device 7 is normally a card unit route. Under the management and control of the card unit 15, ball rental, storage, payment (recording processing to a card), replay, return of a game card, etc. The necessary information is displayed on the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7, but it is prioritized when it is necessary during production (for example, the battle mode when a reach occurs). Based on the signal, the card unit route is preferentially switched to the gaming machine route, and information related to the effect is preferentially displayed in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7.
However, even if the priority signal is generated, if the player touches the switch button 307, the game machine route is switched to the card unit route for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), for example, ball rental or replay during the game. Is possible.
Therefore, the operation display device can display information related to the production (for example, information on item selection, model name, game description, etc. in the battle mode with the occurrence of reach) without affecting ball lending or replay. 7 can be displayed on the message / operation area 306, and it is easy for the player to understand and can perform various effects.

In the present embodiment, a front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is provided, and the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is a sensor for detecting that the front frame 4 is opened. The configuration is such that the information that the opening of the frame 4 is detected is held even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off.
Therefore, especially when the game hall is closed at night and the front frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened, information (for example, open ON data) that detects that the front frame 4 is opened is displayed at night. Also holds. Note that the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 can detect both the state in which the front frame 4 is opened and the state in which the front frame 4 is not opened. The detection signal of the night monitoring switch 126 is referred to as frame opening information.

  Next, when the pachinko machine 1 is activated by turning on the power (turning on the main power supply) the next morning, the frame opening information detected when the front frame 4 is opened at night is obtained from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126. When the payout control device 230 reads the output signal, the payout control device 230 takes in the output signal. However, the payout control device 230 prepares for startup from the time the main power is turned on (for example, prohibition of all interrupts, CPU It takes a certain amount of time to initialize peripheral circuits (including serial ports). When the frame opening information is input from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 to the payout control device 230 during the start-up preparation period, the frame opening information may not be captured.

Therefore, when the main power supplied from the power supply 58 is turned on, the main power is immediately supplied to the payout control device 230. However, the main power supply is predetermined for the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126. A switch power supply delay circuit 541 for delaying by a time (for example, 5 seconds) is provided, and the main power is supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the main power supply to the dispensing control device 230 is turned on. Supplied. The front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 outputs the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is cut off to the outside after the supply of the main power is started.
Thereby, after the start-up preparation period in the payout control device 230 elapses, the frame open information of the front frame open switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is output to the outside and input to the payout control device 230, and the payout control device. Then, the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored in the RAM 233 is transmitted to the card unit 15.
Therefore, since the frame opening information of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is taken into the dispensing control device 230 after the start-up preparation period of the dispensing control device 230 elapses, there is a risk that the frame opening information cannot be taken in. The frame opening information can be surely captured and security against fraud is improved.

On the other hand, when the store clerk of the game store turns on the RAM clear switch 182 to return the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state in preparation for opening the store, the RAM 113 in the game control device 54, the RAM 233 in the payout control device 230, etc. are initialized. Will be converted.
In this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch 182 is turned on, the RAM 233 in the payout control device 230 is initialized and cleared, and then the frame of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is displayed. The release information is taken into the payout control device 230 and stored in the RAM 233. Thereafter, the frame opening information stored in the RAM 233 is transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the card unit 15. Therefore, there is no problem that the frame opening information of the RAM 233 is erased by turning on the RAM clear switch 182.
The information stored in the RAM 233 is cleared only because the information before the frame opening information of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is taken into the payout control device 230 is used.
When the payout control device 230 receives the frame release information reception notification from the card unit 15, it transmits a frame release information transmission normal command to the game control device 54.

Further, in the payout control device 230, when the frame opening information of the front frame 4 is not transmitted to the card unit 15 (for example, when the reception of the frame opening information is not received from the card unit 15), the frame opening information is transmitted. An error flag is set, and a frame opening information transmission error command is transmitted to the game control device 54. When the frame opening information transmission error command is transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the game control device 54, the game control device 54 transmits a frame opening information transmission error command to the effect control board (effect control device 53). Thereby, in the production | presentation control apparatus 53, based on the frame open | release information transmission error command, control, such as displaying the error message which shows that the command regarding frame open | release information is not transmitted to the card unit 15, for example, is performed. Notify the store clerk.
Note that an abnormality signal may be output from the payout control device 230 to the error display LED 67 so that the error display LED 67 is lit (or flashes).
On the other hand, in the payout control device 230, when the frame opening information of the front frame 4 is transmitted to the card unit 15 (for example, when reception of the frame opening information is received from the card unit 15), the frame opening information transmission normal command Is transmitted to the game control device 54. When the frame opening information transmission normal command is transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the game control device 54, the game control device 54 transmits a frame opening information transmission normal command to the effect control board (effect control device 53).
The production control device 53 performs control such as displaying a message indicating that a command related to frame opening information has been transmitted to the card unit 15 on the display device 41 based on the frame opening information transmission normal command, and notifies the store clerk. May be.

Thus, at the night when the game hall is closed, for example, when a suspicious person opens the front frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 and attaches an illegal board or the like, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) The opening state of the front frame 4 is detected by 126, and the opening information is held even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off.
The next morning, when the main power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main power is supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 after a predetermined time delay from turning on the main power to the payout control device 230. After the delay time elapses, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 outputs the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is shut off to the outside. Next, when the payout control device 230 reads a detection signal (frame opening information) from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126, it is stored in the RAM 233, and the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored in the RAM 233 is stored in the card unit. 15, for example, the card unit 15 notifies the error, or outputs error information to the hall computer 86 (further, it may be possible not to lend the ball). Further, when the front frame 4 is illegally opened and the frame opening information is generated, the error state is displayed on the display device 41.
Accordingly, the store clerk looks at the error notification of the display device 41 and the card unit 15 to check the pachinko machine 1 and take appropriate measures for the attachment of, for example, an illegal substrate (for example, removal and normal inspection of the illegal substrate). ) And security against fraud can be improved.

Further, in this embodiment, the polishing control device 59 (including the polishing device 56) is not limited to the pachinko machine 1 being operated, and even when the store is closed and the power is turned off, the game control device 54 (main board) ) And information input (for example, input of information such as signal input, data input, command input, etc.) is not performed to the payout control device 230. That is, the polishing control device 59 (including the polishing device 56) is “sub-configured”. Therefore, by substituting it, there is a merit that the restriction on ROM capacity and the restriction on parts are relaxed.
When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the polishing device 56 operates to polish the game ball with a predetermined period when the power is turned on as a polishing period. While the game ball is being polished, the ball is stopped from firing and the game cannot be played.
Specifically, the payout control device 230 transmits a polishing start command to the game control device 54 at the start of polishing when the power is turned on, and when the game control device 54 receives the polishing start command from the payout control device 230, the effect control device 53 Send a polishing start command. When the production control device 53 receives the polishing start command from the game control device 54, the production control device 53 instructs the polishing control device 59 to start polishing, and displays on the screen of the display device 41 from reception of the polishing start command to reception of the polishing stop command. Control to do.
In response to a polishing instruction from the production control device 53, the polishing control device 59 performs processing necessary for polishing the encapsulated sphere, such as driving the polishing motor 70 and operating the switching solenoid 79S, for a predetermined period of time. Polishing is performed.
In the polishing process, the polishing motor 70 of the polishing device 56 is turned on and started by the control of the polishing control device 59, and the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 slides a part of the ball feed flow path 78 to polish the polishing guide port. 80a is opened, and the encapsulated sphere existing in the sensor flow path 77 and the ball feed flow path 78 is moved by gravity to the lower polishing inflow guiding path 80 through the polishing guiding opening 80a, and the polishing device 56 is passed through the polishing inflow guiding path 80. Lead to. Such an operation (that is, displacement: slide) of the switching solenoid 79S is referred to as switching the path of the enclosing sphere to the “polishing side”. That is, in this case, the encapsulated sphere circulates through the polishing device 56 and becomes a route for polishing.
On the other hand, an operation in which the switching solenoid 79S closes the polishing guide port 80a without sliding a part of the ball feed passage 78 is referred to as switching the path of the encapsulated sphere to the “normal side”. That is, in this case, the encapsulated ball does not circulate through the polishing device 56, passes through the game board 20 and flows into the circulator 55, and the ball feed for firing the ball through the sensor flow channel 77 and the ball feed flow channel 78. The ball sent to the device and sent to the launch position is launched toward the game area 22 along the rail 21 by the launch solenoid 173 of the launch device, and recovered again as an out ball (including a safe ball) or a foul ball. It becomes a normal encapsulated ball circulation route in which the route of flowing in from the game ball inlet 71 as a ball is repeatedly circulated.

When the switching solenoid 79S switches the path of the encapsulated sphere to the “polishing side”, the encapsulated sphere starts to flow into the polishing apparatus 56, and the inflowed sphere is lifted by the lifting screw 73 by the power of the polishing motor 70, And is discharged from the upper outlet 75 via the polishing outlet switch 76 and flows into the sensor flow path 77 again. Thereafter, during ball polishing, the encapsulated sphere is again guided to the polishing device 56 through the sensor flow path 77, the ball feed flow path 78, the polishing guide port 80a, and the polishing inflow guide path 80, and polishing is repeated. .
If the polishing outlet switch 76 does not detect the discharge of the sphere from the upper outlet 75 for a certain time or more, it is determined that there is an abnormality such as a clogging in the polishing device 56, and the polishing motor 70 of the polishing device 56 is prevented from continuing to rotate. .
Next, after the switching solenoid 79S switches the path of the encapsulated sphere to “polishing side”, when a predetermined time T1 elapses, the path of the encapsulated sphere is switched to “normal side”. Thereafter, when the predetermined time T2 further elapses and the predetermined time T3 elapses after the polishing outlet switch 76 is turned on, the driving of the polishing motor 70 is stopped. Furthermore, when receiving the polishing stop command, the effect control device 53 stops the display of the sphere displayed on the screen on the display device 41 during polishing.
When driving of the polishing motor 70 is stopped, the polishing motor 70 does not consume power. In addition, when the switching solenoid 79S switches the path of the enclosed sphere to the “normal side”, the polishing guide port 80a is closed by the valve body of the switching valve 79 (for example, the valve body is urged by a spring to polish the polishing guide port). The switching solenoid 79S does not consume power in this state.
Thus, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the path of the encapsulated sphere is switched to the “polishing side” for a predetermined time T1, and the encapsulated sphere is polished by the polishing device 56. Next, when the polishing of the encapsulated sphere is completed, the game is ready, and the encapsulated sphere is circulated without going through the polishing device 56 during the game.
In addition, the game control device 54 (main board) and the payout control device 230 simply issue a polishing start command and a polishing stop command to the effect control device 53, and under the control of the effect control device 53, the polishing control device 59 (polishing device). Therefore, the control burden on the game control device 54 (main board) and the payout control device 230 can be reduced, and the efficiency is improved.

Further, when the number of balls is generated during the game of the pachinko machine 1, the decoration with a large number of LEDs of the upper decorative ball display device 250a and the lower decorative ball display device 250b in the decorative ball display device 250 is performed.
For example, in the upper decorative ball display device 250a, when the number of balls held by the player is 100 or more, all LEDs are lit or moved and blinked, and when the number of balls held is 50 or less, half of all LEDs. The decoration is controlled so that is turned off.
Further, in the lower decorative ball display device 250b, for example, when the number of counted balls = 0, all the LEDs are turned off, and while counting the number of balls, the lower decorative ball display device 250a is imaged from the upper decorative ball display device 250a. The decoration is controlled so that the LED (that is, the LED of the count decoration unit 250c) is moved and blinked so that the sphere moves toward the sphere display device 250b. Then, the LED is turned on in order from the lower part of the lower decorative ball display device 250b that imagines a ball box in accordance with the number of counted balls, and the decoration control is performed so that the player can know the approximate number of counted balls by the number of lighted LEDs. Done.
In this way, since the decoration of the number of balls held and the number of counted balls is performed using a large number of LEDs in the decorative ball display device 250, the expression of the number of balls held and the number of counted balls close to the real ball is given to the player. can do. Therefore, the player can easily understand the number of balls held and the number of balls counted.

Further, when the number of balls held during the game of the pachinko machine 1 is generated, the number of balls held by the player is displayed on the ball number display 40. When the counting switch 311 is pressed, as described above, the number of balls held is counted and becomes the number of counted balls, which is displayed on the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 (for example, digital display of the number of counted balls) (Numerical value)) and analog display (analog display with a figure that looks like a ball box). When the number of counting balls is present, the counting ball display 313 is lit to notify.
In this state, when the player wants to return from the number of counted balls to the number of possessed balls, the player uses a counting ball use switch 314. That is, when the player desires to move the ball from the number of counting balls to the number of possessed balls, the counting ball use switch 314 is operated. When the number of counting balls is present, the counting ball indicator 313 is lit, so that the player can know. The counting ball use switch LED built in the counting ball use switch 314 is lit when the ball can move from the counting ball number to the holding ball number, so that the player also has the counting ball number. I understand that. Note that the case of returning from the counted number of balls to the number of balls held corresponds to the concept of moving a ball from a so-called ball box to an upper plate.
When the counting ball use switch 314 is operated once, a predetermined amount (for example, 100 balls) of the counting ball moves to the number of holding balls. Thereby, the player can play again using the number of balls moved. The movement from the counted number of balls to the number of possessed balls is displayed on the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 (details will be described later).

Further, the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) includes a ball number display 40 as a first display device capable of displaying the number of balls held, and a counting ball display 313 as a second display device capable of simply displaying a counting ball. The card unit 15 is capable of displaying details of the number of balls held and counting balls, and is provided with an operation display device 7 as a third display device that is managed by the card unit 15 to give the player the number of balls held, etc. Display information of.
Here, the number of balls held is digitally displayed on the number-of-balls display 40 under the control of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1), and the presence / absence of counting balls is simply displayed on the counting ball display 313. On the other hand, the number of balls and the details of the counting balls are displayed by the control on the card unit 15 side. Therefore, when informing the player of the number of balls possessed and the counting balls, the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) only displays the number of possessing balls and the counting balls simply by digital display or simple display, and does not perform detailed display. Therefore, the control burden of the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230 is reduced, and the efficiency is high.
In addition, the player can grasp the number of balls possessed and the number of counted balls with the first to third devices, which is convenient and easy to understand.

G. Operation of Control System Next, the control contents of the game control device 54 will be described with reference to FIGS.
[Main processing of game control device]
First, the main process of the game control device 54 will be described with reference to FIGS.
This main process is started based on the fact that the CPU 111 is forcibly reset. That is, when the power switch 181 of the power supply 58 that supplies power to the game control device 54 is turned on, a reset signal is sent from the power supply 58 at a predetermined timing (during a predetermined reset period when the power is turned on). When the reset terminal of the CPU 111 is turned on by being input to the control device 54 and this reset signal is subsequently released, the CPU 111 is activated. Similarly, when the power is restored from a power failure, the CPU 111 is activated after the reset signal is released and then released. Further, when the operator wants to initialize the RAM 113 and the like of the game control device 54, it is necessary to turn on the power switch 181 while turning on the RAM clear switch 182 (initialization switch) of the power supply device 58. There is. Note that the RAM 113 is represented as RWM in FIG.

When the CPU 111 is started, first, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are prohibited, the CPU peripheral circuit (including the serial port) built in the CPU 111 is initialized, and access to the RAM 113 is permitted. An off signal (a signal corresponding to a binary signal “0”) is output to all output ports (steps S1 to S4).
Since each output port is turned off (reset) by the reset signal, it is not always necessary to output the off signal to each output port in software, but step S4 is provided here just in case. .

After step S4, another board activation waiting timer is set in step S5. This is a state in which a control device other than the game control device 54 (main board) (for example, the effect control device 53, the payout control device 230, etc.) is activated and can reliably take in the command from the game control device 54. Since it takes a predetermined period to become, the delay time is set by the other board activation wait timer.
Next, the process proceeds to step S6, and a payout command reception interrupt is permitted. In this case, since a command may be transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the game control device 54, an interrupt for receiving the command is permitted (details will be described later in a subroutine).
Next, the process proceeds to step S7 to determine whether or not a power failure has occurred. The determination here is performed using, for example, a power failure detection signal (not shown in step S7, but the same determination as in steps S33 to S35 described later is performed). If it is determined in step S7 that a power failure has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S8, and the other board activation wait timer is updated (decremented) by “−1”. Next, in step S9, it is determined whether or not the other board activation waiting timer has become “0”. If not, the process returns to step S7 to repeat the loop. Then, the loop is repeated, and if the other board activation waiting timer becomes “0”, the determination result in step S9 becomes YES, and the process proceeds to step S10 and subsequent steps. Therefore, at this time, the respective processes of the pachinko machine 1 are sequentially activated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7 that a power failure has occurred, the process jumps to step S37 shown in FIG. At this time, processing for power failure is sequentially performed (details will be described later).

If no power failure has occurred and the process proceeds from step S9 to step S10, it is first determined in step S10 whether there is a gaming machine ID transmission request. This is because there is a case where a command requesting transmission of the gaming machine ID is sent from the payout control device 230 to the game control device 54, and it is determined whether or not there is the request command. If there is no gaming machine ID transmission request, it waits in this step S10, and if a gaming machine ID transmission request comes, it will progress to step S11 and will perform main control ID transmission processing. Thereby, the gaming machine ID of the game control device 54 (main board) is transmitted to the payout control device 230.
Next, in step S12, it is determined whether frame opening information has been received. This is because the frame opening information detected when the front frame 4 is opened at night is taken into the dispensing control device 230 when the dispensing control device 230 reads the output signal from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126. After that, it is sent to the effect control device 53 via the game control device 54, but it is determined whether or not the game control device 54 has received the frame opening information from the payout control device 230. . If frame opening information has not been received, the process waits in step S12. If frame opening information has been received, the process proceeds to step S13 to determine whether a frame opening information transmission error command has been received. This is because the frame opening information detected when the front frame 4 is opened at night is taken into the dispensing control device 230 when the dispensing control device 230 reads the output signal from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126. After that, it is also transmitted to the card unit 15, but when the card unit 15 does not receive it within a certain time, a frame opening information transmission error command is produced from the payout control device 230 via the game control device 54. Since the error notification is sent to the control device 53, it is determined whether or not the game control device 54 has received a frame opening information transmission error command from the payout control device 230.

If the frame open information transmission error command has been received in step S13, the process proceeds to step S14 to set the frame open information transmission error flag, and in step S15, the frame open information transmission error command is sent to the effect control device 53 (effect control board). ). As a result, the effect control device 53 does not transmit the frame opening information to the card unit 15 and performs an effect of displaying on the display device 41 that an error has occurred.
After step S15, the process proceeds to step S16. On the other hand, if the frame open information transmission error command has not been received in step S13, the process jumps to step S16.
In step S16, it is determined whether a frame opening fraud occurrence error command has been received. This is to determine whether or not the game control device 54 has received it from the payout control device 230 when there is error information that the front frame 4 is illegally opened. There are two types of “commands related to frame opening information” transmitted by the payout control device 230 (see main processing of the payout control device 230 (FIGS. 24 and 25)), with and without frame opening information. This corresponds to the “frame open error occurrence error command”. If a frame opening fraud occurrence error command has been received in step S16, the process proceeds to step S17 to set a frame opening fraud occurrence flag, and in step S18, the frame opening fraud occurrence command is sent to the effect control device 53 (effect control board). Send. As a result, the effect control device 53 performs an effect of displaying on the display device 41 that the error of the unauthorized opening of the front frame 4 has occurred based on the frame opening fraud occurrence command.
After step S18, the process proceeds to step S19. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S16 that no frame opening fraud occurrence error command has been received, the process jumps to step S19.

In step S19, it is determined whether the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 182 of the power supply device 58 is being pressed (operated). If the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 182 is being pressed, the process proceeds to step S20, and it is determined whether or not the frame open error state is in effect. This is because, when the RAM clear switch 182 is pressed, all the data in the RAM 113 and CPU 111 and the like are cleared and initialized, so it is determined whether or not there is a frame open error state before the initialization. It is. At this time, if the frame open error is in progress, the information of the frame open error is initialized (cleared) and disappears, so that it is not deleted.
That is, if it is determined in step S20 that the frame open error state is in progress, the process proceeds to step S21, where it is determined whether all values in the power failure inspection areas 1 and 2 of the RAM 113 are normal power failure inspection area check data. If so, the process proceeds to step S22 assuming that the power is restored (when the power is restored), and if abnormal (if not stored normally), the process branches to step S26. The power failure inspection area check data is set in step S38 to be described later. In this step S21, since it is determined whether or not it is a power failure recovery time based on a plurality of check data as described above, it is highly reliable to determine whether or not it is a power failure recovery time.

Next, in step S22, a checksum of data in the RAM 113 (RWM) is calculated, and in step S23, it is compared with the checksum at the time of power-off, and it is determined whether or not the value is normal (match). If the checksum is not normal (that is, when the data in the RAM 113 is corrupted), the process proceeds to step S26, and if the checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step S24.
In step S24, processing for power failure recovery (initial value setting) is executed. That is, all the power failure inspection areas are cleared, the checksum area is cleared, and the areas related to error and fraud monitoring are reset. Next, in step S25, a power failure recovery command (power failure recovery command) corresponding to the state of the gaming machine is transmitted to the effect control device 53 (effect control board). After step S25, the process proceeds to step S29 shown in FIG.

The command at the time of power failure recovery (power failure recovery command) includes information notifying the state at the time of power failure (game state, rest state, settlement state). For example, if there is a power outage during a break, the information indicating that the user is taking a break (for example, the same command as the break start command) may be included in this power outage recovery command. The received effect control device 53 resumes the display on the display device 41 for notifying the break during the power failure, for example, after the power failure is restored. In addition, when there is a power failure during the settlement, the information indicating that the settlement is in progress is included in the command at the time of power failure recovery. The display on the display device 41 for informing the settlement being performed is resumed as it is after the power failure recovery. Accordingly, the player can clearly recognize that the state at the time of the power failure is stored in the RAM 113 and the state is resumed at the time of the power failure recovery, and the player does not feel uneasy at the time of the power failure recovery.
Furthermore, if the command at the time of power failure recovery (power failure recovery command) is in the frame open error state as described above, the error information is also included. For example, the display on the display device 41 that notifies that the frame open error state that was being executed at the time of the power failure is resumed as it is after the power failure is restored.

Next, if it is determined in step S20 that the frame open error state is not in effect, or if the process jumps from step S21 or S23 to step S26, the processing from step S26 including step S26 is performed.
When the processing proceeds to step S26 and subsequent steps, processing such as initialization of data (excluding the access prohibited area) in the RAM 113 of the game control device 54 is performed. That is, in step S26, all areas of the RAM 113 to be used are cleared. Specifically, in RAM 113, all work areas before the access prohibited area are cleared, and all stack areas after the access prohibited area are cleared. Next, in step S27, the initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized, and in step S28, a command for power-on (power-on command) is transmitted to the effect control device 53 (effect control board). When the power-on command is transmitted, in response to the power-on command, the effect control device 53 performs initialization such as setting the operation position of the motor of the frame effect device to the initial position. As described above, since it is confirmed that the frame opening error state is not being established, the RAM 113 is initialized, so that the frame opening information at the time of power-off is not lost and security is high.

When the process proceeds to step S29 via step S28 or when the process jumps from step S25 to step S29, for example, a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) provided in the CPU 111 is activated in step S29 shown in FIG. CTC is a circuit for timer interrupt.
Next, in step S30, activation setting of a random number generation circuit provided in a CPU peripheral circuit built in the CPU 111 is performed. This random number generation circuit generates a part of each random number of the special figure and the usual figure in hardware. However, the initial values of some of these random numbers are set in software by the process in step S32 described later.
Note that the random numbers related to the special figure include jackpot random numbers (random numbers for determining whether to win or not), jackpot symbol random numbers 1, 2 (random numbers for determining jackpot stop symbol), fluctuation pattern random numbers (reach of reach) Random number for determining a fluctuation pattern including presence / absence), stop symbol random number (random number for determining outlier stop symbol) and the like. In addition, examples of random numbers related to ordinary maps include random numbers per ordinary figure (random numbers for determining whether or not per ordinary figure). Of these, the random numbers targeted in steps S30 and S32 are, for example, jackpot random numbers, random numbers per common figure, jackpot symbol random numbers 1 and 2. In addition, when there are two types of special drawings, the random numbers related to the special drawings may be common to the special drawings 1 and 2 or may be provided separately.

Next, in step S31, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are permitted. When the process proceeds to the next step S32, an initial value random number update process is performed in step S32. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the initial value of the random number so that it is difficult to deliberately hit the game ball at the timing of launching the game ball.
Next, the process proceeds to step S33, where the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (for example, 2 times) is set, and in the next step S34, it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. In step S35, if it is not turned on, the process returns to step S32. During normal operation, steps S34 to S32 are repeated.

And when it progresses to step S35, it will determine whether the ON state of a power failure monitoring signal is continued by the number of times of the check, and if this determination result is affirmative, it will be finally determined that a power failure has occurred, and it will proceed to step S36. If negative, it is determined that a power failure has not occurred, and the process returns to step S34.
When the power failure monitoring signal is turned on, this power failure monitoring signal may be used as an NMI interrupt signal to interrupt the process being executed and forcibly execute the power failure processing from step S36. However, in the configuration of this example, the power failure monitoring signal is turned on temporarily and instantaneously due to noise or the like even though no power failure has actually occurred since the power failure monitoring signal is checked for multiple times in step S35. In this case, there is an advantage that it is not erroneously determined that a power failure has occurred.

In step S36, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are prohibited. Then, in step S37, all outputs are turned off (off data is output to all output ports), and then in step S38, a power failure occurs. Execute information setting processing. In the power failure information setting process, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1, and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2.
After passing through step S38, in the next step S39, a checksum of data in the RAM 113 is calculated and saved in a predetermined checksum area. Next, in step S40, access to the RAM 113 is prohibited, and the process waits.
In addition, the power failure process of the above steps S36-S40 is performed before a power supply voltage falls below the operating voltage of CPU111 by a power failure (a normal power supply interruption is included).
Further, as described above, when it is determined in step S7 that a power failure has occurred, the process jumps to step S37, performs the processing from step S37 described above, and finally prohibits access to the RAM 113 in step S40, and then waits. Will do.

[Drawing command reception interrupt processing]
Next, payout command reception interrupt processing of the game control device 54 will be described with reference to FIG.
In this process, an interrupt for receiving a command transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the game control device 54 is performed.
When this routine is started, the register is first saved in step S51. Next, in step S52, the payout serial reception buffer status is read, and in the subsequent step S53, it is determined whether there is reception data. In this case, since a command (for example, a polishing start command) may be transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the game control device 54, the presence / absence of received data of the command is determined.
If it is determined in step S53 that there is received data, the process proceeds to step S54, where the command is read from the payout serial reception buffer. Next, a payout command determination table is set in step S55, and determination data corresponding to the command is acquired in step S56. Next, in step S57, it is determined whether or not the determination data is normal. If it is normal, the address of the information setting area corresponding to the command is acquired in step S58.

Here, since various areas are assigned with addresses assigned to the information setting area, for example, a polishing start flag for a polishing start command and a polishing end flag for a polishing end command. The address of the information setting area corresponding to the command received from the payout control device 230 is acquired.
For example, if the command received from the dispensing control device 230 this time is a polishing start command, the address of the polishing start flag assigned to the polishing start command is acquired.
Note that flags set in the information setting area in addition to the above-described commands include, for example, flags corresponding to error state flags (for example, encapsulated ball number error, floating ball (so-called staphylococcal error)), etc. There is.
In the above case, the same area may be used for the same type of command, and the value may be changed. For example, the following may be used.
If the command is related to the polishing of the encapsulated sphere, the following values are used.
“0”: No instruction to polish the enclosed sphere “1”: Instruction to start polishing the enclosed sphere • “2”: Instruction to finish polishing the enclosed sphere

After step S58, the process proceeds to step S59, where the value meant by the command is saved in the information setting area. This is to decode the instruction content of the command received from the payout control device 230 and hold it in the information setting area. For example, if the command received from the payout control device 230 is a polishing start command this time, the polishing start command By reading the address of the polishing start flag assigned to, the flag called the polishing start flag is read, and from this, the command to start polishing the encapsulated sphere is decoded and saved is there.
After step S59, the process returns to step S52 to repeat the loop. Then, all the payout serial reception buffer statuses are read out, the loop from step S52 to step S59 is repeated, and if it is determined in step S53 that there is no reception data, the process branches from step S53 to step S60.
After branching to step S60, in order to resume the main routine in step S60, the payout command reception interrupt request is cleared, the register saved in step S61 is restored, all interrupts are permitted in step S62, and Return to the interrupted process. In FIG. 12 and the like, “return = RETI” means returning to the process interrupted at the time of interrupt. On the other hand, “RET” represents a return from the subroutine to the original routine.

[Game control device timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process of the game control device 54 will be described with reference to FIG.
This timer interrupt process is started by the processes of steps S29 and S31 in the main process described above, and is repeatedly executed at a predetermined timer interrupt period.
In this timer interrupt process, first, in step S71, register saving and interrupt prohibition are executed as necessary, and then the input process in step S72 is executed. In this input process, the detection signals of the above-described sensors (start port switches 120 and 121, gate switch 122, winning port switch 123, count switch 124, magnet sensor 142, radio wave sensor 143, vibration sensor 144, etc.) are read. Execute. Specifically, the output value of each sensor is determined at each timer interruption period, and when the output value of the same level continues for a specified number of times (for example, twice), the level of this output value is detected by each sensor. Read as deterministic value of signal. When it is read that any one of the sensors is on, a flag (input flag) indicating that is set.
Signals from various switches necessary for enclosing ball control such as the front frame opening switch 126, the glass frame opening switch 125 and the switches denoted by reference numerals 161 to 165 in FIG. 6 are input to the dispensing control device 230. This is not handled in the input process of the game control device 54.

Next, in step S73, output processing for setting and outputting the output data set in steps S80, S81, S82, S83, S84 and the like, which will be described later, to the corresponding output port is executed.
Next, in steps S74 and S75, random number update processes 1 and 2 are executed, respectively. Here, the soft random number related to the special drawing and the soft random number related to the general drawing are updated. As soft random numbers related to special figures, for example, jackpot symbol random numbers 1, 2 (random number for determining jackpot stop symbol), variation pattern random number (random number for determining variation pattern including presence / absence of reach action), stop symbol random number ( Random numbers for determining outage stop symbols). Here, the update of the random number is executed by increasing the random number by, for example, “1”. Therefore, each time this timer interrupt processing routine is repeated, the random number changes, and the extracted value of the soft random number maintains the at-randomness.

  In this example, there are three types of variation pattern random numbers: variation pattern random numbers 1-3. Among these, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is a random number for selecting the reach system of the second half fluctuation (the fluctuation after the start of reach), and the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is a detailed presentation distribution (for example, plus one frame) from the reach system. The special pattern stops or the special figure stops at minus one frame), and the variation pattern random number 3 is a random number for selecting the first half variation (variation before the start of reach). is there. The variation pattern random number may directly determine all of the variation modes, but in this example, the effect control device 53 determines the specific mode. For example, only the variation time and reach system (rough type of reach) are determined by the variation pattern random number 1, and the production control device 53 determines a specific variation mode based on the determined variation time and reach system.

Next, timer update processing is performed in step S76. Thereby, the update of various timers handled by the processing in the game program is performed in an integrated manner. For example, the initial value setting, value determination, and processing based on the determination result are performed by another routine. However, if the initial value is set, the update may be performed by the timer update processing. Moreover, the timer used for each determination mentioned later may be updated as mentioned above, for example, may be updated by a corresponding routine.
Next, an error monitoring process is executed in step S77. This is a process for monitoring undetected errors of the above-described sensors and detection signals from the magnet sensor 142, the radio wave sensor 143, the vibration sensor 144, and the like. It should be noted that illegal winnings other than when the special winning opening 27a and the public power supply 26 are not open are monitored in the process of step S79 described later.

For example, the types of errors monitored by this error monitoring process are as follows.
・ Switch abnormality (connector disconnection, switch failure, etc.)
・ Magnetic fraud ・ Vibration fraud ・ Radio wave fraud

Next, the process proceeds to step S78, and it is determined whether payment is being made or a break is in progress. This is determined based on information from the payout control device 230.
If the account is being settled or resting, the process jumps from step S79 to step S82 and proceeds to step S83. This is to jump to step S83 without executing steps S79 to S82 related to the progress of the game in order to prevent the enclosed ball game from being performed during settlement or rest.
If it is not being settled or resting, the process proceeds to step S79 and a winning mouth switch monitoring process is executed. The winning opening switch monitoring process monitors the input flags (start opening switches 120 and 121, winning opening switch 123, and count switch 124 in the special figure) set as described above, for example, the input flag of the count switch 124 is set. If so, processing such as addition of the number of balls of 15 prize balls (awarding) is executed (details will be described later).

Next, a payout command transmission process is performed in step S80. This is a process of transmitting a command from the game control device 54 to the payout control device 230 (details will be described later).
Next, the process proceeds to step S81 to perform special figure game processing. In the special figure game process, overall control of the special figure variable display game is performed. That is, when the change start condition (start condition of the change display game) is satisfied, the determination of the big hit random number, the process of setting the combination (result mode) of the special figure stop pattern, and the process of setting the special figure change mode Is done.
Here, when the variation start condition is satisfied, when the variation display game is started when there is a start opening prize in a waiting state and the variation display game ends, there is a start memory and the variation display game is executed again. When the game is played, there are three types when the jackpot is over, the start-up memory is stored, and the variable display game is executed again.
In this special figure game process, a process for setting various output data related to the special figure variable display game is also performed. That is, the content (command data) of a command to be transmitted to, for example, the effect control device 53 is set according to the game state of the special display variable display game.

Next, in step S82, processing for the usual variable display game is performed. That is, processing for setting the content of a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 53 or the like according to the state of the usual variable display game is performed.
After step S82, the process proceeds to step S83. The process proceeds to step S83 in addition to the case where the process proceeds through step S82, as described above, sometimes the determination result in step S78 is YES. In step S83, external information editing processing is executed. This edits data to be output from the game control device 54 to an external device such as the hall computer 86 or the card unit 15.
However, the game control device 54 is required for the game computer 86 and the ball management device 85 via the card unit 15 via the external information terminal board 51 and the first card unit connection terminal board 52A via the payout control device 230. Information is output.

Next, an LED editing process is performed in step S84. This is a process for various LEDs (for example, various displays of the collective display device 35 and processing related to LED display. In this LED editing process, the special figure design determined in the special figure game process of step S81 is performed. Also included is a process for displaying the symbols and other information of the usual figure determined in the usual figure game process in step S82 on various indicators and LEDs constituting the collective display device 35.
Next, a polishing apparatus control process is performed in step S85. This gives an instruction to the polishing control device 59 to control the operation of the polishing device 56 for encapsulated spheres (details will be described later). Next, a ball number command transmission process is performed in step S86. This transmits a command to the effect control device 53 and causes the effect control device 53 to control the decorative ball display device 250 (details will be described later).
After step S86, to resume the main routine, the timer interrupt request is cleared in step S87, the saved register is restored in step S88, all interrupts are permitted in step S89, and Return to the interrupted process.

[Error monitoring process]
Next, the error monitoring process S77 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, the routine returns after executing the switch abnormality monitoring process at step S101, the radio wave fraud monitoring process at step S102, the magnet fraud monitoring process at step S103, and the vibration fraud monitoring process at step S104.
The switch abnormality monitoring process is a process for monitoring an abnormality such as a connector disconnection or a switch failure as described in step S77 (FIG. 13). The radio fraud monitoring process, the magnet fraud monitoring process, and the vibration fraud monitoring process are processes for monitoring the radio wave fraud, magnet fraud, and vibration fraud described in step S77.

[Prize mouth switch monitoring process]
Next, the winning opening switch monitoring process S79 in the timer interruption process will be described with reference to FIG.
The winning opening switch monitoring process is a process for monitoring whether or not there is an input of a signal (a change in signal) from a switch provided in each of the various winning openings.
In the winning opening switch monitoring process, first, a winning monitoring table for the winning opening switch in the large winning opening is prepared (step S111). There is a count switch 124 as a prize opening switch in the big prize opening. Next, a fraud & prize winning monitoring process is performed (step S112). This is to monitor the winning of a regular game ball (such as at the time of a big hit) at the big winning opening 27a and to monitor the winning at an illegal big winning opening 27a other than the big win.
Next, a winning monitoring table for a winning switch in the ordinary electric train is prepared (step S113). There is a second start port switch 121 for detecting a winning to the second start winning port 26 as an ordinary electric accessory (general power).
Next, fraud & prize winning monitoring processing is performed (step S114). This monitors the winning of a regular game ball to the second start winning opening 26 as a normal electric accessory (general power), and monitors the winning to the illegal second starting winning opening 26. Next, a prize monitoring table (for example, a list indicating switches that do not require fraud monitoring) of a prize opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring is prepared (step S115). As the winning opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring, there are, for example, a first starting opening switch 120 and a winning opening switch 123 provided for the general winning openings 28 to 31.
For prize-winning switches that do not require fraud monitoring, the prize detection process is performed although fraud monitoring is not performed. Therefore, a prize monitoring table is prepared for the process, and the winning number counter updating process for updating the winning number in the next step. (Step S116) is executed. The detailed procedure of the winning number counter updating process will be described later.
After step S116, the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

[Unauthorized & winning monitoring process]
Next, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process (steps S112 and S114) in the winning opening switch monitoring process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The fraud & prize winning monitoring process is a process performed on the count switch 124 of the big prize opening or the second start opening switch 121 in the ordinary electric power. Here, in addition to the detection of the prize, fraud is monitored. This is because the big prize opening (special variable prize-winning device 27) and ordinary electric power (ordinary variable prize-winning device 26) tend to be fraudulently forcibly opening the opening / closing member and inserting the game ball to pay out the prize ball.
In the fraud & winning monitoring process, first, the target fraud monitoring period flag is checked (step S121), and it is determined whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S122). If it is not during the fraud monitoring period, the process jumps to step S133 to perform the processing after step S133.
On the other hand, if it is during the fraud monitoring period, it is checked whether or not there is an input to the winning port switch subject to error monitoring (the count switch 124 of the large winning port or the second start port switch 121 in the ordinary power system) (step S123). If it is determined that there is no input (step S123; NO), the process jumps to step S135. If it is determined that there is an input (step S123; YES), the process proceeds to step S124, and the target illegal winning number is updated (+1) ( Add) and go to step S125.

In step S125, it is checked whether the number of fraudulent winnings after the addition exceeds the number of fraud determinations to be monitored (for example, 5). The number of judgments is set to five. For example, when a large winning opening in an open state is converted to a closed state, a game ball is sandwiched between door members of the large winning opening, and the gaming ball passes the valid period of the count switch. This is because it is not determined to be illegal when winning a prize or when noise occurs in the signal, that is, it is not illegal but not easily determined as an error. If it is determined that the determination number has not been exceeded (step S125; NO), the process jumps to step S133, and if it is determined that the determination number has been exceeded (step S125; YES), the process proceeds to step S126.
In step S126, the number of fraudulent winnings is limited to the number of fraud occurrence determination, and in step S127, an initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the target fraud winning notification timer area, and a target fraud winning generation command is prepared. (Step S128) Further, an illegal winning flag is prepared as an illegal flag (Step S129).

Next, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S130). If they do not match (step S130; NO), the process proceeds to step S131, and the prepared fraud flag is set as the target fraud flag area. After saving (step S131), an effect command setting process is performed in step S132, and the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated.
Therefore, if fraud has occurred as described above, a fraud notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 53, and unauthorized notification is made.
On the other hand, if YES in step S130, that is, if the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area, it can be determined that the state is the same as the state already taught to the production control device 53, step S131, The fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated without performing the process of step S132. This is because the command is transmitted only when the flag changes.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S122 that fraud monitoring is not being performed and the process branches to step S133, or if it is determined in step S125 that the number of determinations has not been exceeded (step S125; NO) and the process branches to step S133, step S133 is performed. Then, a prize monitoring table for a prize opening switch to be monitored for fraud (a count switch 124 for a big prize opening or a second start opening switch 121 in the public power system) is prepared. Thereafter, after executing the process of updating the winning number counter, that is, the process S134 of counting the number of winnings as the target of the prize ball addition, the target illegal winning notification timer has already timed up or (-1) timed up after updating If the illegal prize notification timer is not “0”, (−1) is updated (step S135), and the check result is determined in step S136 (that is, whether the illegal prize notification timer is “0”). To do.
If the target illegal prize notification timer has not expired or has not expired after (-1) update, the determination in step S136 is NO, and the routine is repeated and the routine is repeated.

  If the target unauthorized prize notification timer has already timed up or has expired after (-1) update, the process proceeds to step S137 to prepare a target unauthorized prize release command, and in step S138, the unauthorized prize is released as an unauthorized flag. The flag is prepared, and then the process proceeds to step S139, where it is determined whether or not it is the moment when the illegal winning notification timer is 0. If not, the routine is returned and the routine is repeated, and the illegal winning notification timer is 0. At the moment, the process proceeds to step S140 to clear the target illegal winning number, and then the process proceeds to step S130. Thereafter, the processes after step S130 are executed. Therefore, at this time, an unauthorized winning cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control device 53, and the unauthorized notification is canceled.

[Winner counter update process]
Next, the winning number counter updating process (step S116) in the above-described winning opening switch monitoring process and the winning number counter updating process (step S134) in the fraud & winning monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the input number counter update process, first, the number of winning port switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning monitor table acquired in the above-described winning port switch monitoring process (step S151).
Here, the information defined in the winning table of the winning monitoring table prepared in the winning opening switch monitoring process is as follows.
(A) Number of repetitions: Number of switches to be monitored (b) Data for determining whether there is an input (monitoring switch bit): Definition for each switch (c) Lower address of the winning number counter area: Definition for each switch Then, it is checked whether there is an input of detection signals (more precisely, changes in input) from the winning prize switch to be monitored (step S152). If it is determined that there is no input (S152; NO), the process jumps to step S157. If it is determined that there is an input (S152; YES), the value of the target winning number counter area is loaded in the next step S153.

Then, the target winning number counter is updated (+1) in step S154, and it is checked whether or not it overflows in step S155. If it is determined that the counter overflow has not occurred (step S155; NO), the process proceeds to step S156, the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area, and the process proceeds to step S157.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S155 that a counter overflow has occurred (S155; YES), step S156 is skipped and the process jumps to step S157. The maximum storage number (for example, 255 for 1-byte size and 65535 for 2-byte size) is determined depending on the size of the winning number counter area provided. You will lose information on the number of award balls you should have. In order to avoid this, in step S154 and step S155, the contents of the area are not updated suddenly, and it is updated after confirming that (+1) is set to “0” outside the area. ing.
In step S157, it is determined whether or not the monitoring process for all the switches has been completed. If the monitoring process has been completed (step 157; YES), the input number counter update process is terminated, and if not completed (step S157; (NO), it returns to step S152 and repeats the said process.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, the payout command transmission process (step S80) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the payout command transmission process, first, in step S161, it is determined whether or not write counter = read counter. This is because the command is sent from the game control device 54 to the payout control device 230 by serial communication, so that the values of the serial buffer writing and reading counters are determined. If it is determined in step S161 that the write counter is not a read counter, the process proceeds to step S162. On the other hand, if it is determined that write counter = read counter, the process branches to step S172.
First, when the process proceeds to step S162, the payout serial transmission buffer status is read in step S162, and it is determined in step S163 whether or not the transmission buffer is full (transmission buffer is full).
If the transmission buffer is full, the routine ends and returns.
On the other hand, if the transmission buffer is not full, the process advances to step S164 to update the read counter by (+1). Next, in step S165, a command is loaded from the payout command area corresponding to the lead counter, and in the subsequent step S166, the loaded command area is cleared.

In step S167, the command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer. Thus, the command is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the payout control device 230 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111 in the game control device 54.
Next, in step S168, the payout serial transmission buffer status is read out. In step S169, it is determined whether or not transmission (command transmission) is in progress. If transmission is in progress, the process returns to step S161 to repeat the loop. . If the transmission is not in progress (NO in step S169), the process proceeds to step S170 to initialize the transmission circuit. Next, the process proceeds to step S171, where the command is rewritten to the payout serial transmission buffer, and then the process returns to step S161 to repeat the loop.
In this flowchart, the command is transmitted in a 1-byte configuration. However, the command is not limited to this. For example, the command has a 2-byte configuration such as “MODE” and “ACTION”, such as a production command. Also good. Further, it may have a more byte structure. In those cases, a flowchart corresponding to a plurality of bytes may be used.

  Next, if it is determined in step S161 that the write counter = read counter, the process branches to step S172. In this case, if the command transmission adjustment timer is not “0” in step S172, (−1 )Update. Next, the process proceeds to step S173, where it is determined whether or not the command transmission adjustment timer is “0”. If the command transmission adjustment timer is not “0”, the process returns and the routine is repeated. When the command transmission adjustment timer becomes “0”, the process goes to step S174 to check whether there is a count number other than “0” in the winning number counter area provided for each winning opening. If it is determined that there is no count number (step S174; NO), the process proceeds to step S175, where the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated, and the counting numbers of all the winning number counter areas are checked. Whether or not has been completed is determined (step S176). If it is determined in this determination that all checks have been completed (step S176; YES), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S176 that all checks have not been completed (step S176; NO), the process returns to step S174 and the above process is repeated.

If it is determined in step S174 that there is a count number (step S174; YES), the process proceeds to step S177, and the count number in the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1). Thereafter, a prize ball command table is set in step S178.
In the prize ball command table, the number of prize balls associated with winning is set as follows.
・ Big winning port 27a = 13 ・ Starting winning port 25 = 3 ・ Starting winning port 26 (general power) = 1 unit ・ General winning port 28 to 31 = 10 Then, in step S179, the address of the winning number counter area is set Get the corresponding prize ball command.
Here, the command will be described as follows.
Payout command: A collective term for commands that the game control device 54 exchanges with the payout control device 230. Depending on the type of command, there is transmission / reception or one-sided communication.
Prize ball command: A command representing the number of prize balls, and one-sided communication from the game control device 54 to the payout control device 230. The prize ball command is a concept smaller than the payout command representing the generic name of the command, and the prize ball command is one of the payout commands.

After step S179, the process advances to step S180, where the payout serial transmission buffer status is read. In step S181, it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer is full (transmission buffer is full). If the transmission buffer is full, the routine ends and returns.
On the other hand, if the transmission buffer is not full, the process advances to step S182 to write a command (for example, a prize ball command) in the payout serial transmission buffer. Thus, a command (for example, a prize ball command) is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the payout control device 230 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111 in the game control device 54.
Next, the process proceeds to step S183 to determine whether transmission is in progress (command transmission is in progress). If transmission is in progress, the process jumps to step S186. On the other hand, if not transmitting, the process proceeds to step S184 to initialize the transmission circuit, and in the subsequent step S185, the command is rewritten in the payout serial transmission buffer, and then the process proceeds to step S186. In step S186, an initial value (for example, 500 ms) is set in the command transmission adjustment timer. Next, a main prize ball remaining number update process is performed in step S187. In this method, data for outputting one pulse for every ten winning balls as external information is updated.
In this way, the command is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the payout control device 230 by serial communication. Since serial communication is performed using the serial communication function of the CPU 111 in the game control device 54, there is an advantage that the configuration is simple.
In the above flow chart, the left column (steps S162 to S171) in FIG. 18 transmits game machine status information, and the left column (steps S172 to S187) transmits prize ball instruction commands (prize ball commands). It corresponds to the control to do. This is because the state information of the gaming machine is preferably sent to the payout control device 230 as soon as possible, and all set commands are transmitted. In addition, although it is possible to send a prize ball instruction command (prize ball command) at once, in order to give the player a sense of paying out a ball, a time lag is created and sent one by one. The process enhances the sense of excitement in the game.

In addition to the prize ball command, the commands transmitted from the game control device 54 to the payout control device 230 will be described together as follows.
<Command for notifying various states of gaming machine: gaming machine information command>
-Command to notify whether the symbol is changing-Command to notify the end of symbol change-Command to notify the jackpot-Command to notify in special mode-Command to notify the game machine (main control) RAM clear The above is an example Other than these, commands may be included. Further, the command (game machine information command) for notifying various states of the gaming machine may be composed of one command, but may be composed of a plurality of commands.
<Commands to notify various error conditions of gaming machine: gaming machine error information command>
・ Switch abnormal command ・ Prize prize illegal command ・ Penden illegal command ・ Radio wave illegal command ・ Magnetic illegal command ・ Vibration illegal command Other commands for notifying error information other than the above may also be included Good.

[LED editing process]
Next, the LED editing process (step S84) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, a winning display LED editing process (step S191) and a special figure / general chart / game state display LED editing process (step S192) are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
Here, in the winning display LED editing process, processing related to the display of the winning display LED 355 in the collective display device 35 is executed (details will be described later in a subroutine). In the special drawing / general drawing / game state display LED editing process, setting of display data for performing various displays on each display device constituting the collective display device 35 is executed.

[Winning display LED editing process]
Next, the winning display LED editing process in step S191 of the LED editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, if the winning display output control timer is not “0” in step S201, the timer is updated (decremented) by “−1”, and in step S202, the winning display output control timer is “0”. It is determined whether or not. This is because the winning display output control timer is set to an initial value (for example, 1500 ms in the normal mode) in step S211 to be described later, and "-1" is updated (decremented) from the initial value. Is determined to be “0”.

If the decision result in the step S202 is YES, the process advances to a succeeding step S203 to decide whether or not the winning display read counter is equal to the winning display light counter. This is to determine whether or not the current number of winning balls has been read from the winning display number storage area storing the number of winnings. If the determination result in step S203 is NO, it is determined that the winning display read counter is not equal to the winning display light counter and the current number of winning balls has not been read from the winning display number storage area, and the process proceeds to step S204.
On the other hand, if the determination result in step S203 is YES, the winning display read counter is equal to the winning display light counter, and it is determined that the current number of winning balls has been read from the winning display number storage area, and the process branches to step S215. In step S215, the extinction data is saved in the winning display LED output data area, and then the process returns. As a result of the processing in step S215, the winning ball display of the winning display LED 355 disappears.

When the process proceeds to step S204, first, the winning display lead counter is updated (incremented) by "+1" in step S204, and then in step S205, the current winning ball from the winning display number storage area corresponding to the winning display lead counter is updated. Load a number. Next, in step S206, winning display LED pattern data corresponding to the number of prize balls loaded in step S205 is set. The winning display LED pattern data is data for determining which of the seven segments is to be lit (or blinked) because the winning display LED 355 of the collective display device 35 is composed of two 7-segment LEDs. It is. For example, when displaying the number of winning balls = 10, the lighting data of each segment is set so that two LEDs display “10” with two digits.
In step S207, the winning display LED pattern data set in step S206 is saved in the winning display LED pattern data area, and the process proceeds to step S208.

In step S208, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is in the special mode.
The special mode corresponds to a big hit, a probability fluctuation, a short time (medium power support: a low probability of support). On the other hand, the normal mode is a normal gaming state other than the special mode.
If it is not in the special mode in step S208, the process proceeds to step S209, where “1” is saved as the winning display LED lighting time number, and then the process proceeds to step S211. When the winning display LED lighting time number = “1”, the winning display by the winning display LED 355 is controlled at a timing of 1 second ON (lighted) and 0.5 seconds OFF (lighted off).
In this case, the winning display output control timer is set to “375” as an initial value. This is because the repetition timing of this routine is every 4 ms, so “375” × 4 ms = 1500 ms. From 1500 ms to 1000 ms (1 second) is ON, and thereafter 500 ms (“125” × 4 ms = 500 ms) is OFF. This is because the winning display can be controlled at a timing of 1 second ON (lighted) and 0.5 seconds OFF (lighted off).
Accordingly, the winning display is ON (lit) for 1 second while the routine is repeated “250” times from the initial value of 1500 ms, and then the winning display is 0.5 seconds while the routine is repeated “125” times. It is controlled at the timing of OFF (light off).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S208 that the special mode is being used, the process proceeds to step S210, where “2” is saved as the winning display LED lighting time number, and then the process proceeds to step S211. When the winning display LED lighting time number = “2”, the winning display by the winning display LED 355 is controlled at a timing of 0.5 seconds ON (lighted) and 0.1 seconds OFF (lighted off).
In this case, the winning display output control timer is set to “150” as an initial value. This is because the repetition timing of this routine is every 4 ms, so “150” × 4 ms = 600 ms. From 600 ms to 500 ms (0.5 seconds) is ON, and the subsequent 100 ms (“25” × 4 ms = 100 ms) is This is because by turning OFF, the winning display can be controlled at the timing of 0.5 seconds ON (lights on) and 0.1 seconds OFF (lights off).
Accordingly, while the routine is repeated “125” times from the initial value of 600 ms, the winning display is turned ON (lit) for 0.5 seconds, and thereafter, the winning display is 0. 0 while the routine is repeated “25” times. It is controlled at the timing of OFF (extinguish) for 1 second.
In the special mode, the winning display time by the winning display LED 355 is set to ON (lighted) for 0.5 seconds, which is shorter than the game ball firing interval (0.6 seconds). That is, the number of game balls fired by operating the firing operation handle 11 is defined as 100 shots per minute according to a predetermined rule. Therefore, the payout control device 230 controls the ball feed solenoid 172 to make 100 shots / minute. Although it is set to fall within the range of (one ball is fired in approximately 0.6 seconds (s)), the winning display time by the winning display LED 355 is 0.5 seconds, compared to the firing interval of 0.6 seconds. Since the ON (lighted) is shorter, the number of winning balls displayed by the winning display LED 355 does not stagnate even if the winning balls associated with winning are continuous, such as during a big hit.

As described above, when the process proceeds from step S209 or step S210 to step S211, in step S211, the timer initial value corresponding to the winning display LED lighting time number is saved in the winning display control timer area. As described above, in the normal mode, since the winning display LED lighting time number = “1”, the winning display output control timer is saved to “375” as an initial value. Thus, since the repetition timing of this routine is every 4 ms, “375” × 4 ms = 1500 ms, and the winning display is ON (lit) for 1 second while this routine is repeated “250” times from the initial value 1500 ms. Thereafter, while this routine is repeated “125” times, the winning display is controlled at a timing of 0.5 seconds OFF (lights off).
In the special mode, the winning display LED lighting time number = “2”, so that the winning display output control timer is saved to “150” as an initial value. Thus, since the repetition timing of this routine is every 4 ms, “150” × 4 ms = 600 ms, and the winning display is ON for 0.5 seconds while this routine is repeated “125” times from the initial value 600 ms ( After that, while the routine is repeated “25” times, the winning display is controlled at a timing of OFF (extinguish) for 0.1 second.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S212, and the winning display LED pattern data corresponding to the number of winning balls set in step S206 is loaded. Subsequently, in step S213, the winning display LED pattern data loaded in step S212 is received as the winning display LED output data area. After saving, return. Accordingly, the display of the prize display LED 355 of the collective display device 35 is controlled according to the prize display LED pattern data set in step S20 at the control timing of the prize display LED lighting time number = “1” or “2”. Then, the fact that the player has won a prize and the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize are notified.

  On the other hand, if the winning display output control timer is not “0” in step S202, the process branches to step S214 to determine whether the winning display control timer is in the lighting section. This is to determine whether or not the winning display is an ON (lighted) section (period), and the determination value in step S214 differs depending on the value of the lighting time number. If the determination result of step S214 is the ON section, the process proceeds to step S212, and the winning display LED pattern data corresponding to the number of winning balls is loaded, and then the process of step S213 is performed. Thereby, the section where the winning display is ON (lighted) continues. If the winning display control timer is not in the lighting period in step S214, the process proceeds to step S215, the extinction data is saved in the winning display LED output data area, and the process returns. Thereby, the winning ball display of the winning display LED 355 disappears.

[Polishing device control processing]
Next, the polishing apparatus control process (step S85) in the above-described timer interruption process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is determined in step S221 whether or not a polishing start flag is set. The polishing start flag is set by receiving a polishing start command from the payout control device 230. The polishing start command is received from the payout control device 230 in the payout command reception interrupt process in the game control device 54. .
In step S221, a polishing start command is received from the dispensing control device 230, and it is determined whether or not the polishing start flag is set (set).
If it is determined in step S221 that the polishing start flag is set, the process proceeds to step S222, where a polishing start command is prepared, and in step S223, an effect command setting process is performed. The effect command setting process sets a command for transmitting a command from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53 by serial communication.
Thereby, a polishing start command is sent to the effect control device 53 by serial communication.

After step S223, the polishing start flag is cleared in step S224, and the polishing flag is set in step S225. The in-polishing flag is used for the game control device 54 to grasp that the enclosing ball is being polished.
Next, in step S226, it is determined whether the polishing end flag is set. The polishing end flag is set by receiving a polishing end command from the payout control device 230, and the polishing end flag is received from the payout control device 230 in the payout command reception interrupt process in the game control device 54. .
In step S226, a polishing end command is received from the dispensing control device 230, and it is determined whether or not the polishing end flag is set (set).
If it is determined in step S226 that the polishing end flag is set, the process proceeds to step S227, where a polishing end command is prepared, and in step S228, an effect command setting process is performed. As described above, the effect command setting process sets a command for transmitting a command from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53 by serial communication.
As a result, the polishing end command is sent to the effect control device 53 by serial communication.

After step S228, the polishing end flag is cleared in step S229, the polishing in-progress flag is cleared in step S230, the routine is ended, and the process returns.
On the other hand, if the polishing start flag is not set in step S221, the process jumps to step S226. Therefore, in this case, no polishing start command is prepared, and the polishing start command is not sent to the effect control device 53.
If the polishing end flag is not set in step S226, the routine is ended and the process returns. Therefore, in this case, the polishing end command is not prepared, and the polishing end command is not sent to the effect control device 53. The encapsulated sphere is continuously polished for a predetermined period from the start of polishing.

[Direction command setting processing]
Next, the effect command setting process (step S132) in the above-described fraud & prize winning monitoring process and the effect command setting process (step S223) in the polishing apparatus control process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, an effect command (MODE) is written in the effect serial transmission buffer in step S241. Thereby, an effect command (MODE) is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111 in the game control device 54.
Next, in step S242, the effect serial transmission buffer status is read out, and in step S243, it is determined whether transmission is in progress (during transmission of the effect command (MODE)). If transmission is in progress, the process jumps to step S246. On the other hand, if the transmission is not in progress (NO in step S243), the process proceeds to step S244 to initialize the transmission circuit. Next, the process proceeds to step S245, where the effect command (MODE) is rewritten in the effect serial transmission buffer, and then the process proceeds to step S246.
Here, in the case of this flowchart, the command is transmitted in a 2-byte configuration such as “MODE” and “ACTION”, as in the case of a production command. In those cases, a flowchart corresponding to a plurality of bytes may be used.

In step S246, an effect command (ACTION) is written in the effect serial transmission buffer. Thereby, an effect command (ACTION) is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111 in the game control device 54.
Next, in step S247, the effect serial transmission buffer status is read out, and in step S248, it is determined whether transmission is in progress (during transmission of the effect command (ACTION)). To do. If the transmission is not in progress (NO in step S248), the process proceeds to step S249 to initialize the transmission circuit. Next, the process proceeds to step S250, where the effect command (ACTION) is rewritten in the effect serial transmission buffer, and then the process returns.
In this way, the effect command (MODE) and the effect command (ACTION) are transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53 by serial communication. The production control device 53 receives these commands and performs production control on the screen of the display device 41. Since the serial communication is performed using the serial communication function of the CPU 111 in the game control device 54, there is an advantage that the configuration is simple.

[Number-of-balls command transmission process]
Next, the number-of-balls command transmission process (step S86) in the above-described timer interruption process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is determined in step S261 whether or not a ball number command has been transmitted. The number-of-balls command and the number-of-balls command to be described later are transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53, and cause the effect control device 53 to perform decoration control of the decoration ball display device 250.
If the number-of-balls command has not been transmitted in step S261, the process proceeds to step S262, and the number-of-balls command corresponding to the number of balls is set.
Here, the number-of-balls command is set such that, for example, the upper decorative ball display device 250a of the decorative ball display device 250 performs the following decoration.
・ When the number of balls is 100 or more: All LEDs are lit or blinking when moving ・ When the number of balls is 50 or less: Decoration control so that half of all LEDs are turned off ・ The number of balls is 50 When the number is less than 100: More than half of all LEDs up to all LEDs, the number of LEDs corresponding to the number of balls is lit or blinking in stages. All LEDs included in the display device 250a.
Therefore, based on the processing in step S262, decoration control is performed such that the LED of the upper decorative ball display device 250a is turned on or moved and blinks according to the number of balls held at that time.

After step S262, a ball number command is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 53) in step S263, and a ball number command transmitted flag is set in the subsequent step S264. Thereby, the number-of-balls command is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53, and the decoration control of the decorative ball display device 250 is performed by the effect control device 53. In addition, the game control device 54 can confirm the transmission of the number-of-balls command to the effect control device 53 by setting the ball-number-of-balls command transmitted flag.
Note that the clearing of the number-of-balls command transmitted flag is performed when data is set in the information setting area in the payout command reception interrupt process. There are also data sets for numbers and counting spheres.

On the other hand, if the number-of-balls command has been transmitted in step S261, the process jumps to step S265.
After step S264, the process proceeds to step S265.
In step S265, it is determined whether or not the counting ball number command has been transmitted. The counted ball number command is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53 and causes the effect control device 53 to perform decoration control of the decorative ball display device 250.
If the counting ball number command has not been transmitted in step S265, the process proceeds to step S266, and the counting ball number command corresponding to the counting ball number is set.
Here, the counting ball number command is set so that, for example, the lower decorative ball display device 250b of the decorative ball display device 250 performs the following decoration.
When the number of balls to be counted is 0: All LEDs are turned off. While the number of balls is being counted: The LED of the counting decoration unit 250c is moving and blinking. The LED (that is, the LED of the counting decoration unit 250c) moves and blinks so that the sphere moves toward the device 250b. LED decoration according to the size of the counting ball:
That is, the LED is turned on in order from the lower part of the lower decorative ball display device 250b, which is an image of a ball box, and the decoration control is such that the player can know the approximate number of balls by the number of LEDs turned on. All of the LEDs included in the decorative ball display device 250b.
Therefore, based on the processing in step S266, the decoration control is performed such that the LED of the lower decorative ball display device 250b is lit or moved and blinks during counting of the number of balls held or according to the size of the ball count at that time. Will be done.

After step S266, a counting ball number command is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 53) in step S267, and a counting ball number command transmitted flag is set in subsequent step S268. Thereby, the counted ball number command is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53, and the decoration control of the decorative ball display device 250 is performed by the effect control device 53. In addition, the game control device 54 can confirm the transmission of the counted ball number command to the effect control device 53 by setting the flag for transmitting the counted ball number command.
On the other hand, if the counting ball number command has already been transmitted in step S265, the routine is terminated and the process returns.
Further, after step S268, the process returns.
G. Operation of Control System Next, the control contents of the payout control device 230 will be described with reference to FIGS.
[Main processing of payout control device]
First, the main process of the payout control device 230 will be described with reference to FIGS.
Here, the flowchart of the payout control device 230 will be described using “step H” as a step number.
This main process is started based on the fact that the CPU 231 is forcibly reset. That is, when the power switch 181 of the power supply 58 that supplies power to the payout controller 230 is turned on, a reset signal is issued from the power supply 58 at a predetermined timing (in a predetermined reset period when the power is turned on). When input to the control device 230 and the reset terminal of the CPU 231 is turned on, and then the reset signal is released, the CPU 231 is activated. Similarly, when the power is restored from a power failure, the reset signal is turned on and then released and the CPU 231 is activated. Further, when the operator wants to initialize the RAM 233 and the like of the payout control device 230, it is necessary to turn on the power switch 181 while turning on the RAM clear switch 182 (initialization switch) of the power supply device 58. There is. Note that the RAM 233 is denoted as RWM in FIG.

When the CPU 231 is activated, first, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are prohibited, the CPU peripheral circuit (including the serial port) built in the CPU 231 is initialized, and access to the RAM 233 is permitted. An off signal (a signal corresponding to a binary signal “0”) is output to all output ports (steps H1 to H4).
Since each output port is turned off (reset) by the reset signal, it is not always necessary to output the off signal to each output port in software, but step B4 is provided here just in case. .

After step H4, the other board activation waiting timer is set in step H5. This is because a control device other than the payout control device 230 (the payout control board) (for example, the game control device 54) is activated and can receive a command from the payout control device 230 with certainty. Since a predetermined period is required, the delay time is set by the other board activation wait timer.
Here, the game control device 54 is called a main control board, the payout control device 230 is called a payout control board, and the effect control device 53 is called an effect control board. The sub-board is a sub-control board, which is named according to these, but for convenience of explanation, the sub-control board is abbreviated as a sub-board.
Therefore, in the specification and drawings, for convenience of explanation, the game control device 54 may be abbreviated as a main board, the payout control device 230 as a payout board, and the sub control board as a sub board.
Next, the process proceeds to step H6, where it is determined whether the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 182 of the power supply device 58 is being pressed. If the power is not turned on while the RAM clear switch 182 is being pressed, the process proceeds to Step H7. If the power is being turned on while the RAM clear switch 182 is being pressed, the process jumps to Step H11.
The determination in step H6 is performed when the RAM clear switch 182 is pressed, because all data such as the RAM 233 and the CPU 231 registers are cleared and initialized. Is not taken into the payout control device 230, and therefore, the operation of the RAM clear switch 182 is determined in step H6.
First, if the power is not turned on while the RAM clear switch 182 is pressed, it is determined in step H7 whether or not all the values of the power failure inspection areas 1 and 2 in the RAM 233 are normal power interruption inspection area check data. If the power failure is restored (when the power failure is restored), the process proceeds to step H8, and if abnormal (if not stored normally), the process proceeds to step H11. The power failure inspection area check data is set in step H46 described later. In this step H7, since it is determined whether or not the power failure has been restored based on the plurality of check data in this way, the determination as to whether or not the power failure has been restored is made with high reliability.

Next, in step H8, a checksum of data in the RAM 233 (RWM) is calculated, and in step H9, it is compared with the checksum at the time of power-off, and it is determined whether the value is normal (match). If the checksum is not normal (that is, when the data in the RAM 233 is corrupted), the process proceeds to step H11, and if the checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step H10.
In step H10, a process (initial value setting) for power failure recovery is executed. That is, all the power failure inspection areas are cleared, the checksum area is cleared, and the areas related to error and fraud monitoring are reset. Next, the process proceeds to Step H13.
The command at the time of power failure recovery (power failure recovery command) includes information notifying the state at the time of power failure (game state, rest state, settlement state). For example, when there is a power outage during a break, information indicating that the user is taking a break (for example, the same as a break start command in Step H414 described later) may be included in the power outage recovery command. The presentation control device 53 that has received the command via the game control measure 54 at the time of power failure recovery, for example, resumes the display on the display device 41 that informs that the break is being performed at the time of the power failure after the power failure recovery. In addition, when there is a power failure during the settlement, the information indicating that the settlement is in progress is included in the command at the time of power failure recovery, and the effect control device 53 that received this command at the time of power failure recovery via the game control measure 54. For example, the display on the display device 41 for notifying the settlement being executed at the time of a power failure is resumed after the power failure is restored. Thus, the player can clearly recognize that the state at the time of the power failure is stored in the RAM 233 and the state is resumed at the time of the power failure recovery, and the player does not feel uneasy at the time of the power failure recovery.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step H6 that the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 182 is being pressed, the process jumps to step H11, and the processing after step H11 is performed including step H11.
When the processing proceeds to step H11 and subsequent steps, processing such as initialization of data in the RAM 233 of the payout control device 230 (except for the access prohibited area) is performed. That is, in step H11, all RAM 233 areas to be used are cleared. Specifically, in RAM 233, all work areas before the access prohibited area are cleared, and all stack areas after the access prohibited area are cleared. Next, in step H12, processing for setting an initial value at the time of power-on is performed in an area to be initialized, and then the process proceeds to step H13.
As described above, since the RAM 233 is initialized before the frame opening information is taken into the payout control device 230, the frame opening information at the time of power-off is not lost, and the security is high.

Next, when the process proceeds from Step H10 to Step H13 or when the process proceeds from Step H12 to Step H13, the processes after Step H13 are performed including Step H13.
When the processing proceeds to step H13 and subsequent steps, first, the frame opening information is read in step H13 and stored as state comparison data. The frame opening information means that the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 (also referred to as a gaming frame opening detection switch) opens the front frame 4 (normally when power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply to the gaming machine). This is information indicating whether or not is detected, that is, at night when the game hall is closed.
The frame opening information from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is output to the dispensing control device 230 for a sufficiently long time. The frame opening information may be stored in the RAM 233 or a register of the CPU 231.
Next, in step H14, the number of checks for the frame opening information is set. This is because the reliability of the frame opening information may be reduced if the frame opening information is read only once. Therefore, the reliability of the frame opening information is obtained by executing the reading a plurality of times and comparing it with the state comparison data. Is to increase. The number of checks for the frame opening information is set to 2 times or 3 times, but may be more than that.
Next, the frame opening information is read in step H15, and the read frame information is compared with the state comparison data in step H16. This is because the first frame information read in advance is stored as the state comparison data, so that the frame information read in step H15 is compared with the stored state comparison data, so that there is an error in the frame information. This is for confirming whether there is (for example, the read frame information is not correct due to the influence of noise or the like).
If the read frame information is not equal to the state comparison data, the process returns to step H13 to repeat the loop. When the loop is repeated and it is determined that the read frame information is equal to the state comparison data, it is determined whether or not the process has passed from step H16 to step H17 and the same state has been continued for the number of times the frame opening information has been checked. Here, the number of checks is the number set in step H14. If the decision result in the step H17 is NO, the process returns to the step H15 to repeat the loop, and if the same state is continued for the number of times of frame release information check, the decision result in the step H17 becomes YES and the frame release information is changed. Confirm and advance to step H18.
The frame opening information read in step H15 is repeatedly looped as described above until the frame is turned on (opened) or the frame is turned off (closed), so that the frame opening information is obtained accurately. I have to.

In step H18, the confirmed frame opening information is saved. In step H19, the main control board reception interrupt and the card unit reception interrupt are permitted. This permits an interrupt between the game control device 54 or the card unit 15 and the payout control device 230. Next, a gaming machine ID transmission request command is prepared in step H20.
The “gaming machine ID transmission request command” in step H20 requests the gaming control device 54 (main control board) to transmit the gaming machine ID of the gaming control device 54 (main control board) to the payout control device 230. It is a command to do.
Next, main control command setting processing is performed in step H21. This is processing when a command is transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the game control device 54 by serial communication. Thereby, the gaming machine ID transmission request command prepared in step H20 is transmitted to the gaming control device 54.

After step H21, the process proceeds to step H22 to determine whether a power failure has occurred. The determination here is performed using, for example, a power failure detection signal (illustration is omitted in H22, but the same determination as in H41 to H43 described later is performed). If it is determined in step H22 that no power failure has occurred, it is determined in step H23 whether or not a gaming machine ID has been received from the main control board (game control device 54). If no gaming machine ID has been received, the process returns to step H22 to repeat the loop, and if a gaming machine ID is received, the process returns to step H24. On the other hand, if it is determined in step H22 that a power failure has occurred, the process jumps to step H44.
When the process proceeds to Step H24, it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred in Step H24. If it is determined in step H24 that no power failure has occurred, it is determined in step H25 whether or not there is a gaming machine ID transmission request from the card unit 15. If there is no gaming machine ID transmission request from the card unit 15, the process returns to step H24 to repeat the loop. If a gaming machine ID transmission request is received from the card unit 15, the process returns to step H26. On the other hand, if it is determined in step H24 that a power failure has occurred, the process jumps to step H44.

If the process proceeds to step H26, a gaming machine ID output process is performed in step H26. In this process, the game machine ID of the main control board (game control device 54) and the game machine ID of the payout control device 230 are output to the outside (card unit 15). Next, the process proceeds to step H27, and it is determined whether or not the RAM 233 has been cleared for the game data.
When the RAM 233 is cleared, a command related to the RAM clear is transmitted to the card unit 15 in step H28. This is because when the RAM 233 is cleared, the data such as the number of balls held and the number of counted balls are cleared. Therefore, in order to match the state with the data state of the card unit 15, the card unit 15 is related to the RAM clear. Send commands. When the card unit 15 receives a command related to the RAM clear, the card unit 15 clears the RAM on the card unit 15 side. Note that the RAM clear here is to clear data such as the number of balls held and the number of balls counted, and the frame opening information is not cleared.

After step H28, the process proceeds to step H29. On the other hand, if the RAM 233 has not been cleared in step H27, the process jumps to step H28 and proceeds to step H29.
In step H29, a command related to the frame opening information is transmitted to the card unit 15. The command corresponding to the frame opening information is to determine the frame opening information, and when there is evidence that the front frame 4 is opened (for example, the frame is opened at night), it is determined that there is a possibility of fraud. This is a command for notifying the unit 15 of an error or issuing a command to output error information to the hall computer 86 (and may not perform ball lending). When the front frame 4 is not opened, it is a command for determining that there is no possibility of fraud and issuing a command to the effect that there is no problem even if lending a ball to the card unit 15.
Next, in step H30, a transmission control timer is set. The transmission control timer counts the time until receiving notification of the frame opening information from the card unit 15, and the transmission control timer is set to a predetermined initial value. If the notification of receipt of the frame opening information is received from the card unit 15 within the time counted by the transmission control timer, it can be determined that the frame opening information has been normally transmitted to the card unit 15, and the notification of reception of the frame opening information is not received. Then, it is determined as a transmission error (see step H35 and the like described later).

Next, in step H31, it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred. If it is determined in step H31 that no power failure has occurred, it is determined in step H32 whether or not there is a frame release information reception notification from the card unit 15. If there is a frame opening information reception notification, it is determined that the frame opening information has been normally transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the card unit 15, and the process jumps to step H37.
On the other hand, if there is no frame release information reception notification from the card unit 15 in step H32, the process proceeds to step H33 to update the transmission control timer by (-1). As a result, the transmission control timer counts down. Next, in step H34, it is determined whether or not the transmission control timer has timed up. If not, the process returns to step H31 to repeat the loop. If a frame release information reception notification is received from the card unit 15 during loop repetition, the determination in step H32 is YES and the process returns to step H37. On the other hand, when the transmission control timer expires in step H34, the process proceeds to step H35, where a frame release information transmission error flag is set, and in step H36, a frame release information transmission error command is sent to the main control board (game control device 54). Send. Thereby, a frame opening information transmission error command is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 transmits, for example, a command related to the frame opening information to the card unit 15 based on the frame opening information transmission error command. It is also possible to notify the store clerk by performing control such as displaying an error message on the display device 41.

Next, the process proceeds to step H38, and a command related to the frame opening information is transmitted to the main control board (game control device 54). The command corresponding to the frame opening information is the frame opening information, and when there is evidence that the front frame 4 is opened (for example, the frame is opened at night), it is determined that there is a possibility of fraud. This is a command such as issuing a command for notifying an error on the display device 41 under the control of the effect control device 53 via the control device 54. Also, the frame opening information is determined and the front frame 4 is opened. If not, it is a command for determining that there is no possibility of fraud and issuing a command to the game control device 54 that there is no problem even if a game is played.
After step H38, the process proceeds to step H39. On the other hand, if it is determined in step H32 that there is a frame opening information reception notification from the card unit 15 and the process jumps to step H37, a frame opening information transmission normal command is transmitted to the main control board (game control device 54) in step H37. To do. Thereby, the game control device 54 recognizes that the frame opening information has been normally transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the card unit 15.
Next, the process proceeds to step H38, and a command related to the frame opening information is transmitted to the main control board (game control device 54). As a result, as described above, when there is a possibility of fraud from the determination of the frame opening information, an error can be notified on the display device 41 under the control of the effect control device 53 via the game control device 54. .

After step H38, the process proceeds to step H39, for example, a CTC (Counter / Timer provided in the CPU 231).
Start Circuit). CTC is a circuit for timer interrupt.
Next, in step H40, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are permitted, and when proceeding to the next step H41, the number of times of power failure monitoring signal check (for example, 2 times) is set in step H41, and in the next step H42. It is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. If the power failure monitoring signal is on, the process proceeds to step H43 for final judgment of power failure, and if not, the process returns to step H41. During normal operation, steps H42 to H41 are repeated.

Then, when proceeding to Step H43, it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of times of the check. If it is negative, it is determined that a power failure has occurred and the process returns to step H42.
When the power failure monitoring signal is turned on, this power failure monitoring signal may be used as an NMI interrupt signal to interrupt the processing being executed and forcibly execute the power failure processing after step H44. However, with the configuration of this example, the power failure monitoring signal is turned on temporarily and instantaneously due to noise, etc., even though no power failure has actually occurred, since the power failure monitoring signal is turned on multiple times at step H43. In this case, there is an advantage that it is not erroneously determined that a power failure has occurred.

Then, when proceeding to Step H44, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are prohibited, and then all outputs are turned off at the next Step H45 (off data is output to all output ports), and then a power failure occurs at Step H46. Execute information setting processing. In the power outage information setting process, the power outage inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power outage inspection area 1, and the power outage inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power outage inspection area 2.
After step H46, in the next step H47, a checksum of the data in the RAM 233 is calculated and saved in a predetermined checksum area, and then access to the RAM 233 is prohibited in step H48, and then waiting.
In addition, the power failure process of the above steps H44-H48 is performed before a power supply voltage falls below the operating voltage of CPU231 by a power failure (a normal power supply interruption is included).
As described above, when it is determined in step H22 or H24 that a power failure has occurred, the process jumps to step H44, performs the processing after step H44 described above, and finally prohibits access to the RAM 233 in step H48. Will wait.

[Main control command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the main control command reception interrupt process of the payout control device 230 will be described with reference to FIG.
In this process, an interrupt for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 54 to the payout control device 230 is performed.
When this routine is started, the register is first saved in step H51. Next, in step H52, the main control serial reception buffer status is read, and in the next step H53, it is determined whether there is reception data. In this case, a command (for example, a prize ball command or the like) may be transmitted from the game control device 54 to the payout control device 230, so that the presence / absence of received data of the command is determined.
If it is determined in step H53 that there is received data, the process proceeds to step H54, and the command is read from the main control serial reception buffer. Next, a main control command determination table is set in step H55, and determination data corresponding to the command is acquired in step H56. Next, in step H57, it is determined whether or not the determination data is normal. If it is normal, the address of the information setting area corresponding to the command is acquired in step H58.

Here, in the information setting area, for example, for the prize ball command, various areas are set by assigning addresses such as setting the number of prize balls represented by the command in the prize ball number area. This time, the address of the information setting area corresponding to the command received from the game control device 54 is acquired.
For example, if the command received from the game control device 54 this time is a prize ball command, the address of the prize ball number area assigned to the number of prize balls represented by the prize ball command is acquired.

After step H58, the process proceeds to step H59, where the value meant by the command is saved in the information setting area. This is to decode the instruction content of the command received from the game control device 54 and hold it in the information setting area. For example, if the command received from the game control device 54 is a prize ball command this time, the prize ball command By acquiring the address of the number of prize balls assigned to the number of prize balls represented by, the number of prize balls represented by the prize ball command is read, and from this, the "number of prize balls" is decoded as the value that the command means. To save.
After step H59, the process returns to step H52 to repeat the loop. Then, all the main control serial reception buffer statuses are read out, and the loop from step H52 to step H59 is repeated. If it is determined in step H53 that there is no reception data, the process branches from step H53 to step H60.
When branching to step H60, in order to resume the main routine in step H60, the main control command reception interrupt request is cleared, the register saved in step H61 is restored, all interrupts are permitted in step H62, and interrupts are interrupted. Return to the process that was interrupted from time to time. In FIG. 26 and the like, “return = RETI” represents returning to the processing interrupted at the time of interrupt. On the other hand, “RET” represents a return from the subroutine to the original routine.

[Timer interrupt processing of the payout controller]
Next, the timer interruption process of the payout control device 230 will be described with reference to FIG.
This timer interrupt process is started by the processes of steps H39 and H40 in the main process described above, and is repeatedly executed at a predetermined timer interrupt cycle.
In this timer interrupt process, first, in step H71, register saving or interrupt prohibition is executed as necessary, and then the input process in step H72 is executed. In this input processing, each of the above-described sensors (launch ball detection switch 161, foul ball detection switch 162, out ball detection switch 163, first sealed ball detection switch 164, second sealed ball detection switch 165, glass frame opening switch 125). The detection signal is read from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 and the like.
Specifically, the output value of each sensor is determined at each timer interruption period, and when the output value of the same level continues for a specified number of times (for example, twice), the level of this output value is detected by each sensor. Read as deterministic value of signal. When it is read that any one of the sensors is on, a flag (input flag) indicating that is set.
Here, the front frame opening switch 126 detects the opening of the front frame 4 at night (when main power is not supplied to the gaming machine), but even in a normal state (when main power is supplied to the gaming machine). The opening of the front frame 4 is detected.

Next, in step H73, output processing for setting and outputting the output data set in steps H84, H85, H86 and the like described later to the corresponding output port is executed.
Next, card unit connection confirmation processing is performed in step H74. The card unit connection confirmation process is for confirming whether the card unit 15 is turned on, whether the communication between the card unit 15 and the pachinko machine 1 can be normally performed, or the like.
For example, the voltage of the input (VL input) connected to the power supply line of the card unit 15 via the first card unit connection terminal plate 52A is turned on (that is, the voltage is higher than the specified value). If the voltage of the VL input is turned on as a result of the determination, for example, a card unit connection indicating that the card unit 15 is powered on and connected to the payout control device 230, for example. Processing such as setting a confirmation flag is performed.
Next, timer update processing is performed in step H75. Thereby, the update of various timers handled by the processing in the payout control program is performed in an integrated manner. For example, the initial value setting, value determination, and processing based on the determination result are performed in different routines. However, if the initial value is set, the update may be performed in the timer update processing. Moreover, the timer used for each determination mentioned later may be updated as mentioned above, for example, may be updated by a corresponding routine.
Next, switch monitoring processing is performed in step H76. This is because the input flags (input flags such as the launch ball detection switch 161, the foul ball detection switch 162, the out ball detection switch 163, etc.) set as described above are monitored, and the number of balls held due to the launch is reduced. Processing for enclosing ball control such as increase / decrease of the number of balls is performed (details will be described later).

Next, an error monitoring process is executed in step H77. This is a process for monitoring an undetected error of each sensor described above, an open state of the glass frame 5, and the like.
For example, the types of errors monitored in this error monitoring process are as follows.
・ Glass frame open (Glass frame 5 open)
-Front frame open (front frame 4 open)
・ Switch abnormality (connector disconnection, switch failure, etc.)
-Board surface ball number error (described later with reference to FIG. 37)
-Enclosed ball number error (described later with reference to FIG. 36)

The enclosing ball number error includes the following.
(A) Enclosed ball number shortage error (b) Enclosed ball number excessive error (c) Enclosed path error error There are other errors in the card unit unconnected error, which are the card unit in step S74 described above. It is monitored by connection confirmation processing (details will be described later).

Next, the process proceeds to step H78, and a firing permission signal editing process is performed. This is when the firing permission signal on data is set when the firing is possible and the card unit 15 is not connected (for example, when a card unit connection confirmation flag (step H74) described later is not set). Is used to set firing permission signal off data (cannot be fired). This includes, for example, a forced firing process in which a ball remaining at the launch tip (the launch rod is operated by the launch solenoid 173) at the time of a power failure is shot empty when the power is turned on (details will be described later).
Next, the number of possessed balls is added at step H79. This is a process of receiving a prize ball command from the game control device 54 and adding it to the number of balls held (details will be described later).
Next, in step H80, it is determined whether or not all card unit communication line confirmations in step H74 are OK. This is because the board (first card unit connection terminal plate 52A) for wiring connection between the pachinko machine 1 side (payout control device 230 side) and the card unit 15 side is connected, and the confirmation result of the communication line is OK. The process branches depending on whether or not there is. If the card unit communication line confirmation is OK, step H81, step H82, step H83, and step H84 are sequentially executed and the process proceeds to step H85. If not OK, the process jumps to step H85 without executing steps H81 to H84.
Steps H81 to H84 are processes for substantially starting and advancing the game, as will be described later. Therefore, if the determination in step H80 is negative, the game is not started and does not proceed. means. That is, in this example, if the communication line between the payout control device 230 and the card unit 15 is not normally connected, the game is not substantially advanced. This makes it difficult to perform illegal actions such as acquiring the number of balls by illegal input to the payout control device 230 using this communication line, and the effect of improving security can be obtained.

If all card unit communication line confirmations are OK in step H80, the ball feed control process is performed in step H81. This includes setting the ON data of the ball feed solenoid 172 when the conditions for sending the ball to the launch position are complete, and processing to send the ball to the launch position, as well as powering the ball remaining at the launch pad during a power failure A process of turning off the ball feed solenoid 172 in order to cope with the shot by launching at the time of throwing is also included (details will be described later).
Next, in step H82, a settlement / rest control process is performed. This is to monitor the behavior of the break switch 312 and the payment instruction from the card unit 15 and perform processing related to payment and break (details will be described later). Next, card unit reception analysis processing is performed in step H83. This is to analyze the signal received from the card unit 15 by the payout control device 230 (details will be described later).

Next, the process proceeds to step H84, where a periodic command transmission process is performed. This is because, as described above, various game information from the game control device 54 and various information in the enclosed ball game (various information including the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls) are given to the card unit 15 from the payout control device 230 at predetermined intervals. (For example, 400 ms), and various information (various information including the number of balls held and the number of counted balls) from the payout control device 230 to the game control device 54 at predetermined intervals (for example, 400 ms). Therefore, transmission at predetermined intervals is executed by a periodic command transmission process.
After step H84, the process proceeds to step H85. Further, as described above, when the determination result of step H80 is NO, the process jumps to step H85 without executing steps H81 to H84.
When the process proceeds to step H85 in this way, external information editing processing is executed in step H85. This edits data to be output from the payout control device 230 to an external device such as the hall computer 86 or the card unit 15.
However, the information from the game control device 54 is transferred to the hall computer 86 and the ball management device 85 via the card unit 15 via the external information terminal board 51 and the first card unit connection terminal board 52A via the payout control device 230. Necessary information is output.

Next, LED editing processing is performed in step H86. This performs processing related to display of various LEDs (for example, an error display LED 67, a ball count indicator 40, an LED built in the counting switch LED 311, an LED built in the break switch 312).
Next, a polishing apparatus control process is performed in step H87. This is to send an instruction to the polishing control device 59 via the game control device 54 and the effect control device 53 to control the operation of the encapsulated ball polishing device 56 (details will be described later).
After step H87, to resume the main routine, the timer interrupt request is cleared in step H88, the saved register is restored in step H89, all interrupts are permitted in step H90, and Return to the interrupted process.

[Switch monitoring processing]
Next, the switch monitoring process H76 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, the launch ball detection switch monitoring process is performed in step H101, then the foul ball detection switch monitoring process is performed in step H102, and then the out ball detection switch monitoring process is performed in step H103. Next, a count switch monitoring process is executed in step H104, and further, a count ball use switch monitoring process is executed in step H105, and then the process returns. Details of each process will be described later.

[Launching ball detection switch monitoring process]
Next, the shot ball detection switch monitoring process H101 in the switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step H111 whether or not there has been an input to the shot ball detection switch 161 (that is, whether or not a game ball to be launched has been detected). If there is an input, the process proceeds to step H112, and the value of the number of possessed balls is updated (decremented) by “−1”. The number of balls held here is total ball number information managed inside the payout control device 230 (payout control board). The processing in step H112 is performed because it is necessary to subtract one ball from the ball as it is launched.
Next, the process proceeds to step H113, and the updated number of possessed balls is updated (decremented) by “−1”. The updated number of balls is information on the number of balls that has changed from the previous number of balls, and is obtained by subtracting one updated number of balls as the ball is launched.
Next, in step H114, the value of the board ball number is updated (incremented) by “+1”, and the process proceeds to step H115.

According to the routine from step H111 to step H114, each time one game ball is fired, the number of board balls is incremented by one and the number of balls held is decremented by one. The number of board balls is the number of game balls that have been fired and not collected, that is, the number of game balls that are falling mainly on the game board surface (in the game area). Here, the process of step H112 constitutes a firing subtraction process for reducing the number of possessed balls (game value) in response to the game balls being launched into the game area.
Next, in step H115, the number-of-balls display light counter is updated (incremented) by “+1”, and in step H116, “−1” is saved in the display updated number-of-balls storage area corresponding to the light counter. This is because it is necessary to display the change in the number of balls that accompanies the launch of the ball on the ball number indicator 40, so that the value of the ball number display light counter is updated (incremented) by "+1" and advanced, “−1” accompanying the launch of the ball is stored in the display updated possession ball number storage area corresponding to the advanced light counter, and the stored “−1” is subtracted from the display possession ball number to display the updated possession ball It is a number.
That is, the amount of change for displaying the number of balls to be displayed for each change event on the number-of-balls display 40 (six LEDs of 7 segments can be arranged to display a 6-digit value (number of balls)). Although it is stored in the display updated possession ball number storage area, here, the number of possession balls is reduced by one due to the launch of the ball, so “−1” is stored in the display update possession ball number storage area. .
After step H116, the process returns. As a result, the number of balls held is subtracted by “1” and the display of the ball holding number display 40 is updated.

[Foul ball detection switch monitoring process]
Next, the foul ball detection switch monitoring process H102 in the switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step H121 whether or not there has been an input to the foul sphere detection switch 162 (that is, a foul sphere has been detected). If there is an input, the process proceeds to step H122 where the value of the number of held balls is updated (incremented) by “+1”, and the number of updated balls is updated (incremented) by “+1” in the next step H123. Here, since it is a foul sphere, one sphere is collected, and one is added to the updated number of possessed balls. As a result, the number of updated possessed balls is incremented by “1” corresponding to the foul ball.

Next, the process proceeds to step H124, and the value of the number of board balls is updated (decremented) by “−1”.
According to the routine from step H121 to step H124, each time one foul ball (a game ball that has been launched but has not reached the game area) is collected, the number of board balls is decremented by one, and the number of balls held Is added. The reason for adding the number of balls is because it was a foul, so that there was no fire so as not to lose the player.
Next, the process proceeds to step H125, and the number-of-balls-displaying light counter is updated (incremented) by “+1”. In step H126, “+1” is saved in the display-based updated number-of-balls storage area corresponding to the light counter. This is because it is necessary to display the change in the number of balls that accompanies the foul of the ball on the ball number display 40, so that the value of the ball number display light counter is updated (incremented) by “+1” and advanced. “+1” associated with the foul of the sphere is stored in the display updated possession ball number storage area corresponding to the advanced light counter, and the stored “+1” is added to the display possession ball number to display the updated possession ball number To do.
That is, every time one foul ball is collected, it is necessary to increment the number of possessed balls. Therefore, the value of the display updated retained ball number storage area is updated (incremented) by “+1”, and the number of retained balls This is because one display 40 is added and displayed. As a result, the number of held balls is incremented by “1” corresponding to the foul ball, and the display of the held ball number display 40 is updated.

[Out ball detection switch monitoring process]
Next, the out-sphere detection switch monitoring process H103 in the switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step H131 whether or not there has been an input to the out sphere detection switch 163 (that is, an out sphere has been detected). If there is an input, the process proceeds to step H132 and the value of the number of outs is updated (incremented) by "+1". In the next step H133, it is determined whether the number of outs is 10 or more. Proceed to step H136. If the number of outs is 10 or more, the value of the out number signal output count is updated (incremented) by “+1” in step H134, and the value of the out number is set to zero (cleared to 0) in the next step H135. The process proceeds to step H136.
Proceeding to step H136, it is determined whether or not a board surface ball number error is in progress. If a board surface ball number error is in progress (specifically, if a board surface ball number error flag in FIG. 37 described later is set), step H137 is performed. If the board ball number error is not in progress (specifically, if the board ball number error flag in FIG. 37 described later is cleared), the process proceeds to step H138.
In step H137, it is determined whether or not a glass frame open error is in progress. If a glass frame open error is in progress (specifically, if a glass frame open error flag in FIG. 38 described later is set), the process returns. If the glass frame opening error is not in progress (specifically, if a glass frame opening error flag in FIG. 38 described later is cleared), the process proceeds to step H138.
In step H138, the value of the board ball number is updated (decremented) by “−1”, and the process returns.

  According to this routine, every time one out ball is collected, one board ball number is subtracted. However, if there is a board surface ball number error and a glass frame opening error is in progress, it is considered that the glass frame 5 is opened and the board surface ball number error (such as a ball clogging in the game area) is being solved. The subtraction of the H138 board ball number is not executed. When the operation for eliminating the board surface ball number error (ball jam in the game area, etc.) is completed and the glass frame is closed, the board surface ball number is cleared by an error release switch monitoring process of FIG. 35 described later (step H194). ).

Note that the out balls detected in step H131 include both game balls that have been fired and have become safe (winning) and game balls that have been out (no winning). That is, the number of outs means the number of all game balls that are discharged and collected from the game area. The out number signal is one piece of external information output to the hall computer 86 (management device). As the out number signal, a signal of one pulse is output for ten out balls. Therefore, in steps H132 to H135, the number of out balls is counted as the out number, and every time the out number reaches 10, the out number signal output count is incremented by 1 to clear this out number to zero. Thereby, the number of times (the number of pulses) of outputting the out number signal (signal for 10 out balls) is counted as the out number signal output number.
When editing of the out number signal is completed in the out number signal editing process (step H485), which will be described later, the out number signal output count is decremented by 1, and the edited out number signal is output by the above-described output process (step H73). Is done.
In addition, even if a board surface ball number error occurs due to the steps H136 and H137, if the glass frame 5 is not opened, step H138 is executed and the board surface ball number is updated. When the player hits the front surface of the glass frame 5 or when the game ball is resolved by the collision of the game balls, the error is canceled without operating the error cancel switch 68. Troublesome for both shoppers and shop assistants.

[Counting switch monitoring process]
Next, the count switch monitoring process H104 in the switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step H141 whether or not the counting switch 311 is on. If the counting switch 311 is in the on state, it is determined that the player intends to count the number of balls held by pressing the counting switch 311, and the process proceeds to step H 142, and the initial value (for example, 2 seconds) is set in the counting stop timer during counting. Set. This is to set the firing stop period in order to stop the launch of the ball during the counting of the number of balls.
In addition, during the launch of the ball, for example, it is assumed that the launch control by the payout control device 230 and the touch sensor 174 are turned on.

Next, in step H143, the count switch-on timer is updated (incremented) by “+1”, and in step H144, it is determined whether or not the count switch-on timer is greater than or equal to the upper limit value. The counting switch-on timer counts the elapsed time from when the player presses the counting switch 311.
The upper limit value in step H144 corresponds to a time during which the number of balls can be counted, and is set to 6 seconds, for example. If the count switch-on timer is greater than or equal to the upper limit value in step H144, the process proceeds to step H145 and the count switch-on timer is kept at the upper limit value. This means that if the counting switch-on timer is set to a value larger than the time value (for example, 6 seconds) at which the total number of balls can be counted, the upper limit value is kept so that the timer does not loop. It is.
After step H145, the process proceeds to step H146. On the other hand, if the count switch-on timer is less than the upper limit value in step H144, the process jumps to step H145 and proceeds to step H146.

In step H146, it is determined whether the count switch-on timer is equal to 1 second. If the count switch-on timer is equal to 1 second, the process proceeds to step H147. Step H146 is a determination for setting the number of units of counting in the processing after Step H147 when the counting switch-on timer is 1 second. The time of counting switch-on timer = 1 second corresponds to the minimum time for counting the number of balls held by pressing the counting switch 311. Therefore, the operation of the counting switch 311 in a time shorter than 1 second is invalid, and the counting of the number of balls is not started. Since less than 1 second may cause the player to touch the counting switch 311 by mistake, it is invalidated to prevent malfunction.
If it is determined in step H146 that the count switch-on timer is not 1 second, this time jumps to step H150 without setting the number of units for counting. On the other hand, if the count switch-on timer is 1 second, the process proceeds to step H147 to set the number of units for counting.

In the processing after step H147, the unit number of the count is determined as follows. The count unit number is, for example, a numerical value (hereinafter referred to as a unit count value) indicating how many balls are counted per second.
In step H147, it is determined whether or not the number of balls possessed is “1000” or less. If the number of balls is “1000” or less, the process branches to step H160 to set “50” as the unit count value, and then proceeds to step H150. On the other hand, if the number of held balls exceeds “1000” in step H147, the process proceeds to step H148, where it is determined whether or not the number of held balls is “10000” or less. If the number of balls is “10000” or less, the process branches to step H161 to set “100” as the unit count value, and then proceeds to step H150.
On the other hand, if the number of held balls exceeds “10000” in step H148, “1000” is set as the unit count value in step H149, and the process proceeds to step H150.
Next, when the process proceeds to Step H150, it is determined whether or not the number of possessed balls is “0”. If the number of balls held is “0” in step H150, the process returns (no counting is performed).

When the processing proceeds to step H151 and subsequent steps, it is first determined in step H151 whether or not the count switch-on timer has a timing value for performing unit counting.
The value of the timing for performing unit counting is that the operation of the counting switch 311 is invalidated because the operation of the counting switch 311 is invalidated when the minimum time for counting the number of balls held by pressing the counting switch 311 is less than 1 second. It is a time of 1 second or more, and a timing with 0.5 second as a unit break after 1 second. Specifically, the timing corresponds to a timer value indicating 1.0 seconds, 1.5 seconds, 2.0 seconds, 2.5 seconds,.
Therefore, the processing of step H151 is as described above, with timings of 0.5 seconds such as 1.0 seconds, 1.5 seconds, 2.0 seconds, 2.5 seconds,. Value of timing for performing unit counting).

Here, the number of units of counting described above will be described. Since the counting method of the number of balls in Example 1 is the same as that of FIG. 117 described later, it will be described with reference to FIG.
In FIG. 117, “pressing time” indicates the operation time (pressing time) of the counting switch 311, and FIG. 117 shows how to count the “pressing time” and the range of the number of balls. ing.
Specifically, it is as follows. The following unit count value corresponds to “count unit”.
・ Pressing time of the counting switch 311 = less than 1 second: Invalid regardless of the range of the number of balls held. 1.0 seconds:
(A) Counting 50 balls when the number of balls is 1000 or less (meaning unit count value = 50, the same applies hereinafter)
(B) Counting 100 balls from 1001 to 10,000 balls (c) Counting 1000 balls or more from 10001, and thereafter every 0.5 seconds:
(B) Count 50 balls when the number of balls is 1000 or less. (B) Count 100 balls when the number of balls is between 1001 and 10,000. (C) Count 1000 when the number is 10001 or more. .0 seconds:
(B) Count all balls with 1,000 or less balls (b) Count all balls with 1001 to 10,000 balls (c) Count all balls with 10001 balls or more

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the time of unit counting is determined by dividing the pressing time of the counting switch 311 every 0.5 seconds. As described above, the operation of the counting switch 311 is invalidated for less than 1 second to prevent the counting switch 311 from malfunctioning. Regardless of how many balls are held, the count time of the count switch 311 is all counted in 6.0 seconds.

Now, returning to the flow, if the count switch-on timer is the value at which the unit count is performed in step H151, it is determined that the number of balls possessed by the operation of the count switch 311 is determined, and the process proceeds to the subsequent step H152. It is determined whether the number is less than the unit count value. If the number of held balls is less than the unit count value, the number of held balls at that time is replaced with the unit count value in step H153. This is to simplify the counting process by replacing the remaining number of balls with the unit count value when only the number of balls remaining less than the unit count value remains.
After step H153, the process proceeds to step H154. On the other hand, if the number of held balls is not less than the unit count value in step H152, the process jumps to step H153 and proceeds to step H154.

Proceeding to step H154, “counting ball number + unit count value” is set as the counting ball number, and this is stored in the RAM 233 of the payout control device 230. In this way, the counting ball number is updated when the counting switch 311 is operated.
Next, in step H <b> 135, “number of balls held−unit count value” is set as the number of balls held this time, and this is stored in the RAM 233 of the payout control device 230. In this way, the number of balls held when the counting switch 311 is operated is updated.
Thus, in this example, both the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls are managed by the payout control device 230 (the card unit 17 is simply transmitted with data of the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls. Only to let you know).
Next, the process proceeds to step H156, and the routine is ended with the number of balls held (the number of balls held in step H155) set as the number of held balls for display, and the process returns.
By the processing of step H155 and step H156, every time the number of balls is counted, the number of balls is subtracted from the unit count value and stored as the number of balls for display in the storage area of the RAM 233 for storing the number of balls, and the memory of the RAM 233 is stored. Based on the number of balls for display (data) stored in the area, the number of balls after counting is displayed on the ball number display 40.

Next, a description will be given of a case where the determination at each step branches to a route different from that described above.
If the count switch 311 is not on in step H141, it is determined that the player has not pressed the count switch 311 or has pressed the count switch 311 but released for a moment, and the process branches to step H157, where the shooting stop timer is counted. If it is not “0”, the timer is updated (decremented) by “−1”.
This is when the player has not pressed the counting switch 311 at all. Since the process returns through steps H158 and H159 described later, counting of the number of balls is not started, but if the player intends to start counting the number of balls by pressing the count switch 311, something is being counted. Since a grace period (for example, 2 seconds) is provided so that the counting of the number of balls can be continued even for a moment when the counting switch 311 is turned off, counting is performed to count the grace period. The medium firing stop timer is updated (decremented) by “−1”.
On the other hand, if the firing stop timer during counting is “0”, it is determined that the player has not pressed the counting switch 311.

After step H157, it is determined in subsequent step H158 whether or not the counting stop timer is “0”. If the firing stop timer is not “0” during counting, the routine returns and the routine is repeated. As described above, when the player intends to start counting the number of balls held by pressing the count switch 311, the count switch 311 is held for a moment during counting even if the count switch 311 is turned off. Although a grace period is provided so that the counting of the number of balls can be continued, NO in step H157 is a case where the grace period is counted.
On the other hand, if the counting stop timer is “0” in step H158, the process proceeds to step H159 to clear the count switch-on timer to “0” and returns. In this case, the player has not pressed the counting switch 311 at all, and the counting of the number of balls is not started.

  Next, if it is determined in step H151 that the count switch-on timer does not have a timing value for performing unit counting, the process branches to step H162, and whether or not the count switch-on timer has a timing value for performing total counting is determined. judge. As shown in FIG. 117, the timing of total counting means that when the pressing time of the counting switch 311 is 6.0 seconds, all the number of balls is counted regardless of the number of balls. Therefore, the timing (that is, 6.0 seconds). Therefore, if it is not the value of the timing when the pressing time of the counting switch 311 becomes 6.0 seconds in step H162, the routine is finished and the process returns, and the timing when the pressing time of the counting switch 311 becomes 6.0 seconds. If it is a value, the process proceeds to step H163, where “counted ball number + number of held balls” is set as the counted ball number and stored in the RAM 233 of the payout control device 230.

If it is a case where the total number of balls is counted and the game is to be ended and settled, the count switch 311 is pressed to count the number of balls to be counted, and then the message / operation area section By touching the “game end” button on the screen 306 and then touching the return button 304, the game card in which all of the number of possessed balls (here, all of the counted balls) are recorded is the card unit 15. Will be discharged from. Accordingly, since this time corresponds to the time of payment, the payout control device 230 transmits data of the total number of balls (number of balls held + number of balls counted) to the card unit 15 at the time of payment.
Next, in step H164, the number of held balls is cleared to “0”, and in step H165, the number of held balls for display is cleared to “0”, the routine is terminated, and the process returns.
By the processing from step H162 to step H165, all of the number of possessed balls is counted and saved in the counted number of balls area, and thereafter, both the number of possessed balls and the number of possessed balls for display are cleared to “0”. .

[Counting ball use switch monitoring process]
Next, the counting ball use switch monitoring process H105 in the switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step H171 whether or not the counting ball use switch 314 has been pressed. The counting ball use switch 314 is operated when the player desires to move the ball from the counting ball number to the holding ball number. When the counting ball use switch 314 is operated once, the counting ball use number is determined from the counting ball number. The configuration is such that the movement of a ball (for example, a predetermined amount = 100 balls) is started. Therefore, in step H171, the counting ball use switch 314 is pressed, and it is determined whether or not the player has requested the movement of the ball from the counting ball number to the holding ball number.
If the counting ball use switch 314 is not pressed, the routine is terminated and the process returns.
On the other hand, if the counting ball use switch 314 is pressed, the process proceeds to step H172 to determine whether the counting ball number is not “0”. If “NO” in the determination in step H172, the counted number of balls is “0”, so that it is determined that the movement to the number of held balls cannot be performed, and the routine is ended and the process returns.

If the determination in step H172 is YES, it is determined that there is a counting ball and it is possible to move to the number of holding balls, the process proceeds to step H173, and whether or not the counting ball number is “100” or more. Determine. If the number of counting balls is “100” or more, “100” (that is, 100 counting balls) out of the number of counting balls is set as the number of counting balls used in step H174. Thereby, 100 balls out of the counted number of balls move to the number of balls held. After step H174, the process proceeds to step H175.
On the other hand, when the number of counting balls is less than “100” in step H173, the process branches to step H179, and all the counting balls are set as the number of counting balls used. As a result, all the counted balls move to the number of balls held.
This is because, when the counting ball use switch 314 is operated once, a predetermined amount (for example, 100) of balls is moved from the counting ball number to the number of possessed balls. This is because the ball may be moved to the number of balls possessed.
After step H179, the process proceeds to step H175.

When the process proceeds from step H174 to step H175, or when the process proceeds from step H179 to step H175, the sum of “the number of balls held + the number of counting balls used” is the upper limit value for design storage (eg, 250,000) in step H175. It is determined whether or not it is equal to or greater than the design upper limit of the number of storages. In step H176, "250,000-number of balls held" is updated and registered as a new number of used counting balls, and then the process proceeds to step H177. This is because, in practice, the number of balls held + the number of counting balls used will not exceed 250,000, but in order to prevent the player's holding and counting balls from losing. is there.
On the other hand, if the total of “the number of balls held + the number of counting balls used” is less than the designed upper limit value (for example, 250,000) in step H175, the process jumps to step H177.
Next, when the process proceeds to step H177, “number of held balls + counted ball used number” is updated as a new number of held balls in step H177, and “counted ball number−counted ball used number” is newly updated in step H178. Update as the correct counting ball number. This is because the counting ball use switch 314 is operated to move the ball from the counting ball number to the holding ball number, so that the values of the holding ball number and the counting ball number are updated in accordance with the situation.
After step H178, the routine is terminated and the process returns.

According to the counting ball use switch monitoring process, when the counting ball use switch 314 is operated once, a predetermined amount (for example, 100) of balls moves from the number of counting balls to the number of possessed balls. If the number of counted balls is less than a predetermined amount (for example, 100), all the counted balls move to the number of balls held.
Therefore, the player can taste the game sensation of the concept of moving the ball from the ball box to the upper plate as well as increasing the number of balls that can be fired by returning from the counted ball number to the number of balls held. is there.

[Error monitoring process]
Next, the error monitoring process H77 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, the process returns after executing the error release switch monitoring process in step H181, the enclosed ball number monitoring process in step H182, the board ball number error monitoring process in step H183, and the frame opening error monitoring process in step H184. To do.
The error release switch monitoring process, the enclosed ball number monitoring process, the board ball number error monitoring process, and the frame opening error monitoring process will be described in detail later.

[Error release switch monitoring process]
Next, the error release switch monitoring process H181 in the error monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step H191 whether or not the error release switch 68 is turned on. If turned on, the process proceeds to step H192, and if not turned on, the process returns. In step H192, the operation of changing the glass frame 5 from the open state to the closed state (the opening and closing operation of the glass frame) is detected before the error release switch 68 is turned on based on the output of the glass frame opening switch 125. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (that is, the opening / closing history of the glass frame is confirmed based on the opening / closing information set in step H252 of FIG. 38 described later, for example). And when this operation | movement (opening / closing operation | movement of a glass frame) is detected, it progresses to step H193, and when not detected, it returns.

Proceeding to step H193, the information that the opening / closing operation of the glass frame 5 has been detected is cleared (i.e., returned to a state where there is no such information), and then the number of board balls is cleared (i.e., step H194). Then, the data on the number of board balls is returned to zero), and then in step H195, an error recovery command is transmitted to the game control device 54 (main control board), and then the process returns. In addition, the game control device 54 that has received the error recovery command sends the command to the effect control device 53, and that the error is being recovered by the effect control device 53 (that is, work to eliminate an error in the number of board balls, which will be described later). For example, the display device 41 is configured to execute a character display of “confirming error recovery”.
In the present embodiment, the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230 are separately configured. However, when the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230 are integrally configured with one main control board. A command (for example, a command during error recovery) is transmitted from the main board to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 that receives the command receives a predetermined display (for example, as described above). The display device 41 is configured to perform control to execute “displaying error recovery confirmation”. Similarly, when the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230 are separately configured as in the present embodiment, commands from the payout control device 230 are sent via the game control device 54 to the effect control device. 53, the production control device 53 receives the same command, and controls the display of the display device 41 based on the command. That is, a command transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the game control device 54 (main control board) is transmitted to the effect control device 53 via the game control device 54, and the display control device 53 based on the command is transmitted by the effect control device 53. Display control is performed.

  Here, when the number of board balls is cleared to zero by the process of step H194, the determination result of step H201 in FIG. 36 described later becomes negative, and the enclosed ball number excess error flag is cleared in step H202. In this case, the determination result in step H231 in FIG. 37, which will be described later, also becomes negative, and the board ball number error flag is cleared in step H235. However, an encapsulated ball number excess error described later has occurred, and this encapsulated ball number excess error has not actually been resolved (for example, the glass frame 5 is opened to release the clogged ball in the game area and the glass frame 5 Is closed and the error release switch 68 is turned on, but if the number of encapsulated balls continues to be excessive as a whole), the enclosing ball number confirmation determination process executed as described later (step H209 and after in FIG. 36) ), For example, step H212 is executed, and the error flag indicating that the number of encapsulated balls is excessive is set again.

  Therefore, according to the routine of FIG. 35, the glass frame 5 is closed after being opened, and then the error release switch 68 is turned on to clear the number of board balls, and the above-mentioned board ball number error flag is set. Release etc. are executed. As a result, there is an abnormality that causes the number of board balls to exceed the specified number due to clogging of game balls (board board ball number error), or an enclosed ball number error (enclosed ball number excess error, enclosed ball number insufficient error, enclosure path error error). When this occurs, when a store clerk or the like of the amusement hall opens the glass frame 5 and manually closes the glass frame 5 after solving the clogging (or shortage of balls), and then turns on the error release switch 68, This error detection state (the state where the error flag is set) is automatically canceled. Therefore, there is an effect that the error can be canceled accurately and smoothly.

  In other words, the error detection state cannot be canceled simply by turning on the error cancel switch 68, and it is not possible to cancel unless the ball clogging is actually resolved. Further, in order to increase the accuracy, it is not necessary to perform another operation, but an additional condition is to open and close the glass frame 5 which is an operation that is absolutely necessary for releasing the ball clogging. Error cancellation can be realized. In the process of FIG. 35, the error flag (for example, the excessive number of encapsulated balls error flag or the board ball number error flag) is not cleared, but the condition for clearing the board ball number is set in step H194. The various error detection states described above related to the encapsulated sphere are canceled. For this reason, the error detection status cancellation process for a large number of error flags (enclosed ball count error, encapsulated ball count error, encapsulated path error error, board ball count error flags) is substantially realized with a small number of steps. As a result, the processing is simplified. In addition, after an error canceling operation (operation including the operations of steps H191 and H192) is performed, a process for checking the number of encapsulated spheres is executed and the number of encapsulated spheres is normal (encapsulated sphere excessive error, encapsulated sphere The error flag is canceled after confirming that the error is not a shortage error or an enclosure path error, so that the accuracy of error cancellation can be further improved.

  In addition, if a board ball number error occurs and the glass frame 5 is opened to try to resolve it manually, the game ball that has been clogged will collide with a game nail in the game area and jump out of the game area. May end up. Thus, even when the game ball is lost without being collected from the out-ball inlet 23, the number of board balls is cleared in step H194, so that the number of board balls is determined to be greater than or equal to the specified number in step H231 described later. The game can be resumed unless it is determined that there is an insufficient number of encapsulated balls in Steps H216 and H219, which will be described later, and problems such as the player feeling dissatisfied are avoided. It should be noted that even if the glass ball 5 is opened in Steps H137 and H138, the number of board balls is not updated even if it passes through the out ball detection switch. Therefore, when the glass frame 5 is opened, the error release switch 68 is operated. And need to clear the error. Furthermore, by clearing the board ball number in step H194, the board ball number error is resolved, so the board ball number is in a positive state even though there is no game ball on the board. Therefore, it does not develop into a problem that a board ball number error occurs frequently even though it is in a normal state.

  In addition, the operation | work for eliminating the factor (ball clogging, a ball shortage, a ball excess) of a board surface ball number error or an enclosed ball number error can be performed as follows, for example. First, for example, a clogged ball (a so-called grape or the like) on the board surface (the front surface of the game board 20 including the game area 22) applies a shock by pushing, pulling, or impacting a ball clogged manually by opening the glass frame 5. It can be resolved by letting it flow down. If the number of encapsulated balls is excessive, the front frame 4 is opened in addition to the glass frame 5 as necessary, and the ball feeding device described above is manually operated to send the ball to the launch position. By removing by hand, it can be solved by discharging the balls one by one out of the machine. Also, when the number of encapsulated balls is insufficient, the glass frame 5 is opened, and a ball from the outside of the machine (supplemented ball) is inserted into the game area 22 from the board side to flow down (for example, flow into the out ball inlet 23). Can be resolved.

[Encapsulated ball number monitoring process]
Next, the enclosed ball number monitoring process H182 in the error monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step H201 whether or not the number of board balls is less than zero. If less than zero, the process proceeds to step H203, and if not less than zero, the process proceeds to step H202. In step S202, since the number of balls on the board is not less than zero, the enclosed ball number excess error flag is cleared, and the process proceeds to step H204. On the other hand, in step S203, since there is an abnormal state in which the number of balls on the board is less than zero and a ball has been illegally thrown into the board, an excessive ball number error flag is set, and the flow proceeds to step H205.

  Proceeding to step H204, it is determined whether or not the enclosed ball number excess error flag is the same as that at the previous processing, and if it is the same as at the previous processing (that is, it has already been cleared in the sequence before the previous processing and is cleared in the previous step H202). If it has already been cleared before being performed), the process proceeds to step H208, and if it is not the same as the previous process (that is, if it was cleared from the state set in the immediately preceding step H202), the process proceeds to step H207. . In step H207, the encapsulated ball number excess error cancel command is transmitted to the game control device 54 (main control board), and the process proceeds to step H208. Here, Step H204 is provided in order not to execute Step H207 unnecessarily and to repeatedly transmit the encapsulated ball number excessive error cancel command.

Proceeding to step H205, it is determined whether or not the enclosed ball number excess error flag is the same as that in the previous processing, and if it is the same as in the previous processing (that is, already set in the sequence before the previous processing and set in the previous step H203). If it has already been set before proceeding, the process proceeds to step H208, and if it is not the same as the previous process (that is, if it was set from the state cleared in the immediately preceding step H205), the process proceeds to step H206. . In step H206, an encapsulated ball number excess error command is transmitted to the game control device 54 (main control board), and the process proceeds to step H208. Here, Step H205 is provided in order not to execute Step H206 unnecessarily and redundantly transmit the enclosed ball number excessive error command.
The game control device 54 that has received the enclosed ball number excess error command sends the same command to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 displays an error display such as “excess balls are mixed” on the display device 41. The game control device 54, which is executed at step S3 and receives the encapsulated ball number excessive error cancel command, sends the same command to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 performs control to erase the error display.

In step H208, it is determined whether or not there is a request for confirming the number of encapsulated balls (that is, whether or not a flag for confirming the number of encapsulated balls is set). If so, the process proceeds to step H209. The process jumps (ie, does not execute) and returns. It should be noted that the enclosing ball number confirmation request flag needs to be cleared with the error canceling switch 68 when the power is turned on and when the glass frame 5 is opened and closed when an error that needs to be cancelled with the error canceling switch 68 has not occurred. This flag is set when the error release switch 68 is turned on by opening and closing the glass frame 5 when an error occurs.
When proceeding to step H209, the enclosing ball number confirmation request flag is cleared, and then at step H210, it is determined whether or not the minimum enclosing ball number detection switch (that is, the first enclosing ball detection switch 164) is turned on. If it is, the process proceeds to Step H211. If not, the process proceeds to Step H216.

Then, when proceeding to Step H211, it is determined whether or not the maximum encapsulated ball number detection switch (that is, the second encapsulated ball detection switch 165) is on. If it is on, the process proceeds to Step H212, and if it is not on. Proceed to step H214. When the process proceeds to step H212, both switches 164 and 165 are both on and an encapsulated ball number excessive error flag is set, and therefore an encapsulated ball number excessive error flag is set. It transmits to the game control apparatus 54 (main control board), and returns after that.
When the process proceeds to step H214, the number of encapsulated spheres is in the normal range (that is, the minimum and maximum is less than or equal to the maximum). The enclosing ball number shortage error flag and the enclosing path error error flag) are cleared, and the enclosing ball number error cancel command is transmitted to the game control device 54 (main control board) in the next step H215, and then the process returns.

Setting the flag means setting the flag, and clearing the flag means setting the flag not set (not set).
In addition, to cancel the state in which the enclosed ball number excess error flag is set (error detection state of the enclosed ball number excess error), as described in FIG. 35, the glass frame 5 is opened to eliminate the cause of the error. However, it is necessary to close the glass frame 5 and press the error release switch 68 after that (for example, removing an extra ball). The same applies to other enclosing ball number errors (encapsulated ball number shortage error and enclosing path error error). Even if the glass frame 5 is simply opened and closed and the error cancel switch 68 is pressed, the encapsulated ball number excess error flag is cleared by steps H194 in FIG. 35 and steps H201 and H202 in this routine (FIG. 36). If the cause of the error has not been resolved (when the number of encapsulated spheres is excessive), thereafter, the processing after step H209 of this routine (FIG. 36) is executed. A flag will be set.

On the other hand, if the determination in step H210 is NO and the process proceeds to step H216, it is determined whether or not the maximum encapsulated ball number detection switch (that is, the second encapsulated ball detection switch 165) is turned on. If not, the process proceeds to step H219. When the process proceeds to step H217, the second enclosed ball detection switch 165 is turned on even though the first enclosed ball detection switch 164 is not turned on. For example, a clogged ball is generated in the sensor flow path 77 described above. Therefore, the enclosure path abnormality error flag is set, and in the next step H218, an enclosure path abnormality error command is transmitted to the game control device 54 (main control board), and then the process returns. If the process proceeds to step H219, the number of encapsulated balls is insufficient (that is, less than the minimum), so an encapsulated ball number insufficient error flag is set, and in the next step H220, an encapsulated ball insufficient error command is issued. Send to (main control board), then return.
The game control device 54 (main control board) that has received the enclosed route abnormality error command transmits the command to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 displays, for example, an error message “path abnormality has occurred”. The game control device 54 (main control board) that is executed by the display device 41 and receives the encapsulated ball number shortage error command transmits the command to the effect control device 53. The game control device 54 (main control board) that has received the error indication “mass” on the display device 41 and has received the enclosed ball number error cancel command transmits the command to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 In this configuration, these error indications are controlled to be erased.

[Panel ball number error monitoring processing]
Next, the board surface ball number error monitoring process H183 in the error monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step H231 whether or not the number of board spheres is equal to or greater than a specified number. Here, the specified number is a value of 1 or more, for example, ten. This is because, if there are generally 10 or more board balls, there is a game problem, and it is considered that the flow of game balls is stagnant to some extent. The prescribed number is not limited to 10, and the optimum value varies depending on the gaming machine.

  Then, when the process proceeds to step H232, the board ball number error flag is set, and the process proceeds to step H233. In step H233, it is determined whether the board ball number error flag is the same as that in the previous processing. If it is the same as in the previous processing (that is, it has already been set in the sequence before the previous time and before being set in the previous step H233). If it has already been set in step H233, the flow returns to step H234. If not, the flow proceeds to step H234. In Step H234, a board surface ball number error command is transmitted to the game control device 54 (main control board), and then the process returns. Here, Step H233 is provided in order not to execute Step H234 unnecessarily and to repeatedly transmit the board surface ball number error command.

On the other hand, when proceeding to Step H235, the board surface ball number error flag is cleared, and the process proceeds to Step H236. In step H236, it is determined whether the board ball number error flag is the same as that in the previous processing. If it is the same as in the previous processing (that is, it has already been cleared in the sequence before the previous time and before it is cleared in the previous step H235). If it has already been cleared, the process returns to step H237, and if it is not the same as the previous process (that is, if it has been cleared from the state set in the previous step H235), the process proceeds to step H237. In step H237, a board surface ball number error release command is transmitted to the game control device 54 (main control board), and then the process returns. Here, step H236 is provided in order not to execute step H237 unnecessarily and to repeatedly transmit the board ball number error cancel command.
In addition, the game control device 54 (main control board) that has received the board surface ball number error command transmits the command to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53, for example, an error “a board surface ball number error has occurred”. The display is executed by the display device 41, and the game control device 54 (main control board) having received the board ball number error cancel command transmits the command to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 turns off this error display. It has a configuration.
According to this routine, when the number of board balls is abnormally increased due to ball clogging or the like in the game area or the like, the determination result of step H231 becomes affirmative, and the board ball number error flag is set in step H232, and the number of board balls An error occurs. When the ball clogging is resolved and the board ball number returns to normal, the judgment result in step H231 becomes negative, and the board ball number error flag is cleared in step H235, and the error detection state of the board ball number error is set. Canceled.

  When a board surface ball number error occurs, a security signal is output to the hall computer 86 or the like via the card unit 15; however, even if the board surface ball number error occurs, it is not impossible to fire a game ball (see FIG. 39 described later). ). Thereby, it becomes impossible to fire the game ball (that is, the game) due to mere clogging of the ball in the game area (when the number of encapsulated balls is normal), and a problem such as dissatisfaction by the player is avoided. However, when another error that should not continue the game (for example, an insufficient number of encapsulated balls) occurs along with the board ball number error, the game ball cannot be fired (see FIG. 39 described later).

[Frame open error monitoring processing]
Next, the frame opening error monitoring process H184 in the error monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step H241, it is determined whether or not the state of the glass frame opening switch 125 for detecting the opening of the glass frame 5 (front frame) is the same as in the previous process. If not the same, in step H242, the glass frame opening monitoring timer initial value (for example, a value corresponding to 100 msec) is set in the glass frame opening monitoring timer, and then the processing proceeds to step H243.
In step H243, if the glass frame opening monitoring timer is not zero, an update process for reducing the value of the glass frame opening monitoring timer by one cycle of the timer processing period is performed, and then the processing proceeds to step H244 and the glass frame opening monitoring timer If it is zero, the process proceeds to step H245. If it is not zero, the process jumps from step H245 to H252 and proceeds to step H253.

  In these steps H241 to H244, the open / close state of the glass frame 5 is monitored by the state of the glass frame open switch 125, and the same state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 100 msec) corresponding to the initial value of the glass frame open monitor timer. For the first time, the open / closed state of the glass frame 5 is determined by the processing after step H245. Thereby, the open / closed state of the glass frame 5 is determined with high reliability. That is, for example, even if the signal of the glass frame open switch 125 fluctuates instantaneously due to noise or the like, it is possible to prevent erroneous determination of the open / closed state of the glass frame 5.

Proceeding to step H245, it is determined whether the state of the glass frame opening switch 125 corresponds to the opening state of the glass frame 5. If the glass frame opening switch 125 is in the open state, the glass frame opening error flag is set in step H246 and then the process proceeds to step H248. If it is not in the open state (that is, if it is in the closed state), after clearing the glass frame open error flag in step H247, the process proceeds to step H248.
In Step H248, it is determined whether the state of the glass frame opening error flag determined this time (whether it is set or cleared) is the same as in the previous processing. Through H252, the process jumps to step H253, and if not the same, the process proceeds to step H249.

  When proceeding to step H249, a command corresponding to the currently determined glass frame opening error state (that is, the state of the glass frame opening error flag set in step H246 or H247) is transmitted to the game control device 54 (main control board). Then, the process proceeds to Step H250. Here, for example, if the glass frame open error flag is set, a command indicating a glass frame open error state is transmitted to the game control device 54 (main control board), and the game control device 54 sends the command. In response to this command, the effect control device 53 is configured to perform error display for notifying the display device 41 that the glass frame 5 is open. If the glass frame opening error flag is cleared, a command indicating that the glass frame opening error is released is transmitted to the game control device 54 (main control board), and the game control device 54 Is transmitted to the production control device 53, and the production control device 53 is configured to receive the command and erase the error display on the display device 41, for example.

In step H250, information that the glass frame 5 has been opened and closed (hereinafter referred to as opening / closing operation information) is cleared, and then in step H251, the open / close state of the glass frame 5 (front frame) determined this time is determined. If it is in the closed state (that is, the state where the glass frame opening error flag is cleared), the process proceeds to step H252, and if it is not in the closed state (that is, if the glass frame opening error flag is set), step H252 is performed. And jump to step H253.
In Step H252, the opening / closing operation information for the glass frame 5 is set, and the process proceeds to Step H253. This opening / closing operation information is used for the determination in step H192 in the error release switch monitoring process (FIG. 35) described above.

Next, when proceeding to Step H253, the front frame 4 is subjected to the same processing as Steps H241 to H249, and then returns.
That is, in step H253, it is determined whether or not the state of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 that detects the opening of the front frame 4 is the same as in the previous process. For example, after setting the front frame opening monitoring timer initial value (for example, a value corresponding to 100 msec) to the front frame opening monitoring timer in step H254, the process proceeds to step H255.

In step H255, if the front frame opening monitoring timer is not zero, an update process for reducing the value of the front frame opening monitoring timer by one cycle of the timer processing cycle is executed, and then the processing proceeds to step H256 and the front frame opening monitoring timer is executed. If it is zero, the process proceeds to step H257, and if it is not zero, the process returns.
In these steps H253 to H256, the open / closed state of the front frame 4 is monitored based on the state of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126, and the same state is a predetermined time corresponding to the initial value of the front frame opening monitoring timer (for example, (100 msec) Only when the operation is continued, the open / closed state of the front frame 4 is determined by the processing after step H257. Thereby, the open / closed state of the front frame 4 is determined with high reliability.

In step H257, it is determined whether the state of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 corresponds to the opening state of the front frame 4. If the front frame opening switch 126 is open, the front frame opening error flag is set in step H258. Proceed to step H260. If not in the open state (that is, in the closed state), after clearing the front frame open error flag in step H259, proceed to step H260.
In step H260, it is determined whether the state of the front frame opening error flag determined this time (set state or cleared state) is the same as in the previous processing. If not, the process proceeds to step H261.

When proceeding to step H261, a command corresponding to the currently determined front frame opening error state (that is, the state of the front frame opening error flag set in step H258 or H259) is transmitted to the game control device 54 (main control board). Then return.
Here, for example, if the front frame opening error flag is set, a command indicating that the front frame opening error is present is transmitted to the game control device 54 (main control board), and the game control device 54 sends the command. In response to this command, the effect control device 53 is configured to perform an error display for notifying the display device 41 that the front frame 4 is in an error state.

[Launch permission signal editing process]
Next, the firing permission signal editing process H78 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step H271 whether the card unit is connected or not. If OK, the process proceeds to step H272, and if not OK, the process proceeds to step H285. This determination is made based on the confirmation result of the card unit connection confirmation process (step H74 in FIG. 27). That is, in step H74, the voltage of the input (VL input) connected to the power line of the card unit 15 via the first card unit connection terminal plate 52A is turned on (that is, the voltage is higher than the specified value). If, for example, the card unit connection confirmation flag indicating that the card unit 15 is turned on and connected to the payout control device 230 is set, the card unit connection confirmation OK in this step H271. It is determined.

  When the process proceeds to step H272, a process for updating the power-on forced firing timer (that is, a process for reducing the value of the power-on forced firing timer by one cycle of the timer interrupt cycle) is executed, and the process proceeds to step H273. The power-on forced launch timer counts the forced launch time to force the ball remaining at the tip of the launcher 57 at the time of a power outage to be automatically fired (automatic launch without any player operation) when the power is turned on. It is a timer to do. Note that the forced launch is a blank shot that does not affect the game result.

In step H273, if the power-on forced firing timer value is not zero, the process jumps to step H284.
In the determination process of steps H274 to H283, if the determination result is affirmative in each determination, the process proceeds to step H285 without executing the subsequent determination process, and the determination result is negative in each determination of steps H274 to H283. The next determination process is sequentially executed, and when the determination result of the last step H283 is negative, the process proceeds to step H284.

  In step H274, the number of balls held is zero, in step H275 it is being settled, in step H276 it is resting, in step H277, there is an insufficient number of encapsulated balls, or in step H278, there is an excessive number of encapsulated balls In step H279, an enclosure path abnormality error is occurring, in step H280, the glass frame is being opened (the glass frame 5 is being opened), in step SH281 the front frame is being opened (front frame 4 is being opened), or in step H282, fraud It is determined whether it is occurring or whether the flag for polishing the encapsulated sphere is set in step H283.

Here, the determination as to whether the account is being settled is made by a settlement control process number described later. For example, if the settlement control process number is any of 2 to 4, it is determined that settlement is in progress. If the settlement control process number is 1, it is determined that settlement is not in progress. Further, whether or not a break is occurring is determined by a break control process number described later. For example, if the break control process number is any one of 2 to 3, it is determined that a break is in progress. If the break control process number is 1, it is determined that the break is not in progress.
Next, whether or not an enclosing ball number shortage error is occurring is determined in the above-described step H219, and whether or not an enclosing ball number excessive error is occurring is set in the above-described steps H203 and H212. Whether the enclosing ball number excessive error flag and the enclosing path abnormality error are occurring is determined based on the enclosing path abnormality error flag set in step H217 described above.

The determination of whether the glass frame is open (the glass frame 5 is open) and the determination of whether the front frame is open (the front frame 4 is open) are the glass frame open errors set in Step H246 and Step H258, respectively. Based on flag and front frame open error flag. These determinations are made when the flag is set, and are judged not generated when the flag is cleared.
In addition, for example, whether or not the illegal act is occurring is determined by the error monitoring process of the game control device 54, in which it is determined that the magnet is illegal, the vibration is illegal, or the radio wave is illegal and an error command is transmitted. Determined.
Whether the enclosing ball is being polished is determined based on whether the polishing flag is set in a polishing apparatus control process described later.

In step H285, after setting the firing permission signal off data, the process returns. When the firing permission signal off data is set, the firing control circuit 236 prohibits the operation of the firing solenoid 173, and the ball cannot be fired (launch non-permitted state). In this firing non-permitted state, even if there is an appropriate firing operation (the touch sensor 174 is turned on and the firing volume 171 is operated), the firing solenoid 173 is not activated and the ball is not fired.
On the other hand, in step H284, after setting the firing permission signal ON data, the process returns. When the firing permission signal ON data is set, the firing control circuit 236 is permitted to actuate the firing solenoid 173, and is in a state where the ball can be fired (launching permitted state).

According to the firing permission signal editing process described above, if the card unit 15 is not connected because the card unit 15 is not connected (or the power of the card unit 15 is not turned on) or the like, it is unconditionally fired. It becomes a disallowed state. After the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the forced firing time has elapsed, each of the conditions of steps H274 to H283 (the number of balls held is zero, during settlement, during break, or an error in the number of encapsulated balls occurs. If any one of (medium, glass frame open, front frame open, fraudulent action occurs, polishing flag set) is established, the ball is not allowed to fire. However, during the period from when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on until the forced firing time elapses, a ball can be fired by the processing of steps H273 and H284 even if any of the conditions of steps H274 to H283 is satisfied. Launch allowed. This is to perform the above-mentioned forced firing.
In addition, during counting (while moving from the number of possessed balls to the number of counted balls), it may be controlled not to permit the firing of the encapsulated balls.

[Number of balls to be added]
Next, the number-of-balls adding process H79 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step H291 whether or not the value of the prize ball number area is “0”. This is because the prize ball number data in the prize ball number area is received after receiving the prize ball command from the game control device 54, and the value in the prize ball number area is not “0” before clearing. And determine based on that. If the value of the prize ball number area is not “0” in step H291, the process proceeds to step H292. If the value of the ball number area is “0”, there is no prize ball to be added to the number of possessed balls, and the routine is ended. And return.
In step H292, the current number of prize balls acquired in response to the prize ball command from the game control device 54 is added to the number of balls held. That is, the number of winning balls acquired this time is added to the current number of balls, and the addition result is updated and registered as a new number of balls. The process of step H292 constitutes a prize award process for increasing the number of balls (game value) in accordance with the game result of the game balls launched into the game area.

Next, in step H293, “updated number of balls held + number of winning balls” is updated to the current number of updated balls. This is because every time there is a prize ball associated with winning a prize, it is necessary to add the number of prize balls to the updated number of possessed balls, so the value of the updated number of possessed balls is added and updated by “the number of prize balls”.
Next, in step H294, the number-of-balls-displaying light counter is updated (incremented) by “+1”, and in step H295, “number of winning balls” is saved in the display-based updated number-of-balls storage area corresponding to the light counter. This is because the change in the number of balls needs to be displayed on the number-of-balls display 40 when there is a prize ball associated with winning, so the value of the number-of-ball display light counter is updated (incremented) by “+1”. ), And store the “number of winning balls” associated with winning a prize in the display updated number-of-balls storage area corresponding to the advanced light counter, and add the stored “number of winning balls” to the number of holding balls for display. This is the number of updated holding balls for display.
That is, the amount of change for displaying the number of balls to be displayed on the number-of-balls display 40 for each change event is stored in the display updated number of balls to be stored. For example, the number of possessed balls increases accordingly, so that the “number of award balls” is stored in the display updated retained ball number storage area. As a result, the “number of winning balls” is added to the number of balls held, and the display on the ball holding number display 40 is updated.
The data (number of winning balls) to be added to the number of holding balls displayed on the holding ball number display 40 is stored in the ring buffer format area in the order of winning. The size of the storage area in the ring buffer format is set to a size corresponding to the maximum number of prize balls per unit time (for example, the number of prize balls per unit time in the big hit round). For example, the size is set to about 32 bytes.

  Next, in step H296, it is determined whether the number of balls updated in step H292 is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (for example, 250,000), and if it is equal to or greater than the upper limit value, it is determined in step H297. The number upper limit (250,000) is updated and registered as a new number of balls, and the process proceeds to step H298. If the number is not greater than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step H298 without executing step H297.

Proceeding to step H298, the current number of prize balls acquired in response to the prize ball command from the game control device 54 is added to the current number of unoutput prize balls, and the result of the addition is the number of new prize balls not yet output. Are updated and registered, and the process proceeds to Step H299. The number of non-output prize balls means the number of prize balls that are not output to the hall computer 86 as a prize ball signal. In step H299, it is determined whether the number of unoutput prize balls updated in step H298 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 10) corresponding to one prize ball signal. If not, the process proceeds to Step H303.
In step H300, the result of subtracting 10 from the current number of non-output prize balls is updated and registered as a new number of non-output prize balls, and the process proceeds to step H301. In step H301, it is determined whether the number of prize ball signals output is less than an upper limit value (for example, 255 times). If less than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step H302, and if not less than the upper limit value, the process returns to step H299. In step H301, the number of prize ball signals output is increased by one and the process returns to step H299.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step H299 that the number of unoutput prize balls is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 10) corresponding to one prize ball signal and the process proceeds to step H303, a prize ball number area in step H303. Clear “0” and return. This prepares for the storage of the number of next prize balls.

  According to the number-of-balls adding process, the number of balls held and the number of balls for display are increased by the number of prize balls as long as the number of balls is not equal to or greater than the upper limit value of the number of balls by the processing of steps H292 to H296. Further, according to the processing of steps H298 to H301, the number of prize ball signal outputs is 1 every time a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls is acquired until the number of prize ball signals reaches the upper limit. Increase the number of times. The number of balls for display is data in a storage area of the RAM 233 for storing the number of balls to be displayed on the ball number display 40.

[Ball feed control processing]
Next, the ball feed control process H81 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step H311 whether or not the value of the forced firing timer at power-on is not zero. If not (ie, if the forced firing time has not elapsed), step H318 is determined. If it is zero, the process proceeds to Step H312. In step H312, it is determined whether or not the value of the ball feed control timer is zero.

  When the process proceeds to Step H313, it is determined whether or not the game ball is being launched. If it is being launched, the process proceeds to Step H314, and if not, the process proceeds to Step H318. Here, the determination as to whether or not the launch is in progress is as long as launch is permitted (that is, the launch permit state in which the above-described launch permit signal on data is set) and the touch sensor 174 is turned on. By determining that it is firing. That is, even if firing is permitted, if the touch sensor 174 is not turned on (if the player has not touched the firing operation handle 11), it is not determined that firing is being performed, and even if the touch sensor 174 is turned on, firing is permitted. If not, it is not determined to be firing. Thereby, it is accurately determined that the game ball is actually being fired.

In Step H314, a prescribed initial value (a value corresponding to the firing interval time) is set as the value of the ball feed control timer, and the process proceeds to Step H315. When the process proceeds to step H315, an update process for decreasing the value of the ball feed control timer by one cycle of the timer interrupt period is executed, and the process proceeds to step H316. In step H316, it is determined whether or not the value of the ball feed control timer matches the set value set as the ball feed on timing. If they match, the ball feed solenoid 172 is judged in step H317 as the ball feed on timing. The ball feed solenoid 172 is actuated by setting the ON data for the ball feed, and if not coincident, it is determined that it is not the ball feed on timing, and the process proceeds to step H318 to set the off data for the ball feed solenoid 172 to stop the ball feed solenoid 172.
The initial value of the ball feed control timer set in step H314 is set so that the ball firing frequency (number of shots per time) is equal to or less than a predetermined value.

  According to the above ball feed control process, the ball feed solenoid 172 is maintained in a stopped state during a period from when the power is turned on until the forced firing time elapses. This is because the ball remaining at the tip of the tip at the time of a power failure is processed by the above-mentioned forced launch, so that the ball is not newly sent to the tip (launch position) during the forced launch period. Then, when the forced firing period ends and the firing is in progress, as long as the firing continues, the value of the ball feed control timer is set to the initial value in step H314 every time the value of the ball feed control timer becomes zero. Is repeated, and every time the value of the ball feed control timer reaches the set value (that is, every time the ball feed on timing is reached), the ball feed solenoid 172 is actuated by the processing of step H317 and one ball is Sent to the tip (launch position).

[Checkout / break control processing]
Next, the settlement / rest control process H82 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, a settlement control process (details will be described later) is performed in step H321, then a break control process (details will be described later) is executed in step H322, and then the process returns.

[Settlement control processing]
Next, the settlement control process in the settlement / rest control process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, at step H331, branching is performed according to the adjustment control process number. In this case, if the settlement control process number is 1, the settlement start monitoring process (described in detail later) in step H332 is performed. If the settlement control process number is 2, the settlement write completion monitoring process (described in detail later) is performed in step H333. If the control process number is 3, a payment completion monitoring process (details will be described later) is executed in step H334, and then the process returns. The initial value of the settlement control process number is set to 1, for example, in step H10 of the main process.
The settlement control process number may be 1, 2, 3,..., But may be 0, 1, 2,..., And if this is done, when the area of the RAM 233 is cleared The process of setting 1 as the initial value can be omitted.

[Break control process]
Next, the break control process H322 in the settlement / break control process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, branching by the break control process number is performed in step H341. In this case, if the break control process number is 1, the break start monitoring process (described later in detail) in step H342 is performed. If the break control process number is 2, the break start ACK monitoring process (described in detail later) is performed in step H343. If the process number is 3, a break end monitoring process (described later in detail) is executed in step H344, and then the process returns. The initial value of the break control process number is set to 1, for example, in step H10 of the main process.
Note that the break control process number may be 1, 2, 3,..., But may be 0, 1, 2,... The process of setting 1 as the initial value can be omitted.

[Checkout start monitoring process]
Next, the settlement start monitoring process H332 in the settlement control process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in steps H351 to H356, a process is performed to determine whether the conditions that can be settled (conditions that can be settled) are satisfied. After clearing the payable flag in H358, the process proceeds to step H359. When all the payable conditions are satisfied, the payable flag is set in step H357 and then the process proceeds to step H359. In other words, the payable flag is set when it is possible to pay.

  Here, there are the following six conditions in the accountable conditions. That is, the break process is not being performed (determined in step H351), the number of balls is not being counted (the count switch on timer is not zero: determined in step H352), no error has occurred (determined in step H353), The number of balls on the board is zero and there is no ball on the board (determined in step H354), the touch sensor 174 is not turned on (determined in step H355), and the customer waiting demonstration is being carried out (determined in step H356). is there. Here, whether or not the break process is being performed may be determined in the same manner as in step H276 described above, for example. Further, whether or not an error is occurring may be determined in the same manner as in Step H271 and Steps H277 to H282 described above, for example.

Next, proceeding to step H359, it is determined whether or not a payment instruction command has been received. This is to determine whether or not a payment instruction command has been received from the card unit 15. In the card unit 15, when the return button 304 on the screen of the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 is pressed when the checkout process is not being performed, a checkout instruction command is sent to the game control device 54 if the checkout is possible. It will be sent (see FIG. 67). Here, the settlement instruction command is transmitted by the first communication method (communication method 1) which is communication in plain text.
If a settlement instruction command is received in step H359, the process proceeds to step H360, and if a settlement instruction command is not received, the process returns.
In step H360, it is determined whether or not the payable flag is on (that is, whether it is set). If it is on, the flow proceeds to step H361, and the processing after step H361 is executed. On the other hand, if the checkout flag is not on, the process returns.

When the processing proceeds to step H361 and subsequent steps, first, in step H361, “the number of held balls + the number of counted balls” is set as the total number of held balls. This is because the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls acquired by the player are all counted to obtain a total number of possessed balls, and the account is automatically settled based on the settlement instruction command. In other words, when the return button 304 is pressed to request the return of the game card, it is necessary to automatically perform payment, so the player's number of balls and the number of counted balls are all counted as the total number of balls, This is because the total number of balls held is transmitted to the card unit 15.
Next, the process proceeds to step H362, and the total number-of-balls command is transmitted to the card unit 15. This is a command for notifying the card unit 15 of the total number of balls from the payout control device 230 at the time of payment, and the total number of balls (number of balls held + counted balls) is sent to the card unit 15 at the time of payment. . The card unit 15 performs a settlement process based on the total number of balls.
Next, in step H363, the total number of balls is set as the number of balls for display. This is because the total number of balls is displayed on the number-of-balls display 40 until settlement is completed. The number of balls for display is stored in a storage area of the RAM 233 that stores the number of balls to be displayed on the ball number display 40.

  Next, in step H364, the number of balls held is cleared to “0”. This is sent from the gaming machine (here, the payout control device 230) to the card unit 15 as a total number of balls command obtained by adding the number of balls held and the number of balls counted, and the number of balls held as the above-mentioned total number of balls on the gaming machine side. Is stored, so there is no problem even if the number of balls held is cleared. On the card unit 15 side, the number of balls held is recorded on the game card, but on the gaming machine side, the total number of balls held and the number of counted balls is totaled in the storage area of the RAM 233 until the settlement process is completed. It will be stored as the number of balls. Even if there is a trouble on the card unit 15 side, if the data on the total number of balls is stored in the storage area of the RAM 233 as the total number of balls on the gaming machine side, This is because trouble can be dealt with.

Next, in step H365, the number of counted balls is cleared to “0”. This is because the gaming machine (here, the payout control device 230) calculates the total number of balls held by the player, including the number of counted balls, with “the number of balls held + the number of counted balls” as the total number of balls held, It is sent to the card unit 15 as a total number of balls command, and the number of balls is stored as the above total number of balls on the gaming machine side. It is.
Next, in step H366, the timer initial value (for example, 2 seconds) of the settlement writing completion monitoring timer is set. The settlement write completion monitoring timer is a timer for setting a timeout in the response from the card unit 15. Next, in step H367, the settlement write completion monitoring process number is set in the settlement control process number, and then the process returns. Therefore, in the settlement control process, the next time, the routine proceeds to the settlement write completion monitoring process routine.

  According to the checkout start monitoring process described above, a checkout possible flag is set when all the checkout possible conditions are satisfied, and when the return button 304 on the screen of the operation display device 7 is pressed in this state, the checkout is performed. Starts. On the other hand, if even one of the conditions for payment adjustment is not satisfied, the payment adjustment flag is cleared, and payment is not started even if the return button 304 is turned on in this state. Here, the message / operation area unit 306 (or the display device 41 may be included) of the operation display device 7 may be displayed to indicate that payment is not possible. It should be noted that since the allowance for payment adjustment is set as described above, it is possible to prevent problems such as the control processing not functioning properly due to an inadvertent operation for starting the adjustment.

[Checkout completion monitoring process]
Next, the settlement write completion monitoring process H333 in the settlement control process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, the settlement write completion monitoring timer is updated (decremented) by “−1” in step H371, and it is determined whether or not the timer has become “0” in step H372. If the settlement write completion monitoring timer is not “0”, the process proceeds to step H373, where it is determined whether settlement settlement completion is received from the card unit 15. The receipt of the payment writing completion is determined by whether or not a payment writing completion command is received from the card unit 15, for example. If payment completion is not received from the card unit 15, the process returns and the routine is repeated. If it is determined in step H373 that payment settlement completion has been received from the card unit 15, the process goes to step H374 to clear the total number of balls held to “0”. This is because the card unit 15 side has completed the payment writing (that is, the recording of all the total number of balls held in the game card) and the record is held in the game card, so the total number of balls held is cleared to “0”. This is because there is no problem.
Next, in step H375, the settlement end monitoring process number is set in the settlement control process number, and the process returns. Therefore, in the settlement control process, the next time, the routine proceeds to the settlement completion monitoring process routine.

On the other hand, if the settlement write completion monitoring timer is “0” in step H372, the settlement write completion cannot be received from the card unit 15 within the predetermined time counted by the settlement write completion monitoring timer. Therefore, the process branches to step H376 to set the settlement write failure flag. Next, in step H377, the total number of balls is made the number of balls for display. Since it is presumed that the card unit 15 has failed to record all the total number of balls in the game card, the total number of balls is temporarily returned to the number of balls for display.
However, at this time, the number of balls held is not the official number of balls, but is displayed on the number-of-balls display 40 as the number of balls held for proof of appearance. After that, the clerk confirms the settlement (inspection and confirmation of each part including the card unit 15 and the game card) and once cancels the settlement process, the total number of balls is officially returned as the number of balls held, It is made to display on the number-of-balls display 40.

Next, in step H378, the command at the time of the settlement writing failure is transmitted to the game control device 54 (main board). The game control device 54 that has received the command at the time of payment writing failure sends the same command to the production control device 53, and the production control device 53 receives the command at the time of payment writing failure, and the display device 41 has a payment failure. Will be controlled.
Next, in step H379, the settlement start monitoring process number is set in the settlement control process number, and the process returns. Therefore, in the settlement control process, the next time, the routine proceeds to the settlement start monitoring process routine.

[Checkout completion monitoring process]
Next, the settlement end monitoring process H334 in the settlement control process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step H381 whether or not the card removal command from the card unit 15 has been received. Return without executing the following. The card extraction command is a command transmitted from the card unit 15 when a game card is extracted. This payment card sampling command is transmitted by the first communication method (communication method 1) which is communication in plain text.

In step H382, an initial value is set in the number-of-balls display timer, and in step H383, a settlement start monitoring process number is set as a settlement control process number.
Here, the number-of-balls display timer has a configuration in which a blinking display to be described later of the number of balls held on the number-of-balls display 40 is terminated when the time is up (see step H534 in FIG. 59 described later). . The initial value is set in the number-of-balls display timer for a short period after the game card is ejected from the card unit 15 (the initial value of the timer). This is to prepare for blinking the number.

[Break start monitoring process]
Next, the break start monitoring process H342 in the break control process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in steps H391 to H396, a process for determining whether or not a condition for taking a break (break permission condition) is established. If even one break permission condition is not established, step H398 is performed. After the break switch valid flag is cleared at step H399, the process proceeds to step H399. When all the break permission conditions are satisfied, the break switch valid flag is set at step H397 and then the process proceeds to step H399. That is, when the break is permitted, the break switch valid flag is set. When the break switch valid flag is set, a control for turning on the LED built in the break switch 312 is executed by a process not shown in the figure, and the player is notified that a break is possible. Conversely, when the break switch valid flag is cleared, the LED built in the break switch 312 is turned off, and the player is notified that the break is impossible.

  Here, the break permission conditions include the following six conditions. That is, the checkout process is not in progress (determined in step H391), no error has occurred (determined in step H392), the number of board balls is zero and there is no ball on the board (determined in step H393), and the touch sensor 174 is on. The number of balls held (one or more) (determined in step H395), and a customer waiting demonstration (determined in step H396). Here, the determination of whether or not the settlement process is being performed may be performed, for example, in the same manner as in Step H275 described above. Whether or not an error is occurring may be determined in the same manner as in step H271 and steps H277 to H282 described above, for example.

In step H399, it is determined whether or not the break switch 312 is turned on. If the break switch 312 is turned on, the process proceeds to step H400. In Step H400, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned break switch valid flag is on (that is, whether or not it is set). If it is on, the process proceeds to Step H401 to start the break, and if not, the process proceeds to Step H404. In step H404, a break operation invalid command is transmitted to the game control device 54 (main board), and then the process returns. The game control device 54 that has received the break operation invalid command sends the command to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 receives the break operation invalid command and displays, for example, on the display device 41 that the break is impossible. Will do.
It should be noted that the break operation invalid command includes different data for each reason why the break cannot be performed (which condition is not satisfied among the conditions of steps H391 to H396), and this command is included in the game control device 54 (main board). It is good also as a structure which the presentation control apparatus 53 received via via also displays on the display apparatus 41 the reason why the rest is impossible.

  On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step H401, the break switch valid flag is cleared, then a break request command is transmitted to the card unit 15 to start the break at step H402, and then the break control processing number is set to 2 (break start at step H403). ACK monitoring process number) is set, and then the process returns. Here, the break request command is transmitted by the first communication method (communication method 1) which is communication in plain text.

  According to the break start monitoring process described above, when all the break permission conditions are satisfied, the break switch valid flag is set. When the break switch 312 is turned on in this state, the process for starting the break ( Steps H402 and H403) are executed. If even one break permission condition is not satisfied, the break switch valid flag is cleared, and even if the break switch 312 is turned on in this state, the process for starting the break is not executed, and the display device 41 cannot take a break. Is displayed.

  Note that, since the break permission condition is set as described above, it is possible to prevent problems such as the control process not functioning properly due to an inadvertent operation to start a break. In particular, according to the condition of Step H395, since there is no number of balls, a break cannot be started, so that the break function such as securing a pachinko machine so that others cannot use it even if there is no number of balls cannot be abused. There is. Because, even if another player inserts a game card into the resting table, it is returned and cannot be used, so this rest function ensures that the pachinko machine can not be used by others However, in this example, such a configuration is not possible when there is no number of balls. Also, in this example, if there is a malicious player who has been taking a break for a long time (or a player who has forgotten to have taken a break and returned home), use a staff card to force a break It is structured to be able to cancel, and the use of such a malicious break can be prevented at any time by the store clerk. Further, the condition of step H395 may be based on whether or not the number of held balls is equal to or more than a specified number, and by doing so, it is possible to prevent securing a pachinko machine with a small number of held balls.

[Break start ACK monitoring process]
Next, the break start ACK monitoring process H343 in the break control process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step H411 whether an error has occurred as in steps H353 and H392 described above. If an error has occurred, the process proceeds to step H416, and if no error has occurred, the process proceeds to step H412. In step H412, it is determined whether or not the break start ACK reception timeout from the card unit 15 is reached. If timed out, the process proceeds to step H416, and if not timed out, the process proceeds to step H413. For example, the elapsed time from the time when the break request command is transmitted in step H402 described above is measured by a process not shown in the figure, and the break start ACK (response signal to the break request command) from the card unit 15 is not received. If this elapsed time exceeds the specified time, it is determined in step H412 that a break start ACK reception timeout has occurred.

  Proceeding to step H413, it is determined whether the break start ACK has been received from the card unit 15, and if received, the process returns after executing steps H414 and H415 in sequence, and if not received, the process returns without executing step H414 and the subsequent steps. To do. In step H414, a break start command is transmitted to the game control device 54 (main board), and in step H415, 3 (the number of the break end monitoring process) is set as the break control process number. The game control device 54 that has received the break start command sends the command to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 executes control for displaying on the display device 41, for example, “It is during a break”. When receiving the break start ACK, the payout control device 230 performs control to emit light by turning on a light emitting source such as an LED in which the operation button portion of the break switch 312 is built, and the break switch 312 also emits a break. You may make it alert | report that it is in.

  On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step H416, a break operation cancel command is transmitted to the card unit 15, then a break operation cancel command is transmitted to the game control device 54 (main board) in step H417, and a break control process number is transmitted in the next step H418. Is set to 1 (the number of the break start monitoring process), and then the process returns. Here, the break operation cancellation command to the card unit 15 is transmitted by the first communication method (communication method 1) which is communication in plain text. Further, the card unit 15 that has received the break operation cancellation command is configured to stop the process for the break. Similarly, the game control device 54 that has received the break operation cancellation command sends the same command to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 is configured to stop the processing for the break.

[Break end monitoring process]
Next, the break end monitoring process H344 in the break control process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, at step S421, it is determined whether or not a break forced release command from the card unit 15 has been received. The break forced release command is transmitted by the communication method 1 when the staff card is inserted into the card unit 15 as described above.

  Proceeding to step H422, it is determined whether a break release command has been received from the card unit 15, and if received, the process returns after executing steps H423 to H425 in sequence, and if not received, the process returns without executing steps H423 and after. To do. The break release command is issued when the game card used before the break starts is inserted into the card unit 15, and the payout control device from the card unit 15 in the first communication method (communication method 1) that is communication in plain text. This is a command transmitted to 230.

In step H423, a break release ACK (response signal to the break release command) is transmitted to the card unit 15 by the communication method 1. In step H424, a break release command is transmitted to the game control device 54 (main board). In step H425, a break control is performed. Set 1 (the number of the break start monitoring process) as the process number, and then return. The game control device 54 (main board) that has received the break release command sends the command to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 is configured to end the processing for the break.
On the other hand, when proceeding to Step H426, a break forced release ACK (response signal to the break forced release command) is transmitted to the card unit 15 by the communication method 1, and then the forced settlement request flag is set at Step H427, and then Step H425 is performed. Returns after execution.
Although the forced settlement request flag is not shown in the figure, when the player does not return within the prescribed time for the break, the break is forcibly canceled and used in a process for performing the forced settlement.

[Card unit reception analysis processing]
Next, the card unit reception analysis process H83 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, the card unit reception analysis process 1 (step H431) and the card unit reception analysis process 2 (step H432) are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
The card unit reception analysis process 1 is an analysis process of information transmitted from the card unit 15 in the communication method 1, and the card unit reception analysis process 2 is an analysis process of information transmitted from the card unit 15 in the communication method 2. is there.

[Card unit reception analysis process 1]
Next, the card unit reception analysis process 1H431 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step H441 whether there is data in the serial reception buffer (reception buffer for performing serial communication with the card unit 15). If there is data, the process proceeds to step H442. To do. Proceeding to step H442, the data in the serial reception buffer is read as received data. Then, in step H443, it is determined whether the received data is a command for rent / number of used balls. If the command is a command, the process proceeds to step H449, and if it is not a command for the number of rented balls / number of used balls, the process proceeds to step H444.

The number of rented balls / number of used balls command is a command transmitted from the card unit 15 when the ball lending button 303 is pressed by a control process (not shown) of the card unit 15. The card unit 15 performs a process of reducing and updating the ball lending number or the number of stored balls recorded on the game card by the value corresponding to the transmitted number of balls / stored ball number command (ball lending information). It has become.
In step H449, an addition process for adding the number corresponding to the number of lent balls / number of used balls command to the number of held balls is executed, and then the process returns. The addition processing of this step H449 corresponds to the fact that the data of the ball lending number or the number of stored balls (valuable value information) recorded on the game card is reduced and updated in the card unit 15, and the pachinko machine 1 (payout control device) 230), a ball lending addition process for increasing the number of balls (game value) data (number of balls stored in the RAM 233) is configured. In the case of a pachinko machine that is not an enclosed ball type, this ball lending addition processing corresponds to a ball lending payout processing for discharging a game ball as a lending ball to the upper plate.

If it progresses to step H444, it will be determined whether the said received data are a break start ACK, If it is a break start ACK, it will progress to step H450, and if it is not a break start ACK, it will progress to step H445. In step H450, a break start ACK received flag is set, and then the process returns. The break start ACK received flag is used in the determination in step H413 described above.
In step H445, it is determined whether the received data is a break forced release command. If the received data is a break forced release command, the flow advances to step H451. If not, the flow advances to step H446. In step H451, a break forced release command received flag is set, and then the process returns. The break compulsory release command received flag is used in the determination in step H421 described above.

In step H446, it is determined whether the received data is a break release command. If the received data is a break release command, the flow advances to step H452, and if not, the flow advances to step H447. In step H452, a break release command received flag is set, and then the process returns. The break release command received flag is used in the determination in step H422 described above.
In step H447, it is determined whether the received data is a payment write completion ACK. If the payment data is a payment write completion ACK, the flow advances to step H453. In step H453, the settlement writing completion ACK received flag is set, and then the process returns. The settlement write completion ACK received flag is used in the determination in step H373 described above.
In step H448, it is determined whether the received data is a payment card removal command. If the payment data is a payment card removal command, the flow advances to step H454. In step H454, the payment card sampling command received flag is set, and then the process returns. The payment card removal command received flag is used in the determination in step H381 described above.

[Card unit reception analysis process 2]
Next, the card unit reception analysis process 2H432 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step H461, it is determined whether there is data in the serial reception buffer (reception buffer for performing serial communication with the card unit 15), and if there is, the process proceeds to step H462. Return.
In step H462, the data in the serial reception buffer is read as received data. In step H463, it is determined whether the received data is a member card ID. If it is a member card ID, the process proceeds to step H467. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step H464.
In step H464, it is determined whether the received data is a visitor card ID. If the received data is a visitor card ID, the process proceeds to step H467. If not, the process proceeds to step H465.
In step H465, it is determined whether the received data is a staff (break release) card ID. If the received data is a staff card ID, the process proceeds to step H467. If not, the process proceeds to step H466.

In step H467, a card IDACK is transmitted to the card unit 15, and then the process returns. The card IDACK is transmitted to the card unit 15 by the second communication method (communication method 2) that can be encrypted by the payout control device 230 and decrypted by the card unit 15 side.
On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step H466, it is determined whether the received data is a gaming machine IDACK (response signal from the card unit 15 with respect to the transmission of the gaming machine ID). Otherwise return. In step H468, a gaming machine IDACK received flag is set, and then the process returns. Although not shown, the gaming machine IDACK is transmitted immediately after receiving the gaming machine ID, for example.

[Regular command transmission processing]
Next, the periodic command transmission process H84 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step H471 whether or not the periodic transmission control timer is "0". This is because the payout control device 230 is connected to the card unit 15 via the first card unit connection terminal board 52A, and various information (for example, holding ball) from the payout control device 230 to the card unit 15 in the enclosed ball game. And various information including the number of counting balls) are sent at predetermined intervals (for example, 400 ms), and the card unit 15 manages control of the operation display device 7 based on various information from the payout control device 230, Since the operation area 306 is configured to display the player's number of balls (game value) and the number of counted balls, a periodic transmission control timer is used to count the predetermined interval (for example, 400 ms). It is what you are doing.
If the periodic transmission control timer is “0”, the process proceeds to step H472 to set a timer initial value (for example, 400 ms) in the periodic transmission control timer, and in subsequent step H473, based on the number of balls held, Set and send the ball count command. Thereby, the number-of-balls command is transmitted to the card unit 15. The card unit 15 can manage the control of the operation display device 7 based on the number-of-balls command from the payout control device 230, and display the number of balls held by the player in the message / operation area 306.

Next, in step H474, based on the number of balls held, a ball number command to the game control device 54 (main board) is set and transmitted. Thereby, the number-of-balls command is transmitted to the game control device 54. The game control device 54 that has received the number-of-balls command sends the command to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 controls the decoration ball display device 250 based on the number-of-balls command and uses a number of LEDs. The decoration display of the number of balls will be performed.
Next, in step H475, a counting ball number command to the card unit 15 is set and transmitted based on the counting ball number. As a result, the counting ball number command is transmitted to the card unit 15. The card unit 15 manages the control of the operation display device 7 based on the counting ball number command from the payout control device 230 and displays the player's counting ball number in the message / operation area 306.

Next, in step H476, a counting ball number command to the game control device 54 (main board) is set and transmitted based on the counting ball number. Thereby, the counting ball number command is transmitted to the game control device 54. The game control device 54 that has received the counted ball number command sends the command to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 performs decoration control on the decorative ball display device 250 based on the counted ball number command and uses a number of LEDs. The decorative display of the number of counted balls is performed.
Next, in step H477, a gaming machine information command to the card unit 15 is set based on various information and transmitted. Thereby, a gaming machine information command is transmitted to the card unit 15. The card unit 15 manages the control of the operation display device 7 based on the gaming machine information command from the payout control device 230, displays various information of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) in the message / operation area unit 306, Information is transmitted to the hall computer 86. After step H477, the process returns.

On the other hand, if the periodic transmission control timer is not “0” in step H471, the process branches to step H478, updates the periodic transmission control timer by (−1), and returns. Then, the routine is repeated, and if YES is determined in step H471, the processes in steps H472 to H477 are executed.
As described above, various information (for example, various information including the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls) in the enclosed ball game from the payout control device 230 to the card unit 15 and the game control device 54 (main board) is a periodic transmission control timer. Is sent at predetermined intervals (for example, 400 ms), and the number of players' balls (game value) and the count are stored in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 under the control of the card unit 15 as described above. The decoration ball display device 250 is decorated under the control of the effect control device 53 based on a command indicating the number of balls or via the game control device 54.

[External information editing process (withdrawal)]
Next, the external information editing process H85 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, gaming machine ID signal editing processing (step H481), security signal editing processing (step H482), frame opening signal editing processing (step H483), break signal editing processing (step H484), out signal editing Processing (step H485) and prize ball number signal editing processing (step H486) are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
Here, Step H481 is a process for outputting a gaming machine ID signal to the card unit 15 (or further to the hall computer 86). Steps H482 to H486 are processes for outputting other various signals to the test apparatus via the hall computer 86 or the test firing test terminal 234. Note that the same processing is performed in the game control device 54 for steps H481 and 482.

[Game machine ID signal editing process (payout)]
Next, the gaming machine ID signal editing process H481 in the external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is determined in step H491 whether serial communication with the card unit 15 (or further, the hall computer 86) is in progress. If serial communication is in progress, the process returns. This is to check whether serial communication is being executed between the payout control device 230 and the transmission destination of the gaming machine ID (card unit 15). If serial communication is in progress, the gaming machine ID cannot be output this time, so the routine ends and the process returns.
On the other hand, if the serial communication is not in progress, the process proceeds to step H492 to check whether the output request flag of the gaming machine ID signal is set.

Here, the output request flag of the gaming machine ID signal is a signal indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as described below (signal output from the payout control device 230 to an external device such as the card unit 15 or the hall computer 86). Corresponding to time, they are set independently.
"Security signal when power is turned on" (Signal output when the power is turned on)
“Frame open signal” (signal output when the glass frame or front frame is opened)
This is set when a frame opening (error) checked by the payout control device 230 itself occurs.
"Big hit 1 signal" (Signal output when Special Figure 1 hits big)
This is set when the information of the jackpot state transmitted from the game control device 54 is received.
Here, the output request flag of the gaming machine ID signal is a flag for transmitting only once at the start of the period such as the above-mentioned “frame open signal” or “one jackpot signal” (that is, during the period) (There is no need to repeat the machine ID transmission all the time). In addition, the flag is not limited to the start of the period, and for example, a flag may be set when the game machine ID is closed so that the gaming machine ID is transmitted when the frame opening is completed.
In addition, when two or more are simultaneously established, priority is provided and it respond | corresponds one by one. In this case, not all request flags are cleared at once.

When it is checked in step H492 whether the output request flag for the gaming machine ID signal is set, if there is an output request flag based on the check result, the process proceeds to step H493 and the output request flag for the gaming machine ID signal is cleared. To do. This is because the output request flag of the gaming machine ID signal is already set and processing for outputting the gaming machine ID can be performed (in step H494), so the output request flag is cleared. Note that the output request flag of the gaming machine ID signal is set in each process at the timing at which the gaming machine ID is to be output to the external device (game machine ID output trigger). The game machine ID is output to the outside because, for example, the game control device 54 may be modified or exchanged and an illegal game may be performed. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the game machine ID is a legitimate game machine ID. This is for confirmation by the unit 15 or the external management device 91). Therefore, the gaming machine ID is output at a timing such as when the power is turned on, when the frame is opened, or when a big hit occurs, when there is a fraud.
Next, after performing a gaming machine ID output process (described later) in step H494, the process returns. As a result, the gaming machine ID is output and written to the serial transmission buffer. On the other hand, if there is no output request flag in step H492, steps H493 and H494 are jumped and the process returns. Therefore, in this case, the gaming machine ID is not output. The serial transmission buffer is a transmission buffer in a serial communication circuit provided in an IC chip that constitutes the CPU 231.
Further, for example, as described above, the gaming machine ID may be output when the power is turned on, when the frame is released, or when the jackpot is hit, but the data length of the signal for outputting the gaming machine ID varies depending on the time. For example, the contents of the gaming machine ID are transmitted including all codes (chip code, manufacturer code, and product code) when the power is turned on, but only the chip code is transmitted when the frame is opened and when the jackpot is hit . Note that the game machine IDs of both the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230 may be output when the power is turned on, and only the game machine ID of the game control device 54 may be output when the frame is opened and when the big hit. This is because there is a possibility that the game control device 54 is fraudulent during business, but there is a low possibility that the payout control device 230 is fraudulent.
Further, the output destination of the gaming machine ID is basically the card unit 15, but it may be the hall computer 86 (however, different from the embodiment, it is configured to be connected to the hall computer 86).

[Game machine ID output processing]
Next, a gaming machine ID output process H494 in the gaming machine ID signal editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, a start code is written in the serial transmission buffer in step H501. The start code is a code for causing the receiving card unit 15 and the like to specify that serial communication is started. Next, in step H502, the chip identification code of the main control chip is written into the serial transmission buffer.
The main control chip is the CPU 111 of the game control device 54 (main board). The “XX identification code” is a code indicating which information (code) is to be transmitted from now on, and is not a unique code but a common code. After writing this code, the corresponding unique information is written.

Next, in step H503, the chip code (chip ID) of the main control chip is read and written in the serial transmission buffer. This reads out the gaming machine ID (main board unique ID) of the game control device 54 (main board). Specifically, the individual identification information of the IC chip constituting the CPU 111 in the game control apparatus 54 (main board). The chip code as (unique ID) is read out. Then, the read chip code (chip ID) is written into the serial transmission buffer. Thereby, the chip code (chip ID) of the CPU 111 in the game control device 54 (main board) is acquired and output to the card unit 15 or the like.
Next, in step H504, the manufacturer code identification code of the main control chip is written in the serial transmission buffer, and in step H505, the manufacturer code of the main control chip (code relating to the manufacturer name of the gaming machine) is read and written in the serial transmission buffer. Next, in step H506, the type identification code of the main control chip is written in the serial transmission buffer, and in step H507, the type code (code relating to the model name) of the main control chip is read out and written in the serial transmission buffer, and then the process proceeds to step H508. . As a result, the manufacturer code (code related to the manufacturer name of the gaming machine) and the model code (code related to the model name) of the CPU 111 in the game control device 54 (main board) are acquired and output to the card unit 15 or the like. .

In step H508, the chip identification code of the payout control chip is written in the serial transmission buffer. The payout control chip is the CPU 231 of the payout control device 230 (payout board).
Next, in step H509, the chip code (chip ID) of the payout control chip is read and written in the serial transmission buffer. This reads out the gaming machine ID (payout board unique ID) of the payout control device 230 (payout board). Specifically, the individual identification information of the IC chip constituting the CPU 231 in the payout control apparatus 230 (payout board). The chip code as (unique ID) is read. Then, the read chip code (chip ID) is written into the serial transmission buffer. Thereby, the chip code (chip ID) of the CPU 231 in the payout control device 230 (payout board) is acquired and output to the card unit 15 or the like.
Next, in step H510, the maker code identification code of the payout control chip is written in the serial transmission buffer, and in step H511, the maker code of the payout control chip (code relating to the manufacturer name of the gaming machine) is read and written in the serial transmission buffer. Next, in step H512, the type identification code of the payout control chip is written in the serial transmission buffer, and in step H513, the type code of the payout control chip (code for specifying the payout control device) is read and written in the serial transmission buffer. Return. As a result, the manufacturer code of the CPU 231 (code relating to the manufacturer name of the gaming machine) and the model code (code specifying the payout control device) in the payout control device 230 (payout board) are acquired and output to the card unit 15 or the like. Will be.

At least when the gaming machine ID is transmitted to the card unit 15, since it is transmitted by the second communication method (communication method 2) as described above, each code data constituting the gaming machine ID is After the encryption corresponding to the communication method 2 is performed, the data is written in the serial transmission buffer.
Further, in this embodiment, when a security signal at power-on, a frame opening signal, and one jackpot signal are generated, the game controller ID chip code (main board unique ID) and the payout controller 230 chip code ( Since the manufacturer code and model code are output in addition to the payout board unique ID), it is possible to improve security by using even detailed information including the manufacturer code and model code.
When the power is turned on, serial transmission is performed in the order of, for example, a manufacturer code, a model code, and a chip code.
Each identification code includes information indicating the data type and data length of each code.
Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 57, all the codes output at the output timing are the same. However, if the output codes differ depending on the timing, it is determined what code is output if there is no identification code. Because it is difficult, it is easy to distinguish as a configuration including an identification code in this way (for example, even if a code is suddenly output, whether the code is a main control chip or a payout control chip, Alternatively, it is difficult to determine whether it is a chip code or a manufacturer code).

[LED editing process (withdrawal)]
Next, the LED editing process H86 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, an error display LED editing process (step H521), a holding ball number LED editing process (step H522), a counting switch LED editing process (step H523), a counting ball number LED editing process (step H524), The break switch valid state LED editing process (step H525) is sequentially executed, and then the process returns.

Here, in the error display LED editing process, setting of display data for turning on or blinking the error display LED 67 arranged on the back side of the payout control device 230 when a predetermined error occurs is executed.
In the ball number LED editing process, setting of display data for performing various displays on the ball number display 40 is executed (details will be described later).

In the count switch LED editing process, setting of display data for performing various displays with the LEDs built in the count switch 311 is executed.
In the counting ball number LED editing process, setting of display data for performing various displays on the counting ball display 313 is executed.
In the break switch effective display LED editing process, setting of display data for performing various displays using the LEDs incorporated in the break switch 312 is executed.

In the break switch effective display LED editing process, for example, the following display operation is realized.
That is, if the break permission condition described in the break start monitoring process (FIG. 48) is satisfied, the built-in LED in the break switch 312 is lit to notify that a break is possible. In addition, during the break, only the LED built in the break switch 312 blinks and lights up so that a mistake in pressing the counting switch 311 and the break switch 312 can be understood.

[Number-of-balls LED editing process]
Next, the number-of-balls LED editing process in the LED editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step H531 whether a card unit unconnected error has occurred. If it has occurred, the process proceeds to step H538, and if not, the process proceeds to step H532. The determination of the card unit unconnected error is performed based on, for example, a card unit connection confirmation flag, as in step H271 described above.

When the process proceeds to step H532, it is determined whether an enclosure system switch error is occurring. If it is occurring, the process proceeds to step H538, and if not, the process proceeds to step H533. The enclosed system switch abnormality error is a switch abnormality with respect to the enclosed system switch (launch ball detection switch 161, foul ball detection switch 162, out ball detection switch 163, and enclosed ball number detection switches 164 and 165).
In Step H538, display data for performing display for notifying the enclosed system switch abnormality error or the card unit unconnected error is set by the ball number indicator 40, and the process returns.

When the process proceeds to step H533, it is determined whether the payment is in progress (including payment or waiting for game card removal). If the payment is being made, the process proceeds to step H539. If the payment is not being performed, the process proceeds to step H534. The determination as to whether or not the account is being settled may be performed, for example, in the same manner as in steps H391 and H275 described above.
In step H539, display data for blinking the number of balls held by the number-of-balls display 40 (ball number display blinking data) is set, and the process returns.
On the other hand, when proceeding to Step H534, it is determined whether the value of the number-of-balls display timer is not zero. If not, the process proceeds to Step H540, and if it is zero (time is up). In the case), the process proceeds to Step H535. The number-of-balls display timer is a timer that is set at the end of the settlement in step H382 (FIG. 47) described above.
If it is determined in step H534 that the value of the number-of-balls display timer is not zero (the time is not up) and the process proceeds to step H540, the number of balls to be blinked and displayed by the number-of-balls display 40 in step H540. The number-of-balls display blinking data is set, and the number-of-balls display timer is updated (-1) (decremented) in the subsequent step H541. Thereby, the number-of-balls display timer is counted. Next, at step H542, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-balls display timer has become zero. If not, the routine returns and the routine is repeated. If the value of the number-of-balls display timer becomes zero (count up), the process proceeds to step H543 to clear the number of balls for display, and then the process proceeds to step H537, and the number-of-balls display 40 as described later. Set the demo display data for performing the demo display with, and then return.
By the processing of these steps H533, H534, H539 and steps H540 to H543, after the return button 304 is pressed and the checkout process is started, the game card is removed and the number-of-balls display timer counts up. The number of balls held is displayed blinking on the ball number display 40.

On the other hand, if it progresses to H535, it will be determined and determined whether it is during a break, and if it is during a break, it will progress to step H544, and if it is not during a break, it will progress to step H536. The determination as to whether or not a break is in progress may be made, for example, in the same manner as in steps H351 and H276 described above.
In Step H544, break display data for displaying that the player is on the ball with the number-of-balls display 40 is set, and the process returns.

When the process proceeds to step H536, it is determined whether the game is in progress (the player is seated). If the game is being played, the process proceeds to step H545, and if not, the process proceeds to step H537. Whether or not a game is in progress is determined by determining that the game is in progress if a game card is inserted in the card unit 15, and determining that the game is not in progress if it is not inserted.
In step H545, the number-of-balls display data setting process is performed, and then the process returns. This is a process for displaying the number of balls held on the number-of-balls display 40 and will be described in detail later.
In step H537, the demo display data for performing the demo display on the holding ball number display 40 is set, and the process returns.

  According to this routine, the number of balls held is basically displayed on the number-of-balls display 40 during the game, but when a card unit non-connection error or an encapsulated system switch error occurs, an error display is displayed. A display indicating that the payment is being performed during the checkout and a display indicating that the break is being performed during the break are respectively performed on the number-of-balls display 40. And when it is not in any of these states, demo display is executed on the number-of-balls display 40. In the present embodiment, the data setting processing for the display on the number-of-balls display 40 is collectively processed in this routine for all displays other than the number-of-balls display. For this reason, there exists an effect which can simplify a process and can reduce cost.

[Number of balls display data setting processing]
Next, the number-of-balls display data setting process in step H545 of the number-of-balls LED editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, if the held ball number display update timer is not “0” in step H551, the timer is updated (decremented) by “−1”, and in step H552, the held ball number display update timer is “ Whether or not “0” is determined. This is because the number-of-balls display update timer is set to an initial value (for example, 300 ms) in step H557, which will be described later, and is updated (decrement) by “−1” from the initial value. It is determined whether or not.

If the decision result in the step H552 is YES, the process advances to a succeeding step H553 to judge whether or not the number-of-ball display lead counter is equal to the number-of-ball display light counter. This is to determine whether or not the current number of balls has been read from the number-of-balls display number storage area storing the number of balls. If the result of the determination in step H553 is NO, it is determined that the number-of-balls display read counter is not equal to the number-of-balls display light counter and that the current number of balls has not been read from the number-of-balls display number storage area. Then, the process proceeds to Step H554.
Next, in step H554, the number-of-balls display read counter is updated (incremented) by “+1”, and in step H555, the current number of updates is updated from the display updated ball number storage area corresponding to the number-of-balls display read counter. Load it. Next, in step H556, the number of updates loaded in step H555 is added to the number of display balls and updated to the current number of display balls. That is, “the number of holding balls for display + the number of updates” is updated to the number of holding balls for display this time.

Next, in Step H557, the initial value (for example, 300 ms) of the number-of-balls display update timer is saved in the number-of-balls display update timer area. For example, 300 ms is set as the initial value here.
Here, the initial value = 300 m is an interval for updating the number of balls (in a predetermined period (0.3 seconds)) when the number-of-balls display 40 (game value display means) displays the number of balls of the player. Equivalent to the interval).
This is because the RAM 233 as an internal memory stores changes in the number of balls held by the player, and subtracts the fired ball, adds the number of prize balls, and repeats the addition of the foul ball, The number of balls possessed is updated and stored in real time. On the other hand, the update of the number of balls in the possession number display 40 is updated by the RAM 233 and stored in real time. This is because, unlike the process, control is performed so that the updated number of balls is displayed at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds).
That is, the payout control device 230 subtracts the number of balls fired from the number of balls held, adds the number of prize balls, and adds a foul ball by processing based on the game program, so that the RAM 233 can determine the number of balls held in real time. However, when the number-of-balls display 40 displays the number of balls held by the player, the number of balls held is updated by the RAM 233 and stored in real time. Unlike the above, control is performed to update and display the number of balls at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds).

Next, the process proceeds to step H558, and LED display data corresponding to the number of holding balls updated in step H556 is set. This is for setting data to be displayed on the LED of the number-of-balls indicator 40 capable of displaying six digits of numbers (the number of balls) by arranging six 7-segment LEDs. Therefore, if there are 6 LEDs to be displayed, data for 6 digits is set.
Subsequently, in step H559, the LED display data corresponding to the display ball number set in step H558 is saved in the ball number output data area, and then the process returns.
Thus, the current number of balls (the updated number of balls) is displayed on the number-of-balls display 40.
On the other hand, if the number-of-balls display update timer is not “0” in step H552, the process jumps to step H558, and executes step H558 and step H559 in sequence and returns. Therefore, at this time, the display of the previous number of balls is continued by the number-of-balls display 40.

Returning to the step H553, when the determination result in the step H553 is YES, the number-of-ball display lead counter is equal to the number-of-ball display light counter, and the current number of balls is read from the number-of-balls display number storage area. It is determined that the process has been completed, and the process branches to Step H560. After the current number of balls is updated to the number of balls for display in Step H560, the process proceeds to Step H557, and the processes after Step H557 are executed.
In addition, when performing the process of step H560, in order to prevent a deviation between the display data about the number of balls and the internal data, when there is no data to be added (number of balls to be added), it is periodically performed. The processing to match the number of balls in the inside.

[Counting ball LED editing process]
Next, the counting ball number LED editing process in step H524 of the LED editing process (payout) will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step H571 whether or not the counting ball number is “0”. If the counting ball number is not “0”, the process proceeds to step H572 and the counting ball number LED is turned on. Set the data and then return. As a result, the counting ball display 313 is turned on.
On the other hand, if the counting ball number is “0” in step H571, the process proceeds to step H573, where the off data of the counting ball number LED is set, and then the process returns. As a result, the counting ball display 313 is turned off.
In this way, the counting ball indicator 313 is turned on / off according to the presence / absence of the counting ball, informing the player of the presence / absence of the counting ball, and from the counting ball number using the counting ball use switch 314. It is informed whether the movement to the number of balls is possible. Here, the counting ball display 313 performs simple display regarding the number of counting balls to the player by turning on / off thereof, and details of the counting ball number are displayed on the operation display device 7 managed by the card unit 15. . Note that the counting ball display may be configured by several LEDs (for example, six) to notify the approximate counting ball number.

[Polishing device control processing (dispensing)]
Next, the polishing apparatus control process H87 in the above-described timer interruption process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is determined in step H581 whether or not the polishing start flag is set. The polishing start flag is set in the initialization process at the time of starting the program in the dispensing control device 230. Therefore, it is usually set at the start of power supply to the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1). The polishing start command is a command for instructing start of polishing of the encapsulated sphere.
If the polishing start flag is set in step H581, the process proceeds to step H582, and if the polishing start flag is not set, the process jumps to step H587.
In step H582, the polishing start flag is cleared. This is because, when the polishing start flag is set, a polishing start command is sent from the payout control device 230 to the effect control device 53 via the game control device 54, and when the effect control device 53 receives the polishing start command, the polishing is started. Since the control device 59 is controlled and the polishing of the encapsulated sphere is started by the polishing device 56, the polishing start flag is cleared.

After step H582, a polishing flag is set in subsequent step H583. The in-polishing flag informs the game control device 54 that the enclosing sphere is being polished, in order to know that the enclosing sphere is also being polished in the payout control device 230.
In step H584, an initial value is set in the polishing timer. The polishing timer is for counting the polishing period, and has a function as a timer indicating the polishing period. In this case, for example, a value corresponding to 10 minutes is set as the initial value of the timer during polishing. Accordingly, the encapsulated sphere is polished for the period (polishing period) set by the initial value (for example, 10 minutes) of the polishing timer from the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1.
Next, a polishing start command is prepared in step H585, and main control command setting processing is performed in step H586. This is to set a command for transmitting a command from the payout control device 230 to the game control device 54 by serial communication (details will be described later). As a result, a polishing start command is sent to the game control device 54 by serial communication.

After step H586, the process proceeds to step H587. As described above, the process jumps to step H587 also when the polishing start flag is not set in step H581.
In step H587, if the polishing timer is not “0”, (−1) is updated. As a result, the polishing timer counts down. Next, in step H588, it is determined whether the polishing timer is “0”. If it is not “0”, the process returns and the routine is repeated. When the polishing timer reaches “0”, the process goes from step H588 to step H589 to determine whether the polishing flag is set. If the polishing flag is set, the process proceeds to step H590 to clear the polishing flag. On the other hand, if it is determined in step H589 that the polishing flag is not set, the process returns.
After the polishing flag is cleared in step H590, a polishing end command is prepared in step H591, and main control command setting processing is performed in subsequent step H592. The polishing end command is a command for instructing end of polishing of the encapsulated sphere. As described above, the main control command setting process sets a command for transmitting a command from the payout control device 230 to the game control device 54 by serial communication.
As a result, a polishing end command is sent to the game control device 54 by serial communication.
In this way, a polishing start command is set at the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1 (game machine), the start of polishing of the encapsulated sphere is instructed, and the period set by the initial value of the timer during polishing (for example, 10 minutes) After the encapsulated sphere is polished for (polishing period), the end of the encapsulated sphere is instructed by a polishing end command.
In this embodiment, the polishing apparatus 56 is operated for a predetermined period by the polishing start command, and the display during polishing in the effect control apparatus 53 is ended by the polishing end command. The operation of the polishing apparatus 56 may be started by a polishing start command, and the operation of the polishing apparatus 56 may be ended by a polishing end command.

[Main control command setting processing]
Next, main control command setting processes H586 and H592 in the above-described polishing apparatus control process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, a main control command (MODE) is written in the main control serial transmission buffer in step H601. Accordingly, the main control command (MODE) is transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the game control device 54 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 231 in the payout control device 230.
Next, in step H602, the main control serial transmission buffer status is read, and in step H603, it is determined whether or not transmission is in progress (main control command (MODE) is being transmitted). If transmission is in progress, the process jumps to step H606. To do. On the other hand, if the transmission is not in progress (NO in step H603), the process proceeds to step H604 to initialize the transmission circuit. Next, the process proceeds to step H605, where the main control command (MODE) is rewritten in the main control serial transmission buffer, and then the process proceeds to step H606.
Here, in the case of this flowchart, the main control command is transmitted in a 2-byte configuration such as “MODE” and “ACTION”, like an effect command, but it may be configured in more byte configurations. In those cases, a flowchart corresponding to a plurality of bytes may be used.

In step H606, the main control command (ACTION) is written in the main control serial transmission buffer. Thus, the main control command (ACTION) is transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the game control device 54 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 231 in the payout control device 230.
Next, in step H607, the main control serial transmission buffer status is read, and in step H608, it is determined whether transmission is in progress (transmission of the main control command (ACTION)). If transmission is in progress, the routine ends. And return. If the transmission is not in progress (NO in step H608), the process proceeds to step H609 to initialize the transmission circuit. Next, the process proceeds to step H610, where the main control command (ACTION) is rewritten to the main control serial transmission buffer, and then the process returns.
In this way, the main control command (MODE) and the main control command (ACTION) are transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the game control device 54 by serial communication. The game control device 54 receives these commands and transmits the production command (MODE) and the production command (ACTION) to the production control device 53 by the processing of the flowchart shown in FIG. In response to the command, the presentation control is performed on the screen of the display device 41, and an instruction is given to the polishing control device 59. Since the serial communication is performed using the serial communication function of the CPU 231 in the payout control device 230, there is an advantage that the configuration is simple.

Next, the control contents of the effect control device 53 will be described with reference to FIG.
Here, the flowchart of the effect control device 53 will be described using “step P” as the step number.
[Polishing device control processing (production control)]
First, the polishing apparatus control processing (effect control) of the effect control device 53 will be described with reference to FIG.
The polishing apparatus control process is executed by a timer interruption process that is periodically repeated. The content of the polishing apparatus control process is to receive a command from the game control apparatus 54 and control the operation of the polishing apparatus 56.
Note that the polishing apparatus control process is not limited to the timer interrupt process, and is configured to be executed in a form that is called from within a loop process executed in a drawing frame cycle (for example, 33.3 ms) in the main process of the effect control apparatus 53, for example. May be.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step P1 whether or not the encapsulated sphere is being polished. This is determined by a later-described polishing flag (see step P4). That is, if the polishing flag is set (see step P4), it is determined that polishing is in progress.
If it is determined in step P1 that the encapsulated sphere is not being polished, the process proceeds to step P2, and it is determined whether or not the polishing start flag is set. This is determined by analyzing a command transmitted from the game control device 54. For example, when a polishing start command is received from the game control device 54, the effect control device 53 sets a polishing start flag. Since it is, it determines based on it. Therefore, if the production control device 53 has received a polishing start command from the game control device 54, the production control device 53 sets a polishing start flag, and the determination in step P2 is YES.

If the polishing start flag is set in step P2, the process proceeds to step P3, and the polishing start flag is cleared. Since the polishing start flag is confirmed in step P2, the polishing start flag is cleared in order not to repeat the same routine. On the other hand, if the polishing start flag is not set in step P2, the process returns.
After step P3, the process proceeds to step P4 and the polishing flag is set. This is because the polishing flag indicates that the production control device 53 also knows that the encapsulated sphere is being polished.
Next, a display start setting of “in polishing” is performed in step P5. As a result, the display device 41 displays the effect “in polishing”. Next, a polishing start command is prepared in step P6, and polishing apparatus command transmission processing is performed in subsequent step P7. As a result, a polishing start command is transmitted to the polishing control device 59 and the polishing of the encapsulated sphere by the polishing device 56 is started. The process returns after step P7.
The flowchart of the polishing control device 59 will be described later (see FIG. 65).
Further, in this flowchart, only the instruction to start polishing of the encapsulated sphere is issued to the polishing controller 59, and the polishing controller 59 performs the process of polishing the encapsulated sphere for a predetermined period from the instruction to start polishing sent from the effect controller 53. .

Next, if it is determined in step P1 that the encapsulated sphere is being polished, the process branches to step P8, and it is determined whether or not the polishing end flag is set. This is determined by analyzing a command transmitted from the game control device 54. For example, when a polishing end command is received and analyzed from the game control device 54 and analyzed as a polishing end command, a polishing end flag is set. In this case, the determination result in step P8 is YES. On the other hand, if the polishing end command has not been received from the game control device 54, the polishing end flag is not set, and in this case, the determination result in step P8 is NO.
If the polishing end flag is not set in step P8, the routine is ended and the process returns. On the other hand, if the polishing end flag is set in step P8, the process proceeds to step P9, and the polishing end flag is cleared. Since the polishing end flag is confirmed in step P8, the polishing end flag is cleared in order not to repeat the same routine.
After step P9, the process proceeds to step P10, and the polishing flag is cleared. The polishing flag is for grasping that the encapsulated sphere is being polished in the production control device 53, but since the polishing end flag is set, it is not necessary to recognize that the enclosing sphere is being polished. Therefore, the polishing flag is cleared.
Next, display end setting of “in polishing” is performed in step P11. As a result, the display of the effect “in polishing” on the display device 41 ends. The process returns after step P11.

As described above, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 64, when a polishing start command is received from the game control device 54, the effect control device 53 sets the polishing start flag and transmits the polishing start command to the polishing control device 59. Polishing of the encapsulated sphere is started. In this case, the polishing control device 59 starts polishing the encapsulated sphere based on the polishing start command sent from the effect control device 53, and controls the polishing device 56 so as to polish the encapsulated sphere only for a predetermined period from the instruction to start polishing. To do.
During polishing of the encapsulated sphere, an effect “in polishing” is displayed on the display device 41 under the control of the effect control device 53 and is notified to the store clerk and the like.
When a predetermined period elapses from the start of polishing, the polishing of the encapsulated sphere by the polishing device 56 is finished according to an instruction from the polishing control device 59.
At this time, when the polishing end command is received from the game control device 54, the effect control device 53 sets the polishing end flag, and the effect “in polishing” is displayed on the display device 41 based on the polishing end command. End. Further, in this example, the polishing end command from the game control device 54 is used to end the display of the effect “in polishing” on the display device 41. The polishing of the encapsulated sphere is completed based on the judgment of the polishing controller 59. The polishing controller 59 instructs the polishing apparatus 56 to end the polishing when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of polishing. Therefore, the polishing of the encapsulated sphere is completed even if there is no polishing end command from the game control device 54. Therefore, the polishing end command from the game control device 54 may not be provided for the control of the polishing end of the encapsulated sphere.
The configuration may be such that polishing of the encapsulated sphere is started by a polishing start command from the game control device 54 and polishing of the encapsulated sphere is ended by a polishing end command.

[Polishing control processing]
Next, the control contents of the polishing control device 59 will be described with reference to FIG.
Here, with respect to the flowchart of the polishing control device 59, which will be described using “step P” as a step number. When this routine is started, it is determined in step P 21 whether there is a polishing start instruction. This is determined by whether or not a polishing start command has been transmitted from the effect control device 53 to the polishing control device 59. That is, if a polishing start command is transmitted from the effect control device 53 to the polishing control device 59, the determination in step P21 is YES, and the processing after step P22 is executed. On the other hand, if no polishing start command is transmitted from the production control device 53 to the polishing control device 59, the process stays at step P21 and waits for reception of the polishing start command.
If a polishing start command is transmitted from the effect control device 53 to the polishing control device 59, the process proceeds from step P21 to step P22.

When proceeding to Step P22, a weight of a predetermined time T0 is set. The weight of the predetermined time T0 is set in consideration of the preparation period until the polishing of the encapsulated sphere is started. Therefore, the polishing of the encapsulated sphere starts after the predetermined time T0 has elapsed.
Therefore, after step P22, the process proceeds to the next step P23, where the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 is switched to the “polishing side”. As a result, the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 slides a part of the ball feed channel 78 to open the polishing guide port 80a, and the encapsulated sphere present in the sensor channel 77 and the ball feed channel 78 is polished by gravity. It moves to the lower polishing inflow guide path 80 through the guide port 80 a and is guided to the polishing apparatus 56 through the polishing inflow guide path 80, and the filled ball starts to flow into the polishing apparatus 56. In this case, by executing Step P25 described later, the encapsulated sphere is circulated through a route that passes through the polishing device 56 and is polished.

Next, in step P24, a T1 timer that counts the predetermined time T1 is started. Here, the predetermined time T1 corresponds to a period in which the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 is switched to the “polishing side” and the encapsulated sphere is caused to flow into the polishing device 56 and the sphere is polished. . The predetermined time T1 corresponds to a degree of polishing that can sufficiently polish all of the encapsulated spheres enclosed in the pachinko machine 1 and is sufficient for operation on the day (for example, operation for one day on the day). .
Next, the process proceeds to Step P25, and the polishing motor 70 is activated. As a result, the ball that has flowed into the polishing device 56 is polished by the polishing member 74 disposed inside while being lifted by the lifting screw 73 by the power of the polishing motor 70, and is passed from the upper outlet 75 via the polishing outlet switch 76. The encapsulated spheres are polished sequentially.
Next, in step P26, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time T1 has elapsed. This is determined by whether the T1 timer counting the predetermined time T1 has counted up to the predetermined time T1. If the predetermined time T1 has not elapsed, the process jumps to Step P29 and the input from the polishing outlet switch 76 (that is, the signal that the polishing outlet switch 76 detects the sphere discharged from the upper outlet 75) is sent to the polishing control device 59. It is determined whether or not there is. This is to determine whether or not the polishing outlet switch 76 detects a sphere discharged from the upper outlet 75 to the sensor flow path 77. Here, if the polishing outlet switch 76 does not detect the discharge of the sphere from the upper outlet 75 for a certain time or more, it is determined that there is an abnormality such as a clogged ball in the polishing device 56, and the polishing motor 70 of the polishing device 56 is prevented from continuing to rotate. Therefore, the determination in step P29 is performed. If the polishing outlet switch 76 does not detect the discharge of the sphere from the upper outlet 75 for a predetermined time or longer, the T3 timer determines that the time is up in Step P32 described later, and when the time is up, the process goes to Step P33. The polishing motor 70 is stopped and the routine is terminated. Accordingly, the polishing motor 70 can be stopped when the polishing apparatus 56 is abnormal, such as a clogged ball, and abnormal heating of the polishing motor 70 is prevented.

If there is an input from the polishing outlet switch 76 in step P29, it is determined that there is no abnormality such as clogging in the polishing apparatus 56, and the process proceeds to step P30. In Step P30, the T3 timer that counts the predetermined time T3 is reset and activated. The predetermined time T3 here corresponds to a period from when the polishing outlet switch 76 is last turned on while the polishing motor 70 is started to when the polishing motor 70 is stopped. For a predetermined time T3, after the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 is switched from the “polishing side” to the “normal side”, one sphere in the polishing inflow guide path 80 is polished and passed through the polishing outlet switch 76. Corresponds to a sufficient period of time. Therefore, by providing the predetermined time T3, the polishing motor 70 is stopped after all the balls being polished inside the polishing apparatus 56 are discharged. Therefore, in step P30, the T3 timer is returned to the initial value = 0 and then started.
In step P30, every time there is an input from the polishing exit switch 76, the T3 timer is reset to the initial value every time, resetting is started, and counting is started.

After step P30, it is then determined in step P31 whether or not the T2 timer has been started. The predetermined time T2 here corresponds to a period until the polishing motor 70 is stopped after the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 is switched from the “polishing side” to the “normal side”. Therefore, after the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 is switched from the “polishing side” to the “normal side” by providing the predetermined time T2, all the balls being polished inside the polishing apparatus 56 are discharged. Then, the polishing motor 70 is stopped. Therefore, in step P31, it is determined whether the T2 timer has been started.
If the T2 timer has not been started in step P31, the process returns to step P26 to repeat the loop. Therefore, as described above, while the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 is switched to the “polishing side” and the encapsulated sphere is caused to flow into the polishing device 56 to perform the polishing of the sphere, Step P26, Step P29, Step The loop of P30 and Step P31 is repeated, and the polishing of the sphere is continued by the polishing device 56. When the predetermined time T1 has elapsed, it is determined that the encapsulated sphere has been sufficiently polished, the determination result in step P26 is YES, and the flow proceeds to step P27.

In Step P27, the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 is switched from the “polishing side” to the “normal side”. As a result, the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 is turned off, and the switching valve 59 biases the valve body by the spring and displaces it to a position where the polishing guide port 80a is closed. Accordingly, the encapsulated sphere present in the ball feed channel 78 is not moved to the lower polishing inflow guiding path 80 because the polishing guiding port 80 a is closed, and the encapsulated sphere does not flow into the polishing device 56.
Next, the process proceeds to step P28, and the T2 timer is started. As described above, the T2 timer counts the predetermined period T2. In this period T2, the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 is switched from the “polishing side” to the “normal side”, and then the polishing inflow guide path 80 and the polishing are switched. The period until all the balls being polished inside the device 56 are discharged is taken into consideration. Next, the process proceeds to Step P29, and it is determined whether or not there is an input from the polishing outlet switch 76. For a while after starting the T2 timer, the ball being polished inside the polishing apparatus 56 is discharged. Therefore, while the ball is discharged, the determination result in Step P29 is YES, and the process proceeds to Step P30. Become. In step P30, after resetting and starting the T3 timer, the process proceeds to step P31, and it is determined whether or not the T2 timer has been started. In this case, since the T2 timer has already been started, the process proceeds to step P32 to determine whether both the T2 timer and the T3 timer are up. If both the T2 timer and the T3 timer have not timed up, the process returns to step P26 to repeat the loop. In step P32, it is considered that the time is up even when the T3 timer is not activated. If the polishing apparatus 56 is operating normally (that is, without abnormality), there is an input from the polishing outlet switch 76, so that the T3 timer is always started in step P30. On the other hand, if there is an abnormality such as a clogged ball in the polishing apparatus 56, there is no input from the polishing outlet switch 76. In this case, the polishing motor 70 is stopped in step P33 as described later.

If both the T2 timer and the T3 timer are timed up in step P32 due to repetition of the loop, the determination result in step P32 is YES, and the flow proceeds to step P33. In this case, when the loop is repeated, if there is no input from the polishing outlet switch 76 in the determination in step P29, the determination result in step P29 is NO, and the process jumps to step P30 and proceeds to step P31. .
When the process proceeds from step P32 to step P33, the polishing motor 70 is stopped and the routine is terminated in step P33. Thereby, the operation of the polishing apparatus 56 is stopped.
In step P29, it is determined that there is no input from the polishing outlet switch 76. If this state continues for a certain time, it is determined in step P32 that the T3 timer has timed out. The motor 70 is stopped and the routine is terminated. As a result, the polishing motor 70 is stopped when abnormalities such as ball clogging in the polishing apparatus 56 occur, and abnormal heating or the like of the polishing motor 70 is prevented.

Thus, when a polishing start command is transmitted from the production control device 53 to the polishing control device 59, the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 is switched to the “polishing side” after waiting for a predetermined time T0, The polishing motor 70 is started and the polishing of the encapsulated sphere is started by the polishing device 56. Thereafter, when the predetermined time T1 has elapsed, it is determined that the encapsulated sphere has been sufficiently polished, the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 is switched from the “polishing side” to the “normal side”, and then the polishing outlet switch 76. When it is confirmed that the predetermined period T3 has elapsed from the ON state and the predetermined period T2 has elapsed, the polishing motor 70 is stopped.
Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the path of the encapsulated sphere is switched to “polishing side” for a predetermined time T1, and the encapsulated sphere is polished by the polishing device 56. Next, when the polishing of the encapsulated sphere is completed, the game is ready, and the encapsulated sphere is circulated without going through the polishing device 56 during the game.
In addition, the game control device 54 (main board) and the payout control device 230 simply issue a polishing start command and a polishing stop command to the effect control device 53, and under the control of the effect control device 53, the polishing control device 59 (polishing device). Therefore, the control burden on the game control device 54 (main board) and the payout control device 230 can be reduced, and the efficiency is improved.

Next, control contents of the card unit 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 69. FIG.
Here, the flowchart of the card unit 15 will be described using “step A” as the step number.
[Operation display editing process]
First, the operation display device editing process of the card unit 15 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing card unit operation display device control processing of the card unit 15. This routine is a process of performing various controls of the operation display device 7 under the management of the card unit 15, and is repeatedly executed at predetermined intervals.
When this routine is started, first, basic display data of the common display area is set in step A1. This is because the buttons on the common display area, the size of the buttons, the message size, the message / operation size in the entire liquid crystal display part including the various buttons (such as the ball rental button 303 and the return button 304) and the message / operation area unit 306 in the operation display device 7 are displayed. Display data common to the entire screen of the operation area unit 306 is set in advance.

In step A2, sphere unit price display data corresponding to the sphere unit price information is set. This is to set the data for displaying the ball lending rate (that is, the ball unit price) when lending game balls from the card unit 15, and in this embodiment, either 4 yen per ball or 1 yen per ball is set. Since it is possible to lend a ball at a rate, for example, when lending a ball at 4 yen, data for displaying “ball lending: 4 yen per ball” is set.
Next, in step A3, it is determined whether or not a game card (including a prepaid card (for example, a visitor card)) is inserted into the card unit 15 (specifically, inserted into the card slot 201). If a game card has been inserted, display data when the “pick / replay” button is valid is set in step A4. This is to set data for enabling and displaying the storage / replay button 305 disposed on the operation display device 7. As a result, the player inserts a game card into the card slot 201 of the card unit 15 and performs an operation of inputting the member's PIN on the screen of the message / operation area 306. If 305 is pressed, it becomes possible to store the balls acquired by the player using the membership card or to replay using the balls stored in the membership card.

Next, display data when the “return” button is valid is set in step A5. This is to set data for enabling and displaying the return button 304 arranged on the operation display device 7. As a result, if the player wishes to return the game card before starting the game, the game card is returned by pressing the return button 304. The return button 304 is used when the player wants to settle the number of balls.
Next, in step A6, amount display data corresponding to the remaining amount information is set. This is to set data for displaying an amount corresponding to the remaining frequency (remaining amount information) of the inserted game card. For example, if the remaining frequency of the game card is 10, data for displaying 1000 yen as the amount of money is set by calculation of 1 frequency = 100 yen.

Next, the process proceeds to step A7, where it is determined whether or not the remaining amount information (remaining frequency) of the gaming card is equal to or greater than the lenttable amount. Set the display data when the "rent" button is valid. This is to set data for enabling and displaying the ball lending button 303 arranged on the operation display device 7. Thereby, when the player presses the ball lending button 303, the ball lending is performed within the range of the remaining frequency (remaining amount information) of the game card.
Next, in step A9, it is determined whether or not the display mode is the number of balls possessed. This is a mode for displaying the details of the number of balls held and the number of counted balls (including the explanation of the number of balls held and the number of counted balls, and the analog display of the number of balls held) on the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7. Whether or not. When there is a counting ball or when the player selects analog display of the number of balls held (display imitating a ball box), the determination result of step A9 is YES, and when there is no balls, there is no counting balls Or if the player has not selected the analog display of the number of balls held.

If the display mode is not the number-of-balls display in step A9, the determination result is NO, the process proceeds to step A11, and the display data for the demonstration display during game is set. This is because the display mode is not selected to display the number of possessed balls or the number of counted balls, so the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 is displayed in the normal game message (for example, an explanation message of an appearing character or Data for displaying a game game progress message) or the like is set.
Next, the process proceeds to step A12, and a liquid crystal display control process is performed. This is because various display data is set in each of the above steps, and various screens (including button screens) are actually displayed on the operation display device 7 constituted by a liquid crystal display corresponding to these display data. It performs control processing when various buttons are pressed. After step A12, the process returns.

Next, a description will be given of a case where the determination at each step branches to a route different from that described above.
First, when it is determined in step A3 that a game card is not inserted into the card unit 15, the process branches to step A13, and display data when the “pick / replay” button is disabled is set in step A13. As a result, the storage / replay button 305 arranged on the operation display device 7 is not displayed.
After step A13, display data when the “return” button is invalid is set in step A14. As a result, the return button 304 arranged on the operation display device 7 is not displayed. Next, display data when the “ball lending” button is disabled is set in step A15. Thereby, the ball lending button 303 arranged on the operation display device 7 is not displayed. Next, display data of a customer waiting message is set in step A16. This is because the ball lending button 303 or the like is set to be invalid and the game is not in a starting state. The data for displaying is set.
After step A16, the process returns.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A7 that the remaining amount information (remaining frequency) of the gaming card is less than the sphere lending possible amount, the process branches to step A17 to set display data when the “ball lending” button is disabled. Thereby, the ball lending button 303 arranged on the operation display device 7 is not displayed, and the ball lending to the player is not performed. At this time, a message that the remaining amount (remaining frequency) is insufficient may be displayed on the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7. After step A17, the process proceeds to step A9.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A9 that the display mode is the display of the number of balls, for example, when there is a counting ball or when the player selects the analog display of the number of balls (display imitating the ball box), The determination result of step A9 is YES. At this time, the process branches to step A18, and the process of step A18 is performed. In step A18, display data corresponding to the number of balls is set. This is data for displaying the number of balls held in the message / operation area section 306 of the operation display device 7 (including analog display that looks like a ball box, numbers representing the number of balls, explanation of the number of balls held, etc.) Is set. After step A18, the process proceeds to step A19, where display data corresponding to the number of counted balls is set. This is data for displaying the number of counting balls in the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7 (for example, including an analog display that looks like a ball box, a number representing the number of balls, a description of the counting ball, etc.). It is to set. After step A19, the process returns after executing step A12.
In this way, processing for performing various controls of the operation display device 7 is executed under the management of the card unit 15.

[Return button monitoring process]
FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the return button monitoring process of the card unit 15. When this routine is started, it is first determined in step A31 whether or not the settlement process is being performed. On the other hand, if the settlement process is not in progress, the process proceeds to step A32 to determine whether or not the return button 304 has been pressed. If the return button 304 has not been pressed in step A32, the process returns. If the return button 304 has been pressed, the process proceeds to step A33, where it is determined whether or not the payment is possible. This is determined using the gaming machine information command transmitted from the payout control device 230 described above.
If the payment is not possible in step A33, the process returns. If the payment is possible, the process proceeds to step A34, and the payment instruction flag to the payout control device 230 is set. Since the return button 304 is pressed and payment is possible, the payment instruction flag for starting the payment is set as an instruction to the payout control device 230.
That is, step A34 is for setting a command to the payout control device 230. The settlement instruction flag is checked, and the card unit 15 sets an instruction command.
After step S34, the process proceeds to step A35, and the settlement process flag is set. The settlement process in progress flag is a flag indicating that the settlement process is in progress, and is used in the above-described step A31, a settlement process routine described later, and the like. After step A35, the process returns.

[Checkout]
FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the settlement process of the card unit 15. When this routine is started, it is first determined in step A41 whether the settlement process is being performed. This is determined based on the checkout process flag. If the settlement process in progress flag is set, it is determined that the settlement process is being performed, and the process proceeds to step A42. On the other hand, if the settlement process flag is not set, it is determined that the settlement process is not being performed, and the process returns.
In step A42, it is determined whether or not the information on the total number of balls has been received from the payout control device 230. This is to determine whether the total number of balls (number of balls held + number of balls counted) information has been received from the payout control device 230.

If reception of the total number of balls has not been completed from the payout control device 230 in step A42, the routine returns and the routine is repeated, and it is determined that reception of the information on the total number of balls has been completed from the payout control device 230. Then, the process proceeds from step A42 to step A43, and the total number of balls (number of balls held + number of balls counted) is written in the game card (recorded on the game card).
After step A43, the process proceeds to step A44, where a settlement writing completion notification flag to the payout control device 230 is set. The payment writing completion notification flag notifies the payout control device 230 of the completion of payment writing, and the payout control device 230 that receives this clears the total number of balls (the number of balls held + the number of balls counted) to “0”, etc. The processing corresponding to the completion of the settlement is performed.

Next, proceeding to step A45, the game card is discharged from the card slot 201. Next, in step A46, it is determined whether or not the game card has been removed. This is to determine whether or not the game card discharged from the card insertion slot 201 has been extracted by the player. If the game card has not been extracted, the game card stays at step A46, and the game card is extracted by the player. Wait for. If it is determined that the game card has been removed by the player, the process proceeds to step A47, and a card withdrawal completion notification flag to the payout control device 230 is set. The card withdrawal completion notification flag informs the payout control device 230 that the game card has been removed from the card unit 15, and the payout control device 230 that has received the card draws the holding number indicator 40 for a short time. Processing corresponding to the end of the settlement, such as flashing the number of balls, is performed.
Next, the process proceeds to step A48, the settlement process in progress flag is cleared, and then the process returns. As a result, the settlement process in progress flag set in the previous step A35 is cleared and prepared for the next settlement.
In this way, the total number of balls held (number of balls held + number of balls counted) is recorded on the game card and discharged from the card insertion slot 201, the game card is extracted by the player, and the settlement ends.

[Machine ID verification process]
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the gaming machine ID collating process of the card unit 15. When this routine is started, it is first determined whether or not a gaming machine ID is received in step A61. Here, it is determined whether the card unit 15 has received the gaming machine ID output from the payout control device 230 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.
The gaming machine ID here is both a gaming machine ID (main board unique ID) of the game control device 54 (main board) and a gaming machine ID (payout board unique ID) of the payout control apparatus 230 (payout board). This is a concept including the unique identification information (the same applies to the flowchart below).
If the card unit 15 has received the gaming machine ID output from the payout control device 230, the process proceeds to step A 62, and the gaming machine ID is transmitted from the card unit 15 to the external management device 91. This is because when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (for example, when a game store is opened), the gaming machine ID (the gaming machine ID (main board unique ID) of the gaming control device 54 (main board)) and the payout control device 230 (payout board). ) Is sent to the external management device 91 managed by an external third party through the card unit 15, and the external management device 91 stores the regular The game machine ID is collated (matching for determining the legitimacy of the gaming machine ID), and the collation result (ID collation result) is returned to the pachinko machine 1 via the card unit 15. Therefore, in step A62, the gaming machine ID is transmitted via the card unit 15 to the external management device 91 managed by an external third party organization.
The external management device 91 collates with the regular gaming machine ID to be stored (collation for determining the legitimacy of the gaming machine ID), and returns the collation result (ID collation result) to the card unit 15. Since the external management device 91 is managed by an independent third party independent of the amusement store, the accuracy and fairness of the ID verification is ensured.
After step A62, the process returns.

On the other hand, when the game machine ID is not received in step A61, the process goes to NO and branches to step A63, and whether or not the card unit 15 has received the game machine ID verification result from the external management device 91. Determine. When the game machine ID has not been received in step A61, the game machine ID has already been received, and the waiting state for the game machine ID verification result from the external management device 91 is also included.
If the game machine ID collation result is not received in step A63, the process returns and the routine is repeated. If the game machine ID collation result is received, the process proceeds to step A64 to determine whether or not the game machine ID collation result is OK. If the matching result of the gaming machine ID is OK, unique identification information (main board ID: gaming machine ID) of the gaming control device 54 and unique identification information (paying board ID: gaming machine ID) of the payout control device 230 Is determined to be legitimate, and in step A65, information indicating that the result of checking the gaming machine ID is OK is transmitted to the gaming machine (here, the payout control device 230). When the payout control device 230 receives information from the card unit 15 that the result of matching the gaming machine ID is OK, the payout control device 230 performs processing corresponding to the result of matching the gaming machine ID. Specifically, as described above, when the ID collation result OK is received from the card unit 15, a command for illegally closing the night frame opening is sent to the effect control board (effect control device 53) via the game control device 54. When the information indicating that the front frame 4 is opened at night is displayed on the display device 41 under the control of the effect control device 53, this is terminated. Thus, although the opening of the frame is notified to prompt the store clerk to check, it is determined that the possibility of fraud is low, and the opening of the frame is ended. If the night frame opening fraud notification is not in progress, reception of the ID collation result OK is unnecessary, and the display device 41 does not display that the front frame 4 is opened at night.
After step A65, the process returns.

On the other hand, if the check result of the gaming machine ID is not OK in step A64 (that is, if the check result is NG), the process branches to step A66, and card unit error processing is performed in step A66. The state where the matching result of the gaming machine ID is not OK means that either or both of the unique identification information (main board ID) of the game control device 54 and the unique identification information (payout board ID) of the payout control device 230 are valid. Since it is judged that it is not a thing, the possibility of fraud is high. For example, there is a high possibility that the front frame 4 is illegally opened at night and the board of the game control device 54 (or the payout control device 230) is replaced with an illegal board. Therefore, in the card unit error processing in step A66, error notification is performed on the card unit error notification LED 203 and the screen of the operation display device 7, and processing for stopping functions such as ball lending, payment, and game card acceptance is performed. A store clerk who sees the error notification displayed on the card unit error notification LED 203 or the screen of the operation display device 7 can take a countermeasure such as inspecting the pachinko machine 1 and deal with it illegally.
In addition, the card unit 15 performs processing for stopping functions such as ball lending, payment, and game card acceptance, so that the pachinko machine 1 is not required to be operated, and damage to the game store can be prevented.
After step S66, the process returns.
The card unit error process in step A66 is not limited to the process described above, and other effective processes may be used in combination or independently in order to prevent fraud.

Next, the operation of the first embodiment will be described.
First, the operation of the encapsulated sphere polishing control will be described.
FIG. 70 shows a timing chart of the operation of controlling the polishing of the encapsulated sphere when the pachinko machine 1 is activated.
Normally, at game shops around 11:00 pm (or even before), the business is stopped due to the operation of the game machines, the power supply of each game machine is shut off and the store is closed, and then the inside of the store and the table are cleaned and cleaned up. Prepare for the next business day.
Now, when the pachinko machine 1 is started and the power supply device 58 starts to supply power when the game store is opened, the payout control device 230 (payout substrate) transmits a polishing start command to the game control device 54 when the power is turned on. When the game control device 54 (main board) receives the polishing start command from the payout control device 230, it transmits a polishing start command (indicated by a single pulse in FIG. 70) to the effect control device 53 at timing t1. When the production control device 53 receives the polishing start command from the game control device 54, the production control device 53 instructs the polishing control device 59 to start polishing and displays on the screen of the display device 41 from the reception of the polishing start command to the reception of the polishing stop command. Control to do.
On the other hand, the dispensing control device 230 stops the firing of the encapsulated sphere when the polishing start command is transmitted when the power is turned on, and the sphere cannot be launched as shown in FIG. The ball cannot be fired until the polishing control command is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53.

When the polishing control device 59 receives a polishing instruction from the effect control device 53, the determination result in step P21 (whether there is a polishing start instruction) in the flowchart shown in FIG. 65 is YES, and the processing from step P22 onward is executed.
Next, when a predetermined time T0 waits from timing t1 and timing t2, as shown in FIG. 70, the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 changes the circulation path of the enclosed sphere from the “normal side” to the “polishing side”. Switch to. As a result, the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 slides a part of the ball feed channel 78 to open the polishing guide port 80a, and the encapsulated sphere present in the sensor channel 77 and the ball feed channel 78 is polished by gravity. It moves to the lower polishing inflow guide path 80 through the guide port 80 a and is guided to the polishing device 56 through the polishing inflow guide path 80, and the filled ball starts to flow into the polishing apparatus 56.
In addition, the polishing motor 70 is started (turned from OFF to ON) at the same timing t2. As a result, the ball that has flowed into the polishing device 56 is polished by the polishing member 74 disposed inside while being lifted by the lifting screw 73 by the power of the polishing motor 70, and is passed from the upper outlet 75 via the polishing outlet switch 76. The encapsulated spheres are sequentially polished.

On the other hand, as described above, when the production control device 53 receives the polishing start command from the game control device 54, it instructs the polishing control device 59 to start polishing, and displays from the polishing start command reception to the polishing stop command reception. Control is performed so that the screen 41 is displayed during polishing. As a result, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), the message “Encapsulated sphere is being polished. Please wait” is displayed on the display device 41 and notified to the store clerk. Further, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), a progress display SJ indicating the progress of polishing of the encapsulated sphere (the hatched portion indicates completion of polishing and the rest indicates the state of polishing) is shown below the message. Done. Therefore, the store clerk can easily grasp the progress of polishing of the encapsulated sphere.
Note that the notification of the progress of the encapsulating sphere or the progress of the polishing is not limited to the display effect by the display device 41, and for example, a notification lamp other than the display device 41 may be used for notification. Or the structure which alert | reports with an audio | voice or a sound effect may be sufficient.

In response to a polishing instruction from the production control device 53, the polishing control device 59 executes processing necessary for polishing the encapsulated sphere, such as driving the polishing motor 70 and operating the switching solenoid 79S, for a predetermined time period T1, thereby playing the game ball Polishing is performed.
That is, polishing of the encapsulated sphere is executed until a predetermined time T1 elapses from the timing t2. Meanwhile, the sphere discharged from the upper outlet 75 of the polishing apparatus 56 to the sensor flow path 77 is detected by the polishing outlet switch 76. Since the polishing outlet switch 76 is turned from OFF to ON every time one sphere discharged from the upper outlet 75 to the sensor channel 77 is detected, it is input to the polishing controller 59 in the form of a pulse signal as shown in FIG. Is done.
If the polishing outlet switch 76 does not detect the discharge of the sphere from the upper outlet 75 for a certain time or more, it is abnormal such as a clogging of the ball in the polishing device 56, so the polishing motor 70 is stopped. Prevents abnormal heating of FIG. 70 shows a case where the polishing outlet switch 76 has detected a sphere normally discharged from the upper outlet 75.
Next, when the predetermined time T1 elapses from the timing t2 and reaches the timing t3, it is determined that the encapsulated sphere has been sufficiently polished, and the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 changes the circulation path of the encapsulated sphere from the “polishing side”. Switch to “Normal”. As a result, the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 is turned off, and the switching valve 59 is displaced to a position where the valve body is urged by the spring to close the polishing guide port 80a. Since the polishing guide port 80 a is closed, the encapsulated sphere does not flow into the polishing device 56 without moving to the lower polishing inflow guide path 80. During this time, the polishing motor 70 is operating.

In other words, the polishing motor 70 is operating even after the timing t3 has elapsed, so that the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 is switched to the “normal side” from the “polishing side” and thus remains inside the polishing apparatus 56. A period is secured until all balls being polished are discharged.
When all the balls being polished inside the polishing apparatus 56 are discharged, the detection signal of the polishing outlet switch 76 is turned off, and thereafter, the detection signal remains off.
Next, when the predetermined time T2 elapses from timing t3 and reaches timing t4, the polishing motor 70 stops operating (OFF). At a timing t4, a predetermined period T2 has elapsed after the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 is switched from the “polishing side” to the “normal side”, and a predetermined period after the detection signal of the polishing outlet switch 76 is finally turned off. It is the time when T3 has elapsed. As described above, when the predetermined period T3 has elapsed since the detection signal of the polishing outlet switch 76 was last turned off (timing t4), the operation of the polishing motor 70 is stopped, whereby the ball inside the polishing apparatus 56 is stopped. After confirming that all the balls being polished have been discharged, the polishing motor 70 is stopped, so that no enclosing balls remain in the polishing device 56.

On the other hand, the payout control device 230 transmits a polishing end command to the game control device 54 at a timing when the predetermined period T1 + T2 elapses, and when the game control device 54 receives the polishing end command from the payout control device 230, it polishes to the effect control device 53. An end command (indicated by a single pulse in FIG. 70) is transmitted. When the production control device 53 receives the polishing end command from the game control device 54, the production control device 53 controls the display device 41 to display the completion of polishing. This timing is t4.
That is, at timing t4, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), the display device 41 displays a message “polishing of the encapsulated sphere has been completed” and notifies a store clerk or the like. In addition, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), a display of the state where the polishing is completed is displayed below the message by a progress display SJ indicating the progress of the polishing of the encapsulated sphere. Here, as the progress state, the progress display SJ is all hatched so that the hatched portion indicates the completion of polishing, and the display of the state where the polishing is completed is performed. Therefore, the store clerk can easily grasp that the polishing of the encapsulated sphere has been completed.

In this way, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the path of the encapsulated sphere is switched to the “polishing side” for a predetermined time T1, and the encapsulating sphere is polished by the polishing device 56. While the game ball is being polished, the ball is stopped from firing and the game cannot be played. Next, when the polishing of the encapsulated sphere is completed, the game is ready, and the encapsulated sphere is circulated without going through the polishing device 56 during the game.
The game control device 54 (main substrate) and the payout control device 230 simply issue a polishing start command and a polishing stop command to the effect control device 53, and the polishing control device 59 (the polishing device 56 is also controlled under the control of the effect control device 53. Control) is performed to polish the encapsulated sphere, so that the control burden on the game control device 54 (main board) and the payout control device 230 can be reduced, and the efficiency is improved.
Further, in this embodiment, the game control device 54 (main board) and the payout control device 230 produce a polishing start command not only when the pachinko machine 1 is in operation but also when the store is closed and the power is turned off. There is no transmission to the control device 53, and the production control device 53 does not instruct the polishing control device 59 to start polishing the encapsulated sphere. This is because, for example, even when the encapsulated sphere is polished by a polishing device with a battery or the like after the store is closed, there is no instruction input or the like from the outside to the “sub-configured” polishing control device 59, and the internal RTC The polishing controller 56 is operated based on the above information to operate the polishing device 56 to polish the encapsulated sphere. In this way, the game control device 54 (main board) and the payout control device are similarly used. The control burden of 230 can be reduced, the efficiency is improved, and the effect of “sub-setting” is also obtained.
Further, the polishing control device 59 (including the polishing device 56) inputs information to the game control device 54 (main board) and the payout control device 230 (for example, information such as signal input, data input, command input). The polishing control device 59 (including the polishing device 56) is “sub-configured”. Therefore, by substituting it, there is a merit that the limitation of ROM capacity and the limitation of parts are relaxed.

Next, FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an operation example of the operation display device 7 regarding the display of the number of balls held and the number of counted balls.
In the description of FIG. 72, the concept of scene is used in the progress of the game. Scenes P1 to P4 shown in FIG. 72 are the number of balls displayed on the operation display device 7 and the number-of-balls display 40 and the effect screen during the game. This is a concept representing a scene of the entire rendering operation including a button screen and the like.
First, the scene P1 of FIG. 72 shows the operation of the operation display device 7 and the number-of-balls display 40 at the normal time. That is, in the scene P1, the operation display device 7 includes a ball lending rate display 301, a remaining amount display 302, a ball lending button 303, a return button 304, a storage / replay button 305, a message / operation area unit 306, and a switching button. A state in which 307 is arranged is shown, and a ball count indicator 40 is arranged below the operation display device 7.
72 shows a state in which a counting switch 311, a rest switch 312, a counting ball use switch 314, and a counting ball display 313 are arranged on the side of the ball holding number display 40.
In addition, in the description after the scene P2, the above-described encoding is complicated, and is omitted.

In the scene P1, as an example of the normal time, the remaining amount display unit 302 displays the remaining amount as “5000 yen”, so that the player knows that the balance of the gaming card is “5000 yen”. . In addition, the number of balls possessed 40 disposed below the operation display device 7 is digitally displayed with the number “6500” as the number of balls possessed. Thereby, the player knows that the current number of balls is 6500.
On the other hand, a message “Please press the count button to count” is displayed in the message / operation area section 306, and a message “Number of balls ↓ Can be fired” is displayed below this message. This informs the player that a game based on the number of balls possessed is possible. Thereby, it can be seen that the player has 6500 balls and can play a pachinko game by firing the balls.
In the state of scene P1, there is no counting ball number and there is no display of the counting ball number. Therefore, the counting ball display 313 is not lit.

Next, when the player presses the counting switch 311 to count the number of balls, the process moves to the scene P2. The scene P2 shows a case where the player has counted 6000 out of 6500 balls by pressing the counting switch 311. Therefore, 500 balls remain, and the number of counting balls is 6000. The state is displayed as 500 on the holding ball number display 40, and digitally displays “counting ball 6000” in the message / operation area 306. The player is notified by the display of “pieces”. Further, the same number of counting balls as the digitally displayed counting spheres (6000) displayed in the message / operation area 306 is displayed in an analog form with a figure that looks like a ball box T in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7. Is done. In addition, since the code | symbol T attached | subjected to a ball box becomes complicated, it is attached | subjected when it thinks that it is required on account of description.
In the scene P2, four ball boxes T are displayed, and are displayed in an analog form with a figure deceiving that there are 6000 counting balls in the four ball boxes T. Since there are 6000 counting balls, the figure is such that counting balls are collected in all four ball boxes T.
In addition, although not directly shown in the scene P2 of FIG. 72, the operation display device 7 displays a message indicating that there is a number of shootables (number of balls), and the number of shootables (number of balls) is also displayed. The operation display device 7 is configured to display digitally (numerals) such as “500 balls”.
Thus, the player can easily count the number of balls and move it to the counting ball by a simple operation of pressing the counting switch 311, which is convenient. In addition, the counting ball moved from the number of held balls is displayed in an analog form in a message / operation area 306 in a shape of a ball box, so that an intuitive grasp of the counting ball number can be performed smoothly. In particular, since the message / operation area 306 is larger than the number-of-balls indicator 40, the number of counted balls can be grasped more easily.
Further, when the scene P2 is entered, the counting ball display 313 is lit (LED lighting) because the counting ball number is generated. Thereby, the player can easily confirm that the counting ball number exists by looking at the counting ball display 313.

In addition, when displaying the number of spheres in an analogy with a figure that looks like a ball box T in the message / operation area 306, the following display mode is used in this embodiment.
・ Tama box full display: Number of balls = 1500 ・ Half box half display: Number of balls = 750 to less than 1500 ・ Slightly in the box: Number of balls = less than 750 For this reason, the ball rental rate display 301 always displays a rate of “ball rental: 4 yen per ball”. Further, the remaining amount (for example, “5000 yen”) is always displayed on the remaining amount display 302.

Next, when the player starts the game by firing the number of balls, the process moves to the scene P3.
The scene P3 shows a state where the player has fired the number of balls and the remaining number of balls has reached 30. At this time, since the remaining number of balls is 30 and the number of counted balls is 6000, the number of balls held from scene P2 is fired from 500 to 470, and the remaining number of balls is 30 State. This state is displayed as 30 on the number-of-balls display 40, and the message / operation area 306 is digitally displayed with "6000 counting balls" to notify the player.
Since there are only 30 remaining balls, the message / operation area 306 displays “If you want to use counting balls, please press the button to use counting balls → go to 100 balls at a time. Is displayed. This is to notify that the movement from the counted number of balls to the number of held balls is possible because the remaining number of held balls has decreased.

Next, as shown in the scene P4, when the player presses the counting ball use switch 314 and selects the movement from the counting ball number to the holding ball number, 100 counting balls move to the holding ball number by one operation. . At this time, the counting ball use switch 314 notifies that the built-in LED is lit and that the counting ball use switch 314 is usable (that is, the movement from the counting ball number to the holding ball number is possible).
When the player operates the counting ball use switch 314 once, as shown in the scene P4, as a result of the movement of 100 counting balls to the number of holding balls, the number of holding balls is 130, and the number of counting balls is 5900. Therefore, this state is displayed as 130 on the number-of-balls display 40, and the message / operation area 306 is digitally displayed as "the counting ball 100 has moved to the number of balls", so that the player To be notified.

As described above, when the number of balls held during the game of the pachinko machine 1 is generated, the number of balls held by the player is displayed on the ball number display 40. At this time, the lower panel 6 of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. When the counting switch 311 arranged on the button is pressed, the number of balls held is counted and becomes the number of counted balls, which is displayed on the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 (for example, digital display (numbers) of the counted balls) ) And an analog display (analog display with a figure that looks like a ball box) is displayed. When the number of counting balls is present, the counting ball display 313 is lit to notify.
In this state, when the player wants to return from the counting ball to the number of balls held, the counting ball use switch 314 is operated once by pressing the counting ball use switch 314, so that 100 counting balls have the number of balls held. Move to. When the number of counting balls is present, the counting ball indicator 313 is lit, so that the player can know. The counting ball use switch LED built in the counting ball use switch 314 is lit when the ball can move from the counting ball number to the holding ball number, so that the player also has the counting ball number. I understand that. In addition, returning to the number of balls from the counting ball corresponds to a concept of moving the ball from a so-called ball box to the upper plate.
Thereby, the player can play again using the number of balls moved. Further, the movement from the counting ball to the number of possessed balls is displayed on the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7.
Therefore, the player can move the counting ball from the counting ball to the number of holding balls by a simple operation of pressing the counting ball use switch 314, which is convenient. In addition, since the explanation of the number of balls held, the display of the number of counted balls, and the usage explanation are performed by the operation display device 7 managed by the card unit 15, the burden on the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230 of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced, Efficiency is good.

Next, the operation of the decorative ball display device 250 will be described with reference to FIG.
When the number of balls is generated during the game of the pachinko machine 1, the decoration with a large number of LEDs of the upper decorative ball display device 250a and the lower decorative ball display device 250b in the decorative ball display device 250 is performed.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 73, the decorative ball display device 250 is divided into an upper decorative ball display device 250a, a lower decorative ball display device 250b, and a counting decoration unit 250c. Is performed as follows.
<Upper decorative ball display device 250a>
The upper decorative ball display device 250a is designed to create an image of a so-called upper plate and is arranged on the upper side of the operation display device 7, and is composed of a large number of LEDs. In the upper decorative ball display device 250a, for example, when the number of balls held by the player is zero, all LEDs are turned off. All the LEDs move and blink during the ball launch game. When the number of balls held by the player is 100 or more, as shown by the arrows in FIG. 73, all the LEDs are lit or blinking, and when the number of held balls is 50 or less, half of all the LEDs are The decoration is controlled so that it is turned off.
The example of FIG. 73 shows that the number of balls held by the player is 100 or more and all LEDs of the upper decorative ball display device 250a are lit. As a result, the player can instantly and easily know the approximate number of balls by simply looking at the lighting state of all the LEDs in the upper decorative ball display device 250a.
In particular, since the upper decorative ball display device 250a is an image of an upper plate and is arranged on the upper side of the operation display device 7, it matches the sense of the number of balls that can be fired and enhances the interest of the player's game. be able to.

<Lower decorative ball display device 250b>
The lower decorative ball display device 250b is designed to create an image of a so-called ball box, and is disposed on the lower side of the operation display device 7 (below the ball number display 40). The LED is turned on according to the number of counting balls.
That is, in the lower decorative ball display device 250b, for example, when the number of counted balls = 0, all the LEDs are turned off. In the lower decorative ball display device 250b, the LEDs are turned on in order from the lower part of the lower decorative ball display device 250b which is an image of a ball box in accordance with the number of counted balls. Decoration control that is understood by the person is performed.
For example, as shown in FIG. 73, the lower decorative ball display device 250b is configured such that all the LEDs are stacked in six stages, and the ball counting the number of balls is turned on in order from the lower part while turning on the LEDs. The image that accumulates in is coming out.
In the example of FIG. 73, the number of counted balls is accumulated from the lower side of the lower decorative ball display device 250b to the position of the second LED, and as shown by the arrow in FIG. It shows how they are doing. Thus, the player can see the approximate count ball number instantly only by seeing to which part all the LEDs of the lower decorative ball display device 250b are lit (that is, depending on the number of LEDs lit). is there.

<Counting decoration part 250c>
The counting decoration unit 250c is arranged at a portion where the upper decorative ball display device 250a and the lower decorative ball display device 250b are connected, and is held from the upper decorative ball display device 250a toward the lower decorative ball display device 250b. Designed to create an image of flowing spheres counting the number of balls. At this time, when the player operates the counting switch 311, the ball whose number of balls has been counted is directed from the upper decorative ball display device 250 a toward the lower decorative ball display device 250 b that looks like a ball box. The decoration control is performed so that the LED of the counting decoration unit 250c is moved and blinked so as to move. Therefore, the player feels as if the number of balls is counted and the counting ball moves from the upper decorative ball display device 250a, which is an image of an upper plate, to the lower decorative ball display device 250b, which is an image of a ball box. Can have fun and play games.
In this way, since the decoration of the number of balls held and the number of counted balls is performed using a large number of LEDs in the decorative ball display device 250, the expression of the number of balls held and the number of counted balls close to the real ball is given to the player. can do. Therefore, the player can easily understand the number of balls held and the number of balls counted.
The decorative ball display device 250 is not limited to the decorative control as described above. For example, the decorative control that changes the color of the LED to be lit or changes from lighting to blinking according to the number of counted balls. May be performed. In addition, since the decorative ball display device 250 is controlled by the effect control device 53, the burden on the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230 is reduced (simply transmitting the number of balls and counting balls) and efficiency. Is good.

Next, among the operations of the first embodiment, an operation for countermeasures against fraud of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126, and the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is a sensor that detects that the front frame 4 is opened. In this configuration, the information that the opening of the front frame 4 is detected is held even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off.
Therefore, particularly when the front frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened at night when the game hall is closed, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 detects that the front frame 4 has been opened. As the open frame information, for example, ON data is held even at night.
On the other hand, when the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 does not detect the opening of the front frame 4, for example, OFF data is held at night as frame opening information. Note that the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is a front frame by backup power supplied from the power supply device 58 via the game control device 54 even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (for example, at night). It is possible to detect the release of 4 and hold the data.

Next, when the pachinko machine 1 is activated by turning on the power (turning on the main power supply) the next morning, the frame opening information detected when the front frame 4 is opened at night is obtained from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126. When the payout control device 230 reads the output signal, the payout control device 230 takes in the output signal. However, the payout control device 230 prepares for start-up from the time the main power is turned on (for example, prohibition of all interrupts, CPU It takes a certain amount of time to initialize peripheral circuits (including serial ports). When frame opening information is input to the payout control device 230 from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 during the start-up preparation period, the frame opening information may not be captured.
Therefore, when the main power supplied from the power supply 58 is turned on, the main power is immediately supplied to the payout control device 230. However, the main power supply is predetermined for the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126. A switch power supply delay circuit 541 for delaying by a time (for example, 5 seconds) is provided, and the main power is supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the main power supply to the dispensing control device 230 is turned on. The front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is supplied, and outputs the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is cut off to the outside after the supply of the main power is started.
Accordingly, after the start-up preparation period of the payout control device 230 has elapsed, the frame open information of the front frame open switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is taken into the payout control device 230, and the frame open information cannot be taken in. There is no fear, and the frame opening information can be surely captured.

FIG. 74 shows a timing chart of an operation for dealing with an illegality using such a front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126.
74, the operation is described using the timings t1 to t4. However, these timings t1 to t4 are unique to the operation of FIG. 74 and are not related to the timings t1 shown in FIG. Is. For convenience of explanation, the operation timing is merely described using a lowercase letter “t”. Further, not only in FIG. 74 but also in each drawing showing a timing chart to be described later, it is not related to each timing t1 shown in FIG.
In FIG. 74, the main power source is a power source supplied from the power source device 58 (see FIG. 6) in the pachinko machine 1 at a normal time (when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1). 230 indicates a power source that supplies power to each device, electronic device, sensor, and the like. In addition to the main power supply, the power supply device 58 supplies the RAM 113 of the game control device 54, the RAM 233 of the payout control device 230, and the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. A backup power supply is also provided. When the main power supply is turned on, the pachinko machine 1 is activated.
FIG. 74 shows a flow of time from a state before the main power source is turned on, for example, when the game store before the main power source is turned on is also at night.

Normally, at game shops around 11:00 pm (or even before), the business is stopped due to the operation of the game machines, the power supply of each game machine is shut off and the store is closed, and then the inside of the store and the table are cleaned and cleaned up. Prepare for the next business day.
However, there is a case where a suspicious person enters at night when the amusement store is closed, and for example, fraud such as opening the front frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 and attaching a fraudulent board or the like.
As shown in FIG. 74, at the timing t1 at night before the timing t2 when the main power is turned on (for example, when the game store preparation for opening the store is started), a suspicious person enters, for example, the front frame of the pachinko machine 1 When the act of attaching the unauthorized substrate or the like by opening 4 is performed, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 detects the opening of the front frame 4. The opening information of the front frame 4 is held by the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 itself even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. In the example of FIG. 74, the front frame 4 is opened by a suspicious person, but is thereafter closed.

Next, when the main power supply is turned on at timing t2 in preparation for opening the game store, the power supply device 58 supplies the payout control device 230, the game control device 54, the effect control device 53, and power supplies necessary for each electronic component shown in FIG. Supply is started (Note that the power supply to each part of the circuit has a slight time difference between the devices, but the description is complicated, so the details are omitted).
However, the main power supply is immediately supplied to the dispensing control device 230, but the switch power supply that delays the main power supply to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 by a predetermined time Ta (for example, 5 seconds). Since the delay circuit 541 is provided, the main power is supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 after a predetermined time Ta has passed since the main power was turned on to the payout control device 230 (for details). (It will be described later at timing t3).
That is, when the supply of power to the payout control device 230 is started, as shown in FIG. 74, the program of the payout control device 230 is activated to perform initial setting and the like, and each component starts to operate and ready for operation. The operation is gradually turned ON, and thereafter, after a little time has elapsed, the timing t3 is reached.
On the other hand, in the payout control device 230, after processing such as initial setting is performed, the gaming machine ID is acquired, and the gaming machine ID is managed by the external management device 91 managed by an external third party organization via the card unit 15. It transmits and waits for the collation result of the gaming machine ID via the card unit 15 (step H29, step H32, etc.).
At time t3, main power is finally supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 at time t3.

The timing t3 is a period that is exactly delayed by a predetermined time Ta (for example, 5 seconds) from the timing t2 at which the main power supply to the dispensing control device 230 is started. As shown in FIG. 8, a switch power supply delay circuit 541 is provided inside the payout control device 230, and the front surface is turned on after a predetermined time Ta has elapsed since the power supply delay circuit 541 turned on the main power supply to the payout control device 230. This is because main power is supplied to the frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126.
That is, the payout controller 230 operates the power supply delay circuit 541 to supply the main power to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 after a predetermined time Ta has elapsed since the main power was supplied. Here, the predetermined time Ta is set to a period longer than the time when the main power-on process of the payout control device 230 ends (that is, the time when the start-up preparation period of the payout control device 230 ends).
Next, when supply of main power is started at the timing t3, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 stores the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power is shut off for a predetermined time Tb from that time. Is output to the outside (here, to the payout control device 230). The predetermined time Tb is set to a predetermined period (for example, a period sufficient for the dispensing control device 230 to capture the frame opening information of the front frame 4).
As shown in FIG. 74, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 outputs ON when the front frame 4 is opened and is OFF when the front frame 4 is closed, but is output as a measure against disconnection of the switch. May be reversed. That is, when the front frame 4 is opened, it is turned OFF, and when the front frame is closed, the output is turned ON to monitor the OFF state. In this way, since the switch is OFF when the switch is disconnected, it can be recognized that the abnormality is the same as when the front frame 4 is opened.

Here, as described above, the case where the opening of the front frame 4 is detected by the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 at the timing t1 and the opening information is held is taken as an example. However, the frame opening information itself is a concept including both when the opening of the front frame 4 is detected and when the opening of the front frame 4 is not detected.
Even if the payout control device 230 determines the output signal of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126, the opening of the front frame 4 may not be detected (for example, OFF data). The game control device 54 reads the output signal from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126.
If the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 detects and holds the opening of the front frame 4 at the timing t1 when the main power is turned on, until the predetermined time Tb elapses after the main power is supplied, The state of outputting the frame opening information to the outside is continued.
Next, the frame opening information of the front frame 4 output to the payout control device 230 is input to the payout control device 230, taken into the CPU 231 via the input port 546, and stored in the RAM 233.
Accordingly, after the start-up preparation period of the payout control device 230 has elapsed, the frame open information of the front frame open switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is taken into the payout control device 230, and the frame open information cannot be taken in. There is no fear, and the frame opening information is reliably captured.

Next, the payout control device 230 performs processing for determining the frame opening information taken into the CPU 231 via the input port 546 (for example, step H13 to step H17 in FIG. 24) to determine the frame opening information, and the determined frame The release information is saved (stored) in the RAM 233. Next, the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored in the RAM 233 is transmitted to the card unit 15. Specifically, a command corresponding to the frame opening information is transmitted to the card unit 15. The command corresponding to the frame opening information determines the frame opening information, and if there is evidence that the front frame 4 is opened (for example, the frame is opened at night), it is determined that there is a possibility of fraud, and the card unit 15 is a command for issuing an error notification or issuing a command to output error information to the hall computer 86 (and may not perform ball lending). When the front frame 4 is not opened, it is a command for determining that there is no possibility of fraud and issuing a command to the effect that there is no problem even if the card unit 15 is lended.
Also, in the payout control device 230, when the frame opening information due to the unauthorized opening of the front frame 4 is generated, the error state is transmitted to the effect control device 53 via the game control device 54 and displayed by the control of the effect control device 53. Displayed on the device 41 and prompts the store clerk to check the pachinko machine 1. This is because there is a possibility that the frame opening information is fraudulent when it is ON data. First, error notification is given by the pachinko machine 1 or the card unit 15, or error information is sent to the hall computer 86 via the card unit 15. This is because the purpose is to prompt the store clerk to check the output.
In addition, when the frame opening information due to the unauthorized opening of the front frame 4 is generated, the payout control device 230 may be in a launch disapproval state where the ball cannot be launched. By doing so, even if the front frame 4 is illegally opened, the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from operating and the game shop can be prevented from being damaged.
In addition to displaying the error state on the display device 41, an error may be notified by an LED or the like other than the display device 41, or a sound or the like may be notified.

In addition, when there is evidence that the front frame 4 is opened (for example, the frame is opened at night) as described above, an error is notified to the card unit 15 or error information is output to the hall computer 86 (further, A command such as issuing a command is transmitted, but at this time, “information that the front frame 4 is illegally opened” is displayed on the screen of the operation display device 7 under the control of the card unit 15. You may make it the structure which displays, or you may add this structure. In addition, the error notification in the card unit 15 may be displayed by an LED or the like, or may be an audio notification.
Next, the payout control device 230 determines whether or not the command related to the frame opening information has been normally transmitted to the card unit 15.

  If the command regarding the frame opening information has not been normally transmitted, the payout control device 230 sets a frame opening information transmission error flag and sends the frame opening information transmission error command via the game control device 54 to the effect control device. 53. Thereby, in the production control device 53, based on the frame opening information transmission error command, for example, an error message indicating that a command related to the frame opening information is not transmitted to the card unit 15 is displayed on the display device 41, and the like. Notify the store clerk. In addition to displaying an error message on the display device 41, an error notification may be provided by an LED or the like other than the display device 41, or an audio notification may be provided.

On the other hand, a store clerk of an amusement store may turn on the RAM clear switch 182 to return the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state in preparation for opening the store (so-called RAM clear is performed).
The stand that performs RAM clearing is, for example, a case where a gaming machine that has been in a gaming state such as a big hit or a probability variation state when the gaming store is closed is initialized the next day to prepare for normal business. This is because if such a stand is not initialized by clearing the RAM, it will be restored in the gaming state such as the big hit of the previous day or the probability variation state, and will not match the business form.
In order to clear the RAM, the power supply switch 181 of the power supply device 58 is turned on while the RAM clear switch 182 of the power supply device 58 is being pressed to turn on the power. Thereby, the RAM 233 and the like inside the payout control device 230 are initialized.

Here, in the first embodiment, when the power is turned on by turning on the RAM clear switch 182 as described above, the payout control device 230 performs the RAM clear (initialization of the RAM 233, etc.) The frame opening information of the front frame 4 (the output signal of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126) is read. Then, the payout control device 230 reads the frame opening information of the front frame 4 after the RAM is cleared, and transmits the opening information of the front frame 4 to the card unit 15.
Therefore, even if the RAM clear switch 182 is turned on, the frame opening information of the front frame 4 is not missed, and the frame opening information of the front frame 4 can be reliably transmitted to the card unit 15.
The above configuration may be modified as follows.
(Modification of RAM clear)
That is, when the RAM clear switch 182 is turned on and the power is turned on, the payout control device 230 does not clear the RAM clear switch until confirming that the opening information of the front frame 4 is transmitted to the card unit 15. Even if the 182 is turned on, the RAM 233 may not be cleared.
In this case, the payout control device 230 clears (initializes) the RAM 233 after confirming that the opening information of the front frame 4 has been transmitted to the card unit 15. At this time, the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored in the RAM 233 is also cleared.
The payout control device 230 transmits the frame opening information of the front frame 4 to the card unit 15 and then the RAM clear switch 182 confirms the reception ACK indicating that the card unit 15 has received the frame opening information. Even if the ON operation is performed, the RAM 233 is not cleared, and when the reception ACK is confirmed, the RAM 233 including the frame opening information of the front frame 4 may be cleared (initialized) thereafter.

On the other hand, in the payout control device 230, when the frame opening information of the front frame 4 is not transmitted to the card unit 15, even if the RAM clear switch 182 is pressed, the error information is not cleared without clearing the RAM 233. Is output. As the output of error information, for example, a frame release information transmission error flag is set, and a frame release information transmission error command is transmitted to the effect control device 53 via the game control device 54. Thereby, in the production | presentation control apparatus 53, based on the frame open | release information transmission error command, control, such as displaying the error message which shows that the command regarding frame open | release information is not transmitted to the card unit 15, for example, is performed. Notify the store clerk.
The output of the error information is not limited to the above example. For example, an error signal may be output from the payout control device 230 to the error display LED 67, and the error display LED 67 may be turned on (or blinked). Alternatively, this configuration may be added.
The above is the description of the modification.

  Thus, at the night when the game hall is closed, for example, when a suspicious person opens the front frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 and attaches an illegal board or the like, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) An open state of the front frame 4 is detected by 126, and the frame open information is retained even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off. The next morning, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the payout controller 230 operates the power supply delay circuit 541 so that the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is passed after a predetermined time Ta has elapsed since the main power is supplied. Supply main power to When the supply of main power is started at the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126, the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is shut off is output to the dispensing control device 230. Then, when the payout control device 230 reads the output signal from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126, it is stored in the RAM 233, and the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored in the RAM 233 is transmitted to the card unit 15. For example, the card unit 15 takes measures such as notifying an error, outputting error information to the hall computer 86 (and not lending the ball). Further, when the front frame 4 is illegally opened and frame opening information is generated, the error state is transmitted to the effect control device 53 via the game control device 54 and displayed on the display device 41 under the control of the effect control device 53. Is done. Therefore, when the store clerk looks at the display device 41, the pachinko machine 1 can be inspected, and for example, an appropriate measure can be taken (for example, removal of the illegal substrate or the like and normal inspection) for attachment of the illegal substrate or the like.

Further, when the RAM clear switch 182 is turned on and the power is turned on, the payout control device 230 performs RAM clear (initialization of the RAM 233, etc.), and then the frame opening information (front surface) of the front frame 4 is displayed. Frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 output signal) is read and the opening information of the front frame 4 is transmitted to the card unit 15, so that the frame opening information of the front frame 4 is acquired even if the RAM clear switch 182 is turned on. The frame opening information of the front frame 4 can be reliably transmitted to the card unit 15 without spilling.
Therefore, even if the RAM clear switch 182 is turned on before the card unit 15 receives the front frame 4 opening information, the payout control device 230 reads the frame opening information of the front frame 4 after the RAM is cleared. Since the frame opening information indicating that the front frame 4 has been opened illegally is securely held in the RAM 233, it is possible to avoid a reduction in security against the unauthorized operation. Thereafter, the frame opening information of the front frame 4 is reliably transmitted to the card unit 15 from the payout control device 230, so that it is possible to reliably cope with fraud.
The payout control device 230 transmits the frame opening information of the front frame 4 to the card unit 15 and then the RAM clear switch 182 confirms the reception ACK indicating that the card unit 15 has received the frame opening information. Even if the ON operation is performed, the RAM 233 is not cleared, and when the reception ACK is confirmed, the RAM 233 including the frame opening information of the front frame 4 may be cleared (initialized) thereafter. In this way, it is possible to more reliably cope with fraud.

Here, the following configuration may be added to the first embodiment as a configuration that further increases security against fraud using the gaming machine ID.
Accordingly, a configuration using the gaming machine ID will be described below as a modified example.
(Modified example of using game machine ID)
That is, as a modification of the first embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (for example, when the game shop is opened), the gaming machine ID (unique identification information of the gaming control device 54: main board ID and the payout control device 230) (Unique identification information: payout board ID) is transmitted to the external management device 91 managed by an external third-party organization via the card unit 15, and if it is determined that the nighttime frame opening fraud is being reported, external management is performed. A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether information indicating that the ID collation result is OK from the device 91 is received via the card unit 15.
In the case of this configuration, if the ID collation result OK is received from the card unit 15, the effect control device 53 controls the display device 41 to end the display of the information that the front frame 4 is opened at night. . This is intended to be fraudulent when the frame opening information is ON data, so the pachinko machine 1 notifies the frame opening and prompts the store clerk to check the ID collation result OK. This is because even if the front frame 4 is opened, it is determined that the possibility of fraud is low and the notification of the frame opening is ended.
On the other hand, unless the nighttime frame opening fraud notification is being performed, the possibility of fraud is low, and thus it is not performed until it is determined that the ID collation result OK has been received.
If the ID verification result OK has not been received from the card unit 15, the display device 41 or the like continues to display information that the front frame 4 has been opened at night. Accordingly, the store clerk inspects the game control device 54 and the like, and takes necessary measures including the presence or absence of fraud.
Therefore, in this modified example, the possibility of fraud is judged based on two pieces of information: the frame opening information from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 and the matching result of the gaming machine ID. In comparison with the case of determining whether or not, it is possible to further improve the accuracy of determining the possibility of fraud and provide a gaming machine with high security.
When the card unit 15 receives the ID verification result from the external management device 91 (including the case where the ID verification result OK is not received), the card unit 15 transmits the information to the hall computer 86, and the hall computer 86 displays the ID verification result. Information indicating that it has been received or not received is managed and stored for each of a large number of gaming machines. The hall computer 86 also stores the frame opening information transmitted via the card unit 15. Therefore, since the ID verification result information and the frame opening information are stored in the hall computer 86, it is easy to check the ID verification result information and the frame opening information even when the error notification is finished.
The above is the description of the modification.

Now, returning to the description of FIG. 74 again, for a normal gaming machine in which the front frame 4 is not opened illegally, normal monitoring processing is performed after a predetermined time Ta has elapsed since the main power supply was turned on, and Provided.
When the front frame 4 is opened by the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126, for example, at the timing t4, the opening is detected by the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126, and the front frame is opened. Frame open information is output from the front frame open switch (night monitoring switch) 126 and input to the game control device 54 only during the period Tc in which 4 is open, and is input to the game control device 54, and the front frame is released by the error monitoring process (front frame 4 open error). As monitored.

Next, the operation of the game game of the pachinko machine 1 in the first embodiment will be described.
In the game game of the pachinko machine 1, by executing each program described above, a command is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 that receives the command uses the display device 41 based on the program. A variable display game is executed.
Specifically, when the player operates the launch operation handle 11 to throw a game ball into the game area 22 and the game ball that has been placed wins the start winning opening 25 or 26 of the special figure (see the special figure). When there is a start winning prize), a command for instructing the variable display of the decoration special drawing is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53, and a display (so-called variable display) is performed on the display unit 41a. Then, a decorative display variation display game is performed. On the other hand, the ball that has been removed without winning a prize flows into the out-ball inlet 23. The ball that has fallen through the game area 22 becomes out or safe, passes through the game area 22, flows down to the game ball inlet 71 of the circulation device 55, is collected by the circulation device 55, circulates, and is again guided to the launch position. It will be. In this way, the enclosed game ball is circulated and used to perform a pachinko game with the enclosed ball.
In addition, the game control device 54 controls the collective display device 35 such as a variable display of the special figure, the ordinary figure, and the like.

Here, when it is determined that the game ball is safe and the number of balls held by the player is increased, the ball enters the winning port (including the general winning ports 28 to 31 and the starting winning ports 25, 26, etc.). In addition, when a big hit occurs and shifts to the big win state, the bonus winning hole 27a of the variable winning device 27 is temporarily within a range not exceeding a specified time (for example, 30 seconds), for example, for a period up to ten winnings. The jackpot round to be released is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds, and the player wins a large number of winnings.
In this case, all the winning balls associated with winning are displayed by the winning display LED 355 in the collective display device 35.

FIG. 75 is a timing chart of display control of the winning display LED 355 in the collective display device 35.
In FIG. 75, the number of winning balls associated with winning is as follows.
・ Large winning opening 27a = 13 ・ Starting winning opening 25 = 3 ・ Starting winning opening 26 (Fuden) = 1 ・ General winning openings 28 to 31 = 10 In FIG. 75, when these winnings are made Is shown as, for example, “winning (prize ball 13)”, and the same applies to other winning modes.

Now, in the normal mode (displayed as normal in FIG. 75), if there is a winning at the start winning opening 25, the number of winning balls is 3, so the game control device 54 displays the winning display LED 355 of the collective display device 35. On the other hand, a drive signal is output (hereinafter, the control is the same), and the prize display LED 355 displays the prize ball 3 (meaning the number of prize balls = 3). As a result, the winning display LED 355 displays “3” in one digit.
At this time, the winning display of “3” is controlled at a timing of turning on (lit) for 1 second and then turning off (turned off) for 0.5 seconds.
Similarly, in the normal mode, if there is a winning in any of the general winning openings 28 to 31, the number of winning balls is 10, so that the winning display LED 355 receives 10 winning balls (the number of winning balls = 10). Meaning) is displayed. As a result, the winning display LED 355 displays “10” in two digits.
At this time, the winning display of “10” is controlled at a timing of turning on (lit) for 1 second and then turning off (turned off) for 0.5 seconds.

Next, when a big hit was generated from the normal mode and a transition was made to the special mode (during the big hit), winning (number of winning balls = 13) to the big winning opening 27a occurred four times in succession. At this time, if there is a prize at the big prize opening 27a, since the number of prize balls is 13, the game control device 54 outputs a drive signal to the prize display LED 355 of the collective display device 35, and the prize display LED 355 is displayed. The prize ball 13 (the number of prize balls = 13 meanings) is displayed. As a result, the winning display LED 355 displays “13” in two digits. In this case, the winning display of “13” is controlled at a timing of turning on (lit) for 0.5 seconds and then turning off (turned off) for 0.1 seconds, and winning in the big winning opening 27a occurs four times in succession. This is done four times in succession.
In addition, during the special mode, a winning (number of winning balls = 3) to the start winning opening 25 occurred once.
At this time, if there is a winning at the start winning opening 25, the number of winning balls is 3, so that the winning display LED 355 displays the winning ball 3 (the number of winning balls = 3). As a result, the winning display LED 355 displays “3” in one digit. In this case, the winning display of “3” is controlled at a timing of turning on (lighting) for 0.5 seconds and then turning off (turning off) for 0.1 seconds.

Then, the big hit round ends, and the transition is made to the probability fluctuation. Since the probability variation is also in the special mode, the control in the special mode is continued for the winning display by the winning display LED 355. Then, during the probability fluctuation, the winning (number of winning balls = 1) to the start winning opening 26 (Fuden) occurred three times in succession. At this time, if there is a winning at the start winning opening 26 (Penden), the number of winning balls is 1, so that the winning ball 1 (the number of winning balls = 1) is displayed on the winning display LED 355. Is called. As a result, the winning display LED 355 displays “1” in one digit. In this case, the winning display of “1” is controlled for 0.5 seconds ON (lights on) and then off for 0.1 seconds (lights off), and the winning winning opening 26 (general power) continues to win. This occurs three times in succession.
In this way, the number of winning balls associated with winning is displayed by the winning display LED 355 in the collective display device 35. Even if a game ball wins in any winning opening, a predetermined time (1 second in the normal mode, 0.5 second in the special mode) is immediately displayed by the winning display LED 355 consisting of two 7-segment balls. Therefore, the player can easily know where on the board (game board 20) and how many winning balls are obtained.

Next, display update control of the number of balls will be described.
FIG. 76 is a timing chart showing display update control of the number of balls.
In FIG. 76, the number of balls held changes in the following cases.
(A) The number of balls held is reduced by 1 by launching a game ball. (B) When a foul ball is reached, the number of balls held is incremented by 1 (i.e. After all, return to the original)
(C) If there is a number of winning balls associated with winning a prize, it is added to the number of balls held. The number of winning balls accompanying winning a prize is as follows.
・ Large winning opening 27a = 13 ・ Starting winning opening 25 = 3 ・ Starting winning opening 26 (Fuden) = 1 ・ General winning opening 28-31 = 10

Now, when a game ball is being fired to the game area 22 at a rate of approximately 100 shots per minute, this situation is shown by the firing pulses in FIG.
Now, when one game ball is fired when the number of held balls is 11 and the display of the held ball number display 40 is “11” under the control of the payout control device 230, Although the number of balls held is reduced by one when the game ball is launched, the number of balls held in the internal memory (RAM 233 of the payout control device 230) is updated (more precisely, the memory of the number of balls held is updated, but here In this case, the number of balls held is updated immediately (in real time), and the number of balls held immediately becomes “10” (in FIG. 76, the internal memory (RAM 233) is almost simultaneously with the launch of the ball. Since the number of possessed balls has been updated, the memory number “10” is displayed).
On the other hand, display update of the number-of-balls display 40 (the number-of-balls update control when displaying the number of balls of the player on the number-of-balls display 40 by the payout control device 230. Hereinafter, the number of balls held is simply This is called display update of the display 40). Is not performed immediately but at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 76, the display on the number-of-balls display 40 is updated to “10” 0.3 seconds after the game ball is launched.

The time of 0.3 seconds corresponds to half of the time when a game ball is launched into the game area 22 at a rate of 100 shots per minute. As described above, since the number of game balls fired by operating the firing operation handle 11 is defined as 100 shots per minute according to a predetermined rule, the launch control device 57 controls the ball feed solenoid 172. Therefore, it is derived from the fact that it is within the range of 100 shots / minute (approximately one ball fired in 0.6 seconds (s)).
Here, for example, in the case where a big hit has occurred, with the launch of one game ball as described above, one wins the big winning opening 27a, resulting in 13 winning balls = successively. When one game ball is fired and one player continuously wins a prize winning opening 27a and the number of winning balls = 13 occurs, the number of balls held in the internal memory (RAM 233) is immediately updated. The stored number of balls is immediately “9” (in FIG. 76, “subtract one shot” is displayed).
Then, when the above-mentioned two fired balls continuously win the big winning opening 27a and the number of winning balls = 13 occurs twice, the number of balls having 13 winning balls is stored in the internal memory (RAM 233). Immediately add to the stored number “9” and immediately update the number of possessed balls as “22”. Immediately thereafter, the number of 13 prize balls is immediately added to the retained number of stored balls “22” to obtain “35”. The number of balls held is immediately updated.

On the other hand, the display update of the number-of-balls display 40 is not performed immediately even when two fired balls continuously win the big prize opening 27a and the number of winning balls = 13 occurs twice. The update timing is an interval of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 76, the display on the number-of-balls display 40 is updated to “9” 0.3 seconds after the display on the number-of-balls display 40 is updated to “10” .
Thereafter, the number of winning balls = 13 accompanying the winning at the first big winning opening 27a is added to the number of balls held, the display of the number of balls holding display 40 is updated, and the display of the number of balls holding display 40 is displayed. Is updated to “22” (9 + 13).
Next, 0.3 seconds later, the number of winning balls = 13 accompanying the winning at the second big winning opening 27a is added to the number of held balls, and the display of the held ball number display 40 is updated. The display on the ball number display 40 is updated to “35” (22 + 13).

Next, when one game ball is fired, the number of possessed balls is reduced by one by the launch of the game ball, so the number of possessed balls in the internal memory (RAM 233) is immediately updated, and the number of possessed balls Is immediately stored as “34” (35-1). On the other hand, the display update of the number-of-balls display 40 is not performed immediately, but is performed at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds), so the display of the number-of-balls display 40 is set to “35”. The display on the number-of-balls display 40 is updated to “34” 0.3 seconds after the update.
Next, when one more game ball is fired, the number of balls held is reduced by one when the game ball is fired, so the number of balls held in the internal memory (RAM 233) is updated immediately, The number is immediately stored as “33” (34-1). On the other hand, since the display update of the number-of-balls display 40 is not performed immediately, but is performed at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds), the display of the number-of-balls display 40 becomes “34”. The display on the number-of-balls display 40 is updated to “33” 0.3 seconds after the update.

By the way, when the above-mentioned launch ball has become a foul ball, it is necessary to return to the number of balls held, but one is added to the number of balls held, since one has been subtracted by launch, After all, it will return to the original number of balls. Therefore, the number of balls held in the internal memory (RAM 233) for dealing with the foul ball is immediately updated when it is determined that the ball is a foul ball, and the number of held balls is immediately stored as “34” (33 + 1). . On the other hand, the display update of the number-of-balls display 40 is performed at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds). Since the second has passed, only in this case, the display of the number of possessed balls is immediately performed. Therefore, the display of the number of possessed balls display 40 is updated to “34” (33 + 1).
Next, when the number of balls possessed by the foul is 34 and the next game ball is fired, it is necessary to subtract one by the ball fire, so the number of balls held in the internal memory (RAM 233) The number is updated immediately, and the number of balls held is immediately “33” (34-1). On the other hand, the display update of the number-of-balls indicator 40 is 0.3 seconds after the number of balls held becomes 34 due to the foul, so it is held corresponding to one subtraction (“−1”) by firing. The display on the ball number display 40 is updated to “33”. Note that the next display of “33” on the number-of-balls display 40 has no change in the number of balls held, so there is no need to update after 0.3 seconds, so the display of “33” is maintained as it is. It shows the state of being.

In this way, during the progress of the game game, the RAM 233 as the internal memory of the payout control device 230 stores the change in the number of balls held by the player. In the case where the number of balls possessed by the player is updated and stored in real time by repeatedly adding the foul balls, while the number-of-balls display 40 displays the number of balls possessed by the player The update of the number of balls is different from the case where the RAM 233 updates and stores the number of balls in real time, and the updated number of balls is displayed at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds). To be controlled. This predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds) is approximately half the time of the continuous launch interval (0.6 seconds) of game balls.
Therefore, even if there are consecutive wins, the updated number of balls on the number-of-balls display 40 is updated at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds). A margin for sufficiently recognizing the display content of the ball number display 40 is created, and the player can easily recognize that the number of balls held has been updated in response to winning.

Next, the operation of the operation display device 7 will be described.
First, the operation of the switching circuit 320 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.
In FIG. 77, the display data indicates where the data displayed on the operation display device 7 is sent. If the display data is “card unit”, the information transmitted from the card unit 15 is manipulated. The state displayed on the display device 7 is said. On the other hand, when the display data is “gaming machine”, it means a state in which information transmitted from the gaming machine (specifically, the effect control device 53) is displayed on the operation display device 7.
The touch information indicates the connection destination when the connection button of the operation display device 7 is switched by touching the switching button 307 (second rendering operation unit). Specifically, when the player touches the switching button 307 of the operation display device 7, switching information is output from the operation display device 7 to the switching circuit 320, and the internal touch information switching circuit 324 switches in the switching circuit 320. For convenience, the information indicating the connection destination of the operation display device 7 when the connection route of the operation display device 7 is switched by operating based on the information is referred to as touch information. The touch information here has a different meaning from the touch information when the player touches the various buttons of the operation display device 7 except the switching button 307 as described later. The information indicating is only touch information.

As shown in FIG. 77, first (for example, the initial state after the gaming machine is turned on) starts from the normal mode, the priority signal from the gaming machine is not output, and the operation display device 7 is connected to the card unit 15. Root (card unit route). That is, in the normal mode (initial state), it is a route (card unit route) for connecting the operation display device 7 to the card unit 15, and data is transmitted and received between the operation display device 7 and the card unit 15. Is done. As a result, display data and information from the card unit 15 are output to the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 320, and information output from the card unit 15 is displayed in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7. Is displayed.
This state is shown in FIG. 77 assuming that the display data source is “card unit”. Further, since the switching button 307 is not touched, the connection destination of the operation display device 7 is not switched, and the connection destination remains the card unit 15. Therefore, the touch information is indicated as “card unit”.

  In this state, when the player touches various buttons (for example, the ball rental button 303, the return button 304, and the storage / replay button 305) of the operation display device 7 excluding the switching button 307, the touch information is displayed. The data is output to the card unit 15 via the switching circuit 320, and the card unit 15 performs control according to the touch information. In this way, processing such as ball rental, storage, settlement, replay, and return of game cards is performed under the management and control of the card unit 15, and ball rental, storage, settlement, replay, and game cards are performed. The information necessary for returning the message is displayed on the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7.

Next, when it is necessary to output a priority signal while the game is progressing and during production (in the case of special production), specifically, for example, in the battle mode with the occurrence of reach, priority is given from the production control device 53. A signal is output to the switching circuit 320. This state is shown in FIG. 77 in a state in which the priority signal rises from L level to H level and becomes active. The active period of the priority signal continues until, for example, the battle mode at the occurrence of reach ends.
When the priority signal is input to the switching circuit 320, the switching circuit 320 preferentially switches the connection route of the operation display device 7 from the card unit route to the gaming machine route, and based on the display data from the effect control device 53. Information related to effects is preferentially displayed in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7.
As a result, the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 displays a screen that allows the player to select one of a plurality of items used by the character in the battle mode, for example. An effect that allows the player to select with the touch button is performed.
In addition, when it is necessary to perform an effect that causes the player to select a favorite song during the big hit, a priority signal is output from the effect control device 53 to the switching circuit 320, and the operation display device 7 is operated as described above. An effect is provided in which a player can select a favorite song with a touch button on the screen of the message / operation area 306.

On the other hand, even when the priority signal is output to the switching circuit 320, when the player touches the switching button 307 of the operation display device 7, the switching information is transmitted from the operation display device 7 to the switching circuit 320 accordingly. Is output. This state is shown in FIG. 77 in a state in which the switching information rises from the L level to the H level and becomes active.
When the switching information is input to the switching circuit 320, the internal touch information switching circuit 324 operates based on the switching information in the switching circuit 320, and the connection route of the operation display device 7 is set for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). Switch from root to card unit root. As a result, the screen changes to a screen for displaying information from the card unit 15.

  As a process based on the control of the card unit 15, for example, there is a ball lending process during the game. For example, when a player finishes selecting one of a plurality of items used by a character in a battle mode due to reach occurrence, he / she wants to obtain a ball lending when he notices that there are only a few remaining balls. Since the battle mode is displayed on the screen of the message / operation area unit 306 and the ball rental button 303 is not displayed, the player immediately touches the switching button 307 on the screen of the message / operation area unit 306. Thereby, as described above, the connection route of the operation display device 7 is switched from the gaming machine route to the card unit route for a predetermined period a (for example, 5 seconds) by the switching circuit 320, and a screen for displaying information from the card unit 15 is displayed. change. Next, the player touches the ball lending button 303 on the same screen to obtain a desired ball lending, and the number of held balls increases (the increase in the number of balls due to lending is 125 units, Displayed on the ball number display 40). In addition, if you want to replay with the stored ball instead of lending the ball, touch the stored / replay button 305 and enter the member number or PIN on the message / operation area 306 screen, Similarly, the number of holding balls increases in units of 125 pieces.

Next, when the predetermined period a (for example, 5 seconds) elapses, the internal touch information switching circuit 324 is activated in the switching circuit 320 to automatically change the connection route of the operation display device 7 from the card unit route to the gaming machine route. return. Thereby, the display based on the information from the effect control device 53 (for example, the effect in the battle mode) is performed again on the screen of the message / operation area unit 306.
Therefore, information related to the production (for example, information on item selection in the battle mode in the occurrence of reach) is displayed on the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7 without affecting ball lending or replay. It is possible to perform various productions that are easy for the player to understand.
Thereafter, when the priority signal becomes H level to L level and becomes inactive at the timing when the effect of the battle mode ends, the internal touch information switching circuit 324 operates in the switching circuit 320 to automatically operate the operation display device. 7 is changed from the gaming machine route to the card unit route. As a result, on the screen of the message / operation area unit 306, the display based on the information from the card unit 15 is performed again.

Next, when the display based on the information from the card unit 15 is being performed on the screen of the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7, the player switches the switch button 307 on the screen of the message / operation area unit 306. When is touched, the connection route of the operation display device 7 is switched from the card unit route to the gaming machine route by the switching circuit 320 as in the case described above, and the screen is changed to a screen for displaying information from the effect control device 53. For example, when the player wants to obtain information on characters appearing while the game is in progress, touching the switching button 307 causes the screen of the message / operation area unit 306 to be displayed on a screen for displaying information from the effect control device 53. The information about the characters appearing during the game is displayed.
Next, when the player touches the switching button 307 when the connection route of the operation display device 7 is a gaming machine route, the switching circuit 320 switches the connection route of the operation display device 7 from the gaming machine route to the card unit route, The screen changes to a screen for displaying information from the card unit 15.

Next, a specific operation example in the operation display device 7 will be described.
FIG. 78 is a diagram illustrating an operation example of the operation display device 7 regarding the switching display.
In the description of FIG. 78, the concept of a scene is used in the progress of the game, and scenes J1 to J4 are concepts that represent the scene of the entire rendering operation including the rendering screen, the button screen, etc. of the operation display device 7 during the progress of the game. .
First, a scene J1 in FIG. 78 shows the operation of the operation display device 7 in a normal state. That is, in the scene J1, as a normal route, the connection route of the operation display device 7 is a card unit route, and information from the card unit 15 is displayed on the operation display device 7. Specifically, the operation display device 7 includes a ball lending rate display 301, a remaining amount display 302, a ball lending button 303, a return button 304, a storage / replay button 305, a message / operation area unit 306, and a switching button. A state in which 307 is arranged is shown, and a ball count indicator 40 (not shown here) is arranged below the operation display device 7.
However, the display form of the remaining amount display 302 is different from that in FIG. 7A described above for the convenience of explanation, and the remaining amount is displayed in the lower stage (the same applies to the drawings described later).
In addition, in the description after the scene J2, the above-described encoding will be omitted because it becomes complicated.

In the scene J1, as an example of the normal time, the remaining amount display unit 302 displays the remaining amount as “10000 yen”, so that the player knows that the balance of the gaming card is “10000 yen”. . In addition, a message “I welcome you” is displayed in the message / operation area 306.
Furthermore, information from the card unit 15 is displayed on the operation display device 7 as normal information, and for example, ball rental, storage, the number of counted balls, etc. are displayed (however, omitted on the screen J1).
Further, the operation display device 7 is provided with a switching button 307, and when the player touches the switching button 307, the connection route of the operation display device 7 can be changed from the card unit route to the gaming machine route (the reverse thereof). Change to route is also possible).

Next, when the player touches the switching button 307, the connection route of the operation display device 7 is switched from the card unit route to the gaming machine route. When the connection route of the operation display device 7 is switched to the gaming machine route, the operation display device 7 performs display based on information from the effect control device 53, and one of them is a scene J2.
The scene J2 is an example of a display based on information from the effect control device 53 (game machine). Here, the model name of the game machine (pachinko machine 1) and the game description are displayed in the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7. Is displayed. For example, “CRXXXXX” is displayed as the model name, and “High probability until hitting 100 special charts after big hit” is displayed as the game description.
Thereby, the player can receive the model name and the game description only by a simple operation of touching the switching button 307, which is convenient.
Furthermore, while continuing to produce the game on the display device 41 controlled by the gaming machine, the model name and the game description are displayed on the operation display device 7, which is a device different from the display device 41. There is no inconvenience such as hindering the display of the effect of the game or reducing the display space, and it is possible to make the effect of the progress of the game compatible with the model name and the game description.

Next, scene J3 is another example of displaying information from a gaming machine. For example, when a game is in progress, a battle mode is set when a reach occurs and a priority signal is output to the switching circuit 320, and the operation display device 7 is connected. An example in which the route is preferentially switched from the card unit route to the gaming machine route is shown.
In the scene J3, the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7 is displayed in conjunction with the display effect of the effect control device 53 (game machine), for example, a plurality of items used by the character in the battle mode. A screen is displayed that allows the player to select one. Specifically, “Select an item” is displayed along with “Battle mode”, and three types of items are displayed: “Sword”, “Bow”, and “Stone”.

At this time, when the “sword” is touched on the screen of the message / operation area unit 306 to select an item “sword”, for example, the selected touch information is input to the effect control device 53 via the switching circuit 320. Then, the effect control device 53 displays an effect in which the character develops the battle mode using the item “sword” on the display device 41 based on the input touch information.
Therefore, the production progresses with the item reflecting the player's intention, so that the game becomes interesting and the interest of the game is enhanced.
Furthermore, while continuing the battle mode as a game effect on the display device 41 controlled by the effect control device 53, the item selection screen is displayed by the operation display device 7 which is a device different from the display device 41. The display of the battle mode in the display device 41 is not disturbed or the display space is reduced, and the display of the battle mode in the display device 41 and the selection of the item in the operation display device 7 are compatible. And the full power of the battle mode can be achieved.

Next, scene J4 is another example of displaying information from the gaming machine. For example, a big hit occurs during the game, a priority signal is output to the switching circuit 320, and the connection route of the operation display device 7 is a card. An example is shown in which the music that excites the jackpot effect is selected when the unit route is preferentially switched to the gaming machine route.
Note that, as described above, the case where the battle mode is caused by the occurrence of the reach or the case where the big hit occurs corresponds to the case of the special effect.
In the scene J4, the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 is displayed in conjunction with the display effect of the effect control device 53 (game machine). A screen is displayed that allows the player to select one. Specifically, “Choose music” is displayed together with “Big hit”, and six types “A” to “F” are displayed as the types of music.

At this time, on the screen of the message / operation area unit 306, for example, when “A” is touched to select a song “A”, the selected touch information is input to the effect control device 53 via the switching circuit 320. Then, the effect control device 53 displays the effect of playing “A” as a song on the basis of the input touch information on the display device 41, and the performance sound of the song “A” from the speakers 10, 16a, 16b. Will flow up and make a big hit production.
Therefore, the production progresses with the music that reflects the player's intention, so the game becomes interesting and the interest of the game is enhanced.
Furthermore, while continuing the big hit as the progress of the game on the display device 41 controlled by the effect control device 53, the music selection screen is displayed by the operation display device 7 which is a device different from the display device 41. There is no inconvenience such as the display of the jackpot effect on the display device 41 or the display space being reduced, and the jackpot effect on the display device 41 and the selection of music on the operation display device 7 can be made compatible. , The power of directing the big hit can be fully demonstrated.

Next, FIG. 79 shows an operation example when the operation display device 7 introduces a character.
In FIG. 79, a scene K1 shows the operation of the operation display device 7 at the normal time. That is, in the scene K1, as in the case of the scene J1, the connection route of the operation display device 7 is a card unit route, and information from the card unit 15 is displayed on the operation display device 7 as a normal route. Has been. Specifically, the operation display device 7 includes a ball lending rate display 301, a remaining amount display 302, a ball lending button 303, a return button 304, a storage / replay button 305, a message / operation area unit 306, and a switching button. A state in which 307 is arranged is shown.

In the scene K1, as an example of the normal time, the remaining amount display unit 302 displays the remaining amount as “10000 yen”, so that the player knows that the balance of the gaming card is “10000 yen”. . Also, a message “I welcome you” is displayed in the message / operation area 306.
Furthermore, information from the card unit 15 is displayed on the operation display device 7 as normal information, for example, ball rental, storage, count ball number, etc. (however, omitted on the screen K1).
In addition, a switching button 307 is arranged on the operation display device 7, and when the player touches the switching button 307, the connection route of the operation display device 7 can be changed from the card unit route to the gaming machine route (the reverse thereof). Change to route is also possible).

Next, when the player touches the switching button 307, the connection route of the operation display device 7 is switched from the card unit route to the gaming machine route. When the connection route of the operation display device 7 is switched to the gaming machine route, the operation display device 7 performs display based on information from the effect control device 53, and one of them is an introduction of characters appearing in the game of the display device 41. Switch to the scene K2 to be performed.
In particular, in the first embodiment, the switch button 307 is displayed when an effect screen appears in which a character appears in the special game in conjunction with the production of a special game (specifically, a special game). When touched, it is configured to switch to a scene K2 where the characters appearing in the special figure game are introduced.
The scene K2 introduces characters appearing in the game of the display device 41 based on information from the effect control device 53 (game machine), and the explanation introduces the characters to the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7. Is displayed. For example, the characters are introduced by the display of “character introduction 1”, “name: tallow”, “favorite food: cake”, and “special skill: bow”.

Next, when a predetermined time elapses, the process moves to the scene K3, and another character is introduced in the scene K3. Here, the character is introduced to the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 by displaying, for example, “Character introduction 2”, “Name: Giraud”, “Favorite food: Meat”, “Excellent skill: Punch”. Is done.
Next, when a predetermined time elapses, the process moves to the scene K4, and another character is introduced in the scene K4. Here, in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7, for example, the characters are introduced by displaying “character introduction 3”, “name: dragon”, “favorite: whiskey”, “special skill: flame”. Is done.

In this way, the player can see the explanation introducing the characters appearing in the game game by a simple operation of touching the switching button 307, which is convenient.
Further, when the switch button 307 is touched in conjunction with the special figure game production, the characters appearing in the special figure game are introduced, which makes the production easier to understand and enhances the interest of the game.
Further, while the presentation of the game is continued on the display device 41 controlled by the gaming machine side, the explanation regarding the introduction of the character is displayed on the operation display device 7 which is a device different from the display device 41. There is no inconvenience such as disturbing the display of the effect of the display or reducing the display space, and it is possible to make the effect of the progress of the game compatible with the explanation of the introduction of the character, which is very convenient.

The first embodiment has the following effects with respect to the notification of the number of balls held and the counting balls.
(1) In the first embodiment, the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) is a ball display device 40 as a first display device that can display the number of balls held, and a second display device that can simply display the counting balls. The card unit 15 can display the number of balls and details of the counting ball, and has an operation display device 7 as a third display device that is managed by the card unit 15. The number of balls held is digitally displayed on the number-of-balls display 40 by the control on the machine (pachinko machine 1) side, and the presence or absence of the counting balls is simply displayed on the counting ball display 313, while the number of balls on the card unit 15 is controlled. The number of spheres and details of the counting sphere are displayed.
Therefore, when notifying the player of the number of balls and the counting balls, the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) simply displays the number of balls and the counting balls simply and digitally, and does not perform detailed display. Therefore, the control burden of the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230 is reduced, and the efficiency is high.
In addition, the player can grasp the number of balls possessed and the number of counted balls with the first to third devices, which is convenient and easy to understand.

This background will be described.
As described above, there is an example of an enclosed ball type game machine that displays the number of balls that can be fired and the number of stored balls that cannot be temporarily fired.
However, when displaying separately for the number of balls that can be fired and the number of balls possessed, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to understand only by displaying both pieces of information using, for example, a 7-segment LED.
For this reason, for example, it may be possible to display an easy-to-understand explanation of the number of balls that can be fired and the number of balls held using a liquid crystal display or the like, but with this method, there is a burden on the control of the gaming machine. There is a new problem of growing.
By the way, the enclosed ball type gaming machine has many elements that need to be controlled, such as control of the game, control of the launching and circulation of the game ball, management of the number of balls, control for prevention of fraud, and the like. As a result, if the display related to the number of balls held is made easier to understand, the burden of control further increases. Therefore, it is required that the control device of the gaming machine can be controlled efficiently.
In view of this, the present invention has devised a configuration of a control device that can efficiently control the display of the number of balls that can be fired and the number of balls possessed in an enclosed ball type gaming machine. In the first embodiment, the “number of balls that can be fired” is the “number of balls held”, and the “number of balls held” is the concept “number of balls counted”. That is, the “number of balls held” is the concept of the number of balls that can be fired, and the “number of balls counted” is the concept of the number of balls that can be temporarily fired.
In the first embodiment, the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) side simply displays the number of balls and the counting balls only by digital display or simple display, and does not perform detailed display. Since the details of the number of balls held and the counting balls are displayed at 7, the purpose of reducing the burden on the game control device 54 (main board) and the payout control device 230 can be achieved.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine that manages the number of balls and counting balls,
A first display device capable of displaying the number of balls held;
A second display device capable of simply displaying the counting ball;
A third display device that manages a card unit capable of displaying details of the number of balls and counting balls;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:
The inventive concept of the above configuration when applied to an enclosed ball type gaming machine is expressed as follows.
A game control device capable of enclosing a predetermined number of game balls in a gaming machine main body, launching the enclosed game balls into a gaming area and playing a game, and managing the progress of the gaming machine With
The game control device determines whether the game result is in a predetermined profit state or any other state, and in the case of the predetermined profit state, the player's profit is increased in correspondence with a predetermined number of prize balls. Let
In the enclosed ball type gaming machine that collects the game balls that have passed through the game area and guides them to the launch position, circulates and uses the enclosed game balls, and manages the number of balls and counting balls,
A first display device capable of displaying the number of balls held;
A second display device capable of simply displaying the counting ball;
A third display device that manages a card unit capable of displaying details of the number of balls and counting balls;
An enclosed ball game machine characterized by comprising:

(2) In addition, the number-of-balls display 40 as the first display device displays the number of balls in digital (numerals), and the counting ball display 313 as the second display device displays at least the presence or absence of counting balls. The display can be displayed by turning on / off the LED, which corresponds to the simple display of the counting ball. On the other hand, the operation display device 7 as a third display device is under the control of the card unit 15 and is based on information periodically transmitted from the gaming machine (including information on the number of balls and counting balls). The details of the number and counting ball are displayed under the control of the card unit 15.
More specifically, the operation display device 7 displays details of the counting ball (the number of stored balls that cannot be temporarily fired) in digital (numerals) and a figure (analog figure) that looks like a ball box T. And a message indicating that there is a possible number of fires (the number of balls), and as described above, although not directly shown in the scene P2 of FIG. Also, the operation display device 7 is configured to display digitally (numerals) such as “500 balls”.
Therefore, simple information and detailed information can be efficiently provided to the player.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The first display device can digitally display the number of balls held,
The second display device can display at least the presence or absence of a counting ball,
The third display device is under the control of the card unit, and displays the number of balls and the details of the counting balls by controlling the card unit based on information sent from the game machine.

(3) In the first embodiment, the player has a counting switch 311 for moving the number of balls to the counting ball and a counting ball use switch 314 for moving the counting ball to the number of balls. The number of balls that can be fired can be counted and moved to a storage ball. Conversely, it can be moved (returned) from the storage ball to the number of balls that can be launched by a simple operation.
In particular, in the case of gaming machines using real balls, the number of balls held is equivalent to the image of the number of balls that can be fired on the upper and lower plates, and the counting ball moves counting from the number of balls held. Since it is a storage ball and corresponds to the image of the ball moved from the upper plate or the lower plate to the ball box, the number of balls can be easily moved to the counting ball simply by operating the counting switch 311. Similarly, by simply operating the counting ball use switch 314, the counting ball can be easily moved to the number of possessed balls, and the enclosed ball type game can be performed with a feeling close to that of a gaming machine using a real ball.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A counting switch that moves the number of balls to the counting ball;
A counting ball use switch for moving the counting ball to the number of balls held,
The payout control device
When the counting switch is operated, control is performed to move the number of balls held to the counting ball,
A gaming machine characterized in that when a counting ball use switch is operated, control is performed to move the counting ball to the number of possessed balls.
Further, in the first embodiment, the counting ball indicator 313 that is turned on when there is a counting ball is arranged, so that the player can easily know the presence of the counting ball.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Provide a counting ball indicator to notify the presence of the counting ball,
The payout control device
A gaming machine characterized in that when a counting ball is present, control is performed to notify (for example, turn on) the presence of the counting ball by a counting ball display.

(4) In the first embodiment, both the number of balls and counting balls are managed by the payout controller 230 and data is stored, and the number of balls and counting are periodically (for example, 400 ms) for the card unit 15. Since the information of the ball is transmitted and displayed on the operation display device 7 as the third display device under the control of the card unit 15, the gaming machine manages the number of balls held, and the counting ball is stored in the card unit. The security can be increased as compared with the method managed by 15.
That is, according to the configuration of the first embodiment, since the data of both the number of balls held and the counting balls are managed only by the payout control device 230 (the gaming machine side), the number of balls held is determined by the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1). And the security is higher than the method in which the card unit 15 manages the counting ball. In addition, for example, there is no loss or inconsistency of data of the number of balls held or the number of counted balls due to a communication failure between the gaming machine and the card unit. Further, since the counting ball number data is not managed on the card unit 15 side, there is no possibility that the counting ball number data is illegally input to the card unit 15 from the outside.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A control device is provided to manage both the number of balls and counting balls,
A gaming machine configured to transmit information about the number of balls and counting balls to a card unit and display the information on a third display device under the control of the card unit.

According to the first embodiment, the following effects can be obtained with respect to polishing control of the encapsulated sphere, sub-assembly, and the like.
(5) In the first embodiment, the polishing control device 59 (including the polishing device 56) is not limited to the pachinko machine 1 being operated, and even when the store is closed and the power is turned off, the game control device 54 (including the polishing device 56) Information is not input to the main board) or the payout control device 230 (payout board) (for example, input of information such as signal input, data input, command input).
That is, the polishing control device 59 (including the polishing device 56) is “sub-configured” (the details of sub-configuration are as described above).
In this way, by “substituting” the polishing control device 59 (including the polishing device 56), the control burden of the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230 can be reduced.
Specifically, it is only necessary to send a polishing start command from the game control device 54 or the payout control device 230 to the effect control device 53. When the effect control device 53 receives the polishing start command, the polishing control device 59 starts polishing. In response to the polishing instruction from the effect control device 53, the polishing control device 59 executes processing necessary for polishing the encapsulated sphere, such as driving the polishing motor 70 and operating the switching solenoid 79S, for a predetermined period. The game ball is polished.

In addition, the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230 can operate the “sub-configured” polishing control device 59 (including the polishing device 56) simply by sending a polishing start command to the effect control device 53. Since the control device 54 and the payout control device 230 only need a simple process of command transmission to polish the encapsulated sphere, the control burden on the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230 can be remarkably reduced. .
Furthermore, since there is no direct influence on the game for the sub-device, there are few restrictions on the components to be mounted. In other words, the sub-device has an advantage that the ROM capacity limitation and the component limitation are alleviated.
Therefore, the sub-device can be designed without worrying about the ROM capacity, and for example, the choice of parts can be expanded, and an RTC (real-time clock) can be mounted, thereby expanding the range of production. In addition, sub-devices have a wider range of options for components such as sensors, leading to lower costs. Furthermore, “sub-substituting” has an advantage that the inspection is simplified because there is no direct influence on the game.
Further, the substituting of the polishing control device 59 (including the polishing device 56) has an advantage that the time required for the type test relating to the device (including the control device) for polishing the game ball is shortened.

This background will be described.
Generally, when a polishing device is installed in an encapsulated ball type gaming machine, the testing apparatus inspects the polishing device. However, since the polishing device is a device that is not found in conventional gaming machines, the test may take a long time. There is.
Conventionally, a game ball polishing apparatus falls within the category of replenishment facilities, and is installed as a replenishment facility. Since the replenishment facility does not directly affect the game result of the gaming machine, the test is omitted from the viewpoint of the gaming machine inspection.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the polishing apparatus is incorporated in the gaming machine, but by substituting it, there is an advantage that the direct influence on the game is eliminated and the inspection is simplified.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A polishing apparatus for polishing a sphere;
In a gaming machine comprising a polishing control device for controlling a polishing device,
A configuration in which a signal cannot be input to at least the game control device and the payout control device from equipment necessary for polishing the game ball including the polishing device and the polishing control device,
A gaming machine characterized in that a polishing controller controls a polishing apparatus according to an instruction from a game control device or a payout control device to polish a ball.

Further, the inventive concept of the above configuration when applied to an enclosed ball type gaming machine is expressed as follows.
A game control device capable of enclosing a predetermined number of game balls in a gaming machine main body, launching the enclosed game balls into a gaming area and playing a game, and managing the progress of the gaming machine With
The game control device determines whether the game result is in a predetermined profit state or any other state, and in the case of the predetermined profit state, the player's profit is increased in correspondence with a predetermined number of prize balls. Let
In an enclosed ball type gaming machine that plays a game by circulating the enclosed game ball by collecting the game ball that has passed through the game area and guiding it to the launch position,
A polishing apparatus for polishing the encapsulated sphere;
A polishing control device for controlling the polishing device,
A configuration in which a signal cannot be input to at least the game control device and the payout control device from equipment necessary for polishing the game ball including the polishing device and the polishing control device,
The polishing control device controls the polishing device according to an instruction from the game control device or the payout control device to cause the ball to be polished.

(6) When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the payout control device 230 transmits a polishing start command to the game control device 54. When the game control device 54 receives the polishing start command from the payout control device 230, the effect control device 53 When the polishing control command is transmitted to the production control device 53 and the production control device 53 receives the polishing start command from the game control device 54, the polishing control device 59 instructs the polishing control device 59 to start polishing. In accordance with a polishing instruction, the encapsulated sphere is polished for a predetermined period.
For this reason, the payout control device 230 simply issues a polishing start command to the effect control device 53 via the game control device 54, and the polishing control device 59 (including the polishing device 56) is managed under the control of the effect control device 53. Since the encapsulated sphere is further polished, the control burden on the payout control device 230 (payout substrate) and the game control device 54 (main substrate) can be reduced, and the efficiency is improved.
The control burden can be reduced on both the hardware side and the software side.
Further, since the polishing control device 59 is equipped with the RTC 60, there is an advantage that the RTC 60 can be used for the production of the production control device 53. In such a case, since it is not necessary to mount an RTC in the production control device in particular, the cost when changing the model of the gaming machine is reduced.
Further, since the polishing control device 59 is subdivided, the parts can be shared as a so-called frame element.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The polishing control device comprises:
A gaming machine, wherein when a polishing start instruction is given, the polishing apparatus is controlled so as to polish a ball only for a predetermined period.
Here, the predetermined period is, for example, a certain period when the gaming machine is turned on.

Also, the payout control device 230 transmits a polishing start command to the game control device 54 at the start of polishing when the power is turned on, and the game control device 54 receives the polishing start command from the payout control device 230 and polishes to the effect control device 53. When the start command is transmitted and the production control device 53 receives the polishing start command from the game control device 54, the control is performed so that the display of the display device 41 is displayed on the screen of the display device 41 after receiving the polishing start command. This is convenient because it is possible to easily know that the encapsulated sphere is being polished only by looking at the screen of the display device 41.
On the other hand, the payout control device 230 transmits a polishing stop command to the effect control device 53 via the game control device 54 after the elapse of a predetermined period from the start of polishing, and when the effect control device 53 receives the polishing stop command, the display is performed. Since the display during the polishing in the apparatus 41 is controlled to be stopped, the store clerk can easily know that the polishing of the encapsulated sphere has been completed simply by looking at the screen of the display apparatus 41, which is convenient.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The payout control device
A gaming machine characterized by instructing the display control device to perform control to display on the display device while the polishing device is polishing a sphere.
When the game control device controls the effect control device, the payout control device may be changed to the game control device in the above configuration.
In addition, when the game control device and the payout control device are integrated into a single game control device, the configuration requirement of the payout control device in the above concept of the invention is changed to the game control device. Good (this also applies to the following inventive concept).

(7) While the encapsulated sphere is being polished, that is, until the dispensing control device 230 transmits a polishing start command to the game control device 54 and then transmits a polishing stop command after a predetermined period of time, the encapsulated sphere is being polished. Therefore, since the control for stopping the launch of the game ball is performed, it is possible to eliminate the trouble to the game. In other words, since the polishing apparatus 56 is not operated during the game, it is possible to prevent the game from being affected by the operation of the polishing apparatus 56.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The payout control device
A game machine characterized by performing control to stop the game while the polishing apparatus is polishing the ball.
In the case where the game control device controls the launch of the ball, the payout control device in the above configuration may be changed to the game control device.

(8) When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the polishing apparatus 56 switches the path of the encapsulated sphere to “polishing side” for a predetermined time T 1 according to an instruction from the polishing control apparatus 59, and the encapsulated sphere is polished by the polishing apparatus 56. Next, when the polishing of the encapsulated sphere is completed, the game is ready, and the encapsulated sphere is circulated without going through the polishing device 56 during the game.
Therefore, the encapsulated sphere can be polished by simple control of switching the path.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A gaming machine comprising path switching means capable of switching between a ball polishing state in which a game ball is guided to a polishing apparatus for polishing and a normal state in which the game ball is circulated without passing through the polishing apparatus.

(9) During the game (when the stand is in operation, including during big hits, etc.), the enclosing ball is controlled to circulate without passing through the polishing device 56 under the control of the polishing control device 59. Therefore, since it does not pass through the polishing device 56 during the game, it is possible to prevent the game from being influenced by the operation of the polishing device 56.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A gaming machine configured to be in a normal state in which a game ball is circulated by the path switching means without going through a polishing device during a game.

(10) In the first embodiment, the decorative ball display device 250 displays the number of held balls and the number of counted balls under the control of the effect control device 53 (sub-board), so that the player has a ball that is close to a real ball. The number and the number of counting balls can be expressed. In other words, the decorative ball display device 250 can express the holding ball close to a real ball type by decorative control with a large number of LEDs, and is easy to understand sensuously. Therefore, the player can easily understand the number of balls held and the number of balls counted.
In particular, the number of balls held is controlled by a large number of LEDs and is designed to create an image of a so-called upper plate by the upper decorative ball display device 250a of the decorative ball display device 250. The effect is that the approximate number of balls is easy to understand.
On the other hand, the number of counted balls is designed to create an image of a so-called ball box by the lower decorative ball display device 250c of the decorative ball display device 250, and is decorated and controlled by a large number of LEDs. There is an effect that the approximate number of counting balls is easily understood.
Furthermore, since the decorative ball display device 250 is controlled by the effect control device 53 that is a sub-board, the control burden on the payout control device 230 and the game control device 54 can be reduced.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A decorative ball display device that displays the number of balls held is provided.
The game machine characterized in that the decorative ball display device is controlled by an effect control device as a sub-board.

In addition, during counting of the number of balls, the LED of the counting decoration unit 250c is moved and blinked so that the ball moves from the upper decorative ball display device 250a to the lower decorative ball display device 250b which is an image of a ball box. Since the decoration is controlled, there is an effect that it is easy for the player to understand that the counting is in progress.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A decorative ball display device that displays the number of balls held is provided.
The production control device
A game characterized in that the decorative ball display device is controlled so that when the number of balls is counted, the decorative ball display device produces an effect display of the number of balls moved to the counting ball. Machine.

(11) In the first embodiment, the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) has a number-of-balls display 40 as a first display device capable of displaying the number of balls, and a second that can display the number of balls and counting balls in a decorative manner. Since the decorative ball display device 250 is provided as a display device, the number of balls held is digitally displayed on the ball holding number display 40, and the number of balls held and the number of counted balls are displayed in analog on the decorative ball display device 250. Thus, the player can know the number of balls possessed in detail, and the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls can be grasped instantaneously by analog display, which is convenient.
In this case, the payout control device 230 performs control so that the number-of-balls display is digitally displayed on the number-of-balls display 40 serving as the first display device, and the effect control device 53 performs the decoration holding as the second display device. Since the ball display device 250 is controlled to display the number of held balls and the number of counted balls in an analog manner, a part of the display control is shared by the effect control device 53 as a sub-board, and the control load of the payout control device 230 is increased. It is reduced.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The payout control device (or game control device)
Control the digital display of the number of balls held by the first display device,
The production control device
A game machine characterized by controlling an ornamental ball display device for effect display of the number of balls held, and causing the ornamental ball display device to perform analog display of the number of balls held and a counting ball.

(12) In the first embodiment, when the RAM clear switch 182 is turned on, the payout control device 230 initializes and clears the RAM 233 inside the payout control device 230 and then clears the front frame opening switch (nighttime). The frame opening information of the monitoring switch 126 is taken into the payout control device 230 and stored in the RAM 233. Thereafter, the frame opening information stored in the RAM 233 is transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the card unit 15.
Therefore, there is an effect that the trouble that the frame opening information of the RAM 233 is erased by turning on the RAM clear switch 182 does not occur.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The payout control device
When the RAM clear switch is pushed, after clearing the RAM of the payout control device, the frame opening information from the front frame opening detecting means is fetched and stored in the RAM,
After that, the gaming machine is configured to transmit the frame opening information stored in the RAM to the card unit.

(13) In the first embodiment, various types of game information such as the number of balls held and the number of balls counted are periodically transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the card unit 15 (for example, every 400 ms). With regard to the number and the number of counting balls, since it is configured to transmit the actual number at that time, not the change, it is not necessary to take measures against data loss, and the number of holding balls and the number of counting balls are accurately transmitted to the card unit 15. Can increase the reliability of data.
By the way, with respect to the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls, when these changes (that is, the updated number of possessed balls and the updated counted number of balls) are transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the card unit 15, the data is lost. In this case, the number of balls held and the number of balls counted on the card unit 15 side are not accurately updated, and the reliability of data is lowered. Therefore, it is necessary to take measures against data loss, and the control becomes complicated.
On the other hand, the first embodiment has an advantage in that it is not necessary to take measures against data loss because the actual number at that time is transmitted with respect to the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls.

Further, according to the first embodiment, the following effects can be obtained with respect to dealing with fraud.
(1) It is possible to detect that the front frame 4 is open even when the main power supply is cut off, and a front frame release switch that holds the frame open information that detects the opening of the front frame 4 even when the main power supply is cut off ( When the main power supplied from the power supply 58 is turned on, the main power is immediately supplied to the payout control device 230, but the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) is provided by the switch power supply delay circuit 541. ) 126 is supplied with a delay by a predetermined time Ta (for example, 5 seconds: a period exceeding the preparation period for starting up the dispensing control device 230), and the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is After the supply of power is started, the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is shut off is output to the outside (for example, the dispensing control device 230).
Accordingly, after the start-up preparation period of the payout control device 230 has elapsed, the frame open information of the front frame open switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is taken into the payout control device 230, and the frame open information cannot be taken in. There is no fear, and the frame opening information can be surely captured. As a result, the function of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 can be fully exhibited, and security can be improved.

This background will be explained.
One of the illegal acts against gaming machines is to enter the game store at night when the gaming machine is turned off and remodel the gaming machine control device or replace it with an unauthorized device (for example, board). May be.
Correspondingly, for example, when a gaming machine is turned off, the fact that the gaming machine is opened (especially the front frame is opened) is detected and stored by a sensor (for example, night monitoring SW), and the game at the next day's opening There is an example in which the opening information of the front frame detected by the sensor when the machine is turned on is output to the game control device.
However, the game control device that captures the frame opening information stored by the nighttime monitoring SW takes some time for start-up preparation from the time the main power is turned on. When the frame opening information from the night monitoring SW is input during the start-up preparation period, there is a possibility that the information cannot be taken in, and the function of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) cannot be sufficiently exhibited.
If the frame opening information cannot be taken in well, even if the sensor detects that the front frame has been opened at the time of turning off the power of the gaming machine (for example, the night monitoring SW), it causes a decrease in security and measures Is required.
The above example is a case where the game control device captures the opening information of the front frame, but there is a similar problem even when the payout control device captures the opening information of the front frame.

The present embodiment can solve the above problems.
That is, the start-up preparation period of the payout control device 230 has elapsed by starting the supply of the main power to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 after being delayed by a predetermined time Ta by the switch power supply delay circuit 541. Therefore, the frame opening information of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is taken into the payout control device 230, and there is no possibility that the frame opening information cannot be taken in, and the frame opening information can be taken in reliably. Reduced security against fraud can be avoided.
In the description of the configuration of the first embodiment, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 detects that the front frame 4 is opened and detects that the glass frame 5 is opened. In that case, similarly, the switch power supply delay circuit 541 delays the main power supply by a predetermined time Ta to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 and starts supplying it. After the start-up preparation period of the payout control device 230 elapses, the opening information of the glass frame 5 by the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is taken into the payout control device 230, and the taken-in glass frame 5 is opened. Based on the information, the same processing as in the case where the front frame 4 is open information is performed. If it does so, there will be no fear that the opening information of the glass frame 5 cannot be taken in, the opening information of the glass frame 5 can be taken in reliably, and the deterioration of security against fraud can be avoided.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device for managing the progress of the game;
In a gaming machine comprising a power supply device for supplying power,
It is possible to detect that the front frame is open even when the main power supply is shut off, and a front frame open detection means for holding information that detects the opening of the front frame even when the main power supply is shut off,
A delay means for delaying the supply of the main power to the front frame opening detection means when the main power supplied from the power supply device is turned on; and
The front frame opening detection means includes
A gaming machine characterized in that after the main power supply is started, the front frame opening information stored when the main power supply is shut off is output.
The inventive concept of the above configuration when applied to an enclosed ball type gaming machine is expressed as follows.
A game control device capable of enclosing a predetermined number of game balls in a gaming machine main body, launching the enclosed game balls into a gaming area and playing a game, and managing the progress of the gaming machine And a power supply device for supplying power,
The game control device determines whether the game result is in a predetermined profit state or any other state, and in the case of the predetermined profit state, the player's profit is increased in correspondence with a predetermined number of prize balls. Let
In an enclosed ball type gaming machine that plays a game by circulating the enclosed game ball by collecting the game ball that has passed through the game area and guiding it to the launch position,
It is possible to detect that the front frame is open even when the main power supply is shut off, and a front frame open detection means for holding information that detects the opening of the front frame even when the main power supply is shut off,
A delay means for delaying the supply of the main power to the front frame opening detection means when the main power supplied from the power supply device is turned on; and
The front frame opening detection means includes
An encapsulated ball type gaming machine characterized in that after the main power supply is started, the opening information of the front frame stored when the main power supply is shut off is output.

(2) When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the payout control device 230 delays the main power by a predetermined time Ta (for example, 5 seconds) with respect to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 by the switch power delay circuit 541. For example, when the power is turned on by turning on the RAM clear switch 182, the payout control device 230 performs RAM clearing (initialization of the RAM 233 and the like) and then the frame of the front frame 4. The opening information (output signal of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126) is read, and the payout control device 230 reads the frame opening information of the front frame 4 after the RAM is cleared, and opens the front frame 4 to the card unit 15. Since the information is transmitted, even if the RAM clear switch 182 is turned on, the frame opening information of the front frame 4 is missed. Since the frame opening information of the front frame 4 can be reliably transmitted to the card unit 15, the card unit 15 receives the frame opening information of the front frame 4, for example, and the card unit 15 reports an error. Then, it is possible to prevent illegal games in advance by taking measures such as outputting error information to the hall computer 86 (and not lending the ball).

(3) If the front frame 4 is illegally opened and the frame opening information is generated, the error state is displayed on the display device 41, so that the store clerk looks at the display device 41 to check the pachinko machine 1 For example, an appropriate measure (for example, removal and normal inspection of an illegal substrate etc.) can be taken with respect to attachment of an illegal substrate or the like.
Even when the store clerk does not look at the display device 41, the card unit 15 receives the incorrect frame opening information of the front frame 4 as described above. Since measures such as outputting error information to 86 are taken, the store clerk is easily aware and security against fraud is improved. Further, if measures such as not lending the ball in the card unit 15 are taken, even if the player performs a lending operation on the card unit 15, the ball lending is not performed, and the player tells the store clerk. Thus, while the clerk notices the malfunction of the card unit 15 and checks the clerk, the clerk notices the improper opening of the front frame 4 and can take appropriate measures such as removal of an illegal board, for example. And security against fraud is improved.

(4) A switch power supply delay circuit 541 (delay means) for supplying main power to the payout control device 230 with a delay of a predetermined time Ta (for example, 5 seconds) to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126. Since it is provided, it is not necessary to provide delay means in the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126, and the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 can be downsized.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The delay means is provided in the game control device,
The front frame opening detection means is
A gaming machine characterized in that after the main power supply is started, the front frame opening information stored when the main power supply is shut off is output to the game control device.

(5) A switch power supply delay circuit 541 that supplies main power to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 after being delayed by a predetermined time Ta (for example, 5 seconds), as shown in FIG. It is configured by a hardware circuit without using it.
Therefore, since the CPU is not used for the delay means (here, the switch power supply delay circuit 541), the burden on the CPU 231 in the payout control device 230 can be reduced.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The delay means is composed of a hardware circuit that does not use a CPU,
A gaming machine characterized in that when the supply of main power is started, the main power is supplied to the front frame opening detection means with a predetermined time delay.

(6) The power supply 58 can supply main power and backup power, and the power supply 58 supplies the backup power to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 when the main power is cut off. The switch (night monitoring switch) 126 itself does not need to have a backup power source, and the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 can be downsized. In addition, when the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 itself is provided with a backup power supply, it is necessary to pay attention to the capacity of the backup power supply. The design is easy to design and leads to cost reduction.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The power supply
Main power and backup power can be supplied.
The power supply device
A gaming machine characterized by supplying backup power to the front frame opening detection means when the main power is shut off.

(7) With regard to the configuration using the gaming machine ID, the following effects are obtained when the following modifications are made.
That is, as a modification, for example, in the pachinko machine 1, when the power is turned on, the gaming machine ID (unique identification information of the game control device 54: main board ID and unique identification information of the payout control device 230: payout unique ID) is stored in the card unit 15. When it is determined that the night frame opening fraud is being informed by sending it to the external management device 91 via the external device and collating it with a pre-managed regular gaming machine ID (authentication of the authenticity of the ID). Determines whether or not the information indicating that the ID collation result is OK is received from the external management device 91 via the card unit 15.
If the ID verification result OK has not been received from the card unit 15, the display device 41 continues to display information that the front frame 4 has been opened at night, and the store clerk continues to display the payout control device 230 and the game control device. 54 etc. are inspected, and necessary measures are taken including the presence or absence of fraud.
Therefore, when such a modification is adopted, the possibility of fraud is judged by using two pieces of information, that is, the frame opening information from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 and the matching result of the gaming machine ID. Compared with the case where fraud is determined only by the frame opening information, the accuracy of the possibility of fraud can be further increased, and a gaming machine with high security can be provided.

In particular, since the authenticity of the gaming machine ID is collated by the external management device 91 managed by a third party outside the gaming store, it is possible to more accurately confirm the illegal modification of the gaming machine.
Further, in the modified example, when the night frame opening fraud notification is being performed, the night frame opening fraud error notification is continued until the ID collation result becomes OK, thereby obtaining the following effects.
1stly, in the situation where an error is notified, since the amusement store is busy preparing for opening a store, there is a possibility that the store clerk may miss the error notification only for a predetermined time. Since the error notification of the night frame opening fraud is continued until becomes OK, there is little possibility that the store clerk will miss it, and it is possible to reliably deal with fraud (for example, fraud inspection).
Secondly, the frame opening information when the opening of the front frame 4 is detected may be that the game store simply opened the front frame for inspection or the like, in which case a lot of gaming machines will report an error. There is a fear. In the modified example, if the front frame of the gaming machine is simply opened, the error notification is terminated when the ID verification result OK is received, so the error notification is merely displayed on the display device 41, There is no risk that many gaming machines will report errors for a long time.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
When the main power is turned on by the power supply,
Providing transmission means for transmitting main unique identification information that can identify and identify a gaming machine to an external management device managed by a third party organization via a card unit,
External management device
A gaming machine configured to collate the transmitted main unique identification information with the main unique identification information of the gaming machine managed in advance, and to return the collation result to the card unit.

(8) In the payout control device 230, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the switch power supply delay circuit 541 delays the main power by a predetermined time Ta (for example, 5 seconds) with respect to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126. After that, the frame opening information of the front frame 4 is fetched from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126, and the front frame opening that the frame opening information due to the unauthorized opening of the front frame 4 occurred at night. When the determination is made based on the detection signal of the switch (night monitoring switch) 126, the error state information is output, so that the error can be notified promptly.
Of the above configurations, the inventive concept for outputting an error state is expressed as follows.
The game control device
A gaming machine that outputs error information of a front frame abnormality when there is front frame opening information by the front frame opening detection means when the gaming machine is turned on.
Also, in the above, error state information from the payout control device 230 is output to the effect control device 53 via the game control device 54, and an error is notified on the display device 41 under the control of the effect control device 53. Can be efficiently confirmed.
Among the above-described configurations, the inventive concept of performing error notification on the display device 41 is expressed as follows.
The game control device
When there is front frame opening information by the front frame opening detection means at the time of turning on the gaming machine, output error information of the front frame abnormality to the production control device,
The effect control device controls the display device to display error information of the front frame abnormality on the display device.

(9) With regard to the configuration using the gaming machine ID, the following effects are obtained when the following modifications are made.
That is, as a modification, for example, in the payout control device 230, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it is determined that there is a possibility of fraud if it is determined that the frame opening information due to the unauthorized opening of the front frame 4 occurs at night. Then, information on the error state is output from the payout control device 230 to the effect control device 53 via the game control device 54, the error is notified on the display device 41 under the control of the effect control device 53, and further, the gaming machine ID If the configuration in which the error notification is continued until the verification result OK is received from the external management device 91 via the card unit 15, the unauthorized opening of the front frame 4 can be reliably notified, and the payout control device 230 or Whether the game control device 54 is true or false can be reliably inspected.
In particular, since the authenticity of the gaming machine ID is collated by the external management device 91 managed by a third party outside the gaming store, it is possible to more accurately confirm the illegal modification of the gaming machine.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
When the main power is turned on by the power supply,
Providing transmission means for transmitting main unique identification information that can identify and identify a gaming machine to an external management device managed by a third party organization via a card unit,
The game control device
When there is front frame opening information by the front frame opening detection means at the time of turning on the gaming machine, output error information of the front frame abnormality,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the output of the error information is continued until the result of collation of the main unique identification information of the gaming machine is sent from the external management device.

(10) Regarding the RAM clear, when the following modification is used, the following effects are obtained.
That is, as a modification, for example, when a store clerk performs a RAM clear operation, for example, the RAM clear switch 182 is turned on before the opening information of the front frame 4 is transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the card unit 15. However, if the RAM clear is not performed and the frame opening information in which the front frame 4 is illegally opened is held in the RAM 233, it is possible to avoid a decrease in security against the fraud.
That is, even if the front frame 4 of the gaming machine is opened at night to mount an illegal board or the like, and then the gaming machine is turned on and the RAM clear switch 182 is pressed to clear the RAM to erase the illegal traces. If the frame opening information of the front frame 4 is not transmitted to the card unit 15, the RAM 233 is not cleared and the frame opening information of the front frame 4 is still held in the RAM 233, so that security against fraud is increased.
Then, according to the configuration of the modified example, after the frame opening information of the front frame 4 is reliably transmitted to the card unit 15 from the payout control device 230, the RAM 233 is cleared (initialized), and at this time, stored in the RAM 233. Since the frame opening information of the front frame 4 that has been set is also cleared, it is possible to reliably cope with fraud.
The payout control device 230 transmits the frame opening information of the front frame 4 to the card unit 15 and then the RAM clear switch 182 keeps on receiving the ACK indicating that the card unit 15 has received the frame opening information. Even if the ON operation is performed, the RAM 233113 is not cleared, and when the reception ACK is confirmed, the RAM 233 including the frame opening information of the front frame 4 may be cleared (initialized) thereafter. In this way, it is possible to more reliably cope with fraud.
As described above, a gaming machine with higher security can be provided.

This background will be described.
One of the illegal acts against gaming machines is to enter the game store at night when the gaming machine is turned off and remodel the gaming machine control device or replace it with an unauthorized device (for example, board). May be.
Corresponding to this, for example, when a gaming machine is turned off, it is detected and memorized by a sensor (for example, night monitoring SW) that the gaming machine has been opened (especially the front frame is opened), and the game at the next day's opening There is an example in which the opening information of the front frame detected by the sensor when the machine is turned on is output to the game control device.
However, even if the frame opening information detected and stored by the sensor (night monitoring SW) is taken in and stored in the game control device, the frame opening information stored in the game control device by the operation of the RAM clear switch by the store clerk. May be deleted.
In other words, when the main power of the gaming machine is cut off, a front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) that detects and holds the opening of the front frame is provided, and if it is read into the gaming machine to monitor fraud, the security is high, If the RAM clear switch is pressed when the game machine is turned on, the information on opening the front frame obtained by monitoring may be lost. Then, the function of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) is demonstrated. Can not.
If the frame opening information is deleted, even if a sensor (for example, the night monitoring SW) detects and stores that the front frame has been opened when the gaming machine is turned off, the security will be reduced and countermeasures will be taken. It has been demanded.
In particular, when the frame opening information is erased, the abnormality detection information is lost, and it is impossible to reliably detect fraud.

The present embodiment can solve the above problems.
That is, even when the store clerk performs a RAM clear operation, the RAM is not cleared and the front side is illegally displayed unless the payout control device 230 confirms that the opening information of the front frame 4 has been transmitted to the card unit 15. Since the frame opening information in which the frame 4 is released is held in the RAM 233, it is possible to avoid a reduction in security against fraud.
Also, after the frame opening information of the front frame 4 is reliably transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the card unit 15, the RAM 233 is cleared, and at the same time, the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored in the RAM 233 is also cleared. . Therefore, it is possible to reliably cope with fraud.
The payout control device 230 transmits the frame opening information of the front frame 4 to the card unit 15 and then the RAM clear switch 182 confirms the reception ACK indicating that the card unit 15 has received the frame opening information. Even if the ON operation is performed, the RAM 233 is not cleared, and when the reception ACK is confirmed, the RAM 233 including the frame opening information of the front frame 4 may be cleared (initialized) thereafter. In this way, it is possible to more reliably cope with fraud.
As described above, a gaming machine resistant to fraud can be provided.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device for managing the progress of the game;
In a gaming machine comprising a RAM clear switch for clearing the RAM of the game control device,
It is possible to detect that the front frame is open even when the power is shut off, and a front frame open detection means that holds information that detects the opening of the front frame even when the power is shut off,
Clear control means for controlling the operation of the RAM clear switch,
The game control device includes:
When turning on the power of the gaming machine, the front frame opening detection means by the front frame opening detection means is transmitted to the card unit,
A gaming machine, wherein when the RAM clear switch is pressed, the RAM is cleared by the clear control means after confirming that the opening information of the front frame is transmitted to the card unit.

The inventive concept of the above configuration when applied to an enclosed ball type gaming machine is expressed as follows.
A game control device capable of enclosing a predetermined number of game balls in a gaming machine main body, launching the enclosed game balls into a gaming area and playing a game, and managing the progress of the gaming machine And a RAM clear switch for clearing the RAM of the game control device,
The game control device determines whether the game result is in a predetermined profit state or any other state, and in the case of the predetermined profit state, the player's profit is increased in correspondence with a predetermined number of prize balls. Let
In an enclosed ball type gaming machine that plays a game by circulating the enclosed game ball by collecting the game ball that has passed through the game area and guiding it to the launch position,
It is possible to detect that the front frame is open even when the power is shut off, and a front frame open detection means that holds information that detects the opening of the front frame even when the power is shut off,
Clear control means for controlling the operation of the RAM clear switch,
The game control device includes:
When turning on the power of the gaming machine, the front frame opening detection means by the front frame opening detection means is transmitted to the card unit,
When the RAM clear switch is pushed, it is confirmed that the RAM is cleared by the clear control means after confirming that the opening information of the front frame is transmitted to the card unit. Machine.

(11) Regarding the RAM clear, when the following modification is used, the following effects are obtained.
That is, as a modified example, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the payout control device 230 delays the output of the detection signal from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 by a switch power delay circuit 541 by a predetermined time. When the open state of the front frame 4 is detected by the front frame open switch (night monitoring switch) 126 and the frame open information of the front frame 4 is not transmitted to the card unit 15, the RAM clear switch 182 is pressed. Even in the case where the configuration is such that the RAM 233 is not cleared and error information is output to the effect control device 53 via the game control device 54, the effect control device 53 relates to the frame opening information. An error message indicating that the command has not been transmitted to the card unit 15 is displayed on the display device 41. Which control was carried out, it will be to inform the clerk.
Therefore, according to this modified example, the store clerk looks at the display device 41 to inspect the pachinko machine 1 and, for example, take appropriate measures for attachment of, for example, an unauthorized substrate (for example, removal of an unauthorized substrate and normal inspection) ). That is, it is possible to reliably cope with fraud.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The game control device includes:
When the front frame opening detection means by the front frame opening detection means is not transmitted to the card unit when the gaming machine is turned on,
Even if the RAM clear switch is pushed, error information is output without clearing the RAM by the clear control means.

(12) With regard to the RAM clear, the following effects can be obtained when the following modification is adopted.
That is, as a modified example, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the payout control device 230 delays the output of the detection signal from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 by a switch power delay circuit 541 by a predetermined time. When the open state of the front frame 4 is detected by the front frame open switch (night monitoring switch) 126, the frame open information of the front frame 4 is stored in the RAM 233 and transmitted to the card unit 15, After confirming the reception ACK, if the frame opening information stored in the RAM 233 is cleared, the RAM is cleared until the card unit 15 does not receive the opening information of the front frame 4 from the dispensing control device 230. Since the frame opening information that the front frame 4 is illegally opened is held in the RAM 233, It is possible to avoid the deterioration of that security.
That is, as long as the frame opening information is held in the RAM 233, the store clerk can take measures to remove the fraud while searching for the possibility of fraud.
In particular, the RAM 233 is checked after confirming the reception ACK indicating that the card unit 15 has received the frame opening information in which the open state of the front frame 4 is detected by the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 when the main power is cut off. Since the frame opening information stored in (1) is cleared, the valuable frame opening information detected when the main power supply is shut off can be used effectively and the security can be enhanced.
Further, if the opening information of the front frame 4 is transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the card unit 15, the frame opening information is cleared. If the card unit 15 cannot receive the frame opening information, the frame opening information is displayed. However, in the modified example, the frame opening information stored in the RAM 233 is cleared after confirming the reception ACK indicating that the card unit 15 has received the frame opening information. It can be significantly improved.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The game control device includes:
When turning on the gaming machine, the front frame opening detection means by the front frame opening detection means is transmitted to the card unit,
A gaming machine characterized by clearing the release information upon confirmation of a reception ACK from a card unit.

(13) Front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 holds the frame opening information when the opening of the front frame 4 is detected when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (for example, at night when the amusement store is closed). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the switch power supply delay circuit 541 delays the main power supply to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 by a predetermined time Ta (for example, 5 seconds), but the main power is supplied. When this is done, immediately, the held frame opening information of the front frame 4 is output to the payout control device 230, and the payout control device 230 reads the frame opening information of the front frame 4, stores it in the RAM 233, and stores it in the RAM 233. Since the frame opening information of the front frame 4 is transmitted to the card unit 15, the card unit 15 determines that the front frame 4 may have been opened illegally at night, for example. Or an error notification in the card unit 15 Te, and outputs error information to the hall computer 86, by further or is not performed spheres rental can be fraudulently appropriate action. As a result, the clerk can inspect the pachinko machine 1 by error notification, and it is also possible not to lend the ball, so even if there is a fraud, it is possible to find a fraudulent board etc. Further, it is possible not to operate the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent damage to the amusement store.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The front frame opening detection means includes
If the opening of the front frame is detected when the gaming machine power is shut off, the opening information is retained, and when the gaming machine is turned on, the opening information of the front frame is output to the outside.
The game control device
A gaming machine characterized by storing front frame opening information detected and held by a front frame opening detection means in a RAM when power is turned on, and transmitting the opening information of the front frame stored in the RAM to a card unit.

Moreover, according to Example 1, there exists the following effect regarding a game game.
(1) The pachinko machine 1 (enclosed ball game machine) of the present embodiment includes a display device 41 (first display device) managed by an effect control device 53 (game machine: pachinko machine 1), and a card unit 15 And an operation display device 7 (second display device) for controlling at least a part thereof. The operation display device 7 displays game information controlled by the gaming machine in addition to displaying information related to ball rental controlled by the card unit 15. Since it is configured to be able to display, other game information (for example, operation screen information for presentation, player selection screen information, characters appearing in the special figure game, while producing a special figure game on the display device 41) Production assistance information such as introduction etc.) can be displayed on the operation display device 7, and a variety of production displays that are easy to understand for the player are possible, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

This background will be explained.
For gaming machines that display with a display device such as a liquid crystal display, for example, display symbol variation and display game descriptions, display various characters, and select effects for the player using push buttons. The screen to be displayed is displayed.
However, when various displays as described above are performed on a single display device, a symbol variation display, a game description, a character appearance, and the like are mixed and the display is difficult for the player to understand.

A specific example is as follows.
For example, there is a gaming machine in which a plurality of operation buttons for performance are provided to change the performance.
However, in such a case, if the roles and operation methods of the plurality of operation buttons are difficult to understand, there is a risk that the interest of the game may be reduced.
In another game machine, for example, there are a plurality of push buttons for production, or they are used for production in combination with a cross key to correspond to various productions.
However, in such a case, the operation is complicated and difficult to understand for the player. Therefore, countermeasures are necessary.

In addition, there is a gaming machine in which a touch panel (a configuration in which a touch sensor is arranged) is provided in a region corresponding to the central portion of the gaming board (see, for example, JP-A-2004-16292).
However, in the case of such a gaming machine, the player touches the glass part with a finger, so that there is a problem that the glass part is conspicuous. On the amusement hall side, the conspicuous part of the gaming machine is dirty, so it is necessary to clean the glass part frequently and is troublesome.
The present embodiment can solve the above problems.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A first display device managed by the gaming machine;
A game machine comprising: a second display device in which the card unit controls at least a part thereof;
The second display device is configured to be capable of displaying game information controlled by a gaming machine in addition to displaying information related to ball rental controlled by a card unit.

The inventive concept of the above configuration when applied to an enclosed ball type gaming machine is expressed as follows.
A game control device that can enclose a predetermined number of game balls in a gaming machine main body, launch the enclosed game balls into a gaming area and perform a game, and manage the progress of the gaming machine With
The game control device determines whether the game result is in a predetermined profit state or any other state, and in the case of the predetermined profit state, the player's profit is increased in correspondence with a predetermined number of prize balls. Let
In an enclosed ball type gaming machine that plays a game by circulating the enclosed game ball by collecting the game ball that has passed through the game area and guiding it to the launch position,
A first display device managed by the gaming machine;
A second display device that controls at least a part of the card unit;
The second display device is configured to be capable of displaying game information controlled by a gaming machine in addition to displaying information related to ball rental controlled by a card unit.

(2) The control of the operation display device 7 is mainly managed by the card unit 15, but when the connection route of the operation display device 7 is switched from the card unit 15 to the gaming machine side by the switching circuit 320, the gaming machine (effect The game information controlled by the control device 53) is displayed on the operation display device 7 (for example, production operation screen information, player selection screen information, production assistance information such as character introductions appearing in special game). The control of the operation display device 7 has an effect that the control burden on the gaming machine can be reduced as compared with the case where the display control is entirely performed on the gaming machine including the information relating to the ball rental.

(3) The operation display device 7, which is a device different from the display device 41, for game information different from the special game effect while continuing to produce the game on the display device 41 controlled by the gaming machine side. The display of the game progress is not inconvenienced, the display space is reduced, and the display space is reduced. is there.
Moreover, since the contents of the effects can be used properly between the display device 41 and the operation display device 7, the range of the effects is widened.

(4) Since the push button type effect operation switch 9 operated by the player and the touch type operation display device (touch panel) are provided, and the switching button 307 is disposed on the operation display device 7, the effect for the player is provided. The width can be increased.
For example, the presentation operation switch 9 displays on the display device 41 a display that prompts the player to make repeated hits in accordance with the contents of the display screen of the display device 41, so that the player can hit the presentation operation switch 9 repeatedly to play the game. On the other hand, the switch button 307 arranged on the operation display device 7 is used for selecting the display of the model name, the game description, and the like, so that it can be switched with the production operation switch 9 for continuous hitting and selection. The buttons 307 can be used separately, and the range of production is expanded.
Further, the use of the effect operation switch 9, the switching button 307, and the various buttons for effect on the operation display device 7 are differently used for continuous hitting and selection, thereby expanding the degree of freedom of the effect.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A first production operation unit and a second production operation unit operated by a player;
The gaming machine, wherein the second performance operation unit is arranged on the second display device.
Here, the production operation switch 9 constitutes a first production operation unit, and the operation display device 7 (including various buttons of the touch panel system) constitutes a second production operation unit.
Further, focusing on the structure, the inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The first performance operation unit is composed of a mechanical push button that can be pressed by the player,
The gaming machine characterized in that the second performance operation unit is configured by a liquid crystal display with a touch panel that can be operated by a player touching with a finger.

(5) A switching circuit 320 for switching information displayed on the operation display device 7 is provided, and the switching circuit 320 can switch between information from the card unit 15 and information from the gaming machine (production control device 53). It has the following effects.
Normally, since the switching circuit 320 switches the connection destination of the operation display device 7 to the card unit route, under the management / control of the card unit 15, the ball rental, storage, settlement, replay, game card return, etc. Necessary information or the like is displayed in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7. On the other hand, when the switch button 307 is touched, the connection destination of the operation display device 7 is changed to the gaming machine route. Is displayed in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7. Therefore, the operation display for ball rental and the like and the operation display for the effect of the gaming machine can be performed by the same operation display device 7, which is convenient and the range of the effect can be widened.
The operation display for the ball rental and the like and the operation display for the effect of the gaming machine are performed by the same operation display device 7, but the switching circuit 320 separates the card unit 15 and the information of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) and mixes them. Display information can be made easy to understand (that is, mixing of information can be avoided).

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A switching means for switching information to be displayed on the second display device;
The gaming machine characterized in that the switching means can switch between information from a card unit and information from a gaming machine.

(6) The operation display device 7 normally displays information from the card unit 15 (ball rental or storage-related information), but a priority signal is sent from the effect control device 53 in conjunction with the effect on the display device 41. When output to the switching circuit 320, the switching circuit 320 preferentially switches the connection route of the operation display device 7 to the gaming machine route, and information from the gaming machine (production control device 53) (operation display information for production). In particular, when the effect on the display device 41 is exciting (for example, when a reach occurs or a big hit occurs), various buttons related to the effect on the operation display device 7 (for example, an item selection button or a big hit) When the player operates the music selection button), the production progresses with the contents reflecting the player's intention, so that the game becomes interesting and the interest of the game is enhanced.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The second display device includes:
Usually displays information from the card unit,
A gaming machine that displays information from a gaming machine when the switching means is operated and switched in conjunction with an effect on the first display device.

(7) As described above, the effect operation switch 9 is related to the effect of the operation display device 7 while the player hits the effect operation switch 9 repeatedly in accordance with the content of the effect screen of the display device 41 and plays the game. Various touch panel buttons (for example, item selection buttons and music selection buttons at the time of jackpot) are used for selection of items to be used for production, selection of music at the time of jackpot presentation, etc. Further, the production operation switch 9 and the various touch panel buttons of the operation display device 7 can be used separately, and the range of production is widened.
In particular, the production operation switch 9 is composed of a mechanical push button that can be pressed by the player, and therefore has an advantage that it is difficult to be destroyed even if used repeatedly.
On the other hand, since the touch panel type buttons related to the production of the operation display device 7 are of a touch panel type, there is an advantage that an operation for selecting from a plurality of items can be performed with one touch and is easy to understand. In addition, since various buttons displayed on the screen of the operation display device 7 can be changed according to various effects, if the various buttons are changed in an easy-to-understand manner, the selection operation can be displayed in detail for the player and can be easily understood. .
Further, since the operation display device 7 is inherently managed and controlled by the card unit 15, a liquid crystal display with a touch panel that can be operated by a player touching with a finger corresponding to the operation / display of ball rental or storage Since it is also used to operate / display the effects of the gaming machine using the configuration, there is an advantage that the efficiency of the effects / display is good.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The first production operation unit operated by the player is composed of a mechanical push button that can be pressed by the player, and is used for continuous production.
A gaming machine characterized in that the second effect operating unit operated by the player is constituted by a liquid crystal display with a touch panel that can be operated by touching the player with a finger and used for a player selecting effect.
Here, the production operation switch 9 forms a first production operation unit, and the various touch panel buttons of the operation display device 7 form a second production operation unit.

(8) The operation display device 7 is composed of a liquid crystal display with a touch panel that can be operated by touching the player with a finger, and the display screen of the operation display device 7 is displayed by the player's operation (for example, operation of the switching button 307). Since it is possible to switch, information from the gaming machine can be easily displayed on the operation display device 7 managed and controlled by the card unit 15 by the player's operation. Information related to the production of the machine can be notified to the player, and it can be used as if the display device 41 has a plurality of screens.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The second display device is composed of a liquid crystal display with a touch panel that can be operated by a player touching with a finger,
A gaming machine, wherein the display screen of the second display device can be switched by an operation of a player.
Here, the operation display device 7 corresponds to a second display device, and is configured by a liquid crystal display with a touch panel that can be operated by a player touching with a finger.

(9) The operation display device 7 that can be operated by the player and also used as a production operation unit (touch panel) is disposed on the lower panel 6 below the glass frame 5. That is, if it is a normal gaming machine other than the enclosed ball type gaming machine, the operation display device 7 is arranged on the same member as the member provided with the upper plate of the front frame, and the operation display device 7 is not arranged on the glass frame. It is a configuration. Therefore, there are the following effects.
Since the operation display device 7 that is also used as a production operation unit (touch panel) is not provided in the vicinity of the display device 41 (this corresponds to the department of the glass frame 5), it is usually in a prominent place like the glass frame 5. Is not touched by the player, so that the glass frame 5 is not soiled and the cleaning work on the game hall can be reduced.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A gaming machine characterized in that the second performance operating section operated by the player is provided on a lower panel below the glass frame.
Here, the operation display device 7 constitutes a second effect operation unit.

Moreover, according to Example 1, there exist the following incidental effects.
(1) The pachinko machine 1 (enclosed ball game machine) of this embodiment stores the number of balls held in the RAM 233 as an internal memory when the number of balls held by the player (game value) changes continuously. Is updated immediately, but when the number-of-balls display 40 displays the number of balls of the player, the number of balls is updated at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds). .
Therefore, even when there are consecutive winnings, the player can easily recognize that the number of balls held has been updated in response to winnings.

This background will be explained.
During the game, the display of the number-of-balls indicator needs to be updated because there is an increase in the number of winning balls due to winning and a subtraction due to firing.
However, if there are consecutive wins and the number indicator on the ball is displayed immediately, the player will know if the number of balls actually updated in response to the win. Difficult to do.
That is, when there is a change in the player's number of balls (game value), the storage of the number of balls in the RAM 233 as an internal memory is immediately updated, and at the same time, the number of balls held in the number-of-balls display 40. The display of the number-of-balls display 40 is updated instantaneously, especially when winning continuously, so that the player can recognize whether the number of balls has been reliably reflected in the number of balls held. There is a problem that it is difficult.

Therefore, in this embodiment, paying attention to how to update and display the number of balls, focusing on the update of the storage in the internal memory and the display update of the number of balls held display 40, a solution was achieved.
Specifically, even if there are consecutive wins and the number of balls (game value) changes continuously, the storage of the number of balls in the internal memory (RAM 233) is immediately updated. The number of balls held in the number display 40 is updated at intervals (time differences) of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds), so that the display content of the number of balls holding display 40 can be sufficiently recognized. , And the player can easily recognize that the number of possessed balls has been updated in response to winning.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not lower the interest of the game.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device capable of enclosing a predetermined number of game balls in a gaming machine main body, launching the enclosed game balls into a gaming area and playing a game, and managing the progress of the gaming machine With
The game control device determines whether the game result is in a predetermined profit state or any other state, and in the case of the predetermined profit state, the player's profit is increased in correspondence with a predetermined number of prize balls. Let
In an enclosed ball type gaming machine that plays a game by circulating the enclosed game ball by collecting the game ball that has passed through the game area and guiding it to the launch position,
The game control device includes:
A game value storage means for storing changes in the player's game value;
A game value display control means for controlling a game value display means for displaying a player's game value, and
The game value display control means includes
If there is a continuous change in the game value of the player, the update of the game value storage in the game value storage means is controlled to be performed immediately,
The gaming machine is controlled so that the gaming value is updated at intervals of a predetermined period when the gaming value display means displays the gaming value of the player.

(2) If the player's number of balls (game value) changes continuously, the number of balls held in the internal memory (RAM 233) is immediately updated, but the number of balls held in the ball number indicator 40 The number is updated at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds). In this case, the time of 0.3 seconds corresponds to half of the time required for launching a game ball to the game area 22 at a rate of 100 shots per minute. The display on the ball number display 40 can be updated, and the recognition of the number of balls held by the player and the launch of the ball can be adjusted well.
That is, since a game ball cannot be launched into the game area 22 at a pace of 100 or more per minute, if the player updates the display of the number-of-balls display 40 at a maximum interval of 0.3 seconds from the launch, However, it is possible to secure a sufficient time for sufficiently recognizing the display content of the ball holding number display 40.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The game value display control means
The gaming machine is characterized in that when the gaming value display means displays the gaming value of the player, the gaming value update interval is set to a time shorter than at least half the continuous firing interval of gaming balls.

(3) The display of the number of winning balls by the winning display LED 355 is controlled at a timing of turning on (lit) for 1 second in the normal mode and then turning off (turned off) for 0.5 seconds, and on for 0.5 seconds in the special mode ( Is controlled) at a timing of turning off (turning off) and then turning off (turning off) for 0.1 seconds.
Therefore, even when winnings are continued in the special mode such as during a big hit, and winning balls are continuously generated, the winning display time by the winning display LED 355 is shorter than that in the normal mode, and the number of winning balls is increased. The display is not delayed, and the player can easily know how many prize balls have been obtained.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
When a winning entry is made, a winning display device that displays the corresponding number of winning balls for a predetermined time is provided.
The game control device includes:
In the normal mode, the number of winning balls corresponding to each winning is displayed on the winning display device for a predetermined time, and when the special mode is entered, the display time control means for shortening the display time of the winning ball number on the winning display device from the normal mode. A gaming machine characterized by having

(4) In the case of winning continuously in a special mode such as during a big hit, the display time of the number of winning balls by the winning display LED 355 is set to the game ball firing interval (0.6 seconds) (100 shots / minute (0.6 1 shot per second) is shortened to 0.5 seconds, so that the display of the number of prize balls by the prize display LED 355 is not delayed, and how many prize balls the player has obtained Can be easily known.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The display time control means is
A gaming machine, wherein a display time of the number of prize balls in the special mode on a winning display device is set to a time shorter than a continuous firing interval of game balls.

(5) Since the winning display LED 355 is integrally formed with the collective display device 35 that collectively performs various displays including special drawings and ordinary drawings, it is easy to control the game control device 54 related to the display of the number of winning balls. In addition, the arrangement space is small.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The winning display device
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured integrally with a collective display device that collectively displays various displays including special drawings and ordinary drawings.

(6) Since the game control device 54 controls the winning display LED 355, the control efficiency is good. Further, a special control device for controlling the winning display LED 355 is unnecessary, control is easy, and the cost is reduced.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
It has a game control device that manages the progress of the gaming machine,
The game control device includes:
A gaming machine comprising winning display control means for controlling a winning display device that displays the number of winning balls for a predetermined time.

Next, various modifications of the first embodiment will be described.
<Modification 1 of Example 1>
In the first embodiment, the polishing start instruction is in the order of the payout control device 230 → the game control device 54 → the effect control device 53 → the polishing control device 59 at the start of polishing of the encapsulated sphere. It may be as follows.
(1) Polishing instruction: An instruction to start polishing may be given in the order of the game control device 54 → the effect control device 53 → the polishing control device 59.
(2) Launch stop instruction: You may instruct the stop of the launch of the game ball in the order of the game control device 54 → the payout control device 230.
If it carries out like said (1) and (2), the burden of the payout control apparatus 230 can be reduced.

<Modification 2 of Example 1>
Unlike the first modification, for example, the following may be performed.
(1) A configuration without an effect control device may be used when starting the polishing of the encapsulated sphere.
That is, a configuration may be used in which a polishing start instruction is given in the order of the payout control device 230 → the game control device 54 → the polishing control device 59. In this way, the burden on the production control device 53 can be reduced.

<Modification 3 of Example 1>
A configuration in which the game control device 54 and the effect control device 53 are not used when the polishing of the encapsulated sphere is started may be employed. This is an instruction to start polishing in the order of the dispensing control device 230A → the polishing control device 59A, and will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a third modification of the first embodiment, in which an instruction is directly issued from the dispensing control device to the polishing control device.
FIG. 80 is a block diagram showing the control system of the pachinko machine in the third modification of the first embodiment. The configuration shown in this figure is different from the first embodiment shown in FIG. The point is to issue an instruction directly to 59A. The other structure is the same as that of FIG. 6, the same member number is attached | subjected and duplication description is abbreviate | omitted.
In FIG. 80, the dispensing control device 230A is configured to directly issue a polishing start instruction to the polishing control device 59A. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is activated and the power supply device 58 starts supplying power, the payout control device 230A (payout board) transmits a polishing start command to the game control device 54 when the power is turned on, and the game control device 54 pays out. When the polishing start command is received from the control device 230A, the polishing start command is transmitted to the effect control device 53. When the production control device 53 receives the polishing start command from the game control device 54, the production control device 53 performs control so that a display of polishing is displayed on the screen of the display device 41 from the reception of the polishing start command to the reception of the polishing stop command.

Also, the payout control device 230A instructs the polishing control device 59A to start polishing the encapsulated sphere at the timing of transmitting a polishing start command to the game control device 54 when the power is turned on. Note that, unlike the first embodiment, the polishing control device 59A has no connection with the effect control device 53.
When the polishing control device 59A receives an instruction to start polishing from the payout control device 230A, the polishing control device 59A starts polishing the encapsulated sphere as in the first embodiment. As a result, the polishing device 56 operates to polish the encapsulated sphere. Then, when a predetermined period has elapsed from the instruction to start polishing, the polishing control device 59A ends the polishing of the encapsulated sphere as in the first embodiment.
At the same time, the payout control device 230A transmits a polishing end command to the game control device 54 at this timing, and when the game control device 54 receives the polishing end command from the payout control device 230A, the finish control device 53 finishes polishing. Send a command. When the production control device 53 receives the polishing end command from the game control device 54, the production control device 53 controls the display device 41 to stop the display during polishing.

In the third modification, the payout control device 230A is configured to directly issue an instruction to start polishing to the polishing control device 59A, and the polishing control device 59A is not connected to the game control device 54, and further, the payout control device. In this configuration, there is no input to 230A. Therefore, the polishing control device 59A has a “sub-substitution” configuration, and in this respect, an effect based on “sub-substitution” is obtained as in the first embodiment.
In addition, since the payout control device 230A directly issues an instruction to the polishing control device 59A, the control burden on the game control device 54 and the effect control device 53 can be reduced.

<Modification 4 of Example 1>
The RTC 60 of the polishing control device 59 may be used so that the polishing device 56 is not operated during a predetermined period during business.
In the first embodiment, when the power of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) is turned on, an instruction to start polishing is given in the order of the payout control device 230 → the game control device 54 → the effect control device 53 → the polishing control device 59. With the configuration, for example, when the game machine is turned off for inspection during business hours and turned on again, an instruction to start polishing is issued to the polishing controller 59.
If it does so, the operating time of a gaming machine will become short and the profit of a game store will also be affected.
Therefore, in the fourth modification, the RTC 60 of the polishing control device 59 is used so that the polishing device 56 is not operated for a predetermined period during business. The predetermined period here is a business style that considers closing and closing of the amusement store, and powering the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) and polishing the encapsulated ball before opening the store. The predetermined period may be, for example, from opening (9 am) to closing (11:00 pm). Therefore, the RTC 60 of the polishing control device 59 is used, and for example, from 9 am to 11 pm is set as a predetermined period during business, and based on the output of the actual time (including the calendar function) by the RTC 60 The polishing controller 59 is controlled so that the polishing apparatus 56 is not operated during a predetermined period (from 9 am to 11 pm) during which the program of the polishing controller 59 is in operation.
Specifically, from 9 am to 11 pm, even if the gaming machine is turned off for inspection during operation, and the power is turned on again, the program of the polishing control device 59 is executed by the RTC 60. The polishing apparatus 56 is not instructed to start polishing while referring to the real-time output of.

In addition, since the business style is such that the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) is normally turned on before the store is opened and the encapsulated sphere is polished, for example, the store is opened so that the polishing of the encapsulated sphere is completed. The power of the gaming machine is turned on 30 minutes before the polishing of the encapsulated sphere by the polishing device 56 is completed.
As described above, according to the fourth modification, it is possible to prevent the polishing apparatus 56 from being operated during a predetermined period during business by simply setting a program using the RTC 60 of the polishing control apparatus 59. Even if the gaming machine is turned off and then turned on again for reasons such as the polishing machine 56 does not operate, the gaming machine does not fall in operation and the efficiency (operating efficiency of the stand) is good.

<Modification 5 of Example 1>
In the first embodiment, the number of held balls and the number of counted balls are periodically transmitted in the order of the payout control device 230 → the game control device 54 → the effect control device 53, and the decoration control or the like by the decorative ball display device 250 is performed. Not limited to this, for example, a display instruction command (for example, an instruction command for decoration control) is directly transmitted from the payout control device (payout board) 230 to the effect control device 53 to the decoration ball number display device 250. Also good.
Specifically, the following command is sent.
(1) Launch start, stop firing, winning (prize ball), no number of balls, number of balls, etc. (2) number of balls A (100 to 500), number of balls B ( (3) Commands related to counting such as counting start, counting stop, etc. In this way, the payout control device 230 changes to the effect control device 53. By directly sending a command, the burden on the game control device 54 can be reduced.
In addition, the payout control device 230 does not send a command to the game control device 54, thereby facilitating the control, and accordingly, the display instruction command to the decorative ball number display device 250 can be made fine, and the decoration control instruction As for commands, as described above, firing start, firing stop, winning (prize ball), no ball holding, ball holding, ball holding A (100 to 500), ball holding B (500) It is also possible to finely control the decorative ball number display device 250 based on information such as the number of balls held, counting start, counting stop, and the like.

<Modification 6 of Example 1>
81 to 83 are diagrams showing a sixth modification of the first embodiment, in which there is no input from the switching circuit to the gaming machine (production control device), and the operation display device 7 is provided with production auxiliary information such as character introduction. This is an example of display.
FIG. 81 is a block diagram showing the control system of the pachinko machine in the sixth modification of the first embodiment. The configuration shown in this figure is different from the first embodiment shown in FIG. ) Is connected to the effect control device 53 on the gaming machine side, but is one-way communication and the effect control information is unilaterally transmitted from the effect control device 53 to the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 330. Information is not transmitted from the operation display device 7 to the effect control device 53. Therefore, the touch information of the operation display device 7 (second effect operation unit) is not transmitted from the operation display device 7 to the effect control device 53.

  Therefore, in FIG. 81, the arrow extending from the effect control device 53 to the switching circuit 330 is shown only in one direction (the direction in which the signal flows from the effect control device 53 to the switching circuit 330), and a signal is sent from the switching circuit 330 to the effect control device 53. Does not flow in. Then, the operation display device 7 performs control to display effect auxiliary information such as character introduction sent from the effect control device 53. Further, the switching button 307C (see FIG. 8397) of the operation display device 7 displays / not displays (hides) the production auxiliary information sent from the production control device 53 in the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7. It is configured to switch only that.

FIG. 82A is a diagram showing a detailed configuration of the switching circuit 330 in the sixth modification.
82A, in the case of the modification 6, the switching circuit 330 includes the input / output interface 331, the determination circuit 332, and the display switching circuit 333, but is not provided with the touch information switching circuit. Different. In FIG. 82 (a), the description is complicated, and the flow of data, information, and signals is described with the second card unit connection terminal board 52B omitted.
Further, the point that the priority signal is not output from the effect control device 53 to the switching circuit 330 is different from that of the first embodiment.

  In Modification 6, since the touch information switching circuit is not provided, the connection route of the operation display device 7 is set to the card unit 15 in order to output touch information according to the operation status of various buttons of the touch panel method of the operation display device 7. Alternatively, it is not configured to switch to any transmission / reception route of the gaming machine. Therefore, even if various buttons of the touch panel method of the operation display device 7 are operated, the connection route of the operation display device 7 remains the card unit 15. Therefore, touch information corresponding to the operation status of various buttons is not output to the effect control device 53, and the touch information is output only to the card unit 15.

Next, the operation of the switching circuit 330 in Modification 6 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.
Normally (initial state) is a route (card unit route) for connecting the operation display device 7 to the card unit 15, and information from the card unit 15 is displayed on the operation display device 7.
In this state, when the player touches various buttons (for example, the ball lending button 303, the return button 304, and the storage / replay button 305) except the switching button 307C, the touch information is displayed. The data is output to the card unit 15 via the switching circuit 330, and the card unit 15 performs control according to the touch information. In this way, processing such as ball rental, storage, settlement, replay, and return of game cards is performed under the management and control of the card unit 15, and ball rental, storage, settlement, replay, and game cards are performed. The information necessary for returning the message is displayed on the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7.

Next, even if the game progresses and a special effect is produced during the production or the like, the priority signal is not output from the production control device 53 in Modification 6. Therefore, even in the case of special effects, the connection route of the operation display device 7 remains the card unit route, and there is no switching to the gaming machine route. Therefore, information from the card unit 15 is continuously displayed on the operation display device 7.
Next, when the player touches the switching button 307C of the operation display device 7, the switching circuit 330 switches the connection route of the operation display device 7 from the card unit route to the gaming machine route, and displays information from the effect control device 53. Changes to. For example, when the player wants to obtain information on characters appearing while the game is in progress, touching the switch button 307C causes the screen of the message / operation area unit 306 to be displayed on a screen for displaying information from the effect control device 53. The information regarding the characters appearing during the game is displayed.

After that, when the connection route of the operation display device 7 is the gaming machine route, when the player touches the switching button 307C, the switching circuit 330 switches the connection route of the operation display device 7 from the gaming machine route to the card unit route, The screen changes to a screen for displaying information from the card unit 15.
Next, when the player touches the switching button 307C, the switching route of the operation display device 7 is switched from the card unit route to the gaming machine route by the switching circuit 330, and the screen changes to a screen for displaying information from the effect control device 53. FIG. 82 (b) shows the operation so far.

In this way, the switching circuit 330 switches between display data from the gaming machine and display data from the card unit 15, and displays any display data on the operation display device 7. When the player touches various buttons (for example, the ball lending button 303, the return button 304, and the storage / replay button 305) except the switching button 307C, the touch information is displayed on the switching circuit. The data is output only to the card unit 15 via 330, and the card unit 15 performs control according to the touch information.
When the player touches the switching button 307C, the connection route of the operation display device 7 is switched to the gaming machine route or the card unit route by the switching circuit 330, and any display data is displayed on the operation display device 7.

Next, FIG. 83 shows an operation example when a character is introduced by the operation display device 7 of the sixth modification.
In FIG. 83, the scene M1 shows the operation of the operation display device 7 at the normal time. That is, in the scene M1, as the normal route, the connection route of the operation display device 7 is the card unit route as in the case of the scene K1 described above, and information from the card unit 15 is displayed on the operation display device 7. Has been. Specifically, the operation display device 7 includes a ball lending rate display 301, a remaining amount display 302, a ball lending button 303, a return button 304, a storage / replay button 305, and a message / operation area unit 306. Is shown.
Further, the operation display device 7 is provided with a switching button 307C, and when the player touches the switching button 307C, the connection route of the operation display device 7 can be changed from the card unit route to the gaming machine route (the reverse thereof). Change to route is also possible).

In particular, in Modification 6, the character introduction display data is output from the effect control device 53 to the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 330 in conjunction with the effect of the gaming machine, and the operation display device 7 is operated by operating the switch button 307C. The character introduction screen is displayed on the screen.
That is, in the sixth modification, character introduction display data is output from the effect control device 53 to the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 330 in conjunction with the effect of the gaming machine so that the character introduction screen can be displayed at any time. It is the structure to keep. As a result, if only the switching button 307C is operated on the operation display device 7, the character introduction screen is displayed on the operation display device 7.

Specifically, in conjunction with the production of a special game (specifically, a special game of decoration) performed on the display device 41, the switch button 307C is touched when the production screen in which a character appears in the special game is displayed. Then, the operation display device 7 is switched to a scene M2 where the characters appearing in the special game are introduced.
The scene M2 introduces characters appearing in the game of the display device 41 based on the presentation assist information from the presentation control device 53 (game machine), and introduces the characters to the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7. The explanation to be displayed. For example, the characters are introduced by the display of “character introduction 1”, “name: tallow”, “favorite food: cake”, and “special skill: bow”.
When the switch button 307C is operated in this state, the switch button 307C is configured to switch only display / non-display (non-display) of the production assistance information on the operation display device 7, so that the scene M2 returns to the scene M1 again. To do.

Next, in the case of the scene M2, without operating the switching button 307C, when a predetermined time elapses, the process moves to the scene M3, and another character is introduced in the scene M3. Here, the character is introduced to the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 by displaying, for example, “Character introduction 2”, “Name: Giraud”, “Favorite food: Meat”, “Excellent skill: Punch”. Is done.
Next, when a predetermined time elapses, the process moves to the scene M4, and another character is introduced in the scene M4. Here, in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7, for example, the characters are introduced by displaying “character introduction 3”, “name: dragon”, “favorite: whiskey”, “special skill: flame”. Is done.
Further, when the switching button 307C is operated from the state of the scenes M3 and M4, the switching button 307C is configured to switch only to display / not display (non-display) the production assistance information on the operation display device 7, so that the scene M3, It will return to the scene M1 again from M4.

In addition, when switching to the scenes M2 to M4 where the character is introduced, the entire screen may be used for the introduction of the character. However, since the display of the ball rental relationship may be necessary during the game, the introduction of the character. Even if the scenes are switched to the scenes M2 to M4, the ball lending-related display may be left on a part of the screen.
Further, when there is no need for ball rental such as during big hits, the display of ball rental relationship may be deleted.

Modification 6 has the following effects.
(1) Conveniently, the player can see explanations for introducing characters appearing in the game game only by a simple operation of touching the switch button 307C in conjunction with the effect of the gaming machine.
In particular, the appearance character is introduced by touching the switching button 307C in conjunction with the production of the special figure game, so that the production becomes easier to understand and the entertainment of the game is enhanced.
Further, a player who needs to introduce a character can obtain necessary information and enjoy an effect by operating the switching button 307C.
Those who know well about the characters appearing on the display device 41 of the gaming machine are good, but those who do not know do not know what is. In other words, the contents of the game game may not be known. Therefore, it is conceivable to introduce characters appearing on the display device 41 itself, but this may interfere with normal performance. On the other hand, in the modified example 6, since the operation display device 7 installed separately from the display device 41 is performed by touching the switching button 307C to introduce the character to appear, it is easy to see and convenient. This does not interfere with the production on the display device 41.

(2) The control of the operation display device 7 is mainly managed by the card unit 15, but when the switching circuit 330 switches the connection route of the operation display device 7 from the card unit 15 to the gaming machine side, Since the presentation assist information related to the introduction of the character controlled by the control device 53) is displayed on the operation display device 7, the control of the operation display device 7 is controlled as compared with the case where all display control including the information related to ball rental is performed on the gaming machine. There is an effect that the control burden of the gaming machine can be reduced.
(3) Further, while continuing the presentation of the game on the display device 41 that is controlled by the gaming machine, the explanation regarding the introduction of the character is displayed by the operation display device 7 which is a device different from the display device 41. There is no inconvenience that the display of the game progress effect is obstructed or the display space is reduced, and it is possible to achieve both the game progress effect and the introduction of the character, which is very convenient.

(4) Further, in the sixth modification, the configuration is different from that of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 6 and the switching circuit 330 is connected to the effect control device 53 on the gaming machine side. Although the presentation auxiliary information is unilaterally transmitted from the operation display device 7 to the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 330, the information is not transmitted from the operation display device 7 to the production control device 53. Since the touch information of the operation display device 7 is not transmitted to 53, there is an advantage that the control of the effect control device 53 is simpler and easier than the first embodiment.
(5) In addition, since the switching button 307C is configured to switch only display / non-display (non-display) of the production assistance information on the operation display device 7, the control is also simplified.
(6) A player who does not need to introduce a character can concentrate on the effect on the display device 41 because he / she does not have to operate the switching button 307C. That is, the switch button 307C may be left in a state where the production assistance information is not displayed.
(7) Compared with the case where two display devices are installed on the game board surface of the pachinko machine 1, the operation display device 7 is originally used for ball rental, payment, etc. Since the second display device is arranged on the lower panel 6 outside the game board, the cost is reduced and the control efficiency is good.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The second display device is composed of a liquid crystal display with a touch panel that can be operated by a player touching with a finger,
The liquid crystal display is provided with a switching button for performing a switching operation so that the content of information from the gaming machine is switched and displayed on the second display device by a player's operation,
When the production assistance information is transmitted to the second display device in conjunction with the production of the gaming machine, the production assistance information is displayed on the second display device when the switching button is operated. Gaming machine.
Here, the operation display device 7 corresponds to a second display device, and is configured by a liquid crystal display with a touch panel that can be operated by a player touching with a finger. The switch button 307C corresponds to a switch button.
Also in the sixth modification, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 may detect that the glass frame 5 is opened in addition to detecting that the front frame 4 is opened.

<Modification 7 of Example 1>
84 to 86 are diagrams showing a seventh modification example of the first embodiment. In the seventh modification example, the switching circuit is eliminated, and the production assistance information such as character introduction is transmitted to the operation display device via the card unit when the model is changed. It is something to keep.
FIG. 84 is a block diagram showing the control system of the pachinko machine in the modified example 7. The modified example 7 shown in this figure is different from the first embodiment shown in FIG. The production assistance information (including other information such as the model description) is transmitted to the operation display device 7 via the card unit 15 when changing the model of the gaming machine.
Therefore, there is no configuration related to the switching circuit, and there is no transmission of touch information of the switching button 307D (second rendering operation unit) (see FIG. 85 (b)) from the operation display device 7 to the rendering control device 53. Transmission of the touch information of the switching button 307D is performed to the card unit 15, and display control information is displayed / not displayed on the operation display device 7 according to the operation of the switching button 307D by the control of the card unit 15 (not displayed). ) Is switched.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 84, since the operation display device 7 does not have a switching circuit, it is directly connected to the second card unit connection terminal plate 52B and connected to the card unit 15 via the second card unit connection terminal plate 52B. It is the structure which transmits / receives information between. Further, since the operation display device 7 does not have a switching circuit, there is no connection with the effect control device 53. The production assistance information such as the character introduction is input in advance to the card unit 15 when the model of the gaming machine is changed, which will be described later with reference to FIG. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment shown in FIG.

Next, FIG. 85A is a diagram showing the connection relationship of the card unit 15.
85A, an image input personal computer 700 is connected to the card unit 15, and the image input personal computer 700 includes a USB memory terminal and a DVD device. Production assistance information such as character introduction is stored in a storage medium such as a USB memory or a DVD, and these storage media are attached to the image input personal computer 700 to be accessible, and the attached storage medium is accessed to access the character. The presentation assistance information such as introduction is read by the image input personal computer 700 and temporarily stored in an internal RAM or the like. When the storage of the presentation assistance information such as the character introduction is completed, the storage medium such as the USB memory or the DVD is removed from the image input personal computer 700.

In addition, as described above, using the image input personal computer 700 to capture and store presentation assistance information such as character introductions from a storage medium such as a USB memory or a DVD into the image input personal computer 700 Performed when changing models.
Further, the presentation assistance information such as character introduction is not limited to being stored in a storage medium such as a USB memory or a DVD, but may be another storage medium such as a CD, a hard disk device, an SSD, and the like. Anything is possible. Further, the image input personal computer 700 may be placed in an environment connected to the Internet, and presentation assist information such as character introduction may be input to the image input personal computer 700 from a remote place through the Internet line and stored.

  Next, the production assistance information such as the character introduction stored in the image input personal computer 700 is transmitted to the card unit 15. This is because the image input personal computer 700 is connected to the card unit 15 when changing the model of the gaming machine. And the card unit 15 reads the production assistance information such as the character introduction stored in the image input personal computer 700. The read presentation assistance information such as the character introduction is stored in the card unit 15 (for example, an internal storage device, particularly a non-volatile flash memory). The card unit 15 is capable of holding the production assistance information such as the stored character introduction even when the power is turned off at the closing of the amusement store or even during a power failure. In FIG. 85 (a), for the sake of convenience, the flow of data when presentation assistance information such as character introduction is stored in the card unit 15 is indicated by arrows of display data.

Since the card unit 15 is connected to the operation display device 7 and the description is complicated here, the second card unit connection terminal plate 52B is not shown. Display data from the card unit 15 (including various data such as ball lending relationship, storage / replay, etc., as well as presentation assistance information such as character introduction) is transmitted to the operation display device 7. In this configuration, touch information of various buttons and switching information based on the operation of the switching button 307D are transmitted to the card unit 15. The switching information is one piece of touch information, but is separately provided as switching information in order to clarify the operation of the switching button 307D.
When the switching button 307D is operated (touched), presentation assist information such as character introduction is transmitted from the card unit 15 to the operation display device 7 and displayed on the operation display device 7.

  On the other hand, the production control device 53 is connected to the display device 41, and the display data is output from the production control device 53 to the display device 41. The display device 41 is based on the display data and displays a special figure (decoration special figure) game. Display the production. Therefore, in the modification 7, the production control device 53 is not connected to the operation display device 7, and there is no switching circuit. Therefore, all the production assistance information such as character introduction is transmitted to the operation display device 7 via the card unit 15.

Next, FIG. 85B is a diagram showing a display example of the operation display device 7 in the modified example 7.
In the scene N5 shown in FIG. 85 (b), the operation display device 7 is connected to the card unit route (for convenience of explanation, the second card unit connection terminal plate 52B is omitted), and information from the card unit 15 is displayed on the operation display. It is displayed on the device 7. Specifically, the operation display device 7 includes a ball lending rate display 301, a remaining amount display 302, a ball lending button 303, a return button 304, a storage / replay button 305, a message / operation area unit 306, and a switching button. A state in which 307D is arranged is shown.

Then, when the player touches the switching button 307D, presentation assist information such as character introduction is transmitted from the card unit 15 to the operation display device 7 and displayed on the operation display device 7.
In the scene N5 of FIG. 85 (b), when the player touches the switching button 307D, the model name of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) and the game description are displayed in the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7. Yes. For example, “CRXXXXX” is displayed as the model name, and “High probability after big hit, special figure 100 rotation” is displayed as the game description.
Thereby, the player can receive the model name and the game description only by a simple operation of touching the switching button 307D, which is convenient.
In this state, when the switching button 307D is touched again, the switching button 307D is configured to switch only display / non-display (non-display) of the production assistance information on the operation display device 7, and therefore, the scene N1 (scene N1 ( The display returns to the normal display as described below.
In addition, when switching to the scene name N5 where the model name and game description are performed, the entire screen may be used for introduction of the model name and game description. Even when the screen is switched to the scene N5 where the model name or the game description is performed, a configuration in which a ball lending-related display is left on a part of the screen may be used.
Further, when there is no need for ball rental such as during big hits, the display of ball rental relationship may be deleted.

Next, FIG. 86 shows an operation example in the case where the character is introduced by the operation display device 7 of the modified example 7.
In FIG. 86, the scene N1 shows the operation of the operation display device 7 at the normal time. That is, in the scene N1, the operation display device 7 is a route connected to the card unit route, and information from the card unit 15 is displayed on the operation display device 7.
Note that unlike the sixth modification, the connection route of the operation display device 7 is not switched to the card unit route or the gaming machine route, and information from the card unit 15 is always displayed on the operation display device 7. Therefore, the various buttons arranged on the operation display device 7 are the same as those in the scene N5 shown in FIG.

In the scene N1, as an example of the normal time, the remaining amount display unit 302 displays the remaining amount as “10000 yen”, so that the player knows that the balance of the gaming card is “10000 yen”. . In addition, a message “I welcome you” is displayed in the message / operation area 306.
Furthermore, information from the card unit 15 is displayed on the operation display device 7 as normal information, for example, ball rental, storage, count ball number, etc. (however, omitted on the screen N1).
Further, the operation display device 7 is provided with a switching button 307D. When the player touches the switching button 307D, presentation assist information such as character introduction is transmitted from the card unit 15 to the operation display device 7, and the operation display device. 7 is displayed.

Next, a case where the player touches the switching button 307D will be described. In this case, presentation assistance information for introducing characters appearing in the game on the display device 41 is transmitted from the card unit 15 to the operation display device 7 and operated. It is displayed on the display device 7 and switches to the scene N2.
The scene N2 introduces characters appearing in the game of the display device 41 based on information from the card unit 15, and a description for introducing the characters is displayed in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7. . For example, the characters are introduced by the display of “character introduction 1”, “name: tallow”, “favorite food: cake”, and “special skill: bow”.

Next, when a predetermined time elapses, the process moves to the scene N3, and another character is introduced in the scene N3. Here, the character is introduced to the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 by displaying, for example, “Character introduction 2”, “Name: Giraud”, “Favorite food: Meat”, “Excellent skill: Punch”. Is done.
Next, when a predetermined time elapses, the process moves to a scene N4, and another character is introduced in the scene N4. Here, in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7, for example, the characters are introduced by displaying “character introduction 3”, “name: dragon”, “favorite: whiskey”, “special skill: flame”. Is done.
In this way, the player can see explanations for introducing characters appearing in the game game by a simple operation of touching the switching button 307D, which is convenient.

Modification 7 has the following effects.
(1) Although it cannot be linked to the effects of the gaming machine, it is convenient because the player can see explanations introducing characters appearing in the gaming game only by a simple operation of touching the switching button 307D. . In particular, when the player likes it, by touching the switching button 307D, an explanation for introducing the character can be easily seen, which is convenient for the player.
In addition, for the model name and game description, the player can see the description only by a simple operation of touching the switching button 307D, which is convenient.

(2) The control of the operation display device 7 is managed by the card unit 15, and production assistance information such as character introduction is transmitted from the card unit 15 to the operation display device 7. Remarkably reduced.
In other words, in modification 6, the production assistance information such as the character introduction is transmitted from the production control device 53 to the operation display device 7, and the switching circuit 330 for switching the connection route of the operation display device 7 is also provided. On the other hand, in the modified example 7, the switching circuit is eliminated, and the production assistance information such as the character introduction is transmitted from the card unit 15 only to the operation display device 7, so that the control load of the production control device 53 is reduced (program of the program). This also reduces the production / capacity, etc.) and eliminates the need for a switching circuit and its connection wiring, thereby reducing the cost accordingly.

(3) Since the production assistance information such as character introduction is input to the card unit 15 in advance when changing the model of the gaming machine, it is not necessary to previously store the production assistance information in the production control device 53. It also leads to cost reduction.
(4) Further, while the presentation of the game is continued on the display device 41 controlled by the gaming machine side, the explanation regarding the introduction of the character is displayed by the operation display device 7 which is a device different from the display device 41. There is no inconvenience that the display of the game progress effect is obstructed or the display space is reduced, and it is possible to achieve both the game progress effect and the introduction of the character, which is very convenient.

(5) Modification 7 is different from Embodiment 1 shown in FIG. 6 in that there is no switching circuit. Therefore, there is no transmission of information from the operation display device 7 to the effect control device 53, and the operation display device 7 produces the effect. Since there is no transmission of the touch information of the switching button 307D to the control device 53, there is an advantage that the control of the presentation auxiliary information (character introduction) is simple and easy as compared with the first embodiment.
(6) Further, since the switching button 307D is configured to switch only display / non-display (non-display) of the production assistance information on the operation display device 7, the control is also simplified.
(7) Since the player who does not need to introduce the character does not have to operate the switching button 307D, the player can concentrate on the effect on the display device 41. That is, the switch button 307D may be left in a state where the production assistance information is not displayed.
(8) Compared with the case where two display devices are installed on the game board surface of the pachinko machine 1, the operation display device 7 is originally used for ball rental, payment, etc. Since the second display device is arranged on the lower panel 6 outside the game board, the cost is reduced and the control efficiency is good.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The second display device is composed of a liquid crystal display with a touch panel that can be operated by a player touching with a finger,
The liquid crystal display is provided with a switching button for performing a switching operation so that the content of information from the card unit is switched and displayed on the second display device by a player's operation,
Production auxiliary information related to the production of the gaming machine is stored in advance in the card unit from the input device, and when the switching button is operated, production auxiliary information related to the production of the gaming machine is sent from the card unit to the second display device. A game machine that is transmitted to and displayed on a second display device.
Also in the modified example 7, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 may detect that the glass frame 5 is opened in addition to detecting that the front frame 4 is opened.

<Modification 8 of Example 1>
Next, Modification 8 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
In the modified example 8, the switching circuit is eliminated and the control area of the operation display device 701 is divided into a plurality of areas.
FIG. 87A is a diagram showing the connection relationship of the operation display device 701. Since the description is complicated here, the second card unit connection terminal plate 52B is not shown.
In FIG. 87 (a), in the modified example 8, there is no switching circuit, and the display data (various data such as ball lending relationship, storage / replay, etc.) is transmitted from the card unit 15 to the operation display device 701. In 701, a ball lending relationship, storage / replay, etc. are displayed based on the display data. However, the control area of the operation display device 701 is divided into a plurality of areas, and the display of the ball lending relationship, storage / replay, etc. is performed in the card unit control area 701A, which will be described in detail later.

On the other hand, touch information of various buttons is transmitted from the operation display device 701 to the card unit 15, and the card unit 15 receives necessary control based on the touch information (for example, touch information of the ball lending button 303 is received. Control necessary for operation).
Further, touch information of the display change button 702 is transmitted from the operation display device 701 to the card unit 15, and the screen is switched to, for example, a screen when using the storage (details will be described later).
From the effect control device 53, display data (information from the gaming machine such as effect auxiliary information such as model name, game description, character introduction, etc.) is transmitted to the operation display device 701. The operation display device 701 is based on the display data. Displays information from gaming machines. However, the control area of the operation display device 701 is divided into a plurality of areas, and information display from the gaming machine is performed in the gaming machine control area 701B, which will be described in detail later. Touch information is transmitted from the operation display device 701 to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 performs necessary control based on the touch information (details will be described later).
Further, the effect control device 53 is connected to the display device 41, and display data is output from the effect control device 53 to the display device 41. The display device 41 is based on the display data and displays a special figure (decoration special figure) game. Display the production.

Next, FIG. 87 (b) is a diagram showing a control area of the operation display device 701 in Modification 8.
As shown in FIG. 87 (b), the screen of the operation display device 701 is divided into two control areas, which are a card unit control area 701A and a gaming machine control area 701B. This is because the operation display device 701 is composed of a liquid crystal display with a touch panel that can be operated by a player touching with a finger, so that the screen area of the liquid crystal display can be divided into two areas and controlled. It is a thing.
The screen of the operation display device 701 is divided into two control areas, which are based on the display data sending source, and the card unit control area 701A is based on the display data from the card unit 15. Necessary information is displayed on the screen, and the gaming machine control area 701B displays necessary information on the screen based on display data from the gaming machine (in this case, the production control device 53).
Here, the card unit control area 701A is controlled by the card unit 15, and the gaming machine control area 701B is controlled by the gaming machine (in this case, the effect control device 53). Therefore, the control mode is different from the first embodiment and the sixth and seventh modifications, in which the entire operation display device 701 is controlled under the management of the card unit 15.

First, the card unit control area 701A is located in the upper part of the screen of the operation display device 701, and the screen configuration is performed based on the display data from the card unit 15, and the ball rental rate display 301, the remaining amount display 302, A ball lending button 303, a return button 304, and a display change button 702 are arranged.
Note that the message / operation area 306 is not provided. Except for the display change button 702, the same parts as those in the first embodiment are given the same numbers.

The display change button 702 switches the display of the screen when, for example, using the stored ball, and the entire card unit control area 701A becomes a screen for inputting the member's personal identification number in order to use the stored ball. The remaining number of stored balls is displayed, or a screen for displaying a stored / replay button is displayed (these screens correspond to the screen of the message / operation area unit of the first embodiment).
The gaming machine control area 701B displays effect auxiliary information such as character introduction based on display data from the effect control device 53, and has a message / operation area 306 formed therein. In the scene N6 shown in FIG. 87 (b), the model name and the game description are displayed as an example of the production assistance information.
Specifically, in the gaming machine control area 701B of the operation display device 701, for example, “CROOXX” is displayed as the model name, and “High probability after big hit, special figure 100 rotation” is displayed as the game description. .

Next, when a predetermined time elapses, the display moves to another scene and introduces the character in the other scene.
In Modification 8, the screen switching button for switching the screen is not provided in the gaming machine control area 701B. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the screen switching button is provided in the gaming machine control area 701B, and the player When the switch button is touched, the screen may be switched to a screen for displaying other presentation assistance information. For example, in the scene N6, the screen displays the model name and the game description. When the screen switching button is touched, the screen is switched to a screen for introducing characters, and thereafter, every time the screen switching button is touched, another character is successively displayed. You may make it the structure which switches to the screen which introduces.
Further, a menu button may be provided in the gaming machine control area 701B so that the player can select desired information from the production assistance information by touching the menu button.
Further, as in the first embodiment, various buttons related to the performance (for example, an item selection button and a music selection button at the time of big hit) are displayed in the gaming machine control area 701B in conjunction with the performance of the gaming machine, and these buttons are displayed. The player may be operated. The touch information operated by these players is transmitted from the operation display device 701 to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 can control the corresponding effect.

Modification 8 has the following effects.
In addition, since the effect of the part which a structure is common in Example 1, and the modification 6 and 7 has already mentioned above, the effect peculiar to the modification 8 is demonstrated below.
(1) The card unit control area 701A is controlled by the card unit 15, and the gaming machine control area 701B is configured to be controlled by a gaming machine (in this case, the production control device 53). Since the switch is divided into separate bodies, the switching circuit is unnecessary and the cost can be reduced. In particular, since the gaming machine control area 701B is directly controlled by the gaming machine, the display processing in the gaming machine control area 701B is fast. Become.
Further, the control burden on the card unit 15 is reduced by the amount corresponding to the gaming machine control area 701B.

(2) Display of the ball lending relationship may be necessary during the game. In the modified example 8, the character lending relationship is displayed in the card unit control area 701A while introducing the characters in the gaming machine control area 701B. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate ball lending-related operations without switching screens.
That is, there is no need to touch the switch button 307 and switch the screen to a ball rental display as in the first embodiment, which is convenient and not troublesome for the player.
(3) In the gaming machine control area 701B, the production assistance information can always be displayed, so that the player has more opportunities to touch the production assistance information than in the first embodiment and the modified examples 6 and 7, and the game is excited. Can do.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The second display device is composed of a liquid crystal display with a touch panel that can be operated by a player touching with a finger,
The screen of the liquid crystal display is divided into a plurality of regions,
One area is controlled by the card unit and displays information from the card unit,
A gaming machine characterized in that the other area is controlled by a gaming machine and displays information from the gaming machine.

In the modified example 8, with respect to the operation display device 701, the card unit control area 701A is controlled by the card unit 15 and the gaming machine control area 701B is controlled by the gaming machine, but this is not restrictive. For example, even if the screen of the operation display device is divided into a plurality as in Modification 8, the entire operation display device may be controlled under the management of the card unit. If it does in this way, the control burden on the game machine side will decrease, securing the effect of modification 8.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The second display device is composed of a liquid crystal display with a touch panel that can be operated by a player touching with a finger,
The screen of the liquid crystal display is divided into a plurality of regions,
The information from the card unit is displayed in one area, and the information from the gaming machine is displayed in the other area.
A gaming machine characterized in that the second display device as a whole is controlled by a card unit.

<Modification 9 of Example 1>
FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a ninth modification of the first embodiment, and the ninth modification is an example in which a game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) for monitoring the removal of the main board is arranged.
FIG. 88 is a block diagram showing a control system of the pachinko machine 1 in the modified example 9 (there is no overall diagram of the gaming machine, but will be explained with the number of the pachinko machine 1 for convenience of explanation). The main difference between the modification 9 and the first embodiment shown in FIG. 6 is that a game control device monitoring switch (a night monitoring switch (shown as a game control device monitoring SW (night monitoring SW) 127 in FIG. 88)) is newly added. The payout control device 230B is configured to perform removal of the game control device 54 based on a signal from the game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring SW) 127 and perform necessary processing.
Other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment shown in FIG.

In FIG. 88, a game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 127 is connected to the payout control device 230B. The game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 127 is a sensor that detects that the main board (game control device 54) has been removed, and information on whether or not removal of the main board (game control device 54) has been detected ( The game control device monitoring information) is held even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 127 stores the game control device monitoring information related to the removal of the main board (game control device 54) stored at the time of power-off for a predetermined period after the supply of main power is started. Output to the outside (for example, the payout control device 230B).
Specifically, if the main board (game control device 54) is removed from the pachinko machine 1 at night when the game hall is closed, information indicating the removal of the main board (game control device 54) is displayed. Holds it at night. Then, when the pachinko machine 1 is activated the next morning, information (game control device monitoring information) indicating whether or not removal of the main board (game control device 54) is detected at night is a game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring). The detection signal from the switch 127 is read by the payout control device 230B and is taken into the payout control device 230B. Therefore, the game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 127 is also named “night monitoring switch”.
Here, the game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 127 constitutes a main board monitoring means.

The payout control device 230B indicates whether or not the removal of the main board (game control device 54) is detected by the game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 127 that monitors the removal of the main board (game control device 54). When information (game control device monitoring information) is taken in, this information can be transmitted to the card unit 15.
The game controller monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 127 is supplied with main power from the payout control device 230B from the start of main power supply to the payout control device 230B, and back-up power is supplied when the main power is shut off. It has become. As the backup power source, for example, as in the RAM 233 described above, backup power source means (not shown, for example, comprising a large-capacitance capacitor) that supplies power even during a power failure is used, and the pachinko machine 1 is turned off at night. The backup power supply means continues to supply necessary power even in the case of power failure (or during power failure).

In the above configuration, in the modified example 9, information (game control device monitoring information) indicating whether or not removal of the main board (game control device 54) is detected at night is detected from the game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 127. By reading the signal with the payout control device 230B, the signal is taken into the payout control device 230B and stored in the RAM 233. Next, the payout control device 230B transmits a command related to the game control device monitoring information to the card unit 15. The command related to the game control device monitoring information means that the game control device monitoring information is judged and the main board (game control device 54) is removed (for example, the main board (game control device 54) is removed at night). If there is, there is a possibility of fraud (that is, it is determined to be abnormal) and an error notification indicating that the main board (game control device 54) has been removed at night is given to the card unit 15, or a hall This is a command such as issuing a command to output error information to the computer 86 (and it may be possible not to lend the ball). Also, the game control device monitoring information is determined, and the main board (game control device 54). ) Is not removed, it is a command for determining that there is no possibility of fraud and issuing a command to the effect that there is no problem even if lending a ball to the card unit 15.
For the error notification in the card unit 15, for example, the blue LED of the card unit error notification LED 203 (see FIG. 1) disposed in the card unit 15 is blinked, and thereby the main board (game control device 54) in the card unit 15. ) Is notified that there is evidence that it has been removed or that there is a possibility of fraud.
When the store clerk sees that the blue LED of the card unit error notification LED 203 is blinking, there is evidence that the main board (game control device 54) has been removed at night, and there is a possibility of fraud. Necessary measures such as checking the pachinko machine 1 can be taken.
In addition to the blinking of the blue LED, for example, a display indicating that the main board (game control device 54) has been removed is displayed on the operation display device 7, or error information is output from the card unit 15 to the hall computer 86. Or, you may not rent a ball.

  In addition, when there is evidence that the main board (game control device 54) has been removed (for example, the main board (game control device 54) has been removed at night), the card unit 15 provides an error notification by using an LED or the like. An error may be notified by voice or the like. Also in the pachinko machine 1, the payout control device 230B may notify the error by blinking the error display LED 67, the ball number indicator 40, the LED built in the counting switch 311 and the LED built in the break switch 312. It is also possible to notify the voice or the like.

According to the modification 9, there are the following effects.
(1) A game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 127 for detecting the removal of the main board (game control device 54) is provided, and the game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 127 is the main board (game control device 54). The game control device is configured to retain the information that detected the removal of the main board even when the main power supply is cut off, and whether or not the main board (game control device 54) is removed at night when the pachinko machine 1 is activated. Since the monitoring information (detection signal) is output to the outside, if the detection signal of the game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 127 is monitored, it is efficient to remove the main board (game control device 54) that may be fraudulent. It can be monitored well.
Further, if the detection signal of the game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 127 is determined by the payout control device 230B, the payout control device 230B can efficiently monitor the removal of the main board (game control device 54). .
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
It is possible to detect that the removal of the game control device is monitored even when the main power supply is cut off, and a main board monitoring means is provided for holding information detecting the removal of the game control device even when the main power supply is cut off,
The main board monitoring means includes
A game machine that outputs game control device monitoring information related to removal of a game control device stored when the main power supply is turned off after supply of main power is started.

(2) A game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 127 for detecting the removal of the main board (game control device 54) is provided, and the game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 127 is the main board (game control device 54). A game that detects whether or not the main board (game control device 54) has been removed at night when the pachinko machine 1 is activated. Since the control device monitoring information is read by the payout control device 230B and it is monitored whether or not the main board (game control device 54) has been removed, removal of the main board (game control device 54) that may be illegal is removed. The payout control device 230B can monitor efficiently.
In addition, if error information based on the determination of the game control device monitoring information is output from the payout control device 230B to the outside (for example, the card unit 15), an appropriate check such as an inspection that the store clerk who noticed the error information has dealt with illegally. Can take a good response.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Separated from the game control device, a payout control device for controlling the payout of the ball is arranged,
It is possible to detect that the removal of the game control device is monitored even when the main power supply is cut off, and a main board monitoring means is provided for holding information detecting the removal of the game control device even when the main power supply is cut off,
The main board monitoring means includes
After the main power supply is started, the game control device monitoring information relating to the removal of the game control device stored at the time of main power shut-off is output to the payout control device,
The payout control device monitors the removal of the game control device based on the game control device monitoring information.

(3) Since the payout control device 230B is provided separately from the game control device 54 and the game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 127 is managed by the payout control device 230B, the game control device 54 is illegally modified and is normal. Even if it does not function properly, the payout control device 230B can reliably monitor the removal of the main board (game control device 54). For example, the gaming control device 54 can be illegally removed and an illegally modified main board can be attached.
(4) Although the game control device monitoring switch (nighttime monitoring switch) 127 is arranged, the payout control device 230B is provided separately from the game control device 54, so that control relating to game progress and monitoring of the number of encapsulated balls is performed. Controls such as addition / subtraction processing of the number of balls and counting processing of the number of balls can be divided, and the program is simpler than that of the first embodiment.
In addition, the processing load on the CPUs 231 and 111 of the payout control device 230B and the game control device 54 can be reduced.

(5) When the pachinko machine 1 is activated, the payout control device 230B reads the game control device monitoring information, which is detected whether the main board (game control device 54) is removed at night, by the payout control device 230B. It is determined whether or not the board (game control device 54) has been removed. If it is determined that the main board (game control device 54) may be fraudulent, the game is transferred from the payout control device 230B to the card unit 15. Since the error information based on the determination of the control device monitoring information is output, the clerk who notices the error notification is illegally notified by an error notification (for example, flashing of the blue LED of the card unit error notification LED 203) in the card unit 15. Appropriate responses such as inspections handled can be taken.
Therefore, security against fraud can be increased.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Separated from the game control device, a payout control device for controlling the payout of the ball is arranged,
It is possible to detect that the removal of the game control device is monitored even when the main power supply is cut off, and a main board monitoring means is provided for holding information detecting the removal of the game control device even when the main power supply is cut off,
The main board monitoring means includes
After the main power supply is started, the game control device monitoring information relating to the removal of the game control device stored at the time of main power shut-off is output to the payout control device,
The payout control device monitors the removal of the game control device based on the game control device monitoring information, and outputs error information to the card unit in the case of an abnormality.
Regarding the error notification in the card unit 15, the inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The card unit is
A gaming machine characterized by performing a predetermined error notification when receiving error information regarding removal of a game control device from a payout control device.

Next, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 for detecting the opening of the front frame 4 and the game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 127 for detecting the removal of the main board (game control device 54). The effects of providing a sensor are as follows.
(6) In the modification 9, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 for detecting the opening of the front frame 4 and the game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) for detecting the removal of the main board (game control device 54). ) The two sensors 127 are provided. These two pieces of detection information, that is, whether or not the opening of the front frame 4 is detected at night and whether the main board (game control device 54) is removed at night or not. Since the game control device monitoring information regarding whether or not is read by the payout control device 230B and the abnormality is monitored by the payout control device 230B, the payout control device 230B can efficiently monitor the trace that may be fraudulent. it can.
In particular, in comparison with the first embodiment in which fraud is monitored only by the frame opening information of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126, the game control of the game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 127 in addition to the above frame opening information. By using the device monitoring information together, it becomes possible to monitor a trace of possible fraud with much higher accuracy.

This background will be described.
For example, there is frame opening information by the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 when the main power is turned off, and even if it is the opening of the front frame 4, it may not be illegal. For example, when a store clerk opens the front frame 4 for inspection after closing, it is necessary for inspection and is not illegal. Therefore, the reliability may not be sufficient only by the frame opening information by the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126.
In contrast, if there is information that the main board (game control device 54) has been removed, there is a high possibility that the main board (game control device 54) has been illegally replaced or modified.
Therefore, security is enhanced by capturing both pieces of information.
In the modified example 9, paying attention to the above-mentioned viewpoint, not only the frame opening information from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 but also the game control device monitoring switch for detecting the removal of the main board (game control device 54) ( In addition to the game control device monitoring information from the night monitoring switch) 127, the fraud is monitored, so if there is information that the front frame 4 is opened and the main board (game control device 54) is removed, It is a monitoring result that matches the situation that there is a very high possibility that the main board (game control device 54) has been illegally replaced or modified, and it is possible to monitor traces of possible fraud with much higher accuracy, Security against fraud is improved.
In particular, the store clerk may work with the front frame open after the gaming machine is turned off even when the store is open. If it is performed by the control device of the machine, the work at the time of starting up the power supply becomes very complicated. This is because even when the frame is opened when the power is turned off as a normal work process, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, fraud notification processing or the like may be performed for the opening of the frame.
Therefore, in the detection of only the opening of the front frame, the operation of turning off the power and opening the front frame is performed even in the normal work process, so even if fraud is performed, it is determined that the normal frame is open, It is possible to neglect fraud confirmation (because only the notification of opening the frame).
On the other hand, in the modified example 9, not only the frame opening information but also the game control device monitoring information for detecting the removal of the main board (game control device 54) is added to monitor fraud. Thus, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a game is started and a disadvantage is incurred without noticing that the main board has been illegally exchanged.
In addition, if the store clerk works with the front frame open after the gaming machine is turned off while the store is open, the possibility of fraud is low. By monitoring, the possibility of fraud is low, and by itself, processing such as game start regulation is not performed by the control device of the gaming machine, and the processing load of the control device at power-on can be reduced.
Note that a means (for example, a switch or the like) for restricting (for example, canceling) the process of performing error notification only by opening the front frame 4 may be provided.
While operating at the amusement store, it may be possible to turn off the power of the gaming machine once due to some trouble, open the front frame, and then turn on the power. If a means for regulating (for example, canceling) the processing is provided, the processing burden on the control device when the power is turned on can be further reduced by operating the means so as not to notify the error.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device for managing the progress of the game;
In a gaming machine comprising a power supply circuit for supplying power,
It is possible to detect that the front frame is open even when the main power supply is shut off, and a front frame open detection means for holding information that detects the opening of the front frame even when the main power supply is shut off,
It is possible to detect that the removal of the game control device is monitored even when the main power supply is cut off, and main board monitoring means for holding the information that detected the removal of the game control device even when the main power supply is cut off,
With
The front frame opening detection means includes
After the main power supply is started, the front frame opening information stored when the main power supply is shut off is output to the outside.
The main board monitoring means includes
A gaming machine configured to output game control device monitoring information relating to removal of a game control device stored at the time of power-off after the supply of main power is started.

In the configuration of (6) above, a difference may be made in correspondence between both pieces of information (opening information on the front frame 4 and game control device monitoring information regarding removal of the game control device 54).
Specifically, for a large number of gaming machines in a gaming store, error information is given priority from gaming machines having information that the main board (game controlling apparatus 54) has been removed by the gaming control apparatus monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 127. The error information may be distinguished from the error information. For example, it is as follows when distinguished from normal error information.
First priority error information: main board removal information + front frame 4 opening information Second priority error information: main board removal information Third priority error information: front frame 4 opening information Error notification based on error information Is performed on the display device 41 under the control of the card unit 15 and the effect control device 53, and the inspection is started with priority from the gaming machine of the first priority error information.
If the error information is differentiated in this manner, the inspection can be started from a gaming machine having a higher urgency and a high possibility of fraud, and the fraud can be dealt with quickly and efficiently.

(7) The payout control device 230B includes the frame opening information regarding whether or not the opening of the front frame 4 has been detected at night and the game control device monitoring information regarding whether or not the main board (game control device 54) has been removed at night. And the payout control device 230B monitors the abnormality, and outputs error information to the card unit 15 in the case of an abnormality, and the card unit 15 performs error processing, so that the card unit 15 is separated from the pachinko machine 1. Since error processing is performed in the device, security against fraud can be improved with high reliability.
This background will be explained.
As a result of determining the detection signal of the game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 127, if the main board (game control device 54) may be removed at night, it is highly likely that it has been replaced with an unauthorized board. Then, even if the main board exists, it is an illegal board and the main board cannot be trusted.
Therefore, even if the production control device 53 makes a display such as no error on the display device 41 (or even in a display state where there is no error notification) in response to an instruction from the main board (game control device), there is a possibility that it cannot be trusted. Further, since the main board (game control device) 54 and the payout control device 230B are connected to each other, the error notification output from the illegal main board (game control device) to the payout control device 230B is also stopped. There is a risk of fraud.
Then, the payout control device 230B may not be trusted.
Therefore, in the modified example 9, in view of the untrustworthy state that the main board (game control device 54) and the payout control device 230B are fraudulent, the payout control device 230B issues an interrupt from the main board (game control device) 54. Before permitting, the monitoring switch information is transmitted to the card unit 15, and the card unit 15 performs error processing.
For this reason, since error processing is performed by the device called the card unit 15 that is remote from the pachinko machine 1, security against fraud can be improved with high reliability.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Separated from the game control device, a payout control device for controlling the payout of the ball is arranged,
Each detection information of the front frame opening detection means and the main board monitoring means is input to the payout control device,
The payout control device
An abnormality is monitored based on each detection information of the front frame opening detection means and the main board monitoring means, and error information is output to the card unit in the case of an abnormality,
A gaming machine, wherein the card unit is configured to perform predetermined error processing upon receiving error information.

(8) In the card unit 15, a command relating to frame opening information relating to whether or not the opening of the front frame 4 has been detected at night, and a game control device monitoring relating to whether or not the main board (game control device 54) has been removed at night When a command related to information is received from the payout control device 230B, the contents of the error processing (for example, flashing of the red LED or blue LED of the card unit error notification LED 203) are changed corresponding to each command. The status of the error can be grasped, and fraud can be dealt with efficiently.
(9) In addition to notifying the error as described above, the card unit 15 not only performs error notification by blinking the LED as described above, but does not lend a ball or accepts a checkout or a game card. If the system is configured to stop the function, etc., the gaming machine can be virtually automatically shut down against fraud and to prevent damage to the game store in the event of fraud. Is possible.

(10) When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the payout control device 230B has frame opening information regarding whether or not the opening of the front frame 4 is detected at night, and whether or not the main board (game control device 54) has been removed at night. Is stored in the RAM 233, and based on the frame opening information and the game control device monitoring information, it is determined that the opening of the front frame 4 is detected at night or the main board (game) When it is determined that the control device 54) has been removed, commands related to these are transmitted to the card unit 15, and when the RAM clear switch 182 is pressed, the commands related to these are transmitted to the card unit 15, and then Since the RAM 233 is cleared, for example, even if the RAM clear switch 182 is turned on, the RAM is not cleared and the frame Release information and game control device monitoring information (i.e., monitor switch information) so is held in RAM233 such payout controller 230B, it is possible to avoid a decrease in security against unauthorized.
When the command regarding the frame opening information and the game control device monitoring information (that is, the monitoring switch information) is securely transmitted to the card unit 15 from the payout control device 230B, the RAM 233 and the like are cleared (initialized). Since the frame opening information and the game control device monitoring information (that is, monitoring switch information) stored in (2) are also cleared, it is possible to reliably cope with fraud.
(11) Since the game control device 54 clears the RAM 113 after confirming that the frame opening information and the game control device monitoring information (that is, the monitoring switch information) have been transmitted from the payout control device 230B to the card unit 15. , Security against fraud can be improved.

  In the modified example 9, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 may detect that the glass frame 5 is opened in addition to detecting that the front frame 4 is opened.

<Modification 10 of Example 1>
FIG. 89 shows a tenth modification of the first embodiment, which is a modification of the enclosing ball circulation structure.
<Normal state>
FIG. 89 (a) is a diagram showing the circulation structure of the encapsulated sphere, and particularly shows the state of a normal state (a state in which a game is played by circulating the sphere without using a polishing apparatus; the same applies hereinafter). In the figure, a circle mark represents a sphere, and a plurality of circle marks indicate the movement of the sphere.
In FIG. 89 (a), reference numeral 7021 indicates a circulation path (game circulation path) of the encapsulated sphere, and the collection balls from the board surface (see the game board 20 in FIG. 1) flow into the circulation path 7021. Yes. A switching valve 7022 (path switching means) is disposed in the middle of the circulation flow path 7021. In a normal state, a switching solenoid (not shown) of the switching valve 7022 does not operate, and the enclosed ball does not flow into the polishing device 7023. The circulation channel 7021 further flows down toward the lifting device 7024.
A pumping inlet switch 7025 is arranged at the inlet of the lifting device 7024, and the pumping inlet switch 7025 detects whether or not a ball is present at the inlet of the lifting device 7024. When the presence of a ball is detected by the lifting / lowering entrance switch 7025, the lifting / lowering device 7024 is activated, the ball is lifted by the lifting / lowering screw 7025 and moved upward from below, and the lifted ball is moved to the lifting / lowering outlet switch. It is guided to a ball feeder (not shown) of the launching device via 7026. There is a launching device in the upper left part of the board, and the ball sent by the ball feeding unit is launched toward the game area by the launching device.
The balls launched toward the game area are circulated repeatedly through a path in which they are collected again as out balls (including safe balls) and flow into the circulation flow path 7021.
Note that when the ball stop is detected by the lifting outlet switch 7026, the lifting device 7024 stops its operation.
Further, the control of the switching valve 7022, the polishing device 7023, and the lifting device 7024 is performed by the polishing control device as in the first embodiment, for example. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the payout control device is provided separately from the game control device, the payout control device controls the operation of the switching valve 7022, the polishing device 7023, and the lifting device 7024. Also good.
Furthermore, devices necessary for circulation of the sphere such as a switching valve 7022, a polishing device 7023, a lifting device 7024, a launching device (including a ball feeding portion) (for example, a lifting inlet switch 7025, a lifting outlet switch 7026, etc.) are also included. The power is supplied to the power supply 58.

<Ball polished state>
FIG. 89 (b) shows a state in which the encapsulated sphere is polished (the state in which the sphere is polished through a polishing apparatus to circulate the sphere; the same applies hereinafter).
In FIG. 89 (b), when a predetermined period when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on before the amusement store is opened as in the first embodiment) The switching solenoid (not shown) of 7022 is activated to close the circulation flow path 7021 by the valve body so that the encapsulated sphere flows into the polishing device 7023. Thus, the encapsulated sphere is circulated from the switching valve 7022. It flows into the polishing apparatus 7023 from the path 7021 and is polished by the polishing apparatus 7023. That is, the polishing apparatus 7023 polishes the sphere by a polishing member (for example, a polishing cloth) disposed inside, and from the outlet on the lower side. When the polished sphere comes out of the outlet of the polishing device 7023, it flows again into the circulation flow path 7021 and is lifted from the circulation flow path 7021. Then, when the presence of a ball is detected by the lift inlet switch 7025, the lift device 7024 is activated to lift the ball, and the lifted ball is fired via the lift outlet switch 7026. It is guided to the ball feeding portion of the device, and is launched toward the game area by the launching device.
The balls fired toward the game area are circulated repeatedly through a route that is collected again and flows into the circulation flow path 7021.
In addition, in the structure of this modification 10, ball polishing is performed while operating the lifting device 7024, the launching device (including the ball feeding unit), and the like in addition to the polishing device 7023, and circulating the encapsulated ball.

When the predetermined period ends, the operation of the switching solenoid of the switching valve 7022 stops, and the valve body receives a biasing force such as a spring and is displaced to a position where the circulation flow path 7021 is opened. As a result, the encapsulated sphere is prevented from flowing into the polishing device 7023. Further, upon completion of the predetermined period, equipment necessary for circulation of the balls such as a switching valve 7022, a polishing device 7023, a lifting device 7024, a launching device (including a ball feeding unit) (for example, a feeding inlet switch 7025, a lifting device) The operation of the outlet switch 7026 and the like is also stopped.
After the polishing of the encapsulated sphere, the operation of the switching solenoid of the switching valve 7022 is stopped, and the valve body receives a biasing force such as a spring and is displaced to a position where the circulation channel 7021 is opened (returned to the original position). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the valve body may remain in a position where the circulation channel 7021 is closed even after the polishing of the encapsulated sphere. When the valve body is left as it is, the valve body is returned to the original position (position where the circulation channel 7021 is opened) when the next game machine is turned on (for example, when the store is opened). Further, when the valve body is not returned to the original position, the ball polishing may be performed again next time.

The tenth modification of the first embodiment has the following effects.
(1) It is convenient because it can be easily applied to a type of gaming machine in which a launching device (including a ball feeding unit) is arranged at the top of the gaming machine.
In addition, since the launching device (including the ball feeding unit) is arranged at the upper part of the gaming machine and directly launches the ball toward the board surface, there is no generation of a foul ball, and the calculation process of the enclosed ball compared to the first embodiment Becomes easier. Furthermore, since the ball polishing is performed while the launching device (including the ball feeding unit) is also operated to circulate the encapsulated ball, it is possible to polish all the enclosing balls regardless of the structure of the ball feeding unit.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A launcher that launches game balls from the top of the game board;
A game circulation path through which game balls circulate through the game board inside the gaming machine;
A lifting device for lifting a game ball of a game circulation path located at the lower part of the gaming machine to the upper part of the game board,
A polishing device for polishing a game ball is disposed in the vicinity of the game circulation path,
A gaming machine comprising path switching means for switching between a path through which a game ball passes through a polishing apparatus or a path through which a game ball does not pass through a polishing apparatus.

<Modification 11 of Example 1>
FIG. 90 is a diagram illustrating a modification 11 of the first embodiment, and is an example in which two switching buttons are provided.
In FIG. 90A, the operation display device 7 of Modification 11 has a configuration in which two switch buttons 307A (second effect operation unit) and switch buttons 307B (second effect operation unit) are arranged. On the screen of the operation display device 7, “gaming machine” is displayed in correspondence with the switching button 307 </ b> A. When this button is touched, switching to the gaming machine route is displayed in an easy-to-understand manner. On the other hand, “card” is displayed in correspondence with the switch button 307B, and it is displayed in an easy-to-understand manner that when the button is touched, the card unit route is switched.
When the switch button 307A is touched, the switching circuit 320 is activated, the connection route of the operation display device 7 is switched to the gaming machine route, and information from the gaming machine (production control device 53) is displayed on the operation display device 7. When the switch button 307B is touched, the switching circuit 320 is activated, the connection route of the operation display device 7 is switched to the card unit route, and information from the card unit 15 is displayed on the operation display device 7.
Other configurations are the same as those in FIG. 7, and the same reference numerals are given.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The second display device is composed of a liquid crystal display with a touch panel that can be operated by a player touching with a finger,
A first switching button for performing a switching operation on the liquid crystal display so as to switch and display the content of information from the gaming machine on the second display device by a player's operation;
A second switching button for performing a switching operation so that the content of the information from the card unit is switched and displayed on the second display device by the player's operation;
A gaming machine characterized by the arrangement of
Here, the operation display device 7 corresponds to a second display device, and is configured by a liquid crystal display with a touch panel that can be operated by a player touching with a finger. The switching button 307A corresponds to a first switching button, and the switching button 307B corresponds to a second switching button.

FIG. 90B is a timing chart when the switching circuit 320 is operated based on the operation of the two switching buttons 307A and 307B and the connection route of the operation display device 7 is switched.
In FIG. 90B, the definition of display data and touch information is the same as in FIG.
Normally (in the initial state), a priority signal from the gaming machine is not output, and the operation display device 7 displays information from the card unit 15 as a card unit route.
When the game progresses to a special effect (for example, a battle mode when a reach occurs), a priority signal is output from the effect control device 53 to the switching circuit 320, and the connection route of the operation display device 7 is changed to the gaming machine route by the switching circuit 320. The effect display information based on the information from the effect control device 53 is displayed on the operation display device 7.

In this state, when the player touches the switching button 307B, the switching circuit 320 switches the connection route of the operation display device 7 to the card unit route for a predetermined period a (for example, 5 seconds). Information from 15 is displayed.
Next, when the predetermined period a (for example, 5 seconds) elapses, the switching circuit 320 automatically returns the connection route of the operation display device 7 from the card unit route to the gaming machine route.
After that, when the priority signal becomes inactive, the switching circuit 320 switches the connection route of the operation display device 7 from the gaming machine route to the card unit route, and the operation display device 7 performs display based on the information from the card unit 15 again. .

Next, when the player touches the switching button 307A in the state where the display based on the information from the card unit 15 is being performed on the operation display device 7, the switching circuit 320 causes the connection route of the operation display device 7 to be a gaming machine. The operation display device 7 changes to a screen for displaying information from the effect control device 53. For example, when the player wants to obtain information on characters appearing while the game is in progress, touching the switching button 307A changes the screen on the operation display device 7 to display information from the effect control device 53, and there Information about characters appearing during the game is displayed.
Next, when the player touches the switch button 307B when the connection route of the operation display device 7 is a gaming machine route, the connection route of the operation display device 7 is switched to the card unit route by the switching circuit 320, and the card unit 15 The screen changes to display the information. In this state, when ball lending is desired, the ball lending button 303 is touched to increase the number of balls held in units of 125.

  In this way, the operation display device 7 is configured so that the two switching buttons 307A and 307B are arranged, and “gaming machine” and “card” are displayed on the screen on each button. Compared to the first embodiment, the connection route of the operation display device 7 can be switched more easily and easily.

<Modification 12 of Example 1>
FIG. 91 is a diagram illustrating a twelfth modification of the first embodiment, in which the delay unit is realized by software.
In FIG. 91, in Modification 12, the payout control device 230C is provided with an output port 551, a relay 552, and an input port 553, and the CPU 231 executes a program stored in the ROM 232 (that is, executes software) and pays out. In order to start the main power supply to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the main power supply to the control device 230C, The on control signal for turning on the main power supply to the monitoring switch 126 is output to the relay 552 after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the main power supply.
The main power source of 5V power is applied to the relay 552, and the relay 552 is normally off (while the off control signal is input), but when the on control signal is input from the CPU 231, the relay 552 is turned on. Then, the main power of 5V power is supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126. Actually, a driver or the like for outputting the on control signal is arranged in the peripheral circuit of the CPU 231. However, since it becomes complicated, the CPU 231 is representatively shown including the peripheral circuit.

Main power can be supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 from the payout control device 230C, but as described above, only a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of main power supply to the payout control device 230C. The main power supply to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is started after a delay. The front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 outputs the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is cut off to the outside after the supply of the main power is started.
On the other hand, when the main power is cut off, such as at night in a game store, the backup power (5 VBB) from the power supply 58 is supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 via the payout controller 230C. The frame opening information of the front frame 4 is held. The backup power (5VBB) is not supplied via the relay 552, but is always supplied from the power supply 58 to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 via the payout control device 230C.
The output signal of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 (the frame opening information of the front frame 4: that is, abnormality detection information) is output to the payout control device 230C, and the payout control device 230C outputs the frame opening information of the front frame 4. Is received by the internal input port 553 and output to the CPU 231. The CPU 231 stores the frame opening information of the front frame 4 in the RAM 233 and then transmits the information to the card unit 15.

As described above, the CPU 231 executes a predetermined program, and delays by a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of supply of the main power to the payout control device 230C, and then supplies the main power to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126. The on control signal for starting the supply of the power is output to the relay 552, and thereby the relay 552 is turned on. Therefore, the main power supply 5V supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is also delayed. The start of supply of main power to the open switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is later than the CPU 231 and various ICs on the payout control device 230C. Therefore, the timing at which the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 outputs the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is shut off to the outside is also greater than the start of the supply of the main power to the payout control device 230C. Become slow.
The backup power is always supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126.
Here, the payout control device 230C constitutes a delay means.

Thus, in the twelfth modification of the first embodiment, when the main power supplied from the power supply device 58 is turned on, the main power is immediately supplied to the payout control device 230C, but the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) ) 126 in the course of executing the main process, supply of main power to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 until the start-up preparation period (for example, 5 seconds) of the payout control device 230C elapses. After the start-up preparation period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses, supply of main power to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is started, and the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is started. Outputs the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is cut off to the outside after the supply of the main power supply is started.
Therefore, after the start-up preparation period of the payout control device 230C has elapsed, the frame opening information of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is taken into the payout control device 230C, and the frame opening information cannot be taken in. There is no fear, and the frame opening information can be surely captured.
In particular, in the modified example 12 of the first embodiment, the delay means is realized by software. Therefore, compared with the first embodiment, the number of hardware circuit components is reduced, and the cost can be suppressed.
In the modified example 12 of the first embodiment, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 detects that the front frame 4 has been opened and also detects that the glass frame 5 has been opened. May be.
"Example 2"

Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.
Example 2 is an example in which the polishing period of the encapsulated sphere can be set according to the circumstances of the amusement hall. In the second embodiment, the contents of the firing permission signal editing process of the payout control device 230D (in the second embodiment, the payout control device is not shown but will be described with the number of the payout control device 230D for convenience of explanation). In addition to the difference from the first embodiment, the operation of the polishing apparatus 56 and the content of the display effect of the display device 41 are different from the first embodiment.
First, the contents of the firing permission signal editing process will be described.
FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the launch permission signal editing process of the payout control device 230D in the second embodiment.
When this routine is started, the processes from step H271 to step H285 are the same as those in the first embodiment, and the same step numbers are given. The processing different from the first embodiment is the processing from Step H710 to Step H710.

That is, when the firing permission signal ON data is set in step H284, the firing control circuit 236 is permitted to actuate the firing solenoid 173, and the ball can be fired (launching permitted state). If it will be in this state, it will progress to step H701 next and it will be determined whether the polishing impossible command has been transmitted.
The non-polishing command is a command for informing the game control device 54 from the payout control device 230D that the enclosing ball type polishing is impossible during the game, and corresponds to non-polishing information. The non-polishing command (non-polishing information) is sent from the payout control device 230D to the effect control device 53 via the game control device 54. When the non-polishing command is received by the effect control device 53, the polishing control device 59 In addition to sending a non-polishing command, display is not performed on the display device 41, and other information (for example, a setting screen for polishing as shown in FIG. 93) is displayed. In addition, when the polishing control device 59 receives a non-polishing command, it recognizes that the enclosed sphere type polishing is impossible, and when receiving this non-polishing command, the encapsulating sphere is not polished.
If the polishing impossibility command has not been transmitted in step H701, a polishing impossibility command is prepared in step H702, and main control command setting processing is performed in the subsequent step H703. As a result, the non-polishing command is transmitted from the payout control device 230D to the game control device 54 by serial communication.
Next, in step H704, the polishing impossible command transmission flag is set, and in step H705, the polishing impossible command transmission flag is cleared. This is because a non-polishing command is prepared in step H702, and the non-polishing command is transmitted to the game control device 54 in the main control command setting process in step H703, so the non-polishing command is cleared in order not to repeat the same routine. Is. The process returns after step H705.
On the other hand, if the polishing impossibility command has already been transmitted in step H701, the routine is terminated and the process returns.

Next, when the firing permission signal off data is set in step H285, the firing control circuit 236 prohibits the operation of the firing solenoid 173, and the ball cannot be fired (launching disallowed state). Even if a proper firing operation (touch sensor 174 is turned on and firing volume 171 is operated), firing solenoid 173 does not operate and the ball is not fired. If it will be in this state, it will progress to step H706 next and it will be determined whether the polishable command has been transmitted.
The grindable command is a command for notifying the game control device 54 from the payout control device 230D that the encapsulated ball type can be grinded when the game control device 54 is not in a game-ready state. Equivalent to. The polishable command (polishing possible information) is sent from the payout control device 230D to the effect control device 53 via the game control device 54. When the effect control device 53 receives the polishable command, the polish control device 59 receives the polishable command. In addition to sending a polishable command, the display device 41 is controlled to display that it is being polished when a polishing signal from the polishing control device 59 is received. In addition, when the polishing control device 59 receives a polishable command, the polishing control device 59 recognizes that the enclosed sphere type polishing is possible, receives the polishable command, and only when the set polishing period is satisfied, Polishing will be performed. At this time, the polishing control device 59 transmits a polishing signal to the effect control device 53.
If the polishable command has not been transmitted, a polishable command is prepared in step H707, and main control command setting processing is performed in subsequent step H708. Thereby, a polishable command is transmitted from the payout control device 230D to the game control device 54 by serial communication.
Next, in step H709, the polishable command transmission completion flag is set, and in step H710, the polishable command transmission completion flag is cleared. This is because a non-polishing command is prepared in step H707, and the polishable command is transmitted to the game control device 54 in the main control command setting process in step H708. Therefore, the polishable command is cleared so as not to repeat the same routine. Is. The process returns after step H710.
On the other hand, if the polishable command has been transmitted in step H706, the routine is terminated and the process returns.

According to the launch permission signal editing process described above, during the game (ball launch is possible), a non-polishing command (non-polishing information) is transmitted from the payout control device 230D to the game control device 54, and the game control device 54 performs payout control. An unpolished command (unpolished information) from the device 230D is transmitted to the effect control device 53, an unpolished command (unpolished information) is transmitted to the polishing control device 59 at the effect control device 53, and unpolished at the polishing control device 59. When the command is received, the polishing apparatus 56 is not operated, and the enclosed sphere type polishing is not performed.
On the other hand, when the game is not in progress (cannot be fired), a polishable command (polishing permission information) is transmitted from the payout control device 230D to the game control device 54, and the game control device 54 receives a polishable command (polishing permission) from the payout control device 230D. Information) is transmitted to the production control device 53, the production control device 53 transmits a polishable command (polishing permission information) to the polishing control device 59, and the polishing control device 59 receives the grindable command (polishing permission information). Only when the polishing period is set, the polishing apparatus 56 is controlled to polish the encapsulated sphere for a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes).
That is, if the polishing control device 59 is in a set polishing period (for example, a specified period from the closing of the store to the opening of the next day), and receives a polishable command (polishing permission information). Then, the polishing apparatus 56 is controlled so as to perform polishing only for a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes).
In addition, the production control device 53 controls the display device 41 to display that the polishing is in progress when the polishing signal from the polishing control device 59 is received.

Next, FIG. 93 is a diagram showing an example of setting the polishing period in the display device 41. FIG. The polishing period setting screen on the display device 41 is controlled by the effect control device 53, and the result of the setting operation of the polishing period by the operator (for example, a store clerk) is transmitted from the effect control device 53 to the polishing control device 59, and the polishing control device. In 59, if a polishable command (polishing permission information) is received from the effect control device 53 based on the set polishing period, the polishing apparatus performs polishing for a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes). 56 is controlled.
FIG. 93 (a) is a setting screen for the polishing period on the display device 41, particularly a screen for setting a password. In the example of FIG. 93 (a), the message “Amusement hall setting screen” and “Please set password” are displayed on the screen of the display device 41, and numbers from 0 to 9 are displayed. ing.

Here, the setting of the polishing period is set by, for example, a game hall (for example, a store clerk) using the display device 41 and the effect operation switch 9 when the gaming machine is turned on. Note that the setting may be made by using the number-of-balls display 40 instead of the display device 41.
Next, the operator (clerk) presses four switches arranged on the top, bottom, left, and right of the production operation switch 9 to select, for example, a message “Please set password” on the screen of the display device 41. When the push button type switch at the center of the production operation switch 9 is pressed, a password input screen shown in FIG. 93 (b) appears. For example, when the input of a four-digit password is completed, the production control device 53 receives a password setting. A password is provided so that a player or the like cannot set the polishing period without permission.
Next, when the screen shown in FIG. 93C is displayed, a screen for setting a polishing period is displayed. Here, the polishing period is set in accordance with the situation of the game hall. For example, in the example of FIG. 93 (c), “10:30 pm to 11:30 pm (that is, a specific one hour) is set as the polishing period.
Since the polishing control device 59 is equipped with the RTC 60, the real-time information is obtained from the RTC 60 and the calendar function is performed every day, while “10:30 to 11:30” is set as the polishing period. It is possible to control the polishing of the encapsulated sphere.
The polishing period is a period in which the game hall determines that the encapsulated sphere can be polished during this period, and corresponds to a “set polishing period”. The polishing apparatus 56 is operable during the set polishing period and not during a game, but the polishing is actually performed only for a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes). The predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes) is set to a period in which a ball enclosed in one gaming machine is sufficiently polished so that it is not necessary to polish the ball during the business day of the next day. The predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes) is set in advance by a program of the polishing control device 59.

Next, FIG. 94 shows a timing chart of the operation of polishing control of the encapsulated sphere in the second embodiment.
Normally, at game shops around 10:30 pm (or even before), the business is stopped due to the operation of the game machines, the power of each game machine is shut off and the store is closed, and then the inside of the store and the table are cleaned, cleaned, etc. To prepare for the next business day.
Now, when opening a game store, if the business due to the operation of the pachinko machine 1 is stopped at timing t1 (for example, 10:30 pm), the polishing period (that is, the “set polishing period”) starts from this point. enter.
Next, the payout control device 230D controls the firing control circuit 236 so that the ball cannot be fired. This timing is assumed to be t2. As a result, the operation of the firing solenoid 173 by the launch control circuit 236 is prohibited, and a state where the ball cannot be launched (launch not permitted state) is entered.

Also, at this timing t2, a payable control command (polishing permission information) is transmitted from the payout control device 230D to the game control device 54. When the game control device 54 receives the polishable command (polishing permission information), the command is effect-controlled. Transmit to device 53. When the production control device 53 receives a polishable command (polishing permission information), the command is transmitted to the polishing control device 59, and when the polishing control device 59 receives a polishable command (polishing permission information), a set polishing period is received. Only in this case, the polishing apparatus 56 is controlled so as to polish the encapsulated sphere only for a predetermined period. Therefore, when a predetermined time T0 waits from timing t2 and timing t3 is reached, as shown in FIG. 94, the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 changes the circulation path of the enclosed sphere from the “normal side” to the “polishing side”. By switching, the encapsulated sphere starts to flow into the polishing device 56, and the polishing motor 70 is activated to start polishing of the encapsulated sphere. In addition, a polishing signal is transmitted from the polishing control device 59 to the effect control device 53 when polishing of the encapsulated sphere is started.
On the other hand, when the effect control device 53 receives the polishing signal from the polishing control device 59, the effect control device 53 controls the display device 41 to display that the polishing is in progress. Accordingly, display during polishing on the display device 41 is started from the timing t3.

The polishing control device 59 performs processing necessary for polishing the encapsulated sphere such as driving of the polishing motor 70 and operation of the switching solenoid 79S for a predetermined period T1 + T2, thereby polishing the game sphere.
That is, polishing of the encapsulated sphere is executed until a predetermined time T1 elapses from the timing t3. Meanwhile, the sphere discharged from the upper outlet 75 of the polishing apparatus 56 to the sensor flow path 77 is detected by the polishing outlet switch 76. Since the polishing outlet switch 76 is turned from OFF to ON every time one sphere discharged from the upper outlet 75 to the sensor channel 77 is detected, it is input to the polishing controller 59 in the form of a pulse signal as shown in FIG. Is done.
Next, when the predetermined time T1 elapses from the timing t3 and reaches the timing t4, it is determined that the encapsulated sphere has been sufficiently polished, and the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 changes the circulation path of the encapsulated sphere from the “polishing side”. Switch to “Normal”. As a result, the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 is turned off, and the enclosing ball does not flow into the polishing device 56. During this time, the polishing motor 70 is operating.
In other words, the polishing motor 70 is operating even after the timing t4 has elapsed, so that the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 is switched to the “normal side” from the “polishing side” and thus remains inside the polishing apparatus 56. A period is secured until all balls being polished are discharged.
When all the balls being polished inside the polishing apparatus 56 are discharged, the detection signal of the polishing outlet switch 76 is turned off, and thereafter, the detection signal remains off.
Next, when the predetermined time T2 elapses from timing t4 and reaches timing t5, the polishing motor 70 stops operating (OFF). At a timing t4, a predetermined period T2 has elapsed after the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 is switched from the “polishing side” to the “normal side”, and a predetermined period after the detection signal of the polishing outlet switch 76 is finally turned off. It is the time when T3 has elapsed. In this way, when the predetermined period T3 has elapsed since the detection signal of the polishing outlet switch 76 was last turned off (timing t5), the operation of the polishing motor 70 is stopped so that the ball inside the polishing apparatus 56 is stopped. After confirming that all the balls being polished have been discharged, the polishing motor 70 is stopped, so that no enclosing balls remain in the polishing device 56.

On the other hand, the production control device 53 stops transmitting the polishing signal from the polishing control device 59 at the timing t5 when the polishing motor 70 stops, so that the production control device 53 displays the display device 41 during the polishing. finish. Therefore, the display during polishing on the display device 41 ends at the timing t5.
Thereafter, at timing t6, the “set polishing period” ends. Next, the timing t7 represents the timing at which the payout control device 230D changes from the state where polishing is possible to the state where polishing is not possible. At this time, the payout control device 230D permits the operation of the firing solenoid 173 by the firing control circuit 236, and puts the ball into a state where it can be fired (launching permitted state). At time t7, the payout control device 230D transmits a non-polishing command (non-polishing information) to the game control device 54. When the game control device 54 receives a non-polishing command (non-polishing information), it transmits a non-polishing command (non-polishing information) to the effect control device 53. When the production control device 53 receives a non-polishing command (non-polishing information), it sends a non-polishing command (non-polishing information) to the polishing control device 59.

  As described above, the encapsulated sphere is polished only for a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes) only during the set polishing period when the game is not in progress (cannot be fired). In other words, if the polishing period is a set period (for example, a specified period between the closing of the store and the opening of the next day), and the polishing control device 59 receives a polishable command (polishing permission information). The encapsulated sphere is polished for a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes).

The second embodiment has the following effects.
(1) Since the setting of the polishing period is performed by the production control device 53 and the polishing control device 59 by the operation of the game shop clerk, the game control device 54 (main control board) and the payout control device 230D (payout control board) The burden is reduced and the efficiency is improved.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A polishing apparatus for polishing a sphere;
In a gaming machine comprising a polishing control device for controlling a polishing device,
A configuration in which a signal cannot be input to at least the game control device and the payout control device from equipment necessary for polishing the game ball including the polishing device and the polishing control device,
A gaming machine, wherein the polishing control device controls the polishing device to perform polishing of a sphere within a set polishing period.
The inventive concept of the configuration in which the polishing period is set on the screen of the display device 41 is expressed as follows.
A polishing period setting means for setting a polishing period in which the sphere can be polished is provided,
The polishing control device
A gaming machine characterized in that a polishing apparatus is controlled to polish a ball within a polishing period set by a polishing period setting means.
Here, the production control device 53 and the polishing control device 59 of the second embodiment constitute a polishing period setting means.

(2) Even if the RTC 60 for setting the polishing period is mounted on the polishing control device 59 or information related to polishing of the encapsulated sphere is input, the game control device 54 (main control board) and the payout control device 230D (payout) Since there is no input to the control board), fraud is less likely to occur and security is high.
That is, the polishing control device 59 (including the polishing device 56) inputs information to the game control device 54 (main control board) and the payout control device 230D (payout control board) (for example, signal input, data input, (Input of information such as command input) is not performed at all, and since it is “sub-configured”, fraud is not easily performed and security is high.

(3) Also, since the enclosing ball polishing period can be set in accordance with the circumstances of the amusement hall, the polishing period can be set flexibly in accordance with different business hours for each amusement hall, which is convenient.
This background will be explained.
When an encapsulated ball polishing device is installed in an encapsulated ball game machine, it may be desired that the amusement hall requests polishing of the encapsulated ball before or after the start of business so as not to affect the game. .
In this case, since the business hours of the game hall are different for each region and game hall, it is convenient if the polishing period can be set according to the actual situation of the game hall.
However, in the configuration in which the polishing apparatus is controlled by the main control board or the payout control board, information for setting the mounting of the RTC that counts the real time and the business hours of the game hall (for example, time information from the outside, etc.) There is a security problem. That is, there is a risk of unauthorized use.
Therefore, in the present invention, the countermeasures have been devised, and the problem can be solved by “substituting” the polishing apparatus.

In particular, by “substituting” the polishing control device 59 (including the polishing device 56), the RTC 60 is mounted and information is input to the polishing control device 59 (including the polishing device 56) (for example, signal input and data). (Input of information such as input of command, input of command, etc.), there is no security problem, the period during which the polishing apparatus 56 is operated can be freely set, and the actual situation of the amusement hall can be met. Therefore, for example, when it is desired to polish the encapsulated sphere after the end of business, it is possible to cope even if the business hours differ for each game hall.
Other effects of “substituting” are the same as in the first embodiment.
(4) Since the polishing controller 59 is equipped with the RTC 60, the RTC 60 can obtain real-time information and set the polishing period while demonstrating the calendar function every day. You can specify the date and time.

Next, modifications of the first and second embodiments will be described.
<Modification of Example 1 and Example 2>
As a modification, for example, a configuration in which the encapsulated sphere is constantly circulated through the polishing device (a configuration different from FIG. 4), and the polishing control device 59 is instructed by the game control device 54 or the payout control device 230 (or 230D). Instead of this, the polishing apparatus 56 may be controlled (that is, the encapsulated sphere is polished).
In this way, the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230 (or 230D) do nothing (no control) with respect to the polishing of the encapsulated sphere, thus further reducing the burden.
"Example 3"

Next, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.
Example 3 is an example in which the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls are simply displayed by control on the gaming machine side.
FIG. 95 is a front view of a pachinko machine 801 (enclosed ball game machine) in the third embodiment. In FIG. 95, the pachinko machine 801 is provided with a ball count indicator 802 and a counting ball indicator 803 below the operation display device 7. The ball count indicator 802 and the counting ball indicator 803 are smaller than the ball count indicator 40 of the first embodiment, and each includes six LEDs.
Each LED of the holding ball number indicator 802 and the counting ball indicator 803 is, for example, a small rectangular one, and six LEDs are arranged in a row in the horizontal direction. Each LED can be turned off, turned on, and blinked. The lighting control of the number-of-balls indicator 802 and the counting ball indicator 803 is managed by the payout controller 230. Therefore, the control of the number-of-balls display 802 and the counting ball display 803 is performed on the gaming machine (payout control device 230) side.
The number-of-balls indicator 802 has a configuration that can roughly display the number of balls held by the player up to a maximum of six digits by lighting up six LEDs. For example, when the number of balls held is in the range of 100 to 999 balls, three LEDs from the right side to the third are turned on, indicating that the number of balls held is about three digits. Displayed as approximate number of balls. Similarly, when the number of balls held is in the range of 1000 to 9999 balls, the four LEDs from the right side to the fourth LED are turned on, indicating that the number of balls held is about four digits. Displayed as approximate number of balls.

On the other hand, the counting ball display 803 has a configuration that can roughly display the number of counting balls counted from the number of holding balls up to a maximum of six digits by turning on six LEDs. For example, when the number of counting balls = 10 to the number of counting balls = 99, two LEDs from the right side to the second are turned on, so that the number of counting balls is approximately two digits. Displayed as approximate number of balls. Similarly, when the number of counting balls = 10000 to the number of counting balls = 999,999, the five LEDs from the right to the fifth are turned on, indicating that the number of counting balls is approximately five digits. Displayed as an approximate count ball number.
The number-of-balls display 802 constitutes a first display that simply displays the number of balls held, and the counting ball display 803 constitutes a second display that simply displays the number of counting balls.
On the other hand, the operation display device 7 (configured by a liquid crystal display) is configured to be managed by the card unit 15 as in the first embodiment, and the operation display device 7 digitally displays the number of held balls and the number of counted balls in detail ( For example, it is displayed with numbers) and is displayed in analog form with a figure imitating a ball box.
The operation display device 7 constitutes a third display that is managed by the card unit 15 that displays details of the number of balls held and the number of balls counted.

Here, the number-of-balls display 802 as the first display can display at least the presence / absence of the number of balls, and the counting-ball display 803 as the second display displays at least the presence / absence of the number of counting balls It shall be possible. In particular, in the third embodiment, the number-of-balls display 802 as the first display can display the approximate number of balls, and the counting-ball display 803 as the second display has the counting-ball number. Approximate quantity can be displayed.
Further, among other configurations of the pachinko machine 801, although the counting ball display 313 is not arranged in the second embodiment, the other configurations are the same as those in FIG. 1 of the first embodiment. The same number is attached | subjected to the same member. This is because the counting ball display 803 is disposed instead of the counting ball display 313 in the second embodiment.
Note that the pachinko machine 801 is provided with a card unit 15, and the configuration of each part of the card unit 15 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and is given the same number.

Next, FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an operation example of the number-of-balls display 802, the number-of-balls display 803, and the operation display device 7 regarding the display of the number of balls and the number of balls counted.
In the description of FIG. 96, the concept of a scene is used in the progress of the game, and scenes R1 to R4 shown in FIG. 96 are held in the number-of-balls display 802, the counting ball display 803 and the operation display device 7 during the game. This is a concept representing a scene of the entire rendering operation including a ball number display, a counting ball display, a rendering screen, a button screen, and the like.
First, a scene R1 in FIG. 96 shows operations of the number-of-balls display 802, the counting ball display 803, and the operation display device 7 in a normal state. That is, in the scene R1, the operation display device 7 includes a ball lending rate display 301, a remaining amount display 302, a ball lending button 303, a return button 304, a storage / replay button 305, a message / operation area unit 306, and a switching button. A state in which 307 is arranged is shown, and a holding ball number display 802 and a counting ball display 803 are arranged below the operation display device 7.
95 shows a state in which a counting switch 311, a break switch 312, and a counting ball use switch 314 are arranged on the sides of the holding ball number display 802 and the counting ball display 803.
In addition, in the description after the scene R2, the above signing is complicated and therefore omitted.

In the scene R1, as an example at the normal time, the remaining amount display unit 302 displays the remaining amount as “5000 yen”, and thereby the player knows that the balance of the gaming card is “5000 yen”. . In addition, the ball number indicator 802 disposed below the operation display device 7 is lit with the fourth LED from the right side. Thereby, the player knows that the current number of balls is about four digits.
On the other hand, a message “Number of balls: 6500 can be fired” is displayed in the message / operation area 306, and a message “Please press the count button to count” is displayed. Thus, the player knows in detail that his current number of balls is 6500, and knows that he can play a pachinko game by firing the number of balls he has.
That is, the approximate number of balls can be found by the simple display of the number of balls held by the ball number indicator 802, and the details of the number of balls can be known by the digital (numeral) ball number display by the operation display device 7. Can do.
In the state of scene R1, there is no counting ball number, and there is no display of the counting ball number in the message / operation area 306. Further, no LED of the counting ball display 803 is lit.

Next, when the player presses the counting switch 311 and counts the number of balls, the process proceeds to the scene R2. The scene R2 shows a case where the player has pushed the counting switch 311 and counted 6000 out of 6500 balls. Therefore, 500 balls remain and the number of counted balls is 6000. In this case, the number of balls held is displayed by the ball number indicator 802 by turning on the third LED from the right side. As a result, the player knows that the current number of balls is about three digits. The state of the counting sphere is displayed by the counting sphere display 803 by lighting up to the fourth LED from the right side. Thereby, the player knows that the current counting ball has a quantity of about four digits.
On the other hand, the message / operation area 306 displays “Number of balls: 500 can be launched” and “Counting balls: 6000”. As a result, the digital display of “counting ball: 6000” allows the player to know in detail that the current counting ball is 6000.

Further, the same number of counting balls as the digitally displayed counting spheres (6000) displayed in the message / operation area 306 is displayed in an analog form with a figure that looks like a ball box T in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7. Is done. In addition, since the code | symbol T attached | subjected to a ball box becomes complicated, it is attached | subjected when it thinks that it is required on account of description.
In the scene R2, four ball boxes T are displayed, and are displayed in an analog form with a graphic deceiving that there are 6000 counting balls in the four ball boxes T. Since there are 6000 counting balls, the figure is such that counting balls are collected in all four ball boxes T.
Thereby, the player can know the approximate number of balls by the simple display of the number of balls held by the ball number indicator 802, and the number of balls held by the digital (number) display of the number of balls by the operation display device 7. You can know the details. In addition, the counting ball moved from the number of held balls is displayed in an analog form in a message / operation area 306 in a shape of a ball box, so that an intuitive grasp of the counting ball number can be performed smoothly. In particular, since the message / operation area 306 is larger than the counting ball display 803, the number of counting balls can be grasped more easily.

In the case where the number of balls is analogly displayed in the message / operation area portion 306 with a shape of a ball box T, the following display mode is used in the third embodiment as in the first embodiment.
・ Tama box full display: Number of balls = 1500 ・ Half box half display: Number of balls = 750 to less than 1500 ・ Slightly in the box: Number of balls = less than 750 For this reason, the ball rental rate display 301 always displays a rate of “ball rental: 4 yen per ball”. Further, the remaining amount (for example, “5000 yen”) is always displayed on the remaining amount display 302.

Next, when the player starts the game by firing the number of balls, the process moves to the scene R3.
The scene R3 shows a state where the player has fired the number of balls and the remaining number of balls has reached 30. At this time, since the remaining number of balls is 30 and the number of counted balls is 6000, the number of balls held in scene R2 is fired from 500 to 470, and the remaining number of balls is 30 State. This state is displayed by the ball number indicator 802 when the second LED from the right side lights up. As a result, the player knows that the current number of balls is about two digits, and the state of the counting ball is displayed by the counting ball display 803 when the fourth LED from the right side lights up. The Thereby, the player knows that the current counting ball has a quantity of about four digits.
On the other hand, in the message / operation area 306, the message “Number of holding balls: 30 can be fired” is displayed and “Counting sphere: 6000 pcs. “Go to 100 balls at a time” is displayed. As a result, the digital display of “counting ball: 6000” allows the player to know in detail that the current counting ball is 6000.
Also, since the remaining number of balls is as small as 30, the message / operation area 306 displays “If you want to use counting balls, press the button to use counting balls → move to 100 balls at a time. By displaying the message “I will do”, the player knows that the remaining number of balls has decreased, and can easily understand that the player can move from the counted number of balls to the number of held balls.

Next, as shown in the scene R4, when the player presses the counting ball use switch 314 to select the movement from the counting ball number to the holding ball number, 100 counting balls move to the holding ball number by one operation. . At this time, the counting ball use switch 314 notifies that the built-in LED is lit and that the counting ball use switch 314 is usable (that is, the movement from the counting ball number to the holding ball number is possible).
When the player operates the counting ball use switch 314 once, as shown in the scene R4, as a result of the movement of 100 counting balls to the number of holding balls, the number of holding balls becomes 130, and the number of counting balls is 5900. Therefore, this state is displayed by the number-of-ball indicator 802 by turning on the third LED from the right side. As a result, the player knows that the current number of balls is about three digits.
The state of the counting sphere is displayed by the counting sphere display 803 by lighting up to the fourth LED from the right side. Thereby, the player knows that the current counting ball has a quantity of about four digits.
On the other hand, the message / operation area 306 displays “Number of balls held: 130 can be fired” and “Counting balls: 5900 pieces Counting balls have moved to the number of balls held” are displayed. Is done. As a result, the digital display of “counting ball: 5900” allows the player to know in detail that the current counting ball is 5900. Further, the player can easily know that 100 counting balls have moved to the number of possessed balls by looking at the message / operation area unit 306.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 801 according to the third embodiment, the number of balls held is simply displayed by the number-of-balls display 802, and the number of counted balls is simply displayed by the counting ball display 803. Further, the operation display device 7 displays the number of balls and counting balls in detail in a digital display (for example, numbers) and displays them in an analog form with a figure imitating a ball box.

The third embodiment has the following effects.
(1) The number-of-balls display 802 and the number-of-balls display 803 are smaller than the number-of-balls display 40 of the first embodiment, and each has six LEDs, The display is simply displayed by turning on the LED to inform the approximate quantity, and the number of balls and counting balls are digitally displayed in detail by the operation display device 7 under the management of the card unit 15, so that the game control device 54 ( The burden on the main control board) and the payout control device 230 (payout control board) is reduced.

This background will be explained.
In enclosed ball game machines, the number of balls and counting balls (stored holding balls that cannot be temporarily fired) obtained as a result of the game should be managed by the gaming machine. If an easy-to-understand display is made on a machine, there is a problem that the burden of controlling the gaming machine is large.
For example, in order to display the number of balls in an easy-to-understand manner, it is conceivable that six rows of 7-segment LEDs are arranged on the display to display the number of balls held up to 6 digits in digital numbers. If the LED is controlled finely to display numbers, the control burden is large. Display control of this with both the number of balls and the counting ball is a burden regardless of whether it is executed by either the game control device (main control board) or the payout control device (payout control board). In particular, since the number of balls to be held changes with the progress of the game, it becomes a burden of control in particular.
In the third embodiment, therefore, the gaming machine side does not employ a 7-segment LED, but simply notifies the number of balls and counting balls by simply displaying a plurality of LEDs on and off. The above problem was solved by leaving it to management.
Specifically, on the gaming machine side, by controlling the number-of-balls display 802 and the counting ball display 803 by the payout control device 230, the number of balls and the number of counting balls are simply displayed by simply turning on / off a plurality of LEDs. Since the approximate quantity is reported and the number of balls and counting balls are digitally displayed in detail by the operation display device 7 under the management of the card unit 15, the burden on the payout control device 230 (payout control board) can be reduced. In addition, if it is the structure which controls the number-of-balls display 802 and the count ball display 803 by the game control apparatus 54 (main control board), the burden of the game control apparatus 54 (main control board) can be reduced.
That is, when managing the number of balls and counting balls with a gaming machine, the gaming machine (for example, the payout control device 230) simply displays the number of balls and counting balls, so the gaming machine (for example, the payout control device 230). And the details of the number of possessed balls and the counting balls are displayed by the control of the card unit 15, so that the player can easily understand the display.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A first display device capable of simply displaying the number of balls held;
A second display device capable of simply displaying the counting ball;
A third display device capable of displaying details of the number of balls and counting balls;
With
The first display device can display at least the presence or absence of the number of balls,
The second display device can display at least the presence or absence of a counting ball,
The third display device displays the number of balls and counting balls under the control of the card unit.
Here, the number-of-balls indicator 802 constitutes a first indicator, the counting ball indicator 803 constitutes a second indicator, and the operation display device 7 constitutes a third indicator.
Example 4

Next, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
The fourth embodiment is an example in which the number of balls is defined as follows: number of balls held = number of balls to be fired + counting balls, and the number of balls held is displayed by control on the gaming machine side.
That is, in Example 4, the number of balls is defined as follows.
"Number of balls held = number of balls that can be fired + counting balls"
Here, the number of balls that can be fired is the number of balls that can be fired, and in the example of a gaming machine using real balls, it corresponds to the image of the number of balls that can be fired on the upper and lower plates. The ball that has not moved to the ball box.
The number of counted balls is the number of stored balls that have been counted and moved from the number of balls that can be fired. In the example of a gaming machine that uses real balls, It corresponds to the image of a number, and it is a ball in a ball box. By operating the counting switch 311, the number of balls that can be fired can be moved to the number of counting balls.
Therefore, the number of balls held in the fourth embodiment refers to the total number of balls held by the player. In the example of the first embodiment, the number of balls held corresponds to the number of held balls + the number of counted balls = the total number of held balls. is there.

In the fourth embodiment, the display of the number of balls possessed is controlled by the payout control device 230, and the number of balls possessed is displayed by the number-of-balls display 40A. The number-of-balls display 40A displays the number of balls acquired by the player (that is, “number of balls held = number of balls that can be fired + counting balls”), and six 7-segment LEDs are arranged. 6 digits (number of balls) can be displayed, and the display is controlled by the payout controller 230.
In the fourth embodiment, a counting ball display 313 composed of LEDs is arranged, and the counting ball display 313 is configured to be lit when there is a counting ball. The lighting of the counting ball display 313 is controlled by the payout control device 230. Here, the number-of-balls display 40A as the first display can display the number of balls including the counting ball, and the second display The counting ball display 313 as a device is configured to be able to display the counting ball simply.
On the other hand, the operation display device 7 (configured with a liquid crystal display) is managed by the card unit 15 as in the first embodiment. In addition to being displayed as a display (for example, numbers), it is displayed in analog form with a figure imitating a ball box.

Next, FIG. 97 is a diagram illustrating an operation example of the number-of-balls display 40A, the number-of-balls display 313, and the operation display device 7 regarding the display of the number of balls and the number of balls counted.
In the description of FIG. 97, the concept of a scene is used in the progress of the game, and the scenes S1 to S4 shown in FIG. This is a concept representing the scene of the entire rendering operation including the number of balls display, counting ball display, effect screen, button screen and the like.
First, a scene S1 in FIG. 97 shows operations of the number-of-balls display 40A, the counting ball display 313, and the operation display device 7 in a normal state. That is, in the scene S1, the operation display device 7 includes a ball lending rate display 301, a remaining amount display 302, a ball lending button 303, a return button 304, a storage / replay button 305, a message / operation area unit 306, and a switching button. A state in which 307 is arranged is shown, and a holding ball number display 40A and a counting ball display 313 are arranged below the operation display device 7.
97 shows a state in which a counting switch 311, a break switch 312, and a counting ball use switch 314 are arranged in the vicinity of the holding ball number display 40 </ b> A and the counting ball display 313.
In addition, in the description after the scene S2, the above-described encoding is complicated, and is omitted.

In the scene S1, as an example of the normal time, the remaining amount display unit 302 displays the remaining amount as “5000 yen”, so that the player knows that the balance of the gaming card is “5000 yen”. . The number 6500 is digitally displayed on the number-of-balls display 40A disposed below the operation display device 7. Thereby, the player knows that the current number of balls is 6500.
On the other hand, in the message / operation area 306, a message “The breakdown of the number of balls held is as follows” and a message “Number of possible launches: 6500 Counting balls: 0” are displayed. The message “Please press the count button to count” is displayed. As a result, the player can see that the number of balls that can be fired is 6500 and the number of counting balls is 0 as a breakdown of the current number of balls, and as a result, the total number of balls can be counted as 6500 that can be fired. It can be seen that it is 6500 with the addition of 0 balls. In addition, it is clear from the fact that 6500 numbers are digitally displayed on the number-of-balls display 40A. Therefore, the player has “number of balls held = number of balls that can be fired + counting balls”. It can be easily understood that the total number of balls is 6500.
That is, the total number of balls can be found by the number of balls held display 40A, and the breakdown of the number of balls can be found by digital (numeric) display by the operation display device 7.
In addition, since the number of counting balls is zero in the state of the scene S1, the counting ball display 313 is not lit.

Next, when the player presses the counting switch 311 to count the number of balls, the process proceeds to the scene S2. Scene S2 shows a case where the player has pressed the counting switch 311 to count 6000 out of 6500 balls. Therefore, the number of possible launches remains 500, and the number of counting balls is 6000. In this case, since a number of 6500 is digitally displayed on the number-of-balls indicator 40A, the player knows that the total number of balls is 6500.
On the other hand, in the message / operation area 306, a message “The breakdown of the number of balls held is as follows” and a message “Number of possible launches: 500 Counting balls: 6000” are displayed. As a result, it can be seen that the player has 500 shots and 6000 counting balls as a breakdown of the current number of balls, and as a result, the total number of balls to be counted is 500, which is the number of balls that can be fired. It can be seen that it is 6500 with the addition of 6000 balls. In addition, it is clear from the fact that 6500 numbers are digitally displayed on the number-of-balls display 40A. Therefore, the player has “number of balls held = number of balls available for firing + counting balls”. It can be easily understood that the total number of balls is 6500.
That is, the total number of balls can be found by the ball number display 40A, and the breakdown of the number of balls can be known by digital (numerical) display by the operation display device 7.
Further, since there are 6000 counting balls in the state of the scene S1, the counting ball display 313 is turned on to notify that there is a counting ball.

Furthermore, the same number of counting balls as the digitally displayed counting spheres (6000) displayed in the message / operation area 306 is displayed in an analog form in the form of the message box 306 of the operation display device 7 in the shape of the ball box T. Is done. In addition, since the code | symbol T attached | subjected to a ball box becomes complicated, it is attached | subjected when it thinks that it is required on account of description.
In the scene S2, four ball boxes T are displayed, and are displayed in an analog form with a figure deceiving that there are 6000 counting balls in the four ball boxes T. Since there are 6000 counting balls, the figure is such that counting balls are collected in all four ball boxes T.

Next, when the player starts the game by firing the number of balls, the process proceeds to the scene S3.
In the scene S3, the player has released the number of balls and the remaining number of balls has become 30. At this time, since the number of shots that can be left is 30 and the number of balls is 6030, the number of shots that can be shot in scene S2 is fired from 500 to 470, and the remaining number of shots that can be fired is 30 State.
At this time, in the message / operation area section 306, a message “The breakdown of the number of balls held is as follows” and a message “Number of possible launches: 30 Count balls: 6000” are displayed. Since 6030 and a digital number are displayed on the number-of-balls display 40A, the player has a total number of balls of 6030, and the breakdown of the number of balls can be viewed in the message / operation area 306. And easy to understand.
Also, the message / operation area 306 displays “If you want to use a counting ball, please press the counting ball use button → You will move to 100 balls at a time”. Thereby, the player knows that the remaining number of balls has decreased, and easily understands that the movement from the counted number of balls to the number of held balls is possible.

Next, as shown in the scene S4, when the player depresses the counting ball use switch 314 and selects the movement from the counting ball number to the firing possible number, 100 counting balls move to the firing possible number by one operation. . When the player operates the counting ball use switch 314 once, as shown in the scene S4, as a result of the movement of 100 counting balls to the number that can be fired, the number that can be fired is 130, and the number of counting balls is 5900. Therefore, this state is displayed as 6030 and a digital number on the number-of-balls display 40A as the total number of balls.
In addition, in the message / operation area section 306, a message “The breakdown of the number of balls held is as follows” and a message “Number of balls held: 130 Count balls: 5900” are displayed. “Counting ball 100 has moved to the number of balls possessed” is displayed. As a result, the digital display of “counting ball: 5900” allows the player to know in detail that the current counting ball is 5900. Further, the player can easily know that 100 counting balls have moved to the number of possessed balls by looking at the message / operation area unit 306.

As described above, in Example 4, after defining “the number of holding balls = the number of balls that can be fired + the counting ball”,
The number of balls held is displayed by the number-of-balls display 40A. In addition, the operation display device 7 displays the number of balls that can be fired and the counting ball in detail (for example, numbers) as a breakdown of the number of balls, and displays them in analog form with a figure imitating a ball box.

The fourth embodiment has the following effects.
(1) After defining “number of balls held = number of balls held = number of balls available for firing + counting balls”, the number of balls held is displayed by the number-of-balls display 40A under the control of the payout controller 230, The details of the number of balls that can be fired and the counting ball are displayed as a breakdown of the number of balls held by the management of the card unit 15, so that the game control device 54 (main control board) and the payout control device 230 (payout control board) are burdened. It is reduced.
Specifically, on the gaming machine side, the total number of balls is displayed by controlling the number-of-balls display 40A by the payout control device 230, and the breakdown of the number of balls is displayed by the operation display device 7 under the management of the card unit 15. By displaying in detail, the burden on the payout control device 230 (payout control board) can be reduced. In addition, if it is the structure which controls the ball number indicator 40A by the game control apparatus 54 (main control board), the burden of the game control apparatus 54 (main control board) can be reduced.
(2) Since the number-of-balls display 40A displays the number of balls including the counting balls, there is an effect of easily grasping the total number of balls possessed by the player.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A first display device capable of displaying the number of balls possessed including a counting ball;
A second display device capable of simply displaying the counting ball;
A third display device capable of displaying details of the number of balls and counting balls;
With
The first display device can digitally display the number of balls including counting balls,
The second display device can display at least the presence or absence of a counting ball,
The third display device displays the number of balls and counting balls under the control of the card unit.
Here, the number-of-balls display 40A constitutes a first indicator, the counting ball indicator 313 constitutes a second indicator, and the operation display device 7 constitutes a third indicator.
"Example 5"

Next, a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.
The fifth embodiment is an example in which a detection signal (frame opening information) of a front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) is directly output to an external card unit.
FIG. 98 is a diagram illustrating an output system of a front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) in the fifth embodiment.
In FIG. 98, the power supply device 7500 of the fifth embodiment incorporates a switch power supply delay circuit 7510. The power supply device 7500 is provided with a RAM clear switch (RAM clear SW) 7501 and a power switch (power SW) 7502. These functions are the same as those in the first embodiment.
In the fifth embodiment, the game control device 54 is integrated with the payout control device 230 as shown in the first embodiment, and in the following description, the game control device 54 is described as a configuration including the payout control device. doing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the game control device and the payout control device are separated from each other, the game control device shown in the fifth embodiment is replaced with a payout control device and a front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) is detected. Control relating to the signal may be performed (the same applies to the following embodiments as well).
The power supply device 7500 can generate a main power source for the game control device, 5VBB for the game control device, 5VBB for the night monitoring SW, and a main power source for the production control device and supply them to each part. DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V, etc. is generated from AC power supply, and necessary power is supplied to game control device 54, effect control device 53, front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600, launch control device and each electronic component. To do.

That is, the power supply device 7500 is supplied to the game control device 54 with the main power supply for the game control device and 5VBB for the game control device, and the game control device 54 supplies the main power supply for the game control device (hereinafter simply referred to as the main power supply). The game control device 5VBB is used as a backup power source such as a RAM. Further, the main power for the effect control device is supplied from the power supply device 7500 to the effect control device 53.
Furthermore, the 5VBB for night monitoring SW is supplied from the power supply device 7500 to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600. It is continuously supplied as a power source.
On the other hand, the night monitoring SW main power to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600 is supplied from the switch power delay circuit 7510 built in the power supply device 7500, and the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) ) 7600 outputs to the outside (for example, the card unit 7610) the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is cut off after the supply of the night monitoring SW main power supply (hereinafter simply referred to as the main power supply) is started. To do.

The switch power supply delay circuit 7510 built in the power supply device 7500 includes a crystal oscillator 7511, a counter 7512, a shift register 7513, and a relay 7514.
The crystal oscillator 7511 generates an oscillation signal having a predetermined cycle (predetermined frequency), and the counter 7512 divides the oscillation signal of the predetermined frequency generated by the crystal oscillator 7511 to a moderately low frequency that is constant and easy to use by clock division. This is input to the shift register 7513. The shift register 7513 functions as a delay circuit.
The main power generated by the power supply device 7501 is input as input data (5V power main power) into the shift register 7513 inside the switch power supply delay circuit 7510. The shift register 7513 outputs an output signal from the counter 7512. Using a (low-frequency signal divided by a clock) as a shift pulse, the input data (the main power source of the 5V power supply) is shifted (delayed) for a predetermined time and output. Here, the shift register 7513 delays input data (main power source of 5 V power supply) for, for example, 5 seconds, and outputs it to the relay 7514 as a signal for on / off control. Specifically, the shift register 7513 delays the input data (main power source of 5V power supply) for 5 seconds, and outputs the off control signal to the relay 7514 while the delay is delayed, and the on control signal is relayed to the relay 7514 after 5 seconds. Output to.
The main power of 5V power is applied to the relay 7514, and the relay 7514 is normally off (while the off control signal is input), but when the on control signal is input from the shift register 7513, The main power supply of 5V power supply is supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600 by turning on.

Since the main power is supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600 via the switch power delay circuit 7510 as described above, a predetermined time (for example, from the start of main power supply to the game control device 54) The main power supply to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600 is started after a delay of 5 seconds. The front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600 transmits the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is cut off via the external information terminal board 51 (hereinafter referred to as “external”). “Via the information terminal board 51” may be omitted) and output to the card unit 7610.
On the other hand, when the main power is cut off, such as at a game shop at night, the backup power (5VBB) from the power supply device 7500 is supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600, and the frame opening information of the front frame 4 is displayed. It is configured to hold. The backup power supply (5VBB) does not pass through the switch power supply delay circuit 7510, but is always supplied from the power supply device 7500 to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600.
Further, the output signal of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600 (frame opening information of the front frame 4: that is, abnormality detection information) is output to the card unit 7610, and the card unit 7610 stores the frame opening information of the front frame 4 inside. The input port 7612 receives the data and outputs it to the CPU 7611. The CPU 7611 stores the frame opening information of the front frame 4 in a RAM or the like, and then performs processing such as notification.

As described above, the switch power supply delay circuit 7510 inputs the 5V power supply, which is the main power supply of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600, to the shift register 7513 with a constant clock, and the shift register 7513 performs a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). ) Just do a delay. Since the relay 7514 is turned on by the 5V on control signal output from the shift register 7513 that rises with a delay of a predetermined time, the main power supply 5V supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600 is also Delay in starting the supply of main power to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600 is slower than the CPU and various ICs on the game control device 54. Therefore, the timing at which the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600 outputs the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power is shut off to the outside is also greater than the start of the supply of the main power to the game control device 54. Become slow.
The backup power is always supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600. The backup power is the same as that supplied to the RAM of the game control device 54, and the RAM is also backed up in the same manner.
Here, the switch power supply delay circuit 7510 constitutes a power supply delay means.

On the other hand, AC 100V power is supplied from the power supply device 7500 to the card unit 7610. AC 100V commercial power is supplied to the input side of the power supply device 7500. The power supply device 7500 is supplied from the AC 100V commercial power source as described above for the main power source for the game control device, 5VBB for the game control device, and 5VBB for the night monitoring SW. In addition, the main power supply for the production control device is generated and supplied to each unit, and commercial power of AC 100V is supplied to the card unit 7610 via the power supply device 7500 for the card unit 7610.
Note that the card unit 7610 does not include a power switch. Therefore, when the power switch (power SW) 7502 of the power supply device 7500 on the gaming machine side is turned on, power is supplied to the gaming machine and card unit 7610.
As described above, supply of main power to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600 is started with a delay of a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of main power supply, and the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) is started. 7600 outputs the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is cut off to the external card unit 7610 after the main power supply is started, but for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). Is set to a period sufficient for the start-up preparation period such as initialization of the card unit 7610 to elapse after the supply of AC 100V to the card unit 7610 is started.
Therefore, the frame opening information from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600 is taken into the card unit 7610 after the start-up preparation period of the card unit 7610 elapses, and the frame opening information may not be taken in. The frame opening information is surely captured.
The card unit 7610 directly receives the frame opening information from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600. The card unit 7610 receives the frame opening information of the front frame 4 via the internal input port 7612. When it is received and taken into the CPU 7611, the CPU 7611 performs an error notification based on the frame opening information of the front frame 4, and outputs error information to the hall computer 86 (no ball lending may be performed). .
Note that the power supply device 7500 may not be configured to supply power to the card unit 7610 but may be configured to supply commercial power to the card unit 7610 separately from the power supply device 7500 of the gaming machine. Normally, the power of the gaming machine and the card unit is turned on / off collectively for each island where the gaming machine is installed. Therefore, both powers are turned on / off almost simultaneously without supplying power from the gaming machine to the card unit. Will be.

Next, FIG. 99 is a timing chart of an operation for dealing with an illegality using the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600 in the fifth embodiment. For convenience of explanation, the same reference numerals are used in FIG. 99 for the same members as in the first embodiment.
In FIG. 99, the main power source of the game control device is a power supply that is supplied from the power supply device 7500 in the pachinko machine 1 at a normal time (when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1). Indicates the power supplied to each device, electronic device, sensor, and the like. In addition to the main power supply, the power supply device 7500 is a backup power supply (night monitoring SW) supplied to the RAM of the game control device 54 and the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. 5VBB). When the main power supply is turned on, the pachinko machine 1 is activated.
FIG. 99 shows the flow of time from a state before the main power source is turned on, for example, when the game store before the main power source is turned on is also at night.

  As shown in FIG. 99, at a timing t1 at night before the timing t2 at which the main power is turned on (for example, at the start of preparations for opening a game shop), a suspicious person enters, for example, the front frame of the pachinko machine 1 When the act of attaching the unauthorized substrate or the like by opening 4 is performed, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600 detects the opening of the front frame 4. The opening information of the front frame 4 is held by the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600 even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. In the example of FIG. 99, the front frame 4 is opened by a suspicious person, but is thereafter closed.

Next, when the main power supply of the power supply device 7500 is turned on at timing t2 (for example, the power switch 7502 is turned on) in preparation for opening a game store, the main power is supplied to the game control device 54 at the same timing t2 and The main power is also supplied to the control device 53. Further, the supply of AC 100V power from the power supply device 7500 is also started to the card unit 7610 at the same timing t2 (operation preparation and the like will be described later). When the main power supply is started, the game control device 54 is activated to perform initial setting and the like, and the game control device 54 is turned on.
On the other hand, since the night monitoring SW main power (main power) to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600 is supplied via the switch power delay circuit 7510, the switch power delay circuit 7510 includes the power supply device 7500. The main power is supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600 at a timing t3 delayed by a predetermined time Ta (for example, 5 seconds) from the timing t2 when the main power is turned on.
Then, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600 starts its operation immediately with the supply of the main power, and the frame opening information (detection signal) of the front frame 4 stored when the main power is cut off at the timing t3. The data is output to the card unit 7610 via the external information terminal board 51 for a predetermined period Tb (for example, 1 second). The timing t3 is a period that is exactly delayed by a predetermined time Ta (for example, 5 seconds) from the timing t2 when the supply of power to the card unit 7610 is started.
Here, the predetermined time Ta is set to a period longer than the time when the power-on process of the card unit 7610 ends (that is, the time when the card unit 7610 startup preparation period ends). The predetermined time Tb is set to a predetermined period (for example, a period sufficient for the card unit 7610 to capture the frame opening information of the front frame 4).
If the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600 does not detect the opening of the front frame 4 at night, the information (detection signal) that the frame has been opened is not output.

Next, the frame opening information of the front frame 4 output from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600 is input to the card unit 7610 and taken into the CPU 7611 through the input port 7612.
Therefore, the frame opening information from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600 is taken into the card unit 7610 after the start-up preparation period of the card unit 7610 elapses, and the frame opening information may not be taken in. The frame opening information is surely captured. In the subsequent processing, when the front frame 4 is illegally opened at night, the CPU 7611 outputs error information to the hall computer 86 that reports an error based on the frame opening information of the front frame 4 (further, A process such as not lending the ball) may be performed. Further, in the error notification by the card unit 7610, for example, an error display LED notifies an error for a predetermined period.
On the other hand, for normal gaming machines whose front frame 4 is not opened illegally, normal monitoring processing is performed after a lapse of a predetermined time Ta after the main power is turned on, and ready for business. For example, when the front frame 4 is opened at timing t4, the open state of the front frame 4 is detected by the front frame open switch (night monitoring switch) 7600, and the frame open information is taken into the card unit 7610. Become.
The frame opening information taken into the card unit 7610 may be sent to the hall computer 86, and the hole opening information may be accumulated and managed by the hall computer 86 (this is the same in other embodiments).
Further, an error notification LED may be arranged on the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600. In this way, an error can be notified by the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600 itself, which is simple and low cost.

Example 5 has the following effects.
(1) After the start-up preparation period of the card unit 7610 elapses, the frame opening information of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600 will be taken into the card unit 7610, and the frame opening information may not be taken in. The frame opening information can be surely captured. As a result, the function of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600 can be fully exhibited, and security can be improved.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device for managing the progress of the game;
In a gaming machine comprising a power supply device for supplying power,
It is possible to detect that the front frame is open even when the main power is shut off, and a front frame open detection means for holding information that detects the opening of the front frame even when the main power is shut off,
A power supply delay means for delaying the supply of the main power to the front frame opening detection means when the main power supplied from the power supply device is turned on; and
The front frame opening detection means includes
A gaming machine characterized in that after the main power supply is started, the front frame opening information stored when the main power supply is shut off is output to the outside.

(2) In the fifth embodiment, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600 is not connected to various control controls including the game control device 54 and the effect control device 53, and the main power supply is started. Since the opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is shut off is directly output to the external card unit 7610, various control controls including the main board (game control device 54) and the effect control device 53 ( For example, even if the payout control device) is illegally modified, the monitored frame opening information can be output to the outside, and the security can be greatly increased.
In particular, since the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600 does not depend on the control of each control device of the gaming machine, the detection information of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600 can be reliably output to the outside. it can.

This background will be explained.
The meaning of providing a front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) that opens the frame of the gaming machine (for example, the front frame) when the main power supply is cut off is mainly to detect that the main board has been illegally modified or replaced. It is.
That is, it is conceivable that the control device of the gaming machine is modified or replaced with an unauthorized device at night when the gaming machine is turned off. Therefore, there is an example of a night monitoring switch that detects and stores the fact that the gaming machine frame is opened when the gaming machine is powered off, and outputs the opening information of the frame when the power is turned on.
However, if the gaming machine frame is opened at night and the game control device (main board) or payout control device (separated from the game control device) is illegally modified, the game control device (main board) And the payout controller may not output the information of the night monitoring switch accurately.
Also, if the main board is illegally modified, the main board cannot be trusted. Furthermore, since the payout control board (payout control apparatus) is also connected to an unauthorized main board, there is a possibility that it will not operate normally. Therefore, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) detects that the gaming machine frame (for example, the front frame) has been opened during nighttime monitoring, and even if the frame opening information exists, The frame opening information may not be detected.
Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, as a countermeasure, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600 is not connected to various control controls including the game control device 54 and the effect control device 53, and is stored when the main power is cut off. By opening the front frame 4 directly to the card unit 7610, the above problem can be solved.
For example, even if the main board is illegally modified or replaced, the opening information of the front frame 4 is output directly from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600 to the card unit 7610. It is possible to accurately detect and notify the frame opening without being affected by the main substrate. As a result, security can be significantly increased.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The front frame opening detection means includes
It is not connected to various control controls including at least a game control device and a production control device,
A game machine characterized in that after the main power supply is started, the opening information of the front frame stored when the main power supply is shut off is directly output to an external card unit.

(3) The power supply device 7500 supplies main power and backup power directly to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600, and delays the main power to the power device 7500 to delay the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600. Since the switch power supply delay circuit 7510 is supplied to the front panel without relying on the power supply to various control controls including the main board (game control device 54) and the effect control device 53 (for example, the payout control device) The frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600 can be operated normally.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The power supply
While supplying main power and backup power directly to the front frame opening detection means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the power supply device includes a power supply delay means for delaying the main power supply and supplying it to the front frame opening detection means.
Also in the fifth embodiment, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7600 may detect that the glass frame 5 is opened in addition to detecting that the front frame 4 is opened.
"Example 6"

Next, a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
In the sixth embodiment, the form of the output signal of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) is changed.
FIG. 100 is a timing chart of an operation for dealing with an illegality using the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 in the sixth embodiment. For convenience of explanation, the operation will be described on the assumption that the main power supply or the like is supplied from the power supply device 7500 similar to that of the fifth embodiment in FIG. 100, and the same members as those of the fifth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals. It explains using. Further, for convenience of explanation, in the sixth embodiment, the operation will be described using the reference numeral 7700 for the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch).
The front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 of the sixth embodiment has a configuration in which the form of the output signal is changed compared to the first and fifth embodiments. Specifically, the front frame opening switch (night-time monitoring switch) 7700 passes the external information terminal board 51 through the external information terminal board 51 after the main power supply is started and the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is shut off. (Hereinafter, “via the external information terminal board 51” may be omitted) and output to the card unit 7610. In this case, the form of the output signal of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 is a measure against disconnection. It is as follows.
-When the frame opening is detected The signal from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 becomes OFF level. Since this takes such a signal form as a measure against disconnection, there is actually no external output of the signal at the OFF level. That is, when the frame opening is detected, no signal is output from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 to the outside.
When no frame opening is detected The front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 outputs an ON level output signal to the outside.
That is, a signal that is ON when the front frame 4 is closed is output to the outside, while it is OFF when the front frame 4 is opened, and no signal is output to the outside.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, two configuration examples are shown as the form of the output signal of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700. In FIG. 100, these are the output signals of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700. The form is represented by form (a) and form (b).
First, the form (a) has the following output signal configuration.
When the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 detects the opening of the frame, it is turned OFF and no signal is output to the outside. However, at this time, the main power supply is started and stored when the main power supply is cut off. The signal is turned off for a predetermined period (Td) as the frame opening information of the front frame 4 that has been set. Further, in the normal power supply state thereafter, an ON level signal is output to the outside as frame detection information while the frame opening of the front frame 4 is not detected, and when frame opening of the front frame 4 is detected, the frame detection information is The signal is turned off for a period (Te) corresponding to the opening period of the front frame 4. This state is shown as a form (a) of a front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 in FIG.

On the other hand, the form (b) has the following output signal configuration.
When the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 detects the opening of the frame, it is turned OFF and no signal is output to the outside. At this time, when the supply of the main power is started, the first predetermined period ( After outputting the ON level signal for Tf), the signal is turned OFF for the second predetermined period (Tg) as the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is shut off. Further, in the normal power supply state thereafter, an ON level signal is output to the outside as frame detection information while the frame opening of the front frame 4 is not detected, and when frame opening of the front frame 4 is detected, the frame detection information is The signal is turned off for a period (Te) corresponding to the opening period of the front frame 4. This state is shown as a form (b) of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 in FIG.
Thus, in any form (a) or (b), when the cable (particularly the internal cable) of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 or the switch itself is disconnected, the switch itself Since the signal is not output to the outside, it can be quickly determined that the cable may be disconnected if the output signal is OFF even though the front frame 4 is not open. Therefore, if the cable is inspected and repaired based on this determination, the state where the cable is disconnected can be quickly returned to normal, and the function of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 can be exhibited. it can.

Next, the operation of the sixth embodiment will be described.
FIG. 100 shows a flow of time from a state before the main power source is turned on, for example, when the game store before the main power source is turned on is also at night.
As shown in FIG. 100, at the timing t1 at night before the timing t2 at which the main power is turned on (for example, when the game store preparation start is started), a suspicious person enters, for example, the front frame of the pachinko machine 1 When the act of attaching the unauthorized substrate or the like by opening 4 is performed, the opening of the front frame 4 is detected by the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700. The opening information of the front frame 4 is held by the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. In the example of FIG. 100, the front frame 4 is opened by a suspicious person, but is thereafter closed.

Next, when the main power supply of the power supply device 7500 is turned on at timing t2 (for example, the power switch 7502 is turned on) in preparation for opening a game store, the main power is supplied to the game control device 54 at the same timing t2 and The main power is also supplied to the control device 53. Also, the supply of AC 100V power from the power supply device 7500 is started to the card unit 7610 at the same timing t2. When the main power supply is started, the game control device 54 is activated to perform initial setting and the like, and the game control device 54 is turned on.
On the other hand, since the night monitoring SW main power (main power) to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 is supplied via the switch power delay circuit 7510, the switch power delay circuit 7510 includes the power supply device 7500. The main power is supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 at a timing t3 delayed by a predetermined time Ta (for example, 5 seconds) from the timing t2 when the main power is turned on.

Here, first, the operation of the configuration example in which the output signal of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 is the form (a) will be described.
<In the case of configuration of form (a)>
The front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 starts its operation immediately with the supply of the main power, and outputs the frame opening information (detection signal) of the front frame 4 stored when the main power is cut off at the timing t3. In the form (a).
In this case, for example, when the opening of the front frame 4 is detected at night, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 is OFF for a predetermined period (Td) at timing t3, and the signal is an external card. It is not output to the unit 7610. The timing t3 is a period that is exactly delayed by a predetermined time Ta (for example, 5 seconds) from the timing t2 when the supply of power to the card unit 7610 is started.
Next, when a predetermined period (Td) elapses from the timing t3, the output signal of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 becomes the ON level.
Here, the predetermined time Ta is set to a period longer than the time when the power-on process of the card unit 7610 ends (that is, the time when the card unit 7610 startup preparation period ends). The predetermined time Td is set to a predetermined period (for example, a period sufficient for the card unit 7610 to capture the frame opening information of the front frame 4).
On the other hand, when the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 does not detect the opening of the front frame 4 at night, the output signal is output to the card unit 7610 as the ON level from timing t3.

Next, an output signal from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 is input to the card unit 7610 and taken into the CPU 7611 via the input port 7612. The card unit 7610 determines the level of the output signal sent from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700. If the signal level is OFF, it is determined that the front frame 4 is opened at night, and If the signal level is ON, it is determined that the front frame 4 is not open at night.
Accordingly, the frame opening information from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 is taken into the card unit 7610 after the start-up preparation period of the card unit 7610 elapses, and the frame opening information may not be taken in. The frame opening information is surely captured. In the subsequent processing, when the front frame 4 is illegally opened at night, the CPU 7611 outputs error information to the hall computer 86 that reports an error based on the frame opening information of the front frame 4 (further, A process such as not lending the ball) may be performed. Further, in the error notification by the card unit 7610, for example, an error display LED notifies an error for a predetermined period.
On the other hand, when the front frame 4 is not opened illegally, error notification is not performed.
Next, after a lapse of a predetermined time Ta after turning on the main power, normal monitoring processing is performed to prepare for business. For example, when the front frame 4 is opened at the timing t4, the front frame open switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 detects the open state of the front frame 4, and the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 detects the timing. At t4, the signal becomes OFF level for a predetermined period (Te) and no signal is output to the external card unit 7610. In the card unit 7610, if the level of the output signal sent from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 is OFF (that is, no signal is being output), it is determined that the front frame 4 has been opened. . When a predetermined period (Te) elapses from timing t4, the output signal of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 returns to the ON level again, and is prepared for the next detection of opening of the front frame 4.

Next, the operation of the configuration example in which the output signal of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 is in the form (b) will be described.
<In the case of configuration of form (b)>
The front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 starts its operation immediately with the supply of the main power, and outputs the frame opening information (detection signal) of the front frame 4 stored when the main power is cut off at the timing t3. Are output in the form (b).
In this case, for example, when the opening of the front frame 4 is detected at night, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 outputs an ON level signal for a first predetermined period (Tf) from timing t3. As a result of detecting the opening of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is cut off, the signal is turned off for the second predetermined period (Tg) (at this time, no signal is output). The timing t3 is a period that is exactly delayed by a predetermined time Ta (for example, 5 seconds) from the timing t2 when the supply of power to the card unit 7610 is started.
Next, when the second predetermined period (Tg) elapses, the output signal of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 becomes the ON level.
Here, the predetermined time Tg is set to a predetermined period (for example, a period sufficient for the card unit 7610 to capture the frame opening information of the front frame 4).
On the other hand, when the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 does not detect the opening of the front frame 4 at night, the output signal is output to the card unit 7610 as the ON level from timing t3.

Next, an output signal from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 is input to the card unit 7610 and taken into the CPU 7611 via the input port 7612. The card unit 7610 determines the level of the output signal sent from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700. If the signal level is OFF, it is determined that the front frame 4 is opened at night, and If the signal level is ON, it is determined that the front frame 4 is not open at night.
Here, in the configuration of the form (b), when the main power is supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700, the output signal of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 is the first output signal. Since it becomes an ON level only for a predetermined period (Tf) and then becomes a signal form which becomes an OFF level only for a second predetermined period (Tg) as information for detecting the opening of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is shut off. There is an advantage that it is easy to distinguish between when the main power is turned off and when the output signal of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 is turned off when the opening of the front frame 4 is detected.
Accordingly, the frame opening information from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 is taken into the card unit 7610 after the start-up preparation period of the card unit 7610 elapses, and the frame opening information may not be taken in. The frame opening information is surely captured. In the subsequent processing, when the front frame 4 is illegally opened at night, the CPU 7611 outputs error information to the hall computer 86 that reports an error based on the frame opening information of the front frame 4 (further, A process such as not lending the ball) may be performed. Further, in the error notification by the card unit 7610, for example, an error display LED notifies an error for a predetermined period.
On the other hand, when the front frame 4 is not opened illegally, error notification is not performed.

  Next, after the first predetermined period (Tf) and the second predetermined period (Tg) have elapsed, normal monitoring processing is performed to prepare for business. For example, when the front frame 4 is opened at timing t4, the open state of the front frame 4 is detected by the front frame open switch (night monitoring switch) 7700, and the timing from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 is detected. At t4, the signal becomes OFF level for a predetermined period (Te) and no signal is output to the external card unit 7610. In the card unit 7610, if the level of the output signal sent from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 is OFF (that is, no signal is being output), it is determined that the front frame 4 has been opened. . When a predetermined period (Te) elapses from the timing t4, the output signal of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 returns to the ON level again, and is prepared for the next detection of opening of the front frame 4.

In the sixth embodiment, in addition to the same effect as that of the fifth embodiment that the security can be improved, the following effects are obtained.
(1) Since the output signal of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 has a signal form that is ON level when the front frame 4 is closed and OFF level when the front frame 4 is opened, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring) If the switch 7700 cable (especially the internal cable) or the switch itself is disconnected, the signal is turned off and no signal is output, so the front frame 4 is not opened. If the output signal is OFF, it can be quickly recognized that there is a possibility of disconnection of the cable or the switch itself. Therefore, the card unit 7610 can detect the disconnection of the cable of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 or the switch itself only by detecting the opening of the front frame 4 by the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 on a daily basis. It can be judged and is convenient. Further, the function of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) can be exhibited by quickly returning the cable to the normal state.
In other words, if the cable or the like is inspected and repaired based on the determination that the cable or the switch itself is disconnected, the state where the cable is disconnected can be quickly returned to normal, and the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7610 The function can be demonstrated.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device for managing the progress of the game;
In a gaming machine comprising a power supply device for supplying power,
It is possible to detect that the front frame is open even when the main power supply is shut off, and a front frame open detection means for holding information that detects the opening of the front frame even when the main power supply is shut off,
A power supply delay means for delaying the supply of the main power to the front frame opening detection means when the main power supplied from the power supply device is turned on; and
The front frame opening detection means includes
After the main power supply is started, the front frame opening information stored when the main power is shut off is output to the outside, and the output signal of the front frame opening detection means is turned off when the front frame opening is detected. The game machine is configured to be turned on when the opening of the front frame is not detected.

(2) Front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 supplies main power to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 when the frame opening of the front frame 4 is detected when the main power supply is cut off at night. When this is done, the output signal of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 becomes ON level for the first predetermined period (Tf), and then detects the opening of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is shut off. Since the signal is in the form of a signal that becomes OFF level only for the second predetermined period (Tg), the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 when the main power is off and when the opening of the front frame 4 is detected is displayed. This makes it easy to distinguish the output signal from when it is off. That is, the distinction between OFF when the main power supply is shut off (OFF) and OFF (OFF) of the information detected when the frame is opened becomes clear, and the frame opened from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 7700 is surely opened. Can recognize information. Therefore, security can be further enhanced.

This background will be explained.
As a countermeasure against disconnection of the night monitoring switch that monitors the opening of the gaming machine frame (for example, the front frame) when the main power supply is cut off, it is turned on (ON) when the frame is closed, and turned off (OFF) when the frame is opened. Can be considered.
However, in the case of the above signal form, when there is frame opening information at the time of main power cut-off, the output signal from the night monitoring switch is in a form of OFF for a predetermined period after the main power is supplied. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to distinguish between when the main power is turned off and when the output signal of the night monitoring switch is turned off when the frame opening of the front frame 4 is detected.
Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, when there is frame opening information detected when the main power supply is cut off as a countermeasure, a signal form is devised in which an on signal is output once when main power is supplied and then the frame opening information is turned off for a predetermined period. It is what.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The front frame opening detection means includes
When the main power supply is started, when the front frame opening information stored when the main power supply is shut off is output to the outside, the first case is detected when the front frame opening is detected when the main power supply is shut off. After the output signal is turned on for a predetermined period of time, it is turned off only for a second predetermined period as the frame opening information,
After that, the output signal of the front frame opening detection means is OFF when the opening of the front frame is detected, and is turned ON when the opening of the front frame is not detected.
"Example 7"

Next, a seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.
The seventh embodiment is an example in which a power supply delay circuit (delay means) is provided in a front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch).
FIG. 101 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) in the seventh embodiment. In FIG. 101, the game control device 1100 is provided with a CPU 1101 and an input port 1102.
In the seventh embodiment as well, the game control device 1100 is integrated with the payout control device, and in the following description, the game control device 1100 is described as including the payout control device.
The main power (5V) and backup power (5VBB) supplied from the power supply device 58 to the game control device 1100 are supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150 via the game control device 1100. . However, since the power supply delay circuit 1151 is arranged in the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150, the frame opening information is immediately output from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150 even when the main power is supplied. Is not to be done.

That is, the power supply delay circuit 1151 and the frame opening information detection output unit 1156 are arranged in the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150. The power supply delay circuit 1151 includes a crystal oscillator 1152, a counter 1153, a shift register 1154, and a relay 1155. It has.
The crystal oscillator 1152 generates an oscillation signal having a predetermined period (predetermined frequency), and the counter 1153 divides the oscillation signal of the predetermined frequency generated by the crystal oscillator 1152 to a moderately low frequency with a certain ease of use by clock division. This is input to the shift register 1154. The shift register 1154 is configured to function as a delay circuit.
Then, the main power supplied from the power supply device 58 to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150 via the game control device 1100 is supplied to the power supply delay circuit 1151. In the power supply delay circuit 1151, main power is input to the shift register 1154 as input data (main power of 5V power). Is used as a shift pulse, and the input data (the main power source of the 5V power source) is shifted (delayed) for a predetermined time and output. Here, for example, the shift register 1154 delays input data (main power source of 5 V power supply) for, for example, 5 seconds and outputs it to the relay 1155 as a signal for on / off control. Specifically, the shift register 1154 delays the input data (the main power source of the 5V power supply) for 5 seconds, and outputs the off control signal to the relay 1155 while delaying, and the on control signal is relayed to the relay 1155 after 5 seconds. Output to.
The relay 1155 is supplied with a main power source of 5V, and the relay 1155 is normally off (while the off control signal is input), but when the on control signal is input from the shift register 1154, The main power supply of 5V power supply is supplied to the frame opening information detection output means 1156 by turning on.

When the main power supply is started, the frame opening information detection output means 1156 outputs the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is shut off to the outside.
On the other hand, when the main power is cut off, such as at night in a game store, the backup power supply (5 VBB) from the power supply device 58 passes through the game control device 1100 and the frame inside the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150. The opening information detection output means 1156 is supplied to the opening information detection output means 1156. When the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150 detects the opening of the front frame 4 when the main power is cut off, the front opening frame 4 The frame opening information is held. The backup power supply (5VBB) does not pass through the power supply delay circuit 1151, but is always supplied from the power supply device 58 to the frame opening information detection output means 1156 via the game control device 1100.
An output signal from the frame opening information detection output means 1156 (frame opening information of the front frame 4: that is, abnormality detection information) is output to the game control device 1100, and the game control device 1100 stores the frame opening information of the front frame 4 inside. The input port 1102 receives it and outputs it to the CPU 1101. The CPU 1101 stores the frame opening information of the front frame 4 in a RAM (not shown) and then transmits it to the card unit 15.

As described above, the power supply delay circuit 1151 inputs the 5V power supply serving as the main power supply to the frame opening information detection output unit 1156 to the shift register 1154 with a constant clock, and the shift register 1154 delays by a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). I do. Then, since the relay 1155 is turned on by the 5V on control signal output from the shift register 1154 that is delayed by a predetermined time, the main power supply 5V supplied to the frame opening information detection output means 1156 is also delayed. The start of supply of main power to the opening information detection output unit 1156 is slower than the CPU 1101 and various ICs on the game control device 1100. Therefore, the timing at which the frame opening information detection output means 1156 outputs the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is cut off to the outside is also later than the start of the supply of the main power to the game control device 1100.
The backup power is always supplied to the frame opening information detection output unit 1156. The backup power is the same as that supplied to the RAM of the game control device 1100, and the RAM is also backed up in the same manner.
Here, the power supply delay circuit 1151 constitutes a delay means. The frame opening information detection output unit 1156 of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150 corresponds to an internal circuit of the front frame opening detection unit.

It should be noted that the power supply delay circuit 1151 is realized by delay means using, for example, a simple CR circuit (a delay due to a CR time constant) without using the above components such as the crystal oscillator 1152, the counter 1153, the shift register 1154, the relay 1155, and the like. Also good.
However, in the case of the delay due to the CR time constant, there is an advantage that the cost can be reduced. However, since the error may be large, in the seventh embodiment, for example, the power supply delay circuit 1151 is realized by a delay circuit using a logic IC. Yes.
Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, since the frame opening information of the front frame 4 from the frame opening information detection output unit 1156 is abnormality detection information, there is an advantage that it can be output to an external device with an accurate delay time.
The relay 1155 may be a mechanical relay, but is not limited thereto, and may be, for example, a photo relay or other switching means.

Next, FIG. 102 is a timing chart of an operation for dealing with an illegality using the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150 according to the seventh embodiment. For convenience of explanation, the same reference numerals are used in FIG. 102 for the same members as in the first embodiment.
In FIG. 102, the main power source is a power source that is supplied from the power source device 58 in the pachinko machine 1 at a normal time (when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1). Each device including the game control device 1100 This refers to the power source that supplies power to electronic devices and sensors. In addition to the main power supply, the power supply device 58 also includes a backup power supply that is supplied to the RAM of the game control device 1100 and the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. . When the main power supply is turned on, the pachinko machine 1 is activated.
FIG. 102 shows a flow of time from a state before the main power source is turned on, for example, when the game store before the main power source is turned on is also at night.

  As shown in FIG. 102, at the timing t1 at night before the timing t2 at which the main power is turned on (for example, at the start of preparation for opening the amusement shop), a suspicious person enters, for example, the front frame of the pachinko machine 1 When the act of attaching the unauthorized substrate or the like by opening 4 is performed, the opening of the front frame 4 is detected by the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150. The opening information of the front frame 4 is held by the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150 (specifically, held by the frame opening information detection output unit 1156) even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. Yes. In the example of FIG. 102, the front frame 4 is opened by a suspicious person, but is thereafter closed.

Next, when the main power supply of the power supply device 58 is turned on at timing t2 to prepare for the opening of the game store, main power is supplied to the game control device 1100 at the same timing t2 and a front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150. The main power supply is also supplied to the power supply delay circuit 1151. In FIG. 102, these states are indicated as main power ON of the game control device 1100 and main power ON of the power delay circuit 1151.
When the supply of main power is started, the game control device 1100 starts up the program of the game control device 1100 as shown in FIG. 102 and performs initial setting, etc., and each component starts its operation and prepares for operation. Then, the operation is gradually turned ON, and thereafter, after a little time has elapsed, the timing t3 is reached.
On the other hand, when the main power is supplied, the power delay circuit 1151 starts supplying the main power to the frame opening information detection output unit 1156 after a predetermined time Ta has elapsed. That is, when the main power is supplied, the power delay circuit 1151 delays by a predetermined time Ta and starts supplying the main power to the frame opening information detection output unit 1156 at the timing t3. The timing t3 is just a period delayed by a predetermined time Ta (for example, 5 seconds) from the timing t2 at which the main power supply to the game control device 1100 is started. In FIG. 102, the main power supply supplied to the power supply delay circuit 1151 and the power supply output from the power supply delay circuit 1151 (that is, the main power supply to the frame opening information detection output unit 1156) are displayed in FIG. .
Here, the predetermined time Ta is set to a period longer than the time when the main power-on process or the like of the game control device 1100 ends (that is, the time when the start-up preparation period of the game control device 1100 ends).
Next, when the main power supply starts at the timing t3, the frame open information detection output means 1156 of the front frame open switch (night monitoring switch) 1150 stores the main power supply when the main power supply is shut off for a predetermined time Tb. The frame opening information of the front frame 4 that has been received is output to the outside (in this case, to the game control device 1100). The predetermined time Tb is set to a predetermined period (for example, a period sufficient for the game control device 1100 to capture the frame opening information of the front frame 4).

If the frame opening information detection output means 1156 of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150 detects and holds the opening of the front frame 4 at the timing t1 when the main power is turned on, it is predetermined after the main power is supplied. Until the time Tb elapses, the state of outputting the frame opening information to the outside is continued.
Next, the frame opening information of the front frame 4 output from the frame opening information detection output means 1156 is input to the game control device 1100, is taken into the CPU 1101 via the input port 1102, and is stored in the RAM.
Therefore, the frame opening information of the frame opening information detection output means 1156 of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150 is taken into the gaming control device 1100 after the start-up preparation period of the game control device 1100 has elapsed. There is no risk that the frame opening information cannot be captured, and the frame opening information is reliably captured. The subsequent processing is the same as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, normal gaming machines whose front frame 4 is not opened illegally are subjected to normal monitoring processing after a predetermined time Ta has elapsed since the main power supply was turned on, and are ready for business.
Further, when the front frame 4 is opened by the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150, for example, at a timing t4, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150 detects the opening, and the front frame is opened. Frame open information is output from the front frame open switch (night monitoring switch) 1150 and input to the game control device 1100 only during the period Tc in which the frame 4 is open, and the front frame is released by the error monitoring process (front frame 4 open error). As monitored.

Example 7 has the following effects.
(1) After the start-up preparation period of the game control device 1100 elapses, the frame release information of the front frame release switch (night monitoring switch) 1150 is taken into the game control device 1100, and the frame release information cannot be taken in. The frame opening information can be surely captured. As a result, the function of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150 can be fully exerted to improve security.
(2) The front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150 includes a power supply delay circuit 1151. When main power is supplied from outside the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150, the power supply delay circuit 1151 Since the main power supply to the frame opening information detection output unit 1156 is started after being delayed by a predetermined time Ta, it is not necessary to provide the game control device 1100 with a delay unit for delaying the main power supply. Compared to the modification, the control burden on the game control device 1100 can be reduced.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The front frame opening detection means is provided with a delay means,
The delay means is
When supply of the main power to the game control device is started, the main power is supplied to the internal circuit of the front frame opening detection means with a predetermined time delay,
The internal circuit is
A gaming machine characterized in that after the main power supply is started, the front frame opening information stored when the main power supply is shut off is output to the game control device.
Also in the seventh embodiment, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1150 may detect that the glass frame 5 is opened in addition to detecting that the front frame 4 is opened.
"Example 8"

Next, an eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.
Example 8 is an example in which the detection signal (frame opening information) of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) is delayed and output to the outside.
FIG. 103 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250 according to the eighth embodiment. In FIG. 103, the game control device 1200 is provided with a CPU 1201 and an input port 1202.
In the eighth embodiment, the game control device 1200 is integrated with the payout control device, and in the following description, the game control device 1200 is described as including the payout control device.
The main power (5V) and backup power (5VBB) supplied from the power supply device 58 to the game control device 1200 are supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250 via the game control device 1200. .
Since the output delay circuit 1251 is arranged in the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250, the frame opening information is immediately output to the outside from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250 even when the main power is supplied. Is not to be done.

That is, an output delay circuit 1251 and a frame opening information detection output unit 1255 are arranged in the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250. The output delay circuit 1251 includes a crystal oscillator 1252, a counter 1253, and a shift register 1254. Yes.
The crystal oscillator 1252 generates an oscillation signal having a predetermined period (predetermined frequency), and the counter 1253 divides the oscillation signal of the predetermined frequency generated by the crystal oscillator 1252 into a moderately low frequency with a certain ease of use by clock division. This is input to the shift register 1254. The shift register 1254 is configured to function as a delay circuit.
The main power from the power supply 58 is supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250 via the game control device 1200, and the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250 itself is supplied with the main power supply. The operation starts immediately, and the frame opening information detection output means 1255 inputs the frame opening information (detection signal) of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is shut off to the output delay circuit 1251.
In the output delay circuit 1251, the frame opening information (frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is cut off) from the frame opening information detection output means 1255 is input to the shift register 1254 as input data. 1254 uses an output signal from the counter 1253 (a signal with a constant low frequency divided by a clock) as a shift pulse, and shifts (delays) input data (here, frame opening information) for a certain period of time and outputs it. Operates as follows. Specifically, the shift register 1254 delays input data (frame opening information) for 5 seconds, for example, and outputs it to the outside.
Therefore, the output delay circuit 1251 receives the frame opening information from the frame opening information detection output unit 1255 (the front surface stored when the main power supply is shut off) after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the main power supply. (Frame opening information of frame 4) is output to the outside.

On the other hand, when the main power is cut off, such as at night in a game store, the backup power supply (5 VBB) from the power supply device 58 passes through the game control device 1200 and the frame inside the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250. The opening information detection output means 1255 is supplied to the opening information detection output means 1255. When the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250 detects the opening of the front frame 4 when the main power is cut off, the front opening frame 4 The frame opening information is held. The backup power supply (5VBB) is always supplied from the power supply device 58 to the frame opening information detection output means 1255 via the game control device 1200.
An output signal from the frame opening information detection output means 1255 (frame opening information of the front frame 4: that is, abnormality detection information) is output to the game control device 1200, and the game control device 1200 stores the frame opening information of the front frame 4 inside. The information is received by the input port 1202 and output to the CPU 1201. The CPU 1201 stores the frame opening information of the front frame 4 in a RAM (not shown), and then transmits it to the card unit 15.

As described above, the output delay circuit 1251 inputs the frame opening information from the frame opening information detection output unit 1255 to the shift register 1254 as input data, and the shift register 1254 delays the data by a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). Therefore, the frame opening information output from the shift register 1254 is output to the game control device 1200 with a delay of a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of main power supply. Therefore, the timing at which the frame opening information detection output means 1255 outputs the frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is shut off to the outside is later than the start of the supply of the main power to the game control device 1200.
Further, the backup power is constantly supplied to the frame opening information detection output unit 1255. The backup power is the same as that supplied to the RAM of the game control device 1200, and the RAM is also backed up in the same manner.
Here, the output delay circuit 1251 constitutes output delay means.

Note that the output delay circuit 1251 may be realized by delay means using, for example, a simple CR circuit (delay by CR time constant) without using the above-described components such as the crystal oscillator 1252, the counter 1253, and the shift register 1254.
However, in the case of the delay due to the CR time constant, there is an advantage that the cost can be reduced, but it is also possible that the error is large. Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, for example, the output delay circuit 1251 is realized by a delay circuit using a logic IC. Yes.
Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, the frame opening information of the front frame 4 from the frame opening information detection output unit 1255 is abnormality detection information, and therefore there is an advantage that it can be output to an external device with an accurate delay time.

Next, FIG. 104 is a timing chart of an operation for dealing with an illegality using the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250 in the eighth embodiment. For convenience of explanation, the same reference numerals are used in FIG. 104 for the same members as in the first embodiment.
In FIG. 104, the main power source is a power source that is supplied from the power source device 58 in the pachinko machine 1 at a normal time (when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1). Each device including the game control device 1200 This refers to the power source that supplies power to electronic devices and sensors. In addition to the main power supply, the power supply device 58 also includes a backup power supply to be supplied to the RAM and the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250 of the game control device 1200 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. . When the main power supply is turned on, the pachinko machine 1 is activated.
FIG. 104 shows a flow of time from a state before the main power source is turned on, for example, when the game store before the main power source is turned on is also at night.

  As shown in FIG. 104, at the timing t1 at night before the timing t2 when the main power supply is turned on (for example, when preparation for opening a game store is started), a suspicious person enters, for example, the front frame of the pachinko machine 1 When the act of opening 4 and attaching an illegal board or the like is performed, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250 detects the opening of the front frame 4. The opening information of the front frame 4 is held by the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250 even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (specifically, held by the frame opening information detection output unit 1255). Yes. In the example of FIG. 104, the front frame 4 is opened by a suspicious person, but is thereafter closed.

Next, when the main power supply of the power supply device 58 is turned on at timing t2 in preparation for opening the game store, main power is supplied to the game control device 1200 at the same timing t2 and a front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250 is supplied. Main power is also supplied.
When the main power supply of the game control device 1200 is started, as shown in FIG. 104, the program of the game control device 1200 is activated to perform initial setting and the like, and each component starts its operation and prepares for operation. Then, the operation is gradually turned ON, and thereafter, after a little time has elapsed, the timing t3 is reached. In this case, the time difference between the main power supply start timing t2 and the timing t3 is a predetermined time Ta (for example, 5 seconds).
On the other hand, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250 itself starts to operate immediately with the supply of the main power, and the frame opening information detection output means 1255 stores the frame of the front frame 4 stored when the main power is cut off. The release information (detection signal) is input to the output delay circuit 1251. The output delay circuit 1251 delays the frame opening information from the frame opening information detection output means 1255 by a predetermined time Ta (for example, 5 seconds), and outputs it to the game control device 1200 at timing t3. The timing t3 is just a period delayed by a predetermined time Ta (for example, 5 seconds) from the timing t2 at which the main power supply to the game control device 1200 is started.
Here, the predetermined time Ta is set to a period longer than the time when the main power-on process or the like of the game control device 1200 ends (that is, the time when the start-up preparation period of the game control device 1200 ends).
The output delay circuit 1251 starts outputting the frame opening information at the timing t3, but the frame opening information stored in the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is cut off for a predetermined time Tb from the timing t3 to the outside (here, the game control). Output to device 1200). The predetermined time Tb is set to a predetermined period (for example, a period sufficient for the game control device 1200 to capture the frame opening information of the front frame 4).

Next, the frame opening information of the front frame 4 output from the output delay circuit 1251 is input to the game control device 1200, taken into the CPU 1201 via the input port 1202, and stored in the RAM.
Therefore, the frame opening information from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250 is taken into the gaming control device 1200 after the start-up preparation period of the game control device 1200 elapses, and the frame opening information cannot be taken in. The frame opening information is surely captured. The subsequent processing is the same as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, normal gaming machines whose front frame 4 is not opened illegally are subjected to normal monitoring processing after a predetermined time Ta has elapsed since the main power supply was turned on, and are ready for business.
Further, when the front frame 4 is opened by the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250 at the timing t4, for example, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250 detects the opening, and the front frame is opened. Frame open information is output from the front frame open switch (night monitoring switch) 1250 and input to the game control device 1200 only during the period Tc in which 4 is open, and is input to the game control device 1200. As monitored.

Example 8 has the following effects.
(1) After the start-up preparation period of the game control device 1200 elapses, the frame release information of the front frame release switch (night monitoring switch) 1250 is taken into the game control device 1200, and the frame release information cannot be taken in. The frame opening information can be surely captured. As a result, the function of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250 can be sufficiently exhibited to improve security.
(2) The front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250 includes an output delay circuit 1251. When the main power is supplied from the outside of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250, the output delay circuit 1251 Since the frame opening information from the frame opening information detection output unit 1255 is output to the outside after being delayed by a predetermined time Ta, it is not necessary to provide a circuit like the output delay circuit 1251 in the game control device 1200. Compared with the modified example, the control burden on the game control device 1200 can be reduced.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Provide output delay means for delaying the output of the front frame opening detection means,
The output delay means is disposed in the front frame opening detection means,
The output delay means includes
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the supply of main power to the game control device is started, the output of the front frame opening detection means is delayed by a predetermined time and output.
Also in the eighth embodiment, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 1250 may detect that the glass frame 5 is opened in addition to detecting that the front frame 4 is opened.
"Example 9"

Next, a ninth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.
Embodiment 9 is an example in which an output delay circuit that delays a detection signal (frame opening information) of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) and outputs it to the outside is provided in the game control device.
FIG. 105 is a diagram showing the configuration of the output delay circuit 1302 in the ninth embodiment.
In FIG. 105, the game control device 1300 is provided with a CPU 1301 and an output delay circuit 1302.
In the ninth embodiment, the game control device 1300 is integrated with the payout control device, and in the following description, the game control device 1300 is described as a configuration with the payout control device.
Also, the main power supply for the game control device, 5VBB for the game control device, and 5VBB for the night monitoring SW are supplied from the power supply device 1360 to the game control device 1300. The game control device 5VBB is used as a backup power source for a RAM or the like.
On the other hand, the 5VBB for night monitoring SW is supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 via the game control device 1300, and the main power for the game control device is being supplied by itself. The front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is also supplied.
Accordingly, the main power supply (5V) and backup power supply (5VBB for night monitoring SW) supplied from the power supply device 1360 to the game control device 1300 are supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 via the game control device 1300. Become so. The configuration of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is the same as that of the first embodiment.

The power supply 1360 supplies 100 V AC power to the card unit 1350. AC 100V commercial power is supplied to the input side of the power supply 1360. The power supply 1360 is supplied from the AC 100V commercial power supply as described above for the main power source for the game control device, 5VBB for the game control device, and 5VBB for the night monitoring SW. In addition, the main power supply for the production control device is generated and supplied to each unit, and commercial power of AC 100V is supplied to the card unit 1350 via the power supply device 1360 for the card unit 1350.
The card unit 1350 is not provided with a power switch. Accordingly, when the power switch (power SW) 1361 of the power supply device 1360 on the gaming machine side is turned on, power is supplied to the gaming machine and the card unit 1350.
The main power supply for the production control device is supplied from the power supply device 1360 to the production control device 53. The configuration of the effect control device 53 is the same as that of the first embodiment.
As described above, the power supply device 1360 generates the production control device main power supply in addition to the game control device main power supply, the game control device 5 VBB, and the night monitoring SW 5 VBB. As specific voltage values, A DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V is generated from an AC power supply of AC100V, and necessary power is supplied to the game control device 1300, the effect control device 53, the launch control device, and each electronic component.
The power supply device 1360 is provided with a power switch (power SW) 1361 and a RAM clear switch (RAM clear SW) 1362, and these functions are the same as those in the first embodiment.

In the ninth embodiment, an output delay circuit 1302 is arranged in the game control device 1300, and the output delay circuit 1302 includes a crystal oscillator 1303, a counter 1304, and a shift register 1305.
The crystal oscillator 1303 generates an oscillation signal with a predetermined period (predetermined frequency), and the counter 1304 divides the oscillation signal with the predetermined frequency generated by the crystal oscillator 1302 into a moderately low frequency that is easy to use by a certain frequency. This is input to the shift register 1305. The shift register 1305 is configured to function as a delay circuit.
The main power from the power supply device 1360 is supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 via the game control device 1300, and the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is started to supply main power. The frame opening information of the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is shut off is output to the outside (for example, the game control device 1300).
Here, the frame opening information from the front frame opening switch 126 passes through the game control device 1300 but passes through the output delay circuit 1302 and is output to the card unit 1350 without passing through the CPU 1301.
On the other hand, when the main power is cut off, such as at night in a game store, a backup power supply (5VBB for night monitoring SW) from the power supply device 1360 passes through the game control device 1300 and the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126. The frame opening information of the front frame 4 is held. The backup power (5VBB for night monitoring SW) is always supplied from the power supply device 1360 to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 via the game control device 1300.

An output signal of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 (frame opening information of the front frame 4: that is, abnormality detection information) is output to the game control device 1300. The game control device 1300 uses the front frame 4 Frame opening information is received by the internal output delay circuit 1302, and the frame opening information is delayed by a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) and output to the card unit 1350 (as described above, the front frame opening is performed). The frame opening information from the switch 126 passes through the game control device 1300 but is output to the card unit 1350 without going through the CPU 1301).
In the output delay circuit 1302, the output signal of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 (frame opening information of the front frame 4: that is, abnormality detection information) is input as input data to the shift register 1305, and the shift register 1305 receives the counter 1304. The output signal (a signal with a constant low frequency divided by the clock) is used as a shift pulse, and the input data (here, the frame opening information) is shifted (delayed) for a certain period of time so as to be output. . Specifically, the shift register 1305 delays input data (frame opening information) for 5 seconds, for example, and outputs it to the outside.
Accordingly, the output delay circuit 1302 stores frame opening information (stored when the main power supply is cut off) from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the main power was supplied. The open frame information of the front frame 4) is output to the outside.
Here, the game control device 1300 constitutes a delay means. The output delay circuit 1302 corresponds to a delay unit.

An output signal of the output delay circuit 1302 (frame opening information on the front frame 4: that is, abnormality detection information) is output to the card unit 1350. The card unit 1350 receives the frame opening information on the front frame 4 at the internal input port 1352 and receives the CPU 1351. Output to.
Here, the output signal of the output delay circuit 1302 (frame opening information of the front frame 4) is delayed by a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the main power is supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126. Input to the card unit 1350. The predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) is set to a period sufficient for the start-up preparation period such as initialization of the card unit 1350 to elapse after the supply of AC 100V to the card unit 1350 is started. .
Therefore, after the start-up preparation period of the card unit 1350 elapses, the frame opening information from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is taken into the card unit 1350 via the output delay circuit 1302, and There is no possibility that the frame opening information cannot be taken in, and the frame opening information is surely taken in.
In the card unit 1350, when the frame opening information of the front frame 4 is received by the internal input port 1352 via the output delay circuit 1302 and taken into the CPU 1351, the CPU 1351 notifies the error based on the frame opening information of the front frame 4. Processing such as outputting error information to the hall computer 86 (further, it may be possible not to lend a ball) is performed.

Next, FIG. 106 is a timing chart of an operation for dealing with an illegality by using the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 in the ninth embodiment. For convenience of explanation, the same reference numerals are used in FIG. 106 for the same members as in the first embodiment.
In FIG. 106, the main power source of the game control device is a power source supplied from the power source device 1360 in the pachinko machine 1 at a normal time (when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1). Indicates the power supplied to each device, electronic device, sensor, and the like. In addition to the main power supply, the power supply device 1360 is a backup power supply (night monitoring SW) that is supplied to the RAM and the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 of the game control device 1300 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. 5VBB). When the main power supply is turned on, the pachinko machine 1 is activated.
The main power source of the card unit is an AC 100V power source supplied from the power source device 1360 to the card unit 1350.
FIG. 106 shows a flow of time from a state before the main power source is turned on, for example, when the game store before the main power source is turned on is also at night.

  As shown in FIG. 106, at the timing t1 at night before the timing t2 at which the main power is turned on (for example, when the game store preparation start is started), a suspicious person enters, for example, the front frame of the pachinko machine 1 When the act of opening 4 and attaching an illegal board or the like is performed, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 detects the opening of the front frame 4. The opening information of the front frame 4 is held by the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. In the example of FIG. 106, the front frame 4 is opened by a suspicious person, but is thereafter closed.

Next, when the main power supply of the power supply device 1360 is turned on at timing t2 (for example, the power switch 1361 is turned on) in preparation for opening a game store, main power is supplied to the game control device 1300 at the same timing t2, and the game The main power is also supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 via the control device 1300. In addition, the main power is also supplied to the effect control device 53. Furthermore, supply of AC 100V power from the power supply device 1360 is also started to the card unit 1350 at the same timing t2 (operation preparation and the like will be described later).
When the main power supply is started, the game control device 1300 is activated to perform an initial setting or the like and to be turned on.
On the other hand, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 starts its operation immediately with the supply of the main power, and outputs the frame opening information (detection signal) of the front frame 4 stored when the main power is shut off to the outside. The frame opening information (detection signal) of the front frame 4 is input to the output delay circuit 1302 of the game control device 1300. The output delay circuit 1302 delays the frame opening information from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 by a predetermined time Ta (for example, 5 seconds) and outputs it to the card unit 1350 at timing t3. The timing t3 is a period that is exactly delayed by a predetermined time Ta (for example, 5 seconds) from the timing t2 at which the supply of power to the card unit 1350 is started.
Here, the predetermined time Ta is set to a period longer than the time when the power-on processing of the card unit 1350 is completed (that is, the time when the card unit 1350 is ready for startup).
The output delay circuit 1302 starts outputting the frame opening information at the timing t3, but the frame opening information stored in the front frame 4 stored when the main power supply is shut off for a predetermined time Tb from the timing t3 to the outside (here, the card unit). Output to 1350). The predetermined time Tb is set to a predetermined period (for example, a period sufficient for the card unit 1350 to capture the frame opening information of the front frame 4).

Next, the frame opening information of the front frame 4 output from the output delay circuit 1302 is input to the card unit 1350 and taken into the CPU 1351 via the input port 1352.
Therefore, the frame opening information (via the output delay circuit 1302) from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 is taken into the card unit 1350 after the start-up preparation period of the card unit 1350 has elapsed. Therefore, there is no possibility that the frame opening information cannot be taken in, and the frame opening information is surely taken in. In the subsequent processing, if the front frame 4 is illegally opened at night, the CPU 1351 outputs an error information to the hall computer 86 that notifies the error based on the frame opening information of the front frame 4 (further, A process such as not lending the ball) may be performed.
On the other hand, normal gaming machines whose front frame 4 is not opened illegally are subjected to normal monitoring processing after a predetermined time Ta has elapsed since the main power supply was turned on, and are ready for business.
The frame opening information taken into the card unit 1350 may be sent to the hall computer 86, and the hole opening information may be accumulated and managed by the hall computer 86 (this is the same in other embodiments).

Example 9 has the following effects.
(1) After the start-up preparation period of the card unit 1350 has elapsed, the frame opening information of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 will be taken into the card unit 1350, and the frame opening information may not be taken in. The frame opening information can be surely captured. As a result, the function of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 can be fully exhibited, and security can be improved.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The output delay means is disposed in the game control device,
A gaming machine characterized in that when supply of main power to a game control device is started, the output of the front frame opening detection means is delayed by a predetermined time and transmitted to the card unit.

(2) In the configuration of the ninth embodiment, when the card unit 1350 takes in the frame opening information of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 and there is a possibility that the front frame 4 is opened illegally, the card unit 1350 Error notification, error information is output to the hall computer 86, or ball lending is not performed, so that it is possible to deal with it illegally in advance.
(3) Since the card unit 1350 takes in the frame opening information of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 and gives an error notification or the like, the control burden on the CPU 1301 of the game control device 1300 can be reduced.

(4) The game control device 1300 includes an output delay circuit 1302 inside, and delays the frame opening information of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 by delaying the main power supply by the output delay circuit 1302 by a predetermined time Ta. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a circuit such as the output delay circuit 1251 in the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126. Therefore, compared with the seventh and eighth embodiments, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring) is used. The configuration of the switch 126 is simple.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Provide output delay means for delaying the output of the front frame opening detection means,
The output delay means is disposed in the game control device,
The output delay means includes
A gaming machine, characterized in that when supply of main power to a game control device is started, the output of the front frame opening detection means is delayed by a predetermined time and output.

(5) The game control device 1300 includes an output delay circuit 1302 inside, and delays the frame opening information of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 from the main power supply by the output delay circuit 1302 for a predetermined time Ta. Since it outputs to the exterior (for example, card unit 1350) without going through CPU1301 of control device 1300, the control burden of CPU1301 of game control device 1300 can be eased.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The output delay means is disposed in the game control device,
A gaming machine characterized in that when supply of main power to a game control device is started, the output of the front frame opening detection means is delayed for a predetermined time and transmitted to the card unit without going through the CPU of the game control device.

(6) Since the AC 100V power is supplied to the card unit 1350 via the power supply device 1360 in the gaming machine, all the power is supplied to the gaming machine and the card unit 1350 by turning on the power switch 1361 of the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent forgetting to turn on the power of the card unit 1350, which is convenient.
In addition, since the AC 100V power is supplied to the card unit 1350 via the power supply 1360 in the gaming machine, the gaming machine is supplied with power, but the card unit 1350 is not supplied with power. Since there is no state, the card unit 1350 can reliably receive the frame opening information of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126.
This background will be described.
Currently, there are many configurations that supply AC 24V to gaming machines and AC 100V to card units.
However, a power switch is turned on to start the gaming machine, and a necessary power source (for example, DC voltage of DC32V, DC12V, DC5V, etc.) is supplied to each part of the gaming machine. Since the switch is turned on to supply AC100V power to the card unit, it may be inconvenient that the card unit power switch may be forgotten.
Conventionally, there are cases in which a gaming machine supplies 24V power to each part from a 100V through a transformer, and a card unit uses a 100V power supply.
Therefore, since the power supply (particularly voltage) is different between the gaming machine and the card unit, it is possible that the card unit is not turned on even if the gaming machine is turned on. In such a case, the frame opening information from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 output from the gaming machine to the card unit may not be received by the card unit. Therefore, countermeasures are required.
On the other hand, in the ninth embodiment, a commercial power supply of AC100V is supplied to the gaming machine, and the internal power supply unit 1360 converts it to a necessary power supply (for example, DC voltage of DC32V, DC12V, DC5V, etc.) to each part of the gaming machine. On the other hand, AC 100 V is supplied to the card unit 1350 via the power supply device 1360 inside the gaming machine, and all the gaming machine and card unit 1350 are powered by simply turning on the power switch 1361 of the gaming machine. Thus, it becomes easy to supply power to the card unit 1350, and forgetting to turn on the power switch to the card unit 1350 can be prevented.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The output delay means includes
When the main power supply to the game control device is started, the output of the front frame opening detection means is delayed for a predetermined time and transmitted to the card unit,
A gaming machine characterized in that a main power is supplied to the card unit via a power supply device in the gaming machine.
In the ninth embodiment, the card unit 1350 is not provided with a power switch. When the power switch (power SW) 1361 of the power supply device 1360 on the gaming machine side is turned on, the gaming machine and the card unit 1350 are powered on. Although supplied, the card unit 1350 may have a power switch.
Also in the ninth embodiment, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 may detect that the glass frame 5 is opened in addition to detecting that the front frame 4 is opened.
"Example 10"

Next, a tenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
The tenth embodiment is an example in which a game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) for monitoring the removal of the main board is arranged, and in particular, an error notification of the removal of the main board is made by the card unit.
In the tenth embodiment, the game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) shown in FIG. 88 is arranged, and the payout control device 230B detects the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 that detects the opening of the front frame 4, and the main board. Based on detection information from the two sensors of the game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 127 that detects the removal of the (game control device 54), the front frame 4 is opened and the main board (game control device 54) is removed. The determination result is transmitted to the card unit 15, and the card unit 15 notifies an error.
A block diagram as shown in FIG. 88 is omitted, and a flowchart of the card unit 15 is shown in FIG.

Next, monitoring switch information reception processing of the card unit 15 in the tenth embodiment will be described.
In the monitoring switch information reception processing of the card unit 15 in the tenth embodiment, the processing content will be described using F as the step number.
FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing monitoring switch information reception processing of the card unit 15.
When the routine starts, it is determined in step F1 whether or not the frame opening information has been received. This is to determine whether or not a command related to the frame opening information has been received from the payout control device 230B, and is briefly shown in the drawing for convenience of explanation. If a command related to frame opening information has been received, frame opening error processing is performed in step F2. In the frame opening error process, the red LED of the card unit error notification LED 203 (see FIG. 1) arranged in the card unit 15 is caused to blink, whereby the card unit 15 performs error notification.
Since there is a sign that the front frame 4 was opened at night, the error notification here is an error notification indicating that the front frame 4 was opened at night in the card unit 15 by judging that there is a possibility of fraud. This is performed using the card unit error notification LED 203.
When the store clerk sees that the red LED of the card unit error notification LED 203 is flashing, there is evidence that the front frame 4 has been opened at night, and there is a possibility of fraud, and the pachinko machine 1 Necessary measures such as inspection can be taken.
Not only the blinking of the red LED but also, for example, a frame opening error display is displayed on the operation display device 7, error information is output from the card unit 15 to the hall computer 86, and no ball lending is performed. Good.

After step F2, the process proceeds to step F3. On the other hand, if the command related to the frame opening information is not received in step F2, the process jumps to step F2 and proceeds to step F3.
In step F3, it is determined whether game control device monitoring information has been received. This is to determine whether or not a command related to the game control device monitoring information has been received from the payout control device 230B, and is shown briefly in the drawing for convenience of explanation. If a command related to game control device monitoring information has been received, game control device monitoring error processing is performed in step F4. In the game control device monitoring error process, the blue LED of the card unit error notification LED 203 (see FIG. 1) arranged in the card unit 15 is caused to blink, whereby the card unit 15 performs error notification.
In this error notification, since there is a sign that the main board (game control device 54) has been removed at night, it is determined that there is a possibility of fraud and the main board (game control device 54) at night in the card unit 15. An error notification indicating that the card has been removed is performed using the card unit error notification LED 203.
When the store clerk sees that the blue LED of the card unit error notification LED 203 is blinking, there is evidence that the main board (game control device 54) has been removed at night, and there is a possibility of fraud. Necessary measures such as checking the pachinko machine 1 can be taken.
In addition to the blinking of the blue LED, for example, a display indicating that the main board (game control device 54) has been removed is displayed on the operation display device 7, or error information is output from the card unit 15 to the hall computer 86. Or, you may not rent a ball.

If there is both an error in opening the front frame 4 and an error in removing the main board (game control device 54), both the red LED and the blue LED of the card unit error notification LED 203 will blink.
In addition, when the red LED of the card unit error notification LED 203 or the blue LED flashes, or when both LEDs flash, the clerk checks the pachinko machine 1 and if there is no abnormality such as fraud. For example, the card unit 15 is reset (power is turned on again) to stop the blinking of the LED, and the pachinko machine 1 can be operated.
On the other hand, if a clerk inspects the pachinko machine 1 and finds an abnormality such as fraud, the card unit 15 is turned off to stop the blinking of the LED, and the pachinko machine 1 is not operated. The player is stopped and the player is informed of the player by raising a tag such as “under maintenance”.
In this way, when the card unit 15 receives a command related to the frame opening information or a command related to the game control device monitoring information from the payout control device 230B, the card unit 15 performs an error notification to cope with fraud. Can be taken.
After step F4, the routine ends. On the other hand, if a command related to the game control device monitoring information is not received in step F3, the process jumps to step F4 and ends the routine.
In addition, in the error processing of step F2 and step F4, in addition to notifying the error by blinking the LED as described above, the card unit 15 does not rent a ball, but for example, settlement, acceptance of a game card, etc. Processing for stopping the function may be performed.

According to the tenth embodiment, information from the payout control device 230B in the block diagram shown in FIG. 88 (that is, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 126 for detecting the opening of the front frame 4) and the main board (game control). The processing of notifying the card unit 15 of an error in the game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) 127 that detects the removal of the device 54) can be realized by the flowchart of FIG. Therefore, according to the flowchart of FIG. 107, it is possible to obtain the same effect as that of the ninth modification of the first embodiment.
"Example 11"

Next, an eleventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
Example 11 is an example in which the arrangement of the winning display LEDs (winning display device) is changed.
In FIG. 108, reference numeral 401 denotes a pachinko machine, which is configured as an enclosed ball type gaming machine as in the first embodiment. The difference between the pachinko machine 401 and the first embodiment is that the winning display LEDs 402 arranged in the collective display device in the first embodiment are separated and arranged in the frame portion of the pachinko machine 401. 1 and the same number is attached.
Specifically, the winning display LED 402 (winning display device) is arranged at the lower part of the front frame 4 (game frame) and slightly to the left of the center. The function of the winning display LED 402 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and displays the number of winning balls corresponding to winning in the winning opening. The winning display LED 402 includes two 7-segment LEDs, and can display a 2-digit number as the number of winning balls.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The winning display device
A gaming machine that is separated from a collective display device that collectively performs various displays including special drawings and general drawings, and is arranged on a frame member.

With the above configuration, Example 11 has the following effects.
(1) Since the winning display LED 402 is arranged at the lower part of the front frame 4, the display of the number of winning balls associated with winning is performed near the game board 20, so that it is easy to understand and easy to see.
In general, a player often looks at the game board 20 and follows the behavior of the ball with his eyes. If there is a prize display LED 402 in the lower part of the game board 20, the line of sight does not move so much and the prize is accompanied. The number of prize balls can be easily recognized.
(2) Since the number-of-balls display 40 is also arranged in the vicinity of the winning display LED 402, it is easy to recognize that the winning ball due to winning has been added to the number of held balls.
(3) Furthermore, since the winning display LED 402 is arranged on the front frame 4 (that is, the frame portion), there is an effect that leads to cost reduction of the game board 20.

(4) When the area where the game ball is launched into the game area is at the upper left of the game board 20, in the lower left place of the game board 20, that is, the front frame 4 (game frame), the front frame 4 (game frame) It is possible to secure a place slightly on the left side (close to the lower left place of the game board 20) at the lower part of the center. Further, since the lower left area of the front frame is close to the place where the game control device 54 is the main board, the winning display LED 402 controlled by the main board (game control apparatus 54) is arranged at this place. In addition, there is an advantage that the wiring process between them is not complicated and can be shortened.
This advantage can also be obtained when the winning display device is integrated with the collective display device 35. This is because the location of the collective display device 35 controlled by the main board (game control device 54) may be any place near the main board.
"Example 12"

Next, a twelfth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
Example 12 is an example in which the configuration of the winning display LED (winning display device) is changed.
In FIG. 109, reference numeral 501 denotes a pachinko machine, which is configured as an enclosed ball type gaming machine as in the eleventh embodiment. The pachinko machine 501 is provided with a winning display LED 502 (winning display device), and the winning display LED 502 is different in configuration from the eleventh embodiment.
That is, an opening 503 is formed in the lower part of the front frame 4 (game frame) of the pachinko machine 501 slightly to the left of the center, and a prize display LED 502 is arranged at a position facing the opening 503. It is fixed to the game board 20 (that is, arranged on the game board 20). Accordingly, the prize display LED 502 is in a state of being installed on the game board 20 and the front side of the prize display LED 502 is configured to be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 503.

The winning display LED 502 is composed of four small dot-type LEDs, and a sticker indicating “1, 3, 10, 15” is pasted on the top of the four LEDs. The numbers “1, 3, 10, 15” displayed on the sticker indicate the number of prize balls. When the number of winning balls associated with winning is equal to 1, the LED corresponding to “1” on the sticker is lit. Similarly, when the number of winning balls associated with winning is 3, the LED corresponding to “3” is displayed on the sticker. When the number of winning balls associated with winning is 10, the display of the sticker is “10”. LED corresponding to “15” is lit, and when the number of prize balls associated with winning is = 15, the LED corresponding to “15” on the sticker is lit. The twelfth embodiment is an example in which the number of winning balls associated with winning in the big winning opening 27a = 15. In the twelfth embodiment, when the number of prize balls is different depending on the model, the number of the stickers is changed.
The pachinko machine 501 of the twelfth embodiment is the same as the eleventh embodiment except that the configuration of the winning display LED 502 is different from that of the eleventh embodiment. Is abbreviated.

Example 12 has the following effects.
(1) Since the winning display LED 502 is disposed below the front frame 4, the display of the number of winning balls accompanying winning is easy to see.
(2) Since the winning display LED 502 is composed of four LEDs, the cost is lower than that of the 7-segment type.
(3) Since the number of winning balls can be notified only by sticking a sticker indicating “1, 3, 10, 15” on top of the four LEDs of the winning display LED 502, the cost is low.
(4) The winning display LED 502 is composed of four small dot-type LEDs, and has a structure in which a sticker indicating “1, 3, 10, 15” is pasted on the top of the four LEDs. When the number of balls is changed, it is only necessary to change the sticker for displaying the number of winning balls, so that a highly versatile winning display device can be realized.
"Example 13"

Next, a thirteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
The thirteenth embodiment is an example in which the placement location of the winning display LED (winning display device) is changed.
FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a game board 511 of the thirteenth embodiment, and a pachinko machine equipped with the game board 511 is also configured as an encapsulated ball type game machine as in the first embodiment. The game board 511 is provided with a collective display device 512, and a winning display LED 513 (winning display device) is independently arranged near the right side of the collective display device 512.
The collective display device 512 according to the thirteenth embodiment has a configuration in which only the winning display LED 513 is removed from the configuration of the first embodiment and is moved to the outside. The function of the winning display LED 513 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and is composed of two 7-segment LEDs, and can display a 2-digit number as the number of winning balls.
Other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, and the same reference numerals are given, and duplicate descriptions are omitted.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The winning display device
A gaming machine characterized in that it is separated from a collective display device that collectively performs various displays including special drawings and general drawings, and is arranged on a game board.

Example 13 has the following effects.
(1) Since only the prize display LED 513 is removed from the collective display device 512, no other changes are made, so that the control of the collective display device 512 is simple despite the change and can be used without greatly changing the configuration. .
(2) Since the winning display LED 513 is separately provided outside, it is separated from the collective display device 512 and the number of winning balls can be easily recognized.
(3) Since the prize display LED 513 is separated from the collective display device 512, the degree of freedom of the installation space for the prize display LED 513 is increased. For example, the winning display LED 513 may be arranged on the lower left side of the game board 511.
"Example 14"

Next, a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
Example 14 is an example in which the placement location of the winning display LED (winning display device) is changed.
FIG. 111 is a diagram illustrating a game board 521 according to the fourteenth embodiment, and a pachinko machine equipped with the game board 521 is also configured as an encapsulated ball type game machine as in the first embodiment. The game board 521 is provided with a collective display device 522, and unlike the thirteenth embodiment, a prize display LED 523 (winning display device) is arranged alone on the surface of the game board 521 away from the collective display device 522. Yes.
In other words, the winning indication LED 523 is arranged independently in the center case 524 of the game board 521, and the winning indication LED 523 is provided inside the band 532 surrounding the gaming area 531 (particularly, on the lower right side).
In the fourteenth embodiment, as in the thirteenth embodiment, the collective display device 522 is configured to be moved and arranged outside the configuration of the first embodiment except for only the winning display LED 523. The function of the winning display LED 523 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and is composed of two 7-segment LEDs, and can display a 2-digit number as the number of winning balls.
Other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, and the same reference numerals are given, and duplicate descriptions are omitted.

Example 14 has the following effects.
(1) Since the prize display LED 523 is installed inside the band 532 surrounding the game area 524, when there is no installation space outside the band 532, the degree of freedom of the installation space for the prize display LED 523 is increased.
Note that the prize display LED 523 is not limited to the example of being installed on the lower right side inside the band 532 surrounding the game area 531, but may be installed on the lower left side inside the band 532, for example.
"Example 15"

Next, a fifteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
Example 15 is an example in which the configuration of the collective display device is changed.
FIG. 112A is a diagram illustrating a collective display device 601 according to the fifteenth embodiment. The collective display device 601 includes the same components as in the first embodiment, such as a special figure 1 display 351, a special figure 2 display 352, a special figure 1 hold LED 353, a special figure 2 hold LED 354, a general figure LED 356, a general figure hold LED 357, Round display LEDs 358 are provided, which are numbered identically.
On the other hand, the configuration of the winning display LED 602 (winning indicator) is different from the first embodiment. The winning display LED 602 includes two 7-segment LEDs, and can display a 2-digit number as the number of winning balls. Two 7-segment LEDs are denoted by reference numerals 602A and 602B.

In order to explain the details, an enlarged view of the winning display LED 602 is shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 112 (b), among the configurations of the winning display LED 602, the LED 602B that displays a one-digit number has the same configuration as in the first embodiment, but the LED 602A that displays a ten-digit number is the first embodiment. However, the segments a and b of the seven segments are used as segments for displaying 10-digit numbers, while the other segments c to f are used for status display and the like.
That is, the status display LED shown in the first embodiment is not necessary in the fifteenth embodiment (shown as “unnecessary” in FIG. 112 (a)), and instead of the segment of the LED 602A that displays a 10-digit number. A segment other than segments a and b is used so as to have a function of a status display LED. For example, it is as follows.
-Segment a: Illuminates to display one piece of 10-digit numbers-Segment b: Illuminates to display one piece of 10-digit numbers-Segment c: Illuminates to display "probability change state"-Segment d: Illuminates “Time-short state” is displayed. ・ Segment e: For example, normal probability fluctuation is displayed. ・ Segment f: For example, accuracy is displayed.

Note that the two segments e and f need not be used. However, when they are used, they may be used, for example, to display a normal probability fluctuation or a sudden (abrupt probability fluctuation) display.
In order to explain these displays, for example, a sticker may be attached to the collective display device 601 to make it easy to understand.
Moreover, about LED602A which displays the number of 10 digits, the center segment g and the dot h may be used for a certain display. For example, it can be used for “right-handed display” in addition to status display. The “right-handed display” is a display that prompts the player to launch a ball in the right direction of the game board 20 as the game progresses depending on the model, and is displayed under the control of the effect control device 53 on the game board 20, for example. When displaying the message “Please make a right turn” on the device 41 (liquid crystal display), it is necessary to display it under the control of the game control device 54 (main board). Therefore, it is preferable to display somewhere on the collective display device 35 or the like controlled by the game control device 54. Therefore, a configuration in which “right-handed display” is performed in the segment g may be adopted.

The fifteenth embodiment has the following effects.
(1) All the segments can be effectively used for the winning display LED 602 in the collective display device 601.
(2) Since the status display LED is not required from the collective display device 601, the cost is reduced accordingly.
"Example 16"

Next, a sixteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
In the sixteenth embodiment, the configuration of the collective display device is changed.
FIG. 113 is a diagram illustrating a collective display device 611 according to the sixteenth embodiment. The collective display device 611 includes a special figure 1 display 351, a special figure 2 display 352, a special figure 1 hold LED 353, a special figure 2 hold LED 354, a universal figure LED 356, and a universal figure hold LED 357 as components similar to the first embodiment. These are provided with the same number.

On the other hand, the configuration of the winning display LED 612 (winning indicator) is different from the first embodiment. The winning display LED 612 is not a 7-segment type LED, but is composed of four small dot type LEDs. A sticker for displaying “1, 3, 10, 15” is pasted on top of the four small dot-type LEDs in the winning display LED 612. The numbers “1, 3, 10, 15” displayed on the sticker indicate the number of prize balls. When the number of winning balls associated with winning is equal to 1, the LED corresponding to “1” on the sticker is lit. Similarly, when the number of winning balls associated with winning is 3, the LED corresponding to “3” is displayed on the sticker. When the number of winning balls associated with winning is 10, the display of the sticker is “10”. LED corresponding to “15” is lit, and when the number of prize balls associated with winning is = 15, the LED corresponding to “15” on the sticker is lit. The sixteenth embodiment is an example in which the number of prize balls associated with winning in the big winning opening 27a = 15. In the sixteenth embodiment, when the number of prize balls is different depending on the model, the number of the stickers is changed.
Further, as a part different from the first embodiment, the arrangement place of the round display LED 613 and the status display LED 614 is slightly different as shown in FIG. However, the configurations and functions of the round display LED 613 and the status display LED 614 are the same as those in the first embodiment.

Example 16 has the following effects.
(1) Since the prize display LED 612 is composed of four small dot type LEDs, the cost can be reduced as compared with the 7 segment type LED.
"Example 17"

Next, Embodiment 17 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
Example 17 is an example in which the configuration of the collective display device is changed.
FIG. 114 is a diagram illustrating a collective display device 650 according to the seventeenth embodiment. The collective display device 650 includes a special figure 1 indicator 651, a special figure 2 indicator 652, a special figure 1 hold LED 653, a special figure 2 hold LED 654, a general figure LED 655, a universal figure hold LED 656, a round display LED 657, a status display LED 658, and a winning indication. An LED 659 is provided.

Among the indicators and LEDs in the collective display device 650, the special figure 1 hold LED 653, the special figure 2 hold LED 654, the universal figure LED 655, the universal figure hold LED 656, and the status display LED 658 have the same functions and configurations as in the first embodiment. However, as shown in FIG. 114, the arrangement location is slightly different from that of the first embodiment (the same components are not described repeatedly).
On the other hand, there are a special figure 1 display 651, a special figure 2 display 652, a winning display LED 659, and a round display LED 657 as configurations different from the first embodiment. The round display LED 657 displays the number of rounds when a big hit with the start winning in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 occurs and executes the big hit game. As shown in FIG. 114, in this example, four LEDs are displayed. It is configured to display four types of rounds. And the number of rounds (2), (4), (11), (16) is represented on the surface of the main body of the collective display device 650 on the front side of each LED of the round display LED 657 (for example, the number (2) is 2 A sticker depicting numbers is attached and a display corresponding to the number of rounds is performed by four LEDs. For example, a sheet may be used instead of the seal.

The special figure 1 display 651 is not a 7 segment type LED, but is composed of 7 small dot type single LEDs. The special figure 1 indicator 651 performs the display of the special figure 1 (including fluctuation display, stop state display, etc.), and depending on which of the seven dot type LEDs is lit (or flashes). Various display modes are taken. For various types of display, refer to Special Figure 1, for example, “Out of” stop, “Big hit” stop, “During change”, etc. One or two or more lighting (or blinking) of 7 LEDs Can be displayed.
Similarly, the special figure 2 display 652 is not a 7-segment type LED, but is composed of 7 small dot-type single LEDs. The special figure 2 indicator 652 performs the display of the special figure 2 (including change display, stop state display, etc.), and depending on which of the seven dot type LEDs is lit (or flashes). Various display modes are taken. For various types of display, for special figure 2, for example, “out of” stop, “big hit” stop, “during change”, etc., combination of lighting (or blinking) of one or more of seven LEDs Can be displayed.

  The winning display LED 659 (winning display device) is configured integrally with the collective display device 650. The winning display LED 659 is not a 7-segment type LED but a single small dot type LED. A sticker for displaying “1, 3, 10, 15” is pasted on top of the four small dot-type LEDs in the winning display LED 659. The numbers “1, 3, 10, 15” displayed on the sticker indicate the number of prize balls. When the number of winning balls associated with winning is equal to 1, the LED corresponding to “1” on the sticker is lit. Similarly, when the number of winning balls associated with winning is 3, the LED corresponding to “3” is displayed on the sticker. When the number of winning balls associated with winning is 10, the display of the sticker is “10”. LED corresponding to “15” is lit, and when the number of prize balls associated with winning is = 15, the LED corresponding to “15” on the sticker is lit. The seventeenth embodiment is an example in which the number of winning balls associated with winning in the big winning opening 27a = 15. In the seventeenth embodiment, when the number of prize balls is different depending on the model, the number of the stickers is changed.

Further, in the seventeenth embodiment, the winning display LED 659 and the special figure 1 display 651 are arranged close to each other, and are configured as if they are like a group of LEDs that integrally perform decorative effects. In other words, the four dot-type single LEDs of the prize display LED 659 and the seven dots of the dot type single-piece of the special figure 1 display 651 are closely integrated to form a group of eleven dot LEDs. Arranged and each LED is turned on (or flashes), making it difficult to understand the special figure 1 and the like, so that the game can be diversified.
Similarly, the round display LED 657 and the special figure 2 indicator 652 are arranged close to each other, and the configuration is such that the LED group is in the form of an LED group that integrally performs a decorative effect. That is, the four dot type single LEDs of the round display LED 657 and the seven dot type single LEDs of the special figure 2 display 653 are closely integrated to form a group of eleven dot LEDs. Arranged and each LED is turned on (or blinks), making it difficult to understand the special figure 2 and the like, so that the game can be diversified.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The winning display device
It is constructed integrally with a collective display device that collectively displays various displays including special drawings and general drawings, and is arranged close to the special display device that displays special drawings, and the special view display device and the winning display device are integrated. A gaming machine that is configured to take an aspect similar to a group of LEDs that perform decorative effects.

Example 17 has the following effects.
(1) Since the prize display LED 659 is integrally arranged close to the special figure 1 display 651, a decorative effect can be created.
(2) Since the winning display LED 659 is integrally arranged close to the special figure 1 indicator 651, the special figure 1 is discriminated by lighting (or blinking) as a group of eleven dot LEDs. It is possible to diversify the game.
Here, the background will be described.
Recently, with the diversification of game characteristics in gaming machines, special figure result modes tend to be as difficult as possible for players to discriminate. This is because it will feel boring if the figure result form is easily understood at a glance.
Therefore, in the seventeenth embodiment, a winning display LED 659 having a high lighting frequency is integrally disposed in the vicinity of the special figure 1 display 651, and the winning display LED 659 is lit as a group of eleven dot LEDs. Thus, in addition to notifying the number of acquired game balls set for each winning opening, it is possible to make it difficult to discriminate the derived special figure result mode, and it is possible to diversify the game characteristics. It is what I did.
In addition, even if it is difficult to discriminate the special figure result mode, a player who has some knowledge can determine whether or not the round display LED 657 is turned on. By making the winning display LED 659 with a sticker indicating "1, 3, 10, 15" close to the round display LED 657 and almost integrated, it becomes more difficult to distinguish the special figure result mode. This makes it possible to contribute to the diversification of game characteristics.

(3) Since the round display LED 657 is integrally disposed in the vicinity of the special figure 2 indicator 652, a decorative effect can be produced.
(4) Further, since the round display LEDs 657 are integrally arranged in the vicinity of the special figure 2 indicator 652, by turning on (or flashing) as a group of 11 dot LEDs, it is possible to determine round display, etc. It is possible to diversify the game.
(5) The prize display LED 659 is integrally arranged close to the special figure 1 indicator 651, and the prize display LED 659 is configured as a group of four dot LEDs, so it is a large 7 segment type LED. Space saving can be achieved compared with the case where a winning display device is realized. Therefore, the winning display device can be installed without securing a new arrangement space for installing the winning display device.
"Example 18"

Next, an eighteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
Example 18 is an example in which the configuration of the collective display device is changed.
FIG. 115 is a diagram illustrating a collective display device 680 according to the eighteenth embodiment. The collective display device 680 includes a special figure 1 display 681, a special figure 2 display 682, a special figure 1 hold LED 683, a special figure 2 hold LED 684, a universal figure LED 685, a universal figure hold LED 686, a round display LED 687, a status display LED 688, and a winning indication. An LED 689 is provided.

Among each indicator and LED in the collective display device 680, the special figure 1 hold LED 683, the special figure 2 hold LED 684, the universal figure LED 685, and the status display LED 688 have the same functions and configurations as those in the seventeenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 115, this is slightly different from the seventeenth embodiment (the same components are not described repeatedly).
The special figure 1 display 681 and the special figure 2 display 682 are each composed of 7-segment LEDs as in the first embodiment, and display the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively. Takes a display mode. The various display modes are, for example, “out of position” stop, “big hit” stop, “during change”, etc. for Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, respectively.

On the other hand, among the indicators and LEDs in the collective display device 680, the winning display LED 689 (winning display device) has the same configuration as that of the seventeenth embodiment, and is configured integrally with the collective display device 680. The winning display LED 689 is composed of four small dot type LEDs, and a sticker indicating “1, 3, 10, 15” is provided above the four small dot type LEDs in the winning display LED 689. It is pasted.
Further, the round display LED 687 displays the number of rounds when a big hit is generated in accordance with the start winning in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 and the big hit game is executed. As shown in FIG. The LED can display four types of rounds. Then, a sticker depicting numbers representing the number of rounds (2), (4), (11), and (16) is pasted on the surface of the main body of the collective display device 680 on the front side of each LED of the round display LEDs 687. The display corresponding to the number of rounds is performed by one LED. For example, a sheet may be used instead of the seal.

Furthermore, the universal map LED 686 has the same function and configuration as in the first embodiment, but the arrangement location is slightly different from that in the first embodiment as shown in FIG. 115 (the same components are not described repeatedly). ).
Then, the above-mentioned general-purpose hold LED 686, round display LED 687, and winning display LED 689 are arranged close to each other, as if they were a group of LEDs in which all persons integrally perform decorative effects. It is configured. That is, a total of 11 dot-type single LEDs of the general-purpose hold LED 686, four dot-type single LEDs of the round display LED 687, and four dot-type single LEDs of the prize display LED 689 are 11 in total. The LEDs are almost integrated in close proximity to each other, arranged as a group of 11 dot LEDs, and each LED lights up (or flashes) to make it difficult to determine the number of rounds and the decision to hold a normal map. Thus, the game can be diversified.

Example 18 has the following effects.
(1) Since the winning display LED 689 is integrally disposed close to the ordinary figure holding LED 686 and the round display LED 687, a decorative effect can be brought about.
(2) Also, since the round display LED 687, the general-purpose hold LED 686, and the winning display LED 689 are integrally arranged close to each other, they are lit (or blinked) as a group of 11 dot LEDs. This makes it difficult to understand the number of rounds, whether to hold the usual map, etc., and can diversify the game.
"Example 19"

Next, Embodiment 19 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
The nineteenth embodiment is an example of another aspect of the display update control of the number of balls (the configuration of the control system is the same as that of the first embodiment).
FIG. 116 is a timing chart showing display update control of the number of balls in the nineteenth embodiment.
In FIG. 116, the number of balls held changes in the following cases.
(A) The number of possessed balls decreases by 1 when the game ball is launched. (B) When the foul ball is reached, the number of possessed balls is incremented by 1 (that is, when the foul ball is decremented by 1 but when it becomes a foul ball, 1 is added, After all, return to the original)
(C) If there is a number of winning balls associated with winning a prize, it is added to the number of balls held. The number of winning balls associated with winning a prize is as follows.
・ Large prize opening 27a = 13 ・ Starting prize opening 25 = 3 ・ Starting prize opening 26 (Fuden) = 1 piece ・ General prize opening 28-31 = 10 pieces

Now, when a game ball is being fired to the game area 22 at a rate of approximately 100 shots per minute, this state is shown in FIG. 116 by firing pulses. Below the firing pulse, numbers 1 to 5 are drawn for convenience of explanation, and these represent the first to fifth firing balls, respectively.
Now, if the number of balls held is 11 and the display of the ball number indicator 40 is “11”, if the first game ball is fired, Although the number of balls will decrease by one, the number of balls held in the internal memory (RAM 233) is updated (accurately, the number of balls held is updated, but here it is referred to as updating the number of balls held. The same is performed immediately (in real time), and the number of balls is immediately stored as “10” (in FIG. 116, the number of balls is updated in the internal memory (RAM 233) almost simultaneously with the first ball launch. (There is a memory number of “10”).
On the other hand, display update of the number-of-balls display 40 (the update control of the number of balls when the player's number of balls is displayed on the number-of-balls display 40 by the payout controller 230. Hereinafter, the number of balls held is simply This is called display update of the display 40). Is not performed immediately, but at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 116, the display on the number-of-balls display 40 is updated to “10” 0.6 seconds after the first game ball is fired.

The time of 0.6 seconds corresponds to the time when a game ball is launched into the game area 22 at a rate of 100 shots per minute. As described above, since the number of game balls fired by operating the firing operation handle 11 is defined as 100 shots per minute according to a predetermined rule, the firing control circuit 236 controls the ball feed solenoid 172. Therefore, it is derived from the fact that it is within the range of 100 shots / minute (approximately one ball fired in 0.6 seconds (s)).
Here, for example, when a big hit has occurred, with the launch of the first game ball described above, one wins the big winning opening 27a and the number of winning balls = 13 occurs. Furthermore, when one of the game balls is fired in succession and one wins consecutively into the big prize opening 27a and the number of winning balls = 13 occurs, the ball held in the internal memory (RAM 233) The number is immediately updated, and the number of balls held is immediately “9” (in FIG. 116, “subtract one shot” is displayed).
When the above-mentioned two fired balls (first and second balls) continuously win the winning prize opening 27a and the number of winning balls = 13 occurs twice, the internal memory (RAM 233) The number of 13 winning balls is immediately added to the number of stored ball numbers “9” to immediately update the number of held balls to “22”, and immediately after that, the number of 13 winning balls is also stored. Immediately add the number “22” to “35” to immediately update the number of balls.
Then, the sequential update of the number of balls held by the internal memory (RAM 233) is all performed during the predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds). In the above example, all three updates, one subtraction for the second shot, 1 addition for the 13th prize ball for the first time, and 2 for the 13th prize ball for the second time, are all performed for a predetermined period ( For example, it is executed within 0.6 seconds (see FIG. 116).

  On the other hand, the display update of the number-of-balls display 40 is performed when two fired balls (first and second balls) continuously win the big winning opening 27a and the number of winning balls = 13 occurs twice. However, it is not performed immediately, and the display update timing is an interval of a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 116, the calculation is performed to subtract the second shot ball within the next predetermined period after 0.6 seconds have passed since the second game ball was shot. In Example 19, when there is an addition (for example, addition by a prize ball), the addition is performed first at an interval of a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds). The number of prize balls and the number of 13 prize balls for the second time are added to update the display on the number-of-balls display 40 to “36” (10 + 26), and then the second shot within the same predetermined period. The display of the number-of-balls display 40 is updated by “35” (36-1) and displayed.

That is, in Example 19, in the case of a change to be added to the number of balls possessed (for example, addition of the number of prize balls accompanying winning a prize), when updating at the timing of the predetermined period, first, it is added to the number of balls held (twice And display the result of the addition operation as an update of the number of balls, and also perform an operation of subtraction by firing within the same predetermined period to update the number of balls as an update of the number of balls 40 is displayed.
Specifically, the addition of the number of prize balls (prize ball addition) and the firing subtraction are performed in the same predetermined period, and the display on the number-of-balls display 40 is updated. That is, it is as follows.
・ First half of the specified period: Addition of 13 prize balls for the first time and 13 prize balls for the second time (26 in total)
・ Second half of the period: Subtraction of one shot

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 116, in the number-of-balls display 40, the number of balls held = 13 was generated twice for the previous number-of-balls display = 10 in a predetermined period (0.6 seconds). In this case, the total number of award balls = 26 is added to update the number of possessed balls = 36, the display of the number of possessed balls display 40 is set to “36”, and then one shot from 36 (immediately before 1 ball) fired in a predetermined period (0.6 seconds), and the display of the number-of-balls indicator 40 is set to “35” within the same predetermined period (0.6 seconds). Done.

  In this way, the number of winning balls associated with winning the first big winning opening 27a = 13 and the number of winning balls accompanying winning of the second large winning opening 27a = 13 are 10 balls. As a result of the addition, the display of the number-of-balls indicator 40 is updated to “36” (10 + 26), and thereafter, one ball launched in the immediately preceding predetermined period (0.6 seconds) is held. An operation of subtracting from the number is performed, and the display of the number-of-balls display 40 is updated to “35” (36-1) within the same predetermined period (0.6 seconds).

Next, when the third game ball is fired, the number of balls held is reduced by one when the game ball is fired, so the number of balls held in the internal memory (RAM 233) is updated immediately, The number is immediately stored as “34” (35-1). On the other hand, the display update of the number-of-balls indicator 40 is not performed immediately, but is performed at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds). The display on the display 40 is updated to “34”.
Next, when the next fourth game ball is fired, the number of possessed balls is decreased by one due to the launch of the game ball, so the number of possessed balls in the internal memory (RAM 233) is immediately updated. The stored number of balls immediately becomes “33” (34-1) (however, this fired ball becomes a foul ball as described later. This process will be described later).
On the other hand, the display update of the number-of-balls display 40 is not performed immediately, but is performed at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds), so that the predetermined period after the fourth game ball is fired. As will be described later, the display of the number-of-balls display 40 is updated so as to correspond to foul ball addition and firing subtraction.

  By the way, if the fourth shot ball is a foul ball, one shot is subtracted and the foul ball needs to be returned to the number of balls, so add one to the number of balls held. After all, it will return to the original number of balls. Therefore, the number of balls held in the internal memory (RAM 233) for dealing with the foul ball is immediately updated when it is determined that the ball is a foul ball, and the number of held balls is immediately stored as “34” (33 + 1). . On the other hand, regarding the display update of the number-of-balls indicator 40, both the addition to the number of balls having “34” (33 + 1) within the predetermined period in which the foul ball is generated and the subtraction associated with the fourth shot are performed. Although the calculation is performed, what is actually displayed on the number-of-balls display 40 is a predetermined period next to the predetermined period in which the foul ball is generated. Therefore, in this case, the display of the number of balls held with the foul ball will be updated within a predetermined period after the predetermined period that has become a foul ball, and therefore the number of balls held will be displayed in the next predetermined period. The display of the device 40 is updated to “35” (34 + 1: that is, a foul ball addition). In addition, since the display of addition and subtraction can be updated in the same predetermined period, the subtraction associated with the fourth shot is also performed, and the display on the ball count indicator 40 is “34” (35-1: That is, (Subtraction).

  Next, in terms of the update timing of the number of balls in the internal memory (RAM 233), when the number of balls held becomes 34 by fouling and the next game ball is fired, the number of balls held is Therefore, the number of balls held in the internal memory (RAM 233) is immediately updated, and the stored number of balls immediately becomes “33” (34-1). On the other hand, with respect to the display update of the number-of-balls display 40 for the fifth game ball launch, one subtraction (“−1”) is performed after 0.6 seconds have elapsed from the launch timing of the fifth game ball. ]), The display on the number-of-balls display 40 is updated to “33”. For this reason, when 0.6 seconds have elapsed since the fifth game ball is fired, the number of balls held in the internal memory (RAM 233) and the number of balls held on the ball number display 40 are the same value ( 33).

In this way, while the game game is in progress, the RAM 233 as an internal memory stores changes in the number of balls held by the player, and subtracts the fired ball, adds the number of prize balls, and adds the foul ball. By repeating this process, the player's number of balls will be updated and stored in real time, while the number of balls possessed when the player's number display device 40 displays the number of players' balls is updated. Unlike the RAM 233 that updates and stores the number of balls held in real time, it is controlled to update and display the number of balls held at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds). . This predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds) is a time corresponding to a continuous firing interval (0.6 seconds) of game balls.
In addition, regarding the updated display of the number of balls by the number-of-balls display 40, in the case of a change other than addition to the number of balls (for example, subtraction of the number of balls by firing, etc.), a predetermined period (for example, 0. The display of the number of balls held is updated every 6 seconds), but in the case of a change to be added to the number of balls held (for example, the addition of the number of prize balls accompanying winning or the addition accompanying foul balls) When the updated display is performed, the update to be added to the number of balls is first performed, and then the subtraction is updated.

Furthermore, when updating the number of balls in the predetermined period, an update display of the number of balls to be updated is performed at most two times, one addition to the number of balls and one subtraction from the number of balls. Control is performed.
Therefore, even if the prize ball addition due to continuous winning and the subtraction due to the launch of the game ball overlap, the addition to the number of balls held within the predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds) The subtraction from the number is distinguished from the number displayed on the ball count display 40.
Therefore, the player grasps the updated number of balls properly (individual fact of prize ball addition and subtraction by game ball launch) and recognizes the updated number of balls easily. be able to.

The nineteenth embodiment has the following effects.
(1) In the pachinko machine 1 (enclosed ball game machine) of the nineteenth embodiment, when the player's number of balls (game value) changes continuously, the number of balls held display 40 is held by the player. When the number of balls is displayed, the number of balls held is updated at an interval of a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds), and the number of balls held is updated with respect to the display of the number of balls held by the ball number indicator 40. In the case of a change other than adding to the number (for example, subtraction of the number of balls held by launching, etc.), the display of the number of balls held is updated at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds). In the case of a change to be added to the number (for example, the addition of the number of prize balls accompanying the winning or the addition with the foul ball), when updating display within the predetermined period, the update is first added to the number of balls held, Thereafter, the subtraction is updated.
Therefore, even if the prize ball addition due to continuous winning and the subtraction due to the launch of the game ball overlap, the addition to the number of balls held within the predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds) The subtraction from the number is distinguished from the number displayed on the ball count display 40.
In particular, even when the addition by winning and the subtraction by firing are at the same timing, the number of balls held display 40 is distinguished from the addition to the number of balls held and the number subtracted from the number of balls held. Is updated and displayed.
As a result, the player grasps that the number of possessed balls has been updated properly (individual fact of adding a prize ball and subtracting by launching a game ball), and the player easily recognizes the update of the number of possessed balls. can do.

This background will be described.
During the game, the display of the number-of-balls indicator needs to be updated because there is an increase in the number of winning balls due to winning and a subtraction due to firing.
However, if there are consecutive wins and the number display on the ball indicator is displayed immediately, the player knows if the number of balls actually updated in response to the win. Difficult to do.
That is, when there is a change in the player's number of balls (game value), the storage of the number of balls in the RAM 233 as an internal memory is immediately updated, and at the same time, the number of balls held in the number-of-balls display 40. The display of the number-of-balls display 40 is updated instantaneously at the same time, especially when winning continuously, so whether the winning is reliably reflected in the number of balls held for the player. It is difficult to recognize.
In particular, when the prize ball addition due to consecutive winnings overlaps with the subtraction due to the launch of the game ball, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the number of possessed balls (game value) has been updated properly. Therefore, there is a risk of reducing the interest of the game.

Therefore, in the present invention, focusing on how to display the updated number of balls, focusing on the addition of prize balls and subtraction due to the launch of game balls, the display of the number of balls held display 40 is updated to achieve a solution. .
Specifically, when the prize ball addition due to consecutive winnings overlaps with the subtraction due to the launch of the game ball, at the update timing of the predetermined period, an update is first added to the number of balls held, and then the update of the subtraction is performed. By performing an update display of the number of balls held by the number-of-balls display 40, addition to the number of balls and subtraction from the number of balls held within the predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds) Will be displayed on the number-of-balls display 40 as a result, and as a result, the player will individually update that the number of balls has been updated (individual fact of award ball addition and subtraction by game ball launch) ) So that the player can easily recognize the updated number of balls.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not lower the interest of the game.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display device in which a predetermined number of game balls are encapsulated in a gaming machine main body, the enclosed game balls can be launched into a game area and played, and a plurality of identification information is displayed in a variable manner And a game control device for managing the progress of the gaming machine, and a game value display means for displaying the game value of the player,
A game ball is inserted into the start opening to display the identification information of the display device in a variable manner, and when the identification information of the display device is in a special gaming state in a predetermined mode, a special gaming state is generated,
The game control device determines whether the game result is a predetermined profit state including the special game state or a state other than the special game state, and in the case of the predetermined profit state, it corresponds to a predetermined number of prize balls. Increase the profits of the players,
In an enclosed ball type gaming machine that plays a game by circulating the enclosed game ball by collecting the game ball that has passed through the game area and guiding it to the launch position,
The game control device includes:
Game value display control means for controlling the game value display means,
The game value display control means includes
When the game value display means displays the player's game value, the update of the game value is a game every predetermined period in the case of a change other than adding to the game value among the changes in the player's game value. Update value,
In the case of a change to be added to the game value, when updating within the predetermined period, the game value is controlled to be updated to be added to the game value and to be updated after the addition is updated. .

In addition, when applied to two types of gaming machines called so-called feather devices, the inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device capable of enclosing a predetermined number of game balls in a gaming machine main body, launching the enclosed game balls into a gaming area and playing a game, and managing the progress of the gaming machine With
The game control device determines whether the game result is in a predetermined profit state or any other state, and in the case of the predetermined profit state, the player's profit is increased in correspondence with a predetermined number of prize balls. Let
In an enclosed ball type gaming machine that plays a game by circulating the enclosed game ball by collecting the game ball that has passed through the game area and guiding it to the launch position,
The game control device includes:
Game value display control means for controlling the game value display means,
The game value display control means includes
When the game value display means displays the player's game value, the update of the game value is a game every predetermined period in the case of a change other than adding to the game value among the changes in the player's game value. Update value,
In the case of a change to be added to the game value, when updating within the predetermined period, the game value is controlled to be updated to be added to the game value and to be updated after the addition is updated. .

(2) In addition, when updating the number of balls held in the number-of-balls display 40 within the predetermined period, a maximum of two times, one addition to the number of balls and one subtraction from the number of balls held Control of the update display of the number of balls to be updated is performed.
Accordingly, the display update by the addition to the number of balls held and the subtraction from the number of balls held within the predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds) is suppressed to a maximum of two times, and the number of balls held is displayed. Since it is displayed on the device 40, the player can clearly grasp the change in the number of balls at an appropriate speed (the distinction between prize ball addition and firing subtraction), and update the number of balls The player can easily recognize it.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The game value display control means
When the game value is updated within the predetermined period, the game value is updated a maximum of two times: one addition to the game value and one subtraction from the game value.

(3) The number of balls held in the number-of-balls display 40 is updated at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds). In this case, since the time of 0.6 seconds is substantially the same as the time when the game balls are fired to the game area 22 at a pace of 100 shots per minute (game ball continuous firing interval), The display of the number-of-balls display 40 can be updated while maintaining a balance with the above, and the recognition of the number of balls to the player and the launch of the ball can be adjusted well.
In other words, since a game ball cannot be launched into the game area 22 at a pace of 100 or more per minute, if the display of the number-of-balls display 40 is updated at a maximum interval of 0.6 seconds from the launch, the player However, it is possible to secure a sufficient time for sufficiently recognizing the display contents of the ball number indicator 40.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined period when the game value display means displays a player's game value is set to be substantially the same as a continuous launch interval of game balls.
"Example 20"

Next, Embodiment 20 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
In Example 20, the number of balls held by the player can be smoothly understood.
The method for counting the number of balls in Example 20 will be described with reference to FIG.
In FIG. 117, “pressing time” indicates the operation time (pressing time) of the counting switch 311, and FIG. 117 shows how to count the “pressing time” and the range of the number of balls. ing.

Specifically, it is as follows. The following unit count value corresponds to “count unit”.
・ Pressing time of the counting switch 311 = less than 1 second: Invalid regardless of the range of the number of balls held. 1.0 seconds:
(A) Counting 50 balls when the number of balls is 1000 or less (meaning unit count value = 50, the same applies hereinafter)
(B) Counting 100 balls from 1001 to 10,000 balls (c) Counting 1000 balls or more from 10001, and thereafter every 0.5 seconds:
(B) Count 50 balls when the number of balls is 1000 or less. (B) Count 100 balls when the number of balls is between 1001 and 10,000. (C) Count 1000 when the number is 10001 or more. .0 seconds:
(B) Count all balls with 1,000 or less balls (b) Count all balls with 1001 to 10,000 balls (c) Count all balls with 10001 balls or more

  As described above, in the twentieth embodiment, the time of unit counting is determined by dividing the pressing time of the count switch 311 every 0.5 seconds. As described above, the operation of the counting switch 311 is invalidated for less than 1 second to prevent the counting switch 311 from malfunctioning. Regardless of how many balls are held, the count time of the count switch 311 is all counted in 6.0 seconds.

  As described above, in the twentieth embodiment, the count switch 311 is pressed every 0.5 seconds, and the unit count is performed as a timing value. Less than 1 second is used to prevent the count switch 311 from malfunctioning. The operation of is invalidated. Further, no matter how many balls are held, the counting time of the counting switch 311 is all counted in 6.0 seconds.

Next, the effect of the method of counting the number of balls in Example 20 will be described as follows. In the first embodiment, it is described that the counting method shown in FIG. 117 is used. However, since the effect is not specifically described, the common effect will be described here.
(1) In Example 20, for example, when the number of holding balls is 1000 or less, 50 are counted in 1.0 second depending on the operation time (pressing time) of the counting switch 311, and thereafter 50 every 0.5 seconds. Counting the pieces and counting all in 6.0 seconds, so the count amount of the number of balls will be changed according to the operation time of the counting switch 311, the counting time of the number of balls will be an appropriate time, The counting switch 311 has a good feeling of use, is not slow, and does not cause a sense of incongruity such as troublesomeness, so that the number of balls can be counted. Therefore, it is possible to realize an enclosed ball type gaming machine that allows the player to count the number of balls possessed without a sense of incongruity.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A counting operation means capable of operating the counting means by a player's operation is provided,
The counting means includes
A gaming machine, wherein a counting unit (counting amount) of a player's gaming value is changed according to an operation time of the counting operation means.
Here, the counting switch 311 corresponds to a counting operation means capable of operating the counting means by a player's operation.

(2) In Example 20, since the number of balls held is changed according to the number of balls held, that is, when the number of balls is large, it is counted in a large unit, and when the number of balls is small Since counting is performed in small units, it is possible to count the number of balls in an appropriate time regardless of whether the number of balls is large or small, and the usability of the counting switch 311 is good, not slow, and troublesome. There is no risk of discomfort, and the number of balls can be counted. Therefore, it is possible to realize an enclosed ball type gaming machine that allows the player to count the number of balls possessed without a sense of incongruity.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A counting operation means capable of operating the counting means by a player's operation is provided,
The counting means includes
A gaming machine characterized by changing a counting unit (counting amount) of a player's gaming value in accordance with the player's gaming value.

(3) In the twentieth embodiment, the counting amount of the number of held balls is changed according to the operation time (pressing time) of the counting switch 311 and the number of held balls. Specifically, in FIG. As shown, for example, when the number of balls is 1000 or less, 50 is counted in 1.0 second, and then 50 is counted every 0.5 seconds, depending on the operation time of the counting switch 311, and then 6.0 seconds. However, if the number of balls is 1001 to 10,000, 100 is counted every 0.5 seconds, and if the number of balls is 10001 or more, 1000 is counted every 0.5 seconds. The counting time of the number of balls can be an appropriate time, the feeling of use of the counting switch 311 is good, it is not slow, and there is no fear of troublesomeness, and the number of balls can be counted. Therefore, it is possible to realize an enclosed ball type gaming machine that allows the player to count the number of balls possessed without a sense of incongruity.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A counting operation means capable of operating the counting means by a player's operation is provided,
The counting means includes
A gaming machine, wherein a counting unit (counting amount) of a player's game value is changed in accordance with an operation time of the counting operation means and a game value of the player.

(4) In the twentieth embodiment, the count switch 311 is pressed every 0.5 seconds, and the unit count is performed. The count switch 311 is operated for less than 1 second from the start of the operation of the count switch 311. Since it is invalid, it is possible to prevent malfunction of the counting switch 311 such as when the counting switch 311 is touched by mistake.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A counting operation control means for controlling the operation of the counting means is provided,
The counting operation control means is
The gaming machine is controlled so as to invalidate the operation of the counting operation means for a predetermined period from the start of operation of the counting operation means.

(5) While the number of balls held is counted by the counting switch 311, the game balls are stopped from being fired. Can be done.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Providing a counting operation control means for controlling the operation of the counting means;
The counting operation control means includes
A gaming machine that controls to stop the firing of a game ball while the counting operation means is operated and the game value of the player is counted by the counting means.

(6) In addition, no matter how many balls are held, counting of the number of balls is completed when the pressing time of the counting switch 311 reaches 6.0 seconds. However, the counting time of the number of held balls does not become long, and the player can count the number of held balls without feeling uncomfortable.

Next, various modifications of the twentieth embodiment will be described.
<Modification 1>
In the counting method of the number of balls shown in FIG. 117, the timing value for performing unit counting by dividing the pressing time of the counting switch 311 every 0.5 seconds is used, but the present invention is not limited to this.
As a first modification, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which half the number of held balls is counted 3.0 seconds after the start of operation of the counting switch 311 and all the number of held balls is counted 6.0 seconds later.
In this way, the overall balance when counting the number of balls is better than in the case of the twentieth embodiment, and the player can easily understand the counting.

<Modification 2>
FIG. 118 (a) is a diagram showing a second modification of the twentieth embodiment, and particularly shows a method for counting the number of balls.
In FIG. 118A, in the second modification, the number of balls held is counted as follows according to the “pressing time” of the counting switch 311 and the number of balls held.
・ Pressing time of the counting switch 311 = less than 1 second: Invalid regardless of the range of the number of balls held. 1.0 seconds:
(B) Count less than 1,000 balls, count half of the number of balls (b) Count between 1001 and 10,000, count half of the number of balls (c) Number of balls Above, count half of the number of balls held, then every 0.5 seconds:
(B) Counting 3/4 of the number of balls when the number of balls is 1000 or less (b) Counting 3/4 of the number of balls when the number of balls is 1001 to 10,000 (c) If the number is 10001 or more, 3/4 of the number of balls is counted. 6.0 seconds:
(B) Count all balls with 1,000 or less balls (b) Count all balls with 1001 to 10,000 balls (c) Count all balls with 10001 balls or more

As described above, in the second modification, when the operation of the counting switch 311 is started, the counting method is such that the number of possessed balls is counted first and the last one is likely to remain. However, in order to leave the number of balls held, it is necessary to stop counting the number of balls held 6.0 seconds before.
Modification 2 has the following effects.
(1) In the modified example 2, the number of balls held is counted first, and the last is counted so that the number of balls can be easily left. Therefore, if the counting of balls held is stopped 6.0 seconds before. The game can be played with a small number of balls, which is convenient for the player.
(2) Regardless of whether the number of balls is large or small, the counting method of the number of balls is the same, so the player can easily understand the counting progress.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Providing a counting operation control means for controlling the operation of the counting means;
The counting operation control means includes
A gaming machine, wherein a predetermined period of operation start of the counting operation means is controlled to count a player's gaming value in a large amount.

<Modification 3>
FIG. 118 (b) is a diagram showing a third modification of the twentieth embodiment, and particularly shows a counting method for the number of balls.
In FIG. 118 (b), in the third modification, the number of balls held is counted as follows according to the “pressing time” of the count switch 311 and the number of balls held.
・ Pressing time of the counting switch 311 = less than 1 second: invalid regardless of the range of the number of balls possessed.
(B) Counting in units of 100 when the number of balls held is 1,000 or less (b) Counting in units of 1/10 of the number of balls held from 1001 to 10,000 (c) Number of balls held is 10001 The number of balls is counted in units of 1/10 of the number of balls. 6.0 seconds:
(B) Count all balls with 1,000 or less balls (b) Count all balls with 1001 to 10,000 balls (c) Count all balls with 10001 balls or more

As described above, in the third modification, when the operation of the counting switch 311 is started, 1.0 seconds is included, and thereafter, a fixed number of balls corresponding to the number of balls held is counted every 1.0 second as a counting unit. The counting method is such that everything is counted after 6.0 seconds.
Modification 3 has the following effects.
(1) In the modified example 3, since a certain number of balls according to the number of balls is counted as a unit of counting, the flow of counting the number of balls is started little by little. Proceeding at the same rate, the player has the advantage of easy counting.
(2) Since the number of balls is counted little by little, when it is desired to keep the number of balls, a count switch 311 for leaving the number of balls regardless of the number of balls Can be operated easily.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Providing a counting operation control means for controlling the operation of the counting means;
The counting operation control means includes
A gaming machine, wherein a predetermined period of the operation start of the counting operation means is controlled to count a player's gaming value with a small amount.

Next, a modified example of the present invention will be described.
The present invention may be modified as follows.
(1) In some of the above embodiments, the winning display device is separated from the collective display device. However, the installation place where the winning display device is separated is limited to the lower part of the game board and the center case. For example, you may attach to the upper part of a game board, or a big prize opening.
In the case of a model with a small installation space, it may be advantageous to separate in this way.
(2) Alternatively, the winning display device may be separated from the collective display device and installed in a frame of a gaming machine other than the place disclosed in the above embodiment. In this case, the winning display device becomes a frame element, As a board, the cost is reduced.

(3) Variations in the display method of the winning display device are not limited to those disclosed in the above embodiments.
For example, in each of the above embodiments, when the game ball is won at the winning opening, the number of winning balls is displayed on the winning display device only for a predetermined period. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Control may be made so that the winning display (displaying the number of winning balls) on the display device is not turned off (if it is an LED, the lighting is continued). For example, when a ball jam error at a winning opening is detected, control is performed to keep the winning display on the prize display device lit until the ball jam is eliminated.
In this way, you can easily recognize where the ball jam error at the prize opening occurred at the prize winning number display (lit) on the prize display device, and you can quickly respond to the ball jam error. Convenient.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The display time control means is
A gaming machine, wherein when an error relating to winning occurs, the display of the number of winning balls on a winning display device is controlled so as not to be erased for a certain period of time.

(4) Each of the above embodiments is an example in which the medium control unit (card unit 15) is attached to the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1), but the medium control unit may be built in the gaming machine (ie, A media control unit may be provided as part of the gaming machine). For example, in the first embodiment, the game card is inserted into the card unit. However, a mode in which the game card is inserted into the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) (a mode in which the gaming machine also functions as a card unit) may be used.
(5) The storage medium may be a card (such as a magnetic card or an IC card) as in the above embodiment, but is not limited to a card type. For example, it may be a USB memory. Alternatively, it can be read and written without contact.

(6) Moreover, even if it says an enclosed ball type, it does not need to be the structure which a game ball does not come out of a game machine main body at all. For example, a mode in which the game ball once goes out of the pachinko machine, is polished by an external polishing apparatus, and is then returned to the pachinko machine again.

(7) Further, even if the game ball is used in a circulating manner, it does not have to be completely circulated in the gaming machine. There is a function to manage the number of balls held by electronic data and supply game balls to the launch position inside the game machine, so that even if the player does not throw in the actual game balls or pays out as rental balls, The present invention can be applied to any gaming machine that can play a game by launching.
(8) Further, the number of possessed balls as the game value that is a profit of the player does not necessarily have to be treated as the number of game balls. For example, 1 point, 2 points, etc. are treated as points, and for example, “100 points” may be displayed. In this case, the relationship between the number of prize balls and the number of points is not limited to the relationship of 1 point for each prize ball. There can be aspects. Instead of “point”, another unit name such as “point” may be used.

(9) Further, the communication method used in various information communication transmitted and received by the game control device is not necessarily limited to the above embodiment. For example, the number-of-balls command and the number-of-uses command transmitted from the card unit 15 to the game control device 54 are not the first communication method (transmission method in plain text) but the second communication method (encrypted and sent game control). It is also possible to make the fraud using this command difficult by transmitting by the method of decoding by the device 54.
(10) The firing subtraction process for reducing the game value in response to the game ball being fired may not necessarily be executed. For example, there may be a mode in which a game ball can be launched without reducing the number of balls during a period in which a predetermined condition is satisfied.
(11) The polishing apparatus for polishing the game ball may polish the game ball by a pellet method using a pellet instead of the polishing cloth. In the pellet system, a large number of pellets as an abrasive smaller than the game ball are put in a polishing apparatus and polished while being transported together with the game ball.

Next, the scope of application of the present invention will be described.
(1) The present invention can be applied not only to an enclosed ball type gaming machine but also to a normal (current) gaming machine.
The second display device (touch panel type liquid crystal display) is disposed in a so-called saucer portion of a gaming machine and can be applied to the one managed by the card unit.
(2) Similarly, the present invention can be applied not only to the enclosed ball type gaming machine but also to a normal (current) gaming machine, but may have the following configuration.
In other words, the second display device (touch panel liquid crystal display) may be arranged in the tray portion of the gaming machine and managed by a gaming machine (for example, an effect control device) instead of the card unit.
In this case, the operation display for performing operation / display related to the ball lending is managed by the card unit, and is provided as a separate device from the second display device (corresponding to the operation display device in the embodiment).

(3) The present invention can be applied to all enclosed ball type gaming machines as long as the gaming machine includes the first display device and the second display device. For example, as long as the enclosed ball type gaming machine uses a pachinko ball to play a game, it is not limited to the example of the enclosed ball type gaming machine as in each of the above embodiments, and each of the above embodiments includes the internal configuration and control. Even if the configuration of the substrate is different, it can be applied to any enclosed ball type gaming machine.
Moreover, if it is an enclosed ball type gaming machine, the present invention can be applied to the following modes (4) to (6).
(4) The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed ball type gaming machine equipped with a display device capable of displaying a decorative special figure different from the collective display device for displaying the special figure as an enclosed ball type gaming machine. The present invention can be widely applied to encapsulated ball game machines provided with a video device such as a liquid crystal display as a display device.
(5) The display device for the decorative special drawing only needs to be able to change the display content, and the image may be configured to change the screen content by character display, video display, or the like.
(6) The display device for the decorative special figure is not limited to a display device using liquid crystal, but can change the display contents such as an organic EL, a cathode ray tube, a dot LED, a 7-segment LED, a device using a bending material such as electronic paper. Any material can be used as long as it can be produced.

  The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

1, 1a to 1n, 401, 501 Pachinko machine (enclosed ball game machine)
7, 330 Operation display device (second game value display means, second display device, second effect operation unit, third display, third display device)
9 Production operation switch (first production operation unit)
15, 15a to 15n, 7610 Card unit (medium control unit) (game value management means, return operation means, settlement means, switching control means, display mode change control means, input restriction means)
20, 511, 521 Game board 25 1st start winning opening 26 2nd starting winning opening 27 Variable winning apparatus 27a Large winning opening 28-31 General winning opening 35, 512, 522, 601, 611, 650, 680 Collective display apparatus 40 , 403 Number-of-balls display (game value display means, first game value display means, first display device)
41 Display device (first display device)
54 Game control device (control device, game control means)
56, 7023 Polishing device 58, 7500 Power supply device 59.59A Polishing control device 85 Ball holding management device (game value management device)
86 Hall computer 79, 7022 Switching valve (route switching means)
91 External management device 125 Glass frame opening switch 126, 1150, 1250 Front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) (front frame opening detecting means)
127 Game control device monitoring switch (night monitoring switch) (main board monitoring means)
182 RAM clear switch 230, 230A, 230B, 230C payout control device (control device, counting means, counting operation control means, game value storage means, game value display control means, polishing control means)
233 RAM (game value storage means)
250 decorative ball display device 304 return button (return operation means)
307, 307A, 307B, 307C, 307D Switching button (second rendering operation unit, switching operation means)
308 Enlarge button (mode operation means)
311 Counting switch (counting operation means)
313 Counting sphere display (second display device)
314 Counting ball use switch 320, 330 switching circuit (switching means)
355, 402, 502, 513, 523, 602, 612, 659, 689 Winning display LED (winning display device)
541 Switch power supply delay circuit (delay means)
802 Number-of-balls indicator (first indicator)
803 Counting ball display (second display)
909 Switch power supply delay circuit (delay means)
1151 Power supply delay circuit (delay means)
1251 Output delay circuit (output delay means)
1302 Output delay circuit (delay means)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that manages the number of balls and counting balls,
The display update of the number of balls is performed every time interval shorter than the continuous firing interval,
If it is determined that a game ball has been fired, a prize ball or a foul ball has been generated, the game ball has been fired, the award at least after an interval shorter than the continuous firing interval since the last update of the number of balls held A first display device that performs display update of the number of possessed balls accompanying the occurrence of either the ball or the foul ball, and is managed by the gaming machine;
A simple display for notifying the player of the presence of the counting ball, and a second display device managed by the gaming machine;
A third display device capable of displaying details of the number of balls and counting balls, and managed by a card unit;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

Images